Reference Manual for the Infrastructure Parameters

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

DN00126593-25-5en
(TRASYSAPP00221) 03/2017
The content of this document and its appendices and any information provided (all together "document") is for information purposes
only and is subject to change without notice. The document only specifies the products and services identified in the document. The
document is confidential and contains legally privileged information.

The document is only intended for the use of the recipient and the customer whose representative the recipient is, and may only be used
for the purposes for which the document is submitted. The document or any part of it may not be reproduced, disclosed or transmitted
without the prior written permission of Airbus Defence and Space.

Airbus Defence and Space will reasonably ensure that the information provided in the document is free from material errors and
omissions. However, the suggestions, directions, comments and statements made in the document (e.g. regarding the compatibility,
performance and functionality of mentioned hardware and software) are not intended to be and cannot be considered as binding. The
customer assumes full responsibility for using the document or any part of it. All comments and feedback are welcomed by Airbus
Defence and Space and are used as part of the continuous development and improvement of Airbus Defence and Space’s products,
services and the document.

Airbus Defence and Space disclaim and exclude all representations, warranties and conditions whether express, implied or statutory,
including but not limited to the correctness, accuracy or reliability of the document, or otherwise relating to the document. Airbus Defence
and Space’ total liability for any errors in the document is limited to the documentary correction of errors. Airbus Defence and Space will
not be liable for any direct or indirect damages arising from the use of the document or otherwise relating to the document.

Airbus Defence and Space® is a registered trademark of Airbus Defence and Space. Other product names, trademarks or other
identifiers mentioned in the document may be trademarks of their respective companies and are mentioned for information purposes only.

Copyright © 2016–2017 Airbus DS SLC, all rights reserved.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

2/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Contents

1 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

1.1 How to use this document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.2 Key to the entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2 Organisation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.1 Managing the organisation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.2 Organisation-specific parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2.1 Organisation-specific parameters modified with MML (PM command group). . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2.1.1 Allowed user groups (109) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2.1.2 Main organizations right for pre-emption (110). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.2.1.3 Main org max resource pre-emption level (111) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.2.1.4 SCCH class bit mask (121) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.2.1.5 Normal priority category parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2.1.6 Service priority parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.2 Organisation-specific parameters modified with DWS (or TCS client, or Tactilon®
Management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.2.2.1 On tab Timers: Absence time for visiting members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.2.2.2 On tab Timers: Direct call inactivity time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.2.2.3 On tab Timers: Ind call setup time for called MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.2.2.4 On tab Timers: Ind call setup time for called TCS client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.2.2.5 On tab Timers: Max duration for emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.2.2.6 On tab Timers: Max duration for normal individual call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.2.2.7 On tab Timers: Max handover time for individual calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.2.2.8 On tab Timers: ISI group call setup response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.2.2.9 On tab Timers: ISI originating setup response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.2.2.10 On tab Parameters: Emergency Target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.2.2.11 On tab Parameters: Recovery for Tracked MSs only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.2.2.12 On tab Parameters: Tracking Recovery Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.2.2.13 On tab Parameters: Registration Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.2.2.14 On tab Parameters: Maximum Group EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.2.2.15 On tab Parameters: Group Call Service Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.2.2.16 On tab Parameters: Individual Call Service Interaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.2.2.17 On tab Parameters: MSISDN used as CPI/TPI in Individual Calls and SDS/Status
Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 3/466
 2.2.2.18 On tab Parameters: Allow pre-emptive speech items over ISI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.2.2.19 On tab Parameters: ISI speech item priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.2.2.20 On tab Parameters: Allow lower AI security with ISI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.2.2.21 On tab Parameters: CLI included in AL calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.3 Default organisation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.4 Organisation block attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.4.1 Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.4.1.1 Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.4.1.2 Mnemonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.4.1.3 Home Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.4.2 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.4.2.1 Pre-emptive Services: Pre-emptive Rights Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.4.2.2 Call Transfer by Dispatcher: Call Authorised Address (SSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.4.2.3 Resource Usage: User Group Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.4.2.4 Energy Economy Group: Energy Saving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.4.2.5 Energy Economy Group: Start Point Frame Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.4.2.6 Dual Watch Absence Period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.4.2.7 Common Secondary Control Channels: SCCH Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.4.3 Data Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.4.3.1 IP Address Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.4.3.2 Access Point: Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.4.3.3 Access Point: Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.4.4 Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.4.4.1 Subscriber Class Definition: Default Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.4.4.2 Subscriber Class Definition: Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.4.5 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.4.5.1 Organisation Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.4.6 Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.4.7 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

3 Workstation user parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

3.1 Managing the workstation user parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.2.1 Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.2.1.1 Organisation Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.2.1.2 User name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.2.1.3 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.2.2 Communication Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.2.2.1 Alias Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.2.2.2 Ambience Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

4/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 3.2.2.3 Group Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.2.2.4 Individual Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.2.2.5 ISI Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.2.2.6 PABX Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.2.2.7 PSTN Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.2.2.8 Requests and Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.2.2.9 SDS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.2.2.10 Selectable Message Sending Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.2.3 Administrative Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.2.3.1 APN Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.2.3.2 Client Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.2.3.3 Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.2.3.4 Group Combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.2.3.5 Organisation Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.2.3.6 Organisation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.3.7 Radio Subscribers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.3.8 Workstation Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.2.4 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.2.4.1 Normal Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.2.4.2 Speech Item Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.2.4.3 Allow Pre-emptive Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.2.4.4 Pre-Emptive Resource Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.2.4.5 Incoming Communication: Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) . . . . . 77
3.2.4.6 Incoming Communication: Override Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR
Override) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.2.4.7 Outgoing Communication: Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for
ITSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.2.4.8 Outgoing Communication: Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for
FSSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.2.4.9 Outgoing Communication: Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for
MSISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.2.4.10 Short Data Services: Right to Use Gateway with External Networks . . . . . . . . . 79
3.2.4.11 Short Data Services: Allow Using Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2.4.12 Allow Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2.4.13 Allow Forced Release of Individual Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2.4.14 Enable Participation in End-to-End Encrypted Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2.4.15 Individual Call Maximum Duration for Calling Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.2.5 Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.2.5.1 Fleet Specific Short Number Domain Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.2.5.2 Mobile Subscriber ISDN Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 5/466
 3.2.5.3 Short Subscriber Identity Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4 Radio subscriber parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

4.1 Managing the radio subscriber parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.2.1 Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.2.1.1 Subscriber Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.2.1.2 Organisation Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.2.1.3 Visiting Org Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.2.1.4 Passing Acceptance Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.2.1.5 Individual TETRA Subscriber Identity (ITSI) (MCC; MNC; ISSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.2.1.6 Fleet Specific Short Number (FSSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.2.1.7 PABX Numbering Integrated to Fleet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.2.1.8 Mobile Subscriber ISDN Numbering (MSISDN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.2.1.9 Mnemonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.2.2 Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.2.2.1 Radio User Assignment Services: Radio User Assignment Required in
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.2.2.2 Radio User Assignment Services: Radio User Assignment Signalling
Supported. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.2.2.3 Assigned Identities: Primary Assigned Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.2.2.4 Assigned Identities: Secondary Assigned Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.2.2.5 Alias Identity: Profile Id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.2.2.6 Alias Identity: PIN For Alias Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.2.2.7 Assigned Identities: Terminal Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.2.3 Communication Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.2.3.1 Broadcast Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.2.3.2 Individual Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.2.3.3 ISI Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.2.3.4 PABX Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.2.3.5 PSTN Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.2.3.6 Requests and Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.2.3.7 SDS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.2.4 Incoming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.2.4.1 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.2.4.2 Override Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR Override) . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.2.4.3 Call Forwarding on All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.2.4.4 Call Forwarding on Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.2.4.5 Call Forwarding on No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.2.4.6 Call Forwarding on Not Reachable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

6/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 4.2.4.7 Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.2.4.8 Forwarded to number (TETRA Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.2.4.9 Gateway SSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.2.5 Outgoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.2.5.1 Normal Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.2.5.2 Speech Item Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.2.5.3 Allow Pre-emptive Speech Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.2.5.4 Allow Pre-emptive Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.2.5.5 Pre-emptive Resource Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.2.5.6 Allow Resource Pre-emption by Normal Priority Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.2.5.7 Allow Duplex Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.2.5.8 Allow Semi-Duplex Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.2.5.9 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for ITSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.2.5.10 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for FSSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.2.5.11 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for MSISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.2.5.12 Individual Call Maximum Duration for Calling Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.2.5.13 Emergency Target: TETRA Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.2.5.14 Emergency Target: External Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4.2.5.15 Emergency Target: Emergency Target of Organisation Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.2.6 Data Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.2.6.1 Activate Data Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.2.6.2 Obtain an IP Address Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.2.6.3 Specify an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.2.6.4 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.2.6.5 International Mobile Subscriber Identifier (IMSI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.2.6.6 Default Access Point Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.2.6.7 Allow Radio Subscriber Change Access Point Name (APN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.2.6.8 Short Data Services: Allow Using Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.2.6.9 Short Data Services: Right to Use Gateway with External Systems . . . . . . . . 106
4.2.6.10 Short Data Services: Acknowledgement for Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
4.2.6.11 TEDS: Allowed TEDS Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
4.2.6.12 TEDS: Ready Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.2.7 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.2.7.1 Authentication Key Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.2.7.2 Authentication Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.2.7.3 Authentication Triplet: Usage Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.2.7.4 Authentication Triplet: Period of Validity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
4.2.7.5 Air Interface Encryption Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
4.2.7.6 Enable Participation in End-to-End Encrypted Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
4.2.7.7 Periodic Registration: Subscriber Registration Checked by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 7/466
 4.2.7.8 Terminal Enable/Disable: Reason for Disabling the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.2.7.9 Terminal Enable/Disable: ITSI Permanently Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.2.7.10 Terminal Enable/Disable: Terminal Supports Enable/Disable Over the
Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.2.7.11 Terminal Enable/Disable: TETRA Equipment Identity (TEI) Status . . . . . . . . . 112
4.2.7.12 Terminal Enable/Disable: Over the Air Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.2.8 Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.2.8.1 Subscriber Class Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.2.8.2 Individual Call Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
4.2.8.3 Migration Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

5 Group parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

5.1 Managing the group parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.2.1 Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.2.1.1 Organisation Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.2.1.2 Group TETRA Subscriber Identity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.2.1.3 Home Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.2.1.4 Mnemonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.2.2 Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.2.2.1 Area Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.2.2.2 Minimum Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.2.2.3 Area Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.2.3 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.2.3.1 Group Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.2.3.2 Allow Pre-emptive Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.2.3.3 Pre-Emptive Resource Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.2.3.4 Allow Resource Pre-Emption by Normal Priority Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.2.3.5 Previous User's Speech Item Prioritised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.2.3.6 Pre-Emption Speech Item Levels in Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.2.3.7 Group Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.2.3.8 Talking Party Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.2.3.9 Dispatcher Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.2.3.10 Emergency Call Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.2.3.11 Dedicated Data Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.2.3.12 Status Messages (Callback and Emergency Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.2.3.13 Time for Delivery Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.2.3.14 Message Delivery to Combination of Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.2.3.15 Download Group to Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.2.3.16 Notification to Last Dispatcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

8/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 5.2.4 ISI talk group linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.2.4.1 Local ISI group linking mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.2.4.2 GTSI of the groups taking part in the link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.2.4.3 GTSI of the group controlling the link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.2.5 Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.2.5.1 Call Setup Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.2.5.2 Call Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.2.5.3 Speech Item Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.2.5.4 Latency Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.2.5.5 Activate Late Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.2.5.6 Late Entry: Fast Period: Number of Messages, Messages Interval; Slow Period:
Messages Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.2.5.7 Default Scanning Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.2.5.8 Activate Priority Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
5.2.5.9 Priority Scanning: Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.2.5.10 Priority Scanning: Setup Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.2.5.11 Priority Scanning: Fast Period: Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.2.5.12 Priority Scanning: Fast Period: Number of Messages, Messages Interval; Slow
Period: Messages Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
5.2.5.13 Radio Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.2.5.14 Call Control Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5.2.5.15 Energy Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5.2.5.16 Secondary Control Channel use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.2.6 Entry Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
5.2.7 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.2.7.1 Encryption Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.2.7.2 Encryption Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.2.8 Lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.2.8.1 Lifetime in Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.2.8.2 Group Lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

6 Group overlay parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

6.1 Managing the group overlay parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.2.1 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.2.1.1 Organisation block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.2.1.2 Group Overlay Identity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.2.1.3 Mnemonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.2.2 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.2.2.1 Individual calls allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 9/466
 6.2.2.2 Cover group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

7 Client application parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

7.1 Managing the Client application parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.2.1 Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.2.1.1 Organisation block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.2.1.2 Home Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.2.1.3 Individual Short Subscriber Identity (ISSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.2.1.4 Fleet Specific Short number (FSSN) domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.2.1.5 Fleet Specific Short number (FSSN) Fleet Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.2.1.6 PABX numbering integrated to fleet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.2.1.7 Mobile subscriber ISDN numbers (MSISDN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.2.1.8 Mnemonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.2.2 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.2.2.1 Voice Communication enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.2.2.2 Interface unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.2.2.3 Call Forwarding on All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.2.2.4 Call Forwarding on No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.2.2.5 Call Forwarding on Not Reachable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.2.2.6 Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.2.2.7 Forwarded to number (TETRA Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.2.2.8 Gateway SSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

8 External line and connection group parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 153

8.1 Managing the external line and connection group parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 153
8.2 External line parameters (PPC, PPD, PPE, PPI and PPM commands). . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 153
8.3 External line state parameters (PSI and PSM commands). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 153
8.4 Special route parameters (PUC, PUM and PUI commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 154
8.5 Connection group parameters (PGA, PGC, PGD, PGE, PGI, PGM, PGR and PGS
commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 154
8.5.1 Connection group identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 154
8.5.2 Line type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 154
8.5.3 FNIM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 154
8.5.4 FNIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 155
8.5.5 External line index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 155
8.5.6 PCM number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 155
8.5.7 Traffic channel reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 156
8.5.8 Called party prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 156
8.5.9 Utilised Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 156

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

10/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 8.5.10 SIP GW identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.5.11 Related data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.5.12 Mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.5.13 Connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.5.14 Amount of extracted digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.5.15 Calling party prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.5.16 ISI version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.5.17 Start tree for incoming CPI analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.5.18 Gateway ISSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.6 Interexchange speech line state handling parameters (POM and POI commands) . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.7 ET audio interface parameters (P1C, P1I and P1D commands). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.7.1 Unit type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.7.2 Cartridge number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.7.3 Card number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.7.4 Transcoding mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.7.5 PCM number and Time slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.7.6 Number of monitoring lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.7.7 Sub timeslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.7.8 Audio adjustment parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.7.8.1 Tone volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.7.8.2 Decoded speech volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.7.8.3 Encoded speech volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

9 ISDN and ISI PCM parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

9.1 Managing the ISDN and ISI PCM parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
9.2 ISDN and ISI PCM parameters (PQC, PQD, PQE, PQI and PQM commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

10 Radio network parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

10.1 Managing the radio network parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
10.2 Location area parameters (PLA, PLD, PLM, and PLI commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
10.3 Frequency parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
10.3.1 Duplex spacing parameters (PFC and PFD command groups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
10.3.1.1 Duplex space index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
10.3.1.2 Duplex space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
10.3.2 Frequency band (PFA and PFR commands). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
10.3.2.1 Frequency band index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
10.3.2.2 Base frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.3.2.3 End frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.3.2.4 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.3.2.5 Reverse operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 11/466
 10.3.3 Carrier pair (PFT and PFV commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
10.3.3.1 Carrier pair numbers or frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
10.3.3.2 Carrier numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
10.3.3.3 Carrier frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.4 Cell configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.4.1 Identification parameters (PCA, PCC, PCN, PCR, PCD and PCI commands) . . . . . . . . 174
10.4.2 Base station parameters (PCB command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.4.2.1 Base station number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.4.2.2 Combiner type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.4.3 Transceiver parameters (PCT and PCW commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
10.4.3.1 Base station number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
10.4.3.2 TTRX index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
10.4.3.3 Frequency band index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
10.4.3.4 Carrier number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
10.4.3.5 TX power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
10.4.3.6 Ranking value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
10.4.3.7 TTRX operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
10.4.4 System broadcast parameters (PCJ command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
10.4.4.1 SBON allowed subscriber classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
10.4.4.2 SBOFF disallowed subscriber classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
10.4.4.3 REG registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
10.4.4.4 DREG de-registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
10.4.4.5 PRIO priority cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
10.4.4.6 MINM minimum mode service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
10.4.4.7 MIGR migration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
10.4.4.8 VOICE TETRA voice service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
10.4.4.9 CIRC circuit mode data service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
10.4.4.10SNDCP IP packet data service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
10.4.4.11ENCR air interface encryption service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
10.4.4.12ADVL advanced link support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
10.4.4.13AUTH authentication required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
10.4.4.14CLASS security class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
10.4.4.15TXPWR maximum MS transmit power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
10.4.4.16RXLEV minimum RX access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
10.4.4.17ACC access parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
10.4.4.18DLTO radio downlink timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
10.4.4.19IMM immediate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
10.4.4.20WT waiting time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
10.4.4.21NU number of random access transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
10.4.5 Synchronisation broadcast parameters (PCK command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

12/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 10.4.5.1 DXT U-plane DTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
10.4.5.2 F18EXT frame 18 extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
10.4.5.3 COL colour code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
10.4.6 Radio path signalling parameters (PCL command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
10.4.6.1 AIRC aircraft flag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
10.4.6.2 AIRPER aircraft distance reporting period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
10.4.6.3 T2001 access define PDU interval on MCCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
10.4.6.4 T2002 downlink stealing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
10.4.6.5 T2003 channel reserve refresh time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
10.4.6.6 T2004 time to send max frame in startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
10.4.6.7 N2001 maximum number of unused TCH timeslots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
10.4.6.8 N2002 RSSI threshold for carrier jamming detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
10.4.6.9 N2003 threshold number of consecutive jammed MMCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10.4.6.10N2004 RSSI threshold for collision detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10.4.6.11N2005 minimum length of random access frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10.4.6.12N2006 maximum allowed path delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10.4.6.13N2007 Number of consecutive jammed slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
10.4.6.14N2008 threshold number of consecutive jammed TCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
10.4.6.15N2009 maximum length of random access frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
10.4.6.16N2010 IMM for individual call on assigned channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
10.4.6.17N2011 IMM for group call on assigned channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
10.4.6.18N2012 WT for individual call on assigned channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
10.4.6.19N2013 WT for group call on assigned channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
10.4.6.20N2014 framelength for individual call on assigned channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
10.4.6.21N2015 framelength for group call on assigned channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
10.4.6.22N2016 number of sent CCK-id-elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
10.4.6.23N2017 number of sent extended services-elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
10.4.6.24N2018 jammer detection level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
10.4.6.25N2019 jamming noise floor max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
10.4.6.26N252HP maximum BL-DATA retransmission for high priority SDUs . . . . . . . . 198
10.4.6.27N252LP maximum BL-DATA retransmission for low priority SDUs . . . . . . . . . 198
10.4.6.28N253 BL_UDATA repetitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
10.4.6.29T252 acknowledgement waiting timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
10.4.6.30JAMMOD jamming algorithm version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
10.4.7 Cell reselection parameters (PCM command). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
10.4.7.1 SRT slow reselect threshold above fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
10.4.7.2 FRT fast reselect threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10.4.7.3 SRH slow reselect hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
10.4.7.4 FRH fast reselect hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
10.4.7.5 NTXPWR maximum MS transmit power in monitored cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 13/466
 10.4.7.6 NRXLEV minimum RX access level in monitored cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
10.4.7.7 FWDREG forward registration support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
10.4.7.8 EXCELL expedited cell reselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
10.4.8 Cell-related emergency number (PCE command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
10.4.8.1 Connect to number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
10.4.9 General cell-specific parameters (PCG command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
10.4.9.1 SFRAM speech frame format type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
10.4.9.2 FBMOD TBS fallback mode allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
10.4.9.3 LDTIM link down timeout period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
10.4.9.4 EXCAP exclusive capacity for TBS allowed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
10.4.9.5 JATIM minimum MCCH change period on jamming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
10.4.9.6 SOTIM DXT switchover timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
10.4.9.7 IPSEC IP security for DXT-TBS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
10.4.10 Radio channel management parameters (PCH command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
10.4.10.1Max packet data channels in cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
10.4.10.2Secondary control channels defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
10.4.10.3Secondary control channels currently active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
10.4.10.4Max dedicated data channels in cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
10.4.11 TEDS specific cell parameters (PCS command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
10.4.11.1TEDS system broadcast parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
10.4.11.2TEDS radio path signalling parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
10.4.11.3TEDS cell reselection parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
10.5 Neighbour cell parameters (PN command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
10.5.1 Neighbour cell parameters (PNA command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
10.5.1.1 LAID location area identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
10.5.1.2 LANAME location area mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
10.5.1.3 CEID cell index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
10.5.1.4 CENAME cell mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
10.5.1.5 System identifier of neighbour cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
10.5.1.6 Nature of neighbourhood relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
10.5.2 Neighbour cell parameters for TEDS (PNT command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
10.5.2.1 LAID location area identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
10.5.2.2 LANAME location area mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
10.5.2.3 CEID cell index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
10.5.2.4 CENAME cell mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
10.5.2.5 TLAID location area identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
10.5.2.6 TLANAME location area mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
10.5.2.7 TCEID cell index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
10.5.2.8 TCENAME cell mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
10.5.2.9 TDXTID system identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

14/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 10.5.2.10Nature of neighbourhood relationship. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

11 TETRA IP transmission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

11.1 Managing the TETRA IP transmission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
11.2 IP transmission parameters in the PM command group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
11.2.1 Network and registration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
11.2.2 Radio network parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
11.3 IP connection configuration parameters (P2 command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
11.4 IP switching configuration parameters (P3 command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
11.5 SIP and IP transcoding configuration parameters (P4 command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11.6 TETRA Voice Gateway IP configuration parameters (P5 command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11.7 Inter-DXT signalling configuration parameters (NR, NS, OY, QR, Q8, QK, T2 command
groups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

12 DXT parameters modified with the PM command group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

12.1 Managing the DXT parameters (PM command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
12.2 DXT parameters used in PM command group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
12.2.1 Parameter type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
12.2.2 Organisation identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
12.2.3 Display type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
12.2.4 Parameter identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
12.2.5 Parameter value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
12.2.6 Sorting format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
12.2.7 Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
12.2.8 Network and registration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
12.2.8.1 Data recovery activation/deactivation (69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
12.2.8.2 Default route DXT (68). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12.2.8.3 Interexchange speech line testing interval (72) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12.2.8.4 Not valid ASSI gap high limit (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12.2.8.5 Not valid ASSI gap low limit (0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12.2.8.6 Recovery of client applications (32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12.2.8.7 Recovery of group data (33). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
12.2.8.8 Recovery of MSISDN/FSSN numbers (64) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
12.2.8.9 Recovery of organisation blocks (63) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
12.2.8.10Recovery of subnets (58) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12.2.8.11Recovery of subscriber location (31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12.2.8.12Recovery period (17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
12.2.8.13Recovery start hours (18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
12.2.8.14Recovery start minutes (3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
12.2.8.15Spare HLR DXT ID (35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 15/466
 12.2.8.16TBS load monitoring data format version (75) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
12.2.8.17TBS load monitoring tool ip address field1 (76) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
12.2.8.18TBS load monitoring tool ip address field2 (77) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
12.2.8.19TBS load monitoring tool ip address field3 (78) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
12.2.8.20TBS load monitoring tool ip address field4 (79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
12.2.8.21TBS load monitoring tool IP address type (80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
12.2.8.22TBS load monitoring tool port number (81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
12.2.8.23TBS monitoring data interval (82). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
12.2.8.24VLR cleanup notice (26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
12.2.8.25VLR cleanup period (30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
12.2.8.26VLR cleanup start hours (29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
12.2.8.27VLR cleanup start minutes (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
12.2.8.28VLR inactivity time (28) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
12.2.8.29VLR usage limit (27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
12.2.8.30OSTE-NISI transform (89) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
12.2.8.31Signalling QoS tagging DSCP (90). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
12.2.8.32Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
12.2.8.33Voice frame QoS tagging IEEE_802.1p (93) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
12.2.8.34Voice transport VLAN identifier (94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
12.2.8.35Dejitter buffer size (96) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
12.2.8.36IP voice base UDP port value (97) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
12.2.8.37SIP signalling QoS tagging DSCP (98) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
12.2.8.38DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
12.2.8.39DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
12.2.8.40DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
12.2.8.41DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
12.2.8.42DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (103) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
12.2.8.43ToBB signaling QoS tagging DSCP (105) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
12.2.8.44G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (108). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
12.2.8.45G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (109) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
12.2.8.46G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
12.2.8.47G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (111). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
12.2.8.48G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (112). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
12.2.8.49G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (113) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
12.2.8.50G4WIF signaling QoS tagging DSCP (114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
12.2.9 Radio network parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
12.2.9.1 TBS configuration period (34). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
12.2.9.2 TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (83) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
12.2.9.3 TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (84). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
12.2.9.4 Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

16/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 12.2.9.5 TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (86). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
12.2.9.6 TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (87) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
12.2.9.7 TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (88) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
12.2.9.8 ToBB server SIP UDP listen port (106) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
12.2.10 Numbering parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
12.2.10.1V-ASSI value range – lower limit (67) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
12.2.10.2V-ASSI value range – upper limit (66). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
12.2.10.3ESN CUG analysis starting tree number (24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
12.2.10.4ESN external line analysis starting tree (25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
12.2.10.5FSSN domain ID analysis starting tree number (56) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
12.2.10.6MNI analysis starting tree number (73) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
12.2.10.7MSISDN home analysis starting tree number (57). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
12.2.10.8PISN number digits 01–08 (59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
12.2.10.9PISN number digits 09–16 (60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
12.2.10.10PISN number digits 17–24 (61) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
12.2.10.11PISN number digits 25–32 (62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
12.2.10.12SSI analysis starting tree number (23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
12.2.10.13TSI analysis starting tree number (22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
12.2.11 Authentication and encryption parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
12.2.12 Call parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
12.2.12.1Call ID range max (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
12.2.12.2Call ID range min (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
12.2.12.3DXT support for type 1 handover (65) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
12.2.13 Emergency call parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
12.2.13.1TCS client emergency target length (10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
12.2.13.2TCS client emergency target, digits 1- 8 (11). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
12.2.13.3TCS client emergency target, digits 9 - 16 (12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
12.2.14 IP packet data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
12.2.15 Status and SDS parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
12.2.15.1AVL TCS router ISSI 0–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
12.2.15.2AVL TCS target ISSI 0–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
12.2.16 Load limiter parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
12.2.16.1Average round-trip time alarm limit (74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
12.2.16.2CM max load for registrations and calls (9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
12.2.16.3CM maxload for WS commands (19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
12.2.16.4CPU maxload group services (16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
12.2.16.5CPU maxload individual services (15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
12.2.16.6CPU overload alarm limit (71) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
12.2.16.7DWS support for compression (13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
12.2.16.8Load limit at main control channel (70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 17/466
 12.2.16.9Maxload for data recovery (20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
12.2.17 Feature switch parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
12.2.17.1QoS control enabled (95) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
12.2.17.2DXT3p fan supervision enabled (104) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
12.2.17.3ToBB Rel 1 activated in the DXT (107) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

13 DXT parameters modified with the PI and PW command groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

13.1 Managing the DXT parameters (PI and PW command groups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
13.2 Parameters used in PI command group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
13.3 Parameters used in PW command group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

14 DXT parameters modified with the WO command group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

14.1 Managing the DXT parameters (WO command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
14.2 Parameter class 02 (WO command group). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
14.2.1 Q3 DX alarm forwarding enabled (241) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
14.2.2 Q3 Interface in use (814). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
14.3 Parameters class 10 (WO command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
14.3.1 Satellite abis (31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
14.4 Parameters class 34 (WO command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
14.4.1 Hook indiv call(3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
14.4.2 CLIR Override (25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
14.4.3 Energy economy (57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
14.4.4 CDD in network (66) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
14.4.5 ENHANCED_AUDIO_MON (103) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
14.5 Parameter class 38 (WO command group). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
14.5.1 WRITE_CACHE_TIMEOUT (00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
14.5.2 STORAGE_LENGTH (01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
14.5.3 MAX_FILE_COUNT (02). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
14.5.4 ADMINISTRATION_HOUR (03). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
14.5.5 ADMINISTRATION_MINUTES (04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
14.6 Parameters class 45 (WO command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
14.6.1 NW DXTs SW level (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
14.6.2 Max TBS SW DL (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
14.6.3 Pd SW version (11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
14.6.4 Pd MSMS ACC (12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
14.6.5 Pd IP ITSI (13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
14.6.6 NW internal rec (14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
14.6.7 NW GC in use (15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
14.6.8 Session key 0–8 (18–26). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
14.6.9 Clear WS login allowed (27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

18/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 14.6.10 Extended ACCH in use (53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
14.6.11 Lowest TBS SW level (95). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
14.6.12 Pd IP spoofing detect (125) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
14.6.13 Individual call area in use (126) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
14.6.14 Confirmed group call (127) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
14.6.15 Speech item priority and priority value range 1-20 in use (128) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
14.6.16 Dispatcher-initiated Emergency Call Allowed (129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
14.6.17 Group Lifetime (130) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
14.6.18 Passing control in use (131) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
14.6.19 Normal Registration CDR data generation mechanism (132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
14.6.20 Location-based group call in use (133). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
14.6.21 Group addressed status/SDS delivery attribute (136) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
14.6.22 TBS load monitoring in use (137). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
14.6.23 Pre-emptive priority levels release 6.0 (138) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
14.6.24 Pre-emptive priority levels release 5.5 (139) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
14.6.25 Aliasing in use (140) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
14.6.26 Extended VPN for communication rights (141) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
14.6.27 Extended VPN for management rights (142). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
14.6.28 Extended VPN for G4WIF (143). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
14.6.29 MS Special Priority (144). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
14.6.30 TBS fallback indication SDS (145) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
14.6.31 ISI group call in use (147) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
14.6.32 Dedicated data channels in use (148) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

15 Dispatcher Station Controller parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

15.1 Managing the Dispatcher Station Controller parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
15.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
15.2.1 TDSC connection parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
15.2.2 TDSC type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

16 System parameters modified with the PM command group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

16.1 Managing the system parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
16.2 System parameters (PM command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
16.2.1 Feature switch parameters (PM command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
16.2.1.1 Load based SCCH (375) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
16.2.1.2 AVL forwarding in fallback (378) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
16.2.1.3 Terminal disable enable in fallback (391). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
16.2.1.4 Workstation User Networking (393) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
16.2.1.5 Registration CDR data generation mechanism (394) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
16.2.1.6 Other CDR data generation mechanism (395) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 19/466
 16.2.1.7 CDR changes activation (396) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
16.2.1.8 Dispatcher Initiated Talk Group Selection (397) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
16.2.1.9 TEDS carrier timing (415) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
16.2.1.10TBS jamming detection improvement (416) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
16.2.1.11Location Based Group Short Data (417) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
16.2.2 Network and registration parameters (PM command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
16.2.2.1 Country code (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
16.2.2.2 Network code (6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
16.2.2.3 Refreshing period (12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
16.2.2.4 System code (26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
16.2.2.5 SwMI ident (29). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
16.2.2.6 Allowed migrating 01–10 country code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
16.2.2.7 Allowed migrating 01–10 network code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
16.2.2.8 Downloading pending milestone 1 (81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
16.2.2.9 Downloading pending milestone 2 (82) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
16.2.2.10Downloading pending milestone 3 (83) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
16.2.2.11Downloading period 1 (84) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
16.2.2.12Downloading period 2 (85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
16.2.2.13Downloading period 3 (86) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
16.2.2.14Group membership replication optimization (100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
16.2.2.15HLR of APNs and APN pools (114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
16.2.2.16HLR of connection groups (115). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
16.2.2.17EE mode for background groups (173) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
16.2.2.18HLR of SwMI definitions (174) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
16.2.2.19EIR system id (187) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
16.2.2.20TEI query enable (193) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
16.2.2.21Mismatching registration rejected (199) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
16.2.2.22Minimum allowed registration and recovery period (203) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
16.2.2.23DCK retrieval support (296) (Encrypted initial registration support) . . . . . . . . . 321
16.2.2.24TEDS system code (365) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
16.2.2.25Visitor ASSI allocation (368) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
16.2.2.26Group attachment in registration message (372). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
16.2.2.27Automatic TCS client logout (374) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
16.2.2.28Networking mode (376) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
16.2.2.29DXT-DXT satellite offset timer (377) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
16.2.2.30Automatic TCS client home change (392). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
16.2.3 Radio network parameters (PM command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
16.2.3.1 Max resource queuing time (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
16.2.3.2 Priority level of PDU for AL call (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
16.2.3.3 Priority level of PDU for group attachments/detachments (98) . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

20/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 16.2.3.4 Priority level of PDU for DGNA (99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
16.2.3.5 Priority for packet data (101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
16.2.3.6 Priority level of PDU for registration (106) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
16.2.3.7 Fixed TBS fallback mode parameters (108 – 113) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
16.2.3.8 Enhanced TBS fallback mode parameters (108 – 113). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
16.2.3.9 Priority level of PDU for group call (121) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
16.2.3.10Priority level of PDU for on/off hook call (129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
16.2.3.11Priority level of PDU for direct call (130) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
16.2.3.12Priority level of PDU for PSTN/PABX call (131) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
16.2.3.13SDS-TL addressing method (133) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
16.2.3.14Cell load sending period (183) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
16.2.3.15Hysteresis of cell load (184) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
16.2.3.16Lower limit of cell load (185) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
16.2.3.17Higher limit of cell load (186) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
16.2.3.18Send network time (197) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
16.2.3.19Guaranteed channels activation (202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
16.2.3.20Performance management enhancement (300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
16.2.3.21Control channel width in TEDS (311) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
16.2.3.22Max TEDS TTRXs in TBS (312). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
16.2.3.23Use of TEDS options (313) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
16.2.3.24TEDS - Allowed tl-sdu retransmission (314) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
16.2.3.25TEDS - Allowed segment retransmission (315) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
16.2.3.26TEDS - Packet data PDU priority (316). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
16.2.3.27TEDS - TL-SDU win size in original AL (317) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
16.2.3.28TEDS - TL-SDU win size in extended AL (318) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
16.2.3.29TEDS DL signalling cadence (319) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
16.2.3.30TEDS L2 feedback duration (T.230) (320). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
16.2.3.31TEDS L2 feedback interval (T.231) (321) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
16.2.3.32TEDS minimum granting delay (322) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
16.2.3.33TEDS start-high-go-low starting level (323). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
16.2.3.34TEDS max waiting time for slot grant (324). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
16.2.3.35Priority for registration on TEDS (325) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
16.2.3.36Priority level of PDU for DGNA on TEDS (326) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
16.2.3.37Priority lev of group att/det PDU on TEDS (327) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
16.2.3.38TEDS waiting time for random access ack (328) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
16.2.3.39TEDS min amount of RA slots in multiframe (329). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
16.2.3.40TEDS max number of reserved slots for MS (330) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
16.2.3.41Maximum transferring MSs in TEDS TTRX (331) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
16.2.3.42Max served users in QAM PDCH (371) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
16.2.3.43Terminal disable enable pending time (379) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 21/466
 16.2.3.44Terminal disable enable Sub-Protocol ID (380) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
16.2.3.45Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 01 – 10 (381–390). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
16.2.4 Numbering parameters (PM command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
16.2.4.1 Tactilon ISSI (9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
16.2.4.2 FSSN prefix digit (34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
16.2.4.3 MS-ISDN prefix digit (35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
16.2.4.4 NITSI prefix digit (36). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
16.2.4.5 PABX prefix digit (37). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
16.2.4.6 PSTN prefix digit (38) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
16.2.4.7 FSSN base SSI (39) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
16.2.4.8 Num gateway SSI range higher limit (40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
16.2.4.9 Num gateway SSI range lower limit (41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
16.2.4.10Num TCS SSI range lower limit (43). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
16.2.4.11Num external line range lower limit (44) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
16.2.4.12Num system address lower limit (45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
16.2.4.13Selected group ident (120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
16.2.4.14Number of voice mail system 01 (126) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
16.2.4.15Number of voice mail system 02 (127) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
16.2.4.16ASSI values system range – lower limit (175) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
16.2.4.17ASSI values system range – upper limit (176). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
16.2.4.18MSISDN International prefix (177) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
16.2.4.19MSISDN Country Code (178) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
16.2.4.20MSISDN National prefix (179) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
16.2.4.21SSI partitioned 01–10 MNI (301 – 310). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
16.2.5 Authentication and encryption parameters (PM command group). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
16.2.5.1 DXT with transit key database (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
16.2.5.2 Authentication and encryption (30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
16.2.5.3 Authentication situations (31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
16.2.5.4 Default authentication data use count (87) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
16.2.5.5 CCK change demand broadcasts (102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
16.2.5.6 CCK change warning idle time (103). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
16.2.5.7 CCK change warning broadcast time (104) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
16.2.5.8 CCK change start delay (105) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
16.2.5.9 Allowed encryption method (119) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
16.2.5.10DCK retrieval between DXTs (135). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
16.2.5.11Default authentication data validity period (195) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
16.2.5.12Default authentication data validity period type (196). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
16.2.5.13SCK AIE in TBS fallback modes (270 – 276) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
16.2.6 Call parameters (PM command group). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
16.2.6.1 cc parameter refresh period (0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

22/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 16.2.6.2 Individual call speech item max. time (3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
16.2.6.3 Radio-units allowed to queue B-subscriber (10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
16.2.6.4 Refresh time for speech items (11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
16.2.6.5 Keep requested simplex/duplex mode (32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
16.2.6.6 R2 signaling parameter (33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
16.2.6.7 Send Gateway SSI when CLIR is active (88). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
16.2.6.8 MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via PSTN (107) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
16.2.6.9 TBS speech item duration in fallback group 01 (111) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
16.2.6.10TBS speech item duration in fallback group 02 (112) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
16.2.6.11TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03 (113) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
16.2.6.12CFNRy timer for MS subscribers (123) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
16.2.6.13CFNRy timer for WS subscribers (124). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
16.2.6.14Max number of call forwardings (125). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
16.2.6.15Incoming PSTN/PABX calls forwarded (128). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
16.2.6.16Setup timeout in ISI calls (134) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
16.2.6.17Individual call timeout in ISI calls (136) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
16.2.6.18Max resource queuing time – type 1 handover (172) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
16.2.6.19Local routing for normal dispatcher call (180) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
16.2.6.20Tromboning prevention mechanism (182). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
16.2.6.21Duplex individual calls to dispatchers (293) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
16.2.6.22Notification from busy called party (299) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
16.2.6.23Call waiting and call forwarding indication (364) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
16.2.6.24ISI group call inactivity timer (366) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
16.2.6.25ISI late entry interval (367). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
16.2.6.26Max MS count in group call ToC (373) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
16.2.7 Emergency call parameters (PM command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
16.2.7.1 Emergency ident (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
16.2.7.2 Who can release an emergency call (27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
16.2.7.3 Emergency number 01–10 (42, 46, 89 – 96) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
16.2.7.4 Emergency number handling mode (97) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
16.2.7.5 Local routing for emg priority dispatcher call (181) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
16.2.7.6 Emg calls allowed during temporary disable (194) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
16.2.7.7 Max alert time in emergency calls (268) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
16.2.7.8 Emergency group call area (295) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
16.2.7.9 Clear emergency call in always E2EE group (298). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
16.2.7.10Emergency call pre-emption in fallback (369) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
16.2.8 IP packet data parameters (PM command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
16.2.8.1 Pd - maximum length of tl-sdu (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
16.2.8.2 Pd - partial record interval (28) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
16.2.8.3 Network delay (47) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 23/466
 16.2.8.4 Routing period (48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
16.2.8.5 Aip time interval (49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
16.2.8.6 Lease period (50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
16.2.8.7 Source routing (51) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
16.2.8.8 Pd - maximum transmission units (52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
16.2.8.9 Pd - response_wait timer (53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
16.2.8.10Pd - standby timer (54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
16.2.8.11Pd - ready timer (55) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
16.2.8.12Pd - data transfer throughput (56) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
16.2.8.13Pd - number of timeslots (57). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
16.2.8.14Pd - number of segment retransmissions (58). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
16.2.8.15Pd - allowed number of tl-sdu retransmission (59). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
16.2.8.16Pd - tl-sdu window size (60). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
16.2.8.17Pd - inactivity timer (122). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
16.2.8.18Pd - maximum limit for suspended data (188) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
16.2.8.19PD - Access mode (370) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
16.2.9 Status and SDS parameters (PM command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
16.2.9.1 Status messages callback request (13). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
16.2.9.2 Status messages entry request (14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
16.2.9.3 Status messages general ack status l1 (15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
16.2.9.4 Status messages general ack status l2 (16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
16.2.9.5 Status messages general ack status u1 (17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
16.2.9.6 Status messages general ack status u2 (18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
16.2.9.7 Status messages general status acknowledgement (19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
16.2.9.8 Status messages scanning off (20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
16.2.9.9 Status messages scanning on (21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
16.2.9.10Status messages status indicator l (22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
16.2.9.11Status messages status indicator u (24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
16.2.9.12Status SDS messages status indicator type (23). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
16.2.9.13Status messages urgent request (25). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
16.2.9.14Priority for status messages (116) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
16.2.9.15Priority for SDS 4 messages (117) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
16.2.9.16Priority for SDS 1, 2 & 3 messages (118) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
16.2.9.17SDS on PDCH (132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
16.2.9.18Charging option for Storage service (189) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
16.2.9.19Default validity time for SDS messages (190) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
16.2.9.20Default validity time for status messages (191) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
16.2.9.21Default validity time for SDS-TL messages (192) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
16.2.9.22Charging options for SMSGW (200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
16.2.9.23Storage for SDS-TL messages allowed (201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

24/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 16.2.9.24SMSGW ISSI 01–32 (204 – 235) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
16.2.9.25Spare SMSGW ISSI 01–32 (236 – 267) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
16.2.9.26Status messages Tx inhibit on (291) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
16.2.9.27Status messages TxI off (292) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
16.2.9.28Direct sending before storage (294) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
16.2.9.29Alert mechanism for SMSC (297). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
16.2.9.30Use SDS4 Sending profiles (332). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
16.2.9.31Priority of sending profiles (333, 336, 339, 342, 345) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
16.2.9.32Redundancy of sending profiles (334, 337, 340, 343, 346). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
16.2.9.33Channels for sending profiles (335, 338, 341, 344, 347) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
16.2.9.34Use important profile for Protocol ID 01–04 (348 – 351) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
16.2.9.35Use repeating profile for Protocol ID 01–04 (352 – 355) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
16.2.9.36Use dedicated profile for Protocol ID 01–04 (356 – 359) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
16.2.9.37Use paging profile for Protocol ID 01–04 (360 – 363) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
16.2.10 Load-limiter parameters (PM command group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
16.2.10.1MCCH uplink load control for LIP (277 – 290) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
16.2.10.2MCCH downlink load control (198, 269) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
16.2.10.3DDCH downlink load throughput (398) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

17 Configuration and Data Distribution Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

17.1 Managing the Configuration and Data Distribution parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
17.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
17.2.1 HLR of APNs and APN pools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
17.2.2 HLR of connection groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
17.2.3 Home DXT of MSISDNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
17.2.4 Network identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
17.2.4.1 Mobile country code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
17.2.4.2 Mobile network code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
17.2.5 Management blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
17.2.6 Automatic COG recovery counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
17.2.7 Automatic COG recovery timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
17.2.8 G4WIF filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
17.2.9 WSU global rights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
17.3 CDD load parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
17.3.1 Maximum allowed message queue load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
17.3.2 Threshold for message queue load limiting end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
17.3.3 Maximum allowed message queue load for “periodic recovery” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
17.3.4 Threshold for message queue partial load limiting end (“periodic recovery”) . . . . . . . . . 426
17.3.5 Threshold for management event cache alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
17.3.6 Threshold for management event cache alarm cancelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 25/466
 17.3.7 Maximum allowed management event cache usage level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
17.3.8 Threshold for management event cache load limiting end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
17.4 Parameters for logging of management events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
17.4.1 SetLogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
17.4.2 SetFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

18 Other parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

26/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
List of Tables.
Table 1 How are the characteristics of the parameters presented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 2 Key to type information given for the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 3 Managing the organisation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 4 Values requested by terminals in group call and individual call modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Table 5 Managing the workstation user parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Table 6 Managing the organisation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 7 Managing the organisation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 8 Managing radio subscriber parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Table 9 Managing the group parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Table 10 Explanations for the parameter Dispatcher Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Table 11 Explanations for the parameter Emergency Call Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 12 Receivers of different data messages sent by a radio unit when the attribute Status Messages
is set to value Send to Dispatchers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Table 13 Values of the parameter Download Group to Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Table 14 Using the parameters for group calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 15 Interdependency of Time limits: Call Setup Time and Max Resource Queuing Time. . . . . . 129
Table 16 Late Entry attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Table 17 Late entry intervals: Priority Scanning attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Table 18 Managing the group overlay parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 19 Managing the Client application parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Table 20 Managing the external line and connection group parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Table 21 Managing the ISDN and ISI PCM parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Table 22 Managing the radio network parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Table 23 Calculating the carrier frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Table 24 An example of carrier frequencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Table 25 TX power class in phase modulated carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Table 26 TX power class in TEDS TTRX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Table 27 Minimum RX access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Table 28 ACC access parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Table 29 Radio downlink timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Table 30 IMM immediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Table 31 Modifying TETRA IP transmission parameters in an MML session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Table 32 Modifying DXT parameters in an MML session with the PM command group. . . . . . . . . . . 233
Table 33 ISSIs of TCS clients used as AVL targets or re-routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Table 34 ISSIs of TCS clients used as AVL targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Table 35 Modifying DXT parameters in an MML session with the PI and PW command groups . . . . . 283
Table 36 Modifying DXT parameters in an MML session with the WO command group . . . . . . . . . . 285
Table 37 Managing the DSC and TDSC parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Table 38 Managing the system parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 27/466
Table 39 Parameters: Allowed migrating 01–10 country code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Table 40 Parameters: Allowed migrating 01–10 network code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Table 41 Recommendations for using the parameters for group calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table 42 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Table 43 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Table 44 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Table 45 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Table 46 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Table 47 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Table 48 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Table 49 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Table 50 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Table 51 Example of priority levels on QAM PDCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Table 52 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Table 53 LSD of mspid: values and their usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Table 54 LSD of mspid: values and their usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Table 55 Different selections for semiduplex/duplex mode in individual-call setup phase . . . . . . . . . 372
Table 56 Last digit in the Enhanced TBS fallback mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Table 57 Recommendations for using the parameters for group calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Table 58 Parameters: Emergency number 01–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Table 59 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Table 60 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Table 61 Example of priority levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Table 62 Priority of sending profiles: default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Table 63 Redundancy of sending profiles: default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Table 64 Channels for sending profiles: default values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Table 65 Information element: Minimum reporting interval – absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Table 66 Information element: Temporary minimum reporting interval – relative (also used for
maximum reporting distance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Table 67 Managing the CDD parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Table 68 Managing the LME parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

28/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
List of Figures.
Figure 1 Frequencies in phase-modulated channels and QAM channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 2 Duplex space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 3 Frequency offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 4 Reverse operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 29/466
 DOCUMENT AMENDMENTS

VERSION DATE COMMENTS CHAPTER

UPDATED
25-5 03/2017 Parameters related to the Energy Economy feature 2.2.2.14 ,
updated. 2.4.2.4 - 2.4.2.6 ,
5.2.5.15 ,
14.4.3 ,
14.6.11 ,
16.2.2.17
Parameter NW DXTs SW level (5): updated information 14.6.1
on the software release levels.
Added the feature switch parameter Location Based 16.2.1.11
Group Short Data.
25-4 12/2016 Added parameter descriptions of the TBS load 12.2.8.16 -
monitoring system, Viewcor, related parameters. 12.2.8.23 ,
14.6.22
25-3 10/2016 Descriptions of external line parameters and external 8.2 , 8.3
line state parameters (PP and PS command groups)
removed. They can be found in the corresponding
Command Reference Manuals.

Minor modifications. 11 , 12
Added G4WIF GW signalling parameters. 11.2.1
12.2.8.44 -
12.2.8.50
Added information related to the TETRA Voice Gateway 11.6
IP configuration parameters.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

30/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 DOCUMENT AMENDMENTS

VERSION DATE COMMENTS CHAPTER

UPDATED
Changed parameter values or description:
- Air Interface Encryption Method 4.2.7.5
- Calling party prefix 8.5.15
- Gateway ISSI 8.5.18
- Secondary control channels currently active 10.4.10.3
- V-ASSI value range – lower limit (67) 12.2.10.1
- V-ASSI value range – upper limit (66) 12.2.10.2
- ASSI values system range – lower limit (175) 16.2.4.16
- ASSI values system range – upper limit (176) 16.2.4.17
Added new parameters:
- N2018 jammer detection level 10.4.6.24
- N2019 jamming noise floor max 10.4.6.25
- JAMMOD jamming algorithm version 10.4.6.30
- TEDS carrier timing (415) 16.2.1.9
- TBS jamming detection improvement (416) 16.2.1.10
- DCK retrieval between DXTs (135) 16.2.5.10
Parameter NW DXTs SW level (5): updated information 14.6.1
on the software release levels.
25-2 04/2016 Section Group attachment in registration message 16.2.2.26
(372) updated.
25-1 12/2015 Added a note concerning TETRA/TEDS neighbourhoods 10.5.2
definitions/information.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 31/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

32/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
1 About this document
This document provides reference information on the various parameters of the Airbus DS TETRA system. It
is intended for those who plan how to configure the network and its services. The parameters used in the
TETRA terminals are outside the scope of this manual. In case of terminal parameters, refer to the terminal
manuals or contact the Airbus Defence and Space terminal helpdesk at [email protected].
The Glossary section explains the abbreviations used in this document. The full version of the glossary is
provided as a separate document, Glossary, DN00126469.
Some of the features, functionalities, and equipment of the TETRA system described in this document may
not be available in all market areas or are separately priced commercial options. Please contact your Airbus
Defence and Space Account Manager for further information.
Tactilon® is a registered trademark of Airbus Defence and Space.
Note
IP transmission is supported from TETRA System Release 6.5 onwards.

We welcome any suggestions for further improvement of this document. Also, should you find any errors
or omissions in this document, please forward your comments to the local Airbus Defence and Space
representative or send them to the e-mail address [email protected].

1.1 How to use this document

This manual is organised into chapters according to the types of the parameters. Within each chapter, the
parameters are arranged in a different order depending on the tool used to modify the parameter values.
The document is organised as follows:
• Chapter 1 introduces the structure of the document, and explains the typographical conventions used
and the key to the entries.
• Chapter 2 describes the organisation parameters.
• Chapter 3 describes the workstation user parameters.
• Chapter 4 describes the radio subscriber parameters.
• Chapter 5 describes the group parameters.
• Chapter 6 describes the group overlay parameters.
• Chapter 7 describes the client application parameters.
• Chapter 8 describes the external line and connection group parameters.
• Chapter 9 describes the ISDN PCM parameters.
• Chapter 10 describes the radio network parameters.
• Chapter 12 describes the DXT parameters modified by MML session (PM command group).

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 33/466
 • Chapter 13 describes the DXT parameters modified by MML session (PI command group)

• Chapter 14 describes the DXT parameters modified by MML session (WO command group).

• Chapter 15 describes the Dispatcher Station Controller parameters.

• Chapter 16 describes the system parameters.

• Chapter 17 describes the Configuration and Data Distribution parameters.

• Chapter 18 describes other parameters in the TETRA System.

1.2 Key to the entries

Table 1 explains the different kinds of information that can be given for the parameters. Information for each
parameter will be displayed as applicaple.

Table 1 : How are the characteristics of the parameters presented

Subheading... tells you...

Type if you can change the parameter value. See Table 2
Unit what the unit of measurement is (for example, seconds).
Default value the factory default setting. Note that this value may have been
changed by Airbus DS during the factory integration.
Legal values the values the system accepts.
Range the minimum and maximum values, and, if applicable, when the
extreme values should be used.
Special values values that have a specific effect in the system.
Related parameters the interrelationships between parameters if any exist.
Change effective when the change of the parameter value is activated in the system, if
the activation does not take place immediately.
Recommendations the values and actions Airbus DS recommends to use or avoid.
Additional information additional information if found useful.

Table 2 : Key to type information given for the parameters

Subheading... tells you...

changeable can be changed. In addition, this entry can tell who changes and
defines the parameter value, typically or preferably.
changeable with a can be changed but the parameter is one of the critical parameters
warning flag that may affect the usability and security of the TETRA system.
Consequently, do not change the value unless you know the effects it
will have on the system.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

34/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 2: Key to type information given for the parameters (cont'd.)

Subheading... tells you...

unchangeable cannot be changed with the tools meant for the system's operation
and management. The parameter value has been preprogrammed
by Airbus DS.
unchangeable after can be set once with the tools meant for the system's operation and
creation management.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 35/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

36/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
2 Organisation parameters
This chapter introduces the organisation block attributes, default organisation parameters, and
organisation-specific parameters.

When a new organisation is created:

• If the current values of the default organisation parameters are suitable for this organisation, no action
needs to be taken on the organisation level. Nevertheless, the organisation-block attributes must be
set with the DWS or, respectively, the 3rd-party TCS client.

• If the current values of the default organisation parameters are not the right ones for this organisation,
users with the rights to manage the organisation-specific parameters with the DWS (or, respectively,
the 3rd-party TCS client) and by MML.

2.1 Managing the organisation parameters

The following table shows what you need in order to manage the organisation parameters.

Table 3 : Managing the organisation parameters

Topic Organisation- Organisation- specific Default Organisation

specific parameters (DWS/TCS organisation block attributes
parameters client) parameters
(MML)
Tools: MML session organisation-management MML session organisation-
through an MML application (runs on through an management
terminal; either DWS or a 3rd-party MML terminal application (runs
TCS client on either DWS or a
3rd-party TCS client
User MMI GUI or UI running on MMI GUI running on
interface: Microsoft Windows (for Microsoft Windows
example, the DWS (the interface
interface consists of consists of a
a series of windows, series of windows,
dialogues, and menus) dialogues, and
menus)
Required rights to an MML the user must be rights to user must be
rights: session and to granted rights to manage a MML granted rights
appropriate MML organisation parameters session and to manage
commands to appropriate organisation blocks
MML
commands

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 37/466
Table 3: Managing the organisation parameters (cont'd.)

Topic Organisation- Organisation- specific Default Organisation

specific parameters (DWS/TCS organisation block attributes
parameters client) parameters
(MML)
When are — when the after creating a new when the after creating a
values system is being organisation system new organisation,
given? configured is being or when a new
— after creating a configured organisation block
new organisation is added to the
system
Parameters 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.1 , 2.2.2 , 2.4
and/or and 2.3
attributes
listed in
sections:

2.2 Organisation-specific parameters

Organisation-specific parameters define several characteristics on the main organisation level. There are two
kinds of organisation-specific parameters: the first type of parameters is defined by the operator using MML
(see Section 2.2.1 ) and the second type of parameters is defined by the workstation user with the DWS
or, respectively, the 3rd-party TCS client (see Section 2.2.2 ). The organisation parameters specified by the
operator are typically used to give rights for an organisation to use some functionality, and the operator needs
to carefully plan how the parameters assigned to different organisations will function together in the System,
as a whole. The organisation-specific parameters defined by the workstation users (and also organisation
block attributes) are used by the organisations themselves to define how the different functions are used
within these organisations.

2.2.1 Organisation-specific parameters modified with MML (PM

command group)
The parameters described in this section can be set by MMI.
The default values of these parameters are, in fact, the ones defined by the operator with the default
organisation parameters, see Section 2.3 . The default values listed here are the default values of the
default organisation parameters.
When the parameters of this section are modified by MML sessions, they are handled with the PM command
group. The values are changed using CCITT MML sessions. For further details, please refer to the respective
DXT Command Reference Manual.

2.2.1.1 Allowed user groups (109)

For future use.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

38/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
2.2.1.2 Main organizations right for pre-emption (110)

Determines whether the right to use pre-emptive services can be given to sub-organisation blocks which
belong to this main organisation.
Type changeable
Default value F (sub-organisations cannot have the right)
Legal values T (sub-organisations can have the right to use pre-emptive services)
F (sub-organisations cannot have the right)
Related Organisation block attribute Pre-emptive Rights Allowed
parameters
Change effective after the period defined with the system parameter cc parameter refresh
period

2.2.1.3 Main org max resource pre-emption level (111)

Defines the maximum pre-emption level for the main organization. Each main organization has its own
value for the maximum pre-emption level.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values Min. value = 1
Max. value = 20
Related Organisation block attribute Pre-emptive Rights Allowed
parameters
Change effective after the period defined with the system parameter cc parameter refresh
period

2.2.1.4 SCCH class bit mask (121)

Specifies which SCCH classes are allowed for the organisations under the main organisation.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values Min. value = 1
Max. value = 1FFF (1 1111 1111 1111b)
Special values 13 bits bitmask:
0 = not allowed, 1 = allowed
First bit (LSB) = SCCH class 0, second bit = SCCH class 1, etc., 12th bit
= SCCH class 11, 13th bit = Load based SCCH allowed.
Related Organisation block attribute Common Secondary Control Channels:
parameters SCCH Class
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 39/466
2.2.1.5 Normal priority category parameters

2.2.1.5.1 Priority category packet data (112)

Defines if the organisation's packet data transfer on the phase-modulated channel can pre-empt or be
pre-empted by other normal priority calls.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 0 = can be pre-empted
1 = none
2 = can pre-empt
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.1.5.2 Priority category telephone style call (113)

Defines if the organisation's telephone style calls can pre-empt or be pre-empted by other normal priority calls.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 0 = can be pre-empted
1 = none
2 = can pre-empt
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.1.5.3 Priority category group call (114)

Defines if the organisation's group calls can pre-empt or be pre-empted by other normal priority calls.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 0 = can be pre-empted
1 = none
2 = can pre-empt
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.1.5.4 Priority category external network call (115)

Defines if the organisation's external network calls can pre-empt or be pre-empted by other normal priority
calls.
Type changeable
Default value 1

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

40/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values 0 = can be pre-empted
1 = none
2 = can pre-empt
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.1.5.5 Priority category eme individual call (116)

Defines if the organisation's emergency individual calls without pre-emptive priority can pre-empt or be
pre-empted by other normal priority calls.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 0 = can be pre-empted
1 = none
2 = can pre-empt
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.1.5.6 Priority category direct call (117)

Defines if the organisation's direct calls can pre-empt or be pre-empted by other normal priority calls.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 0 = can be pre-empted
1 = none
2 = can pre-empt
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.1.5.7 Priority category broadcast call (118)

Defines if the organisation's broadcast calls can pre-empt or be pre-empted by other normal priority calls.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 0 = can be pre-empted
1 = none
2 = can pre-empt
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.1.5.8 Priority category dedicated data channels (119)

Defines if the organisation's dedicated data channel calls can pre-empt or be pre-empted by other normal
priority calls.
Type changeable
Default value 1

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 41/466
 Legal values 0 = can be pre-empted
1 = none
2 = can pre-empt
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.1.6 Service priority parameters

In this subsection the service priority organisation parameters modified with the PM command group are listed.

Service and organisation priorities are managed together.

The services are prioritised by defining them to 12 different classes at main organisation basis.

Note

This note concerns all the parameters in this subsection!

Even though the organisation and service priorities are tight together, it is possible to configure the System so
that only one of them is in use.

Only the service priorities are in use if the same services have the same priority value in each organisation.

And only organisation priorities are in use if each service has the same priority inside a particular organisation.

2.2.1.6.1 Pre-emptive emergency individual call (108)

This parameter defines whether the emergency individual call uses pre-emptive resource priority or not.
Type changeable
Default value yes
Legal values yes
no
Related Service priority: Emergency individual call
parameters

2.2.1.6.2 Service priority group call (101)

This parameters defines the service priority for normal and background groups.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 12

2.2.1.6.3 Service priority broadcast call (102)

This parameter defines the service priority for broadcast groups.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

42/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 12

2.2.1.6.4 Service priority telephone style call (103)

This parameter defines the service priority for on/off hook individual calls in the network.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 12

2.2.1.6.5 Service priority direct call (104)

This parameter defines the service priority for direct calls in the network.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 12

2.2.1.6.6 Service priority external network call (105)

This parameter defines service priority for outgoing and incoming individual calls connected to external
networks, for example, to the PSTN/PABX.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 12

2.2.1.6.7 Service priority packet data (106)

This parameter defines the service priorities concerning phase-modulated packet data.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 12

2.2.1.6.8 Service priority emergency individual call (107)

This parameter defines service priority for emergency individual calls.

An emergency individual call can be prioritised at organisation level as one service. Additionally, this service
can be defined at main organisation level to be pre-emptive or non pre-emptive service. If this service is not
defined to be pre-emptive, it is treated as normal priority, based on its priority level. In any other means the
service is as an emergency call; it is indicated also in the signalling to be an emergency priority call.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 43/466
The same MML (more specifically – the PM command group) is also used to manage this main–organisation
parameter to define emergency individual call with or without pre-emption.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 12
Related Pre-emptive emergency individual call
parameters

2.2.1.6.9 Service priority dedicated data channels (120)

This parameter defines service priority for dedicated data channel calls.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 12

2.2.2 Organisation-specific parameters modified with DWS (or TCS

client, or Tactilon® Management)
The parameters described in this section can be set for each organisation with DWS or TCS client (or set by
MMI with PM command group as the default organisation parameters).
The default values of these parameters are, in fact, the ones defined by the operator with the default
organisation parameters, see Section 2.3 .

2.2.2.1 On tab Timers: Absence time for visiting members

Specifies the time which a visiting group member can be outside the group's core area and still roam back
into the core area without losing the group membership.
Type changeable
Unit minutes
Default value 5
Legal values integers from 0 to 60; with the increment of 1
Range Min. value = 0
Max. value = 60
Special values 0 may cause that dispatchers must repeatedly add visiting members to
the group when they are locating near the border of the core area.
Related Group parameter Area type
parameters
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Use times from 5 min. upwards.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

44/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Keywords: *timeout, *group management

2.2.2.2 On tab Timers: Direct call inactivity time

Specifies the time after which a direct call is released if there are no speech items during this time.
Type changeable, typically the end user organisation defines
Unit seconds
Default value 5
Legal values 1 - 60 with the increment of 1
Range Min. value = 1
Max. value = 60
Change effective after the next call setup

Note

Airbus DS recommends the value 5 seconds.

Keywords: *timeouts

2.2.2.3 On tab Timers: Ind call setup time for called MS

Full name of the parameter: “Individual call setup time for called MS”.

Specifies the maximum time for call setup in individual calls when called party is an MS. The system interrupts
the call setup after this time if the calling or called party has not done it.
Type changeable
Unit seconds
Default value 60
Legal values integers from 10 to 600 ; with the increment of 1
Range Min. value = 10
Max. value = 600
Related Organisation specific parameter Individual call setup time for called
parameters TCS client
Change effective next individual call

Additional information

The time is measured from the call setup request of the calling party until the called subscriber has answered
the call, all resources for the call are reserved and the call can be through connected.

PSTN and PABX subscribers who call TETRA subscribers are not allowed to queue for the for called party.
However, they can queue for network resources.

Keywords: *timeouts

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 45/466
2.2.2.4 On tab Timers: Ind call setup time for called TCS client

Full name of the parameter: “Individual call setup time for called TCS client”.

Specifies the maximum time for call setup in individual calls when the called party is a TCS client. The system
interrupts the call setup after this time if the calling or called party has not done it.
Type changeable
Unit seconds
Default value 180
Legal values integers from 10 to 600; with the increment of 1
Range Min. value = 10
Max. value = 600
Related Organisation specific parameter Individual call setup time for called MS
parameters
Change effective next individual call

Additional information

The time is measured from the call setup request of the calling party until the dispatcher has answered the
call, all resources for the call are reserved and the call can be connected.

Keywords: *timeouts

2.2.2.5 On tab Timers: Max duration for emergency call

Specifies the maximum duration for an emergency call. This parameter affects both the individual and group
emergency calls. It also specifies the maximum duration of ambience listening calls. After the maximum time,
the system terminates the call even if one of parties is talking and is still in emergency.
Type changeable
Unit minutes
Default value 1440
Legal values integers from 1 to 715827; with the increment of 1
Range Min. value = 1
Max. value = 715 827
Related Radio terminal parameter Emergency call disconnection
parameters System parameter Who can release an emergency call
Change effective next individual call

Note

The maximum duration timer for emergency calls is restarted when a new emergency priority setup is
received to the same group during an ongoing emergency group call.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

46/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Recommendations

Do not use values shorter than one hour. Use the maximum value if you do not want the system to terminate
ongoing emergency calls. An individual emergency call is terminated when either of the parties terminates it.

Keywords: *emergency call, *timeouts

2.2.2.6 On tab Timers: Max duration for normal individual call

Defines the maximum duration for a normal individual call (that is, not for an emergency call). After the
maximum time, the system terminates the call even if one of the parties is talking.
Type changeable
Unit minutes
Default value 1440
Legal values integers from 1 to 1440.; with the increment of 1
Range Min. value = 1
Max. value = 1 440
Related Organisation-specific parameter Max duration for emergency call
parameters
Change effective next individual call

Additional information

In case the calling and the called party belong to different organisations, the lower parameter value applies.

Keywords: *timeouts

2.2.2.7 On tab Timers: Max handover time for individual calls

Defines the maximum duration of the process in which a subscriber in an individual call changes from
one radio channel to another.
Type changeable
Unit seconds
Default value 10
Legal values integers from 5 to 120 ; with the increment of 1
Range Min. value = 5
Max. value = 120
Change effective after the period defined with the system parameter cc parameter refresh
period

Keywords: *cell reselection

2.2.2.8 On tab Timers: ISI group call setup response time

Defines the time in which the originating and participating TETRA network must respond to an ISI setup
initiate message sent by the controlling TETRA network.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 47/466
 Type changeable
Unit seconds
Default value 3
Legal values integers from 1 to 15; with the increment of 1
Range Min. value = 1
Max. value = 15
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.2.9 On tab Timers: ISI originating setup response time

Defines the time the originating TETRA network waits for a response to an ISI originating setup message
from the controlling TETRA network.
Type changeable
Unit seconds
Default value 1
Legal values integers from 1 to 10; with the increment of 1
Range Min. value = 1
Max. value = 10
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.2.10 On tab Parameters: Emergency Target

Specifies the target where an emergency call will be routed if the call cannot be connected to the
subscriber-specific emergency target.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically the end user organisation
defines
Legal values if the emergency target is an internal TETRA subscriber or a group, the
legal values are an existing subscriber (ISSI) or a group address (GSSI)
(the external number field is empty).
if the emergency target is an external address, the legal values are a
valid gateway SSI (in the short subscriber identity field) and a PABX
or PSTN subscriber number with the connection group digits, or the
MSISDN number (in the external number field).
Related Radio subscriber parameter Emergency Target
parameters
Change effective from the next emergency call setup

CAUTION
Do not change the value unless you know the effects in the system. If you try to change the parameter, a
warning appears. Changing the value may affect the security of the system.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

48/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Recommendations

Use addresses that have been created to the system since the system does not check the number.

Additional information

If the system cannot read the parameter value from the database, a cell of origin call is made.

Note

This parameter must be defined during the pilot phase of the system.

Keywords: *emergency call

2.2.2.11 On tab Parameters: Recovery for Tracked MSs only

Defines whether recovery is executed for all MSs or for tracked MSs only.
Type changeable
Default value All MSs
Legal values All MSs
Only tracked MSs
Related System parameter Minimum allowed registration and recovery period
parameters Organisation-specific parameter Tracking Recovery Period
Change effective According to the system parametercc parameter refresh period.

2.2.2.12 On tab Parameters: Tracking Recovery Period

Defines the period for group membership and tracking data to be sent to the Configuration and Data
Distribution (CDD) Server.
Type changeable
Default value 2h
Legal values No timing
10 min
30 min
1h
2h
4h
8h
24 h
Related System parameter Minimum allowed registration and recovery period
parameters Organisation-specific parameter Recovery for Tracked MSs only
Change effective According to the system parametercc parameter refresh period.

2.2.2.13 On tab Parameters: Registration Period

This parameter defines the length of the registration period in periodic registration.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 49/466
 Type changeable
Default value 4=2h
Legal values 0…7
0=no timing
1=10min
2=30min
3=1h
4=2h
5=4h
6=8h
7=24h
Related System parameter Minimum allowed registration and recovery period
parameters Radio subscriber parameter Periodic Registration: Subscriber
Registration Checked by
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *periodic registration

2.2.2.14 On tab Parameters: Maximum Group EG

Defines the maximum energy economy group (EG) that the radio terminals in this organisation may use when
they are expected to receive group communication. This parameter is taken into account in cases where the
radio terminals request a higher energy economy mode than defined to the organisation block they belong to.
If the radio terminal requests a longer energy economy group than defined by this organisation parameter,
then it is assumed to be interested only in individual communication.
Type changeable
Default value 5
Legal values integers from 0 to 7; with the increment of 1
Range from 0 to 7
Related Exchange parameter Energy Economy
parameters Organisation block attribute Energy Economy Group: Energy Saving
Mode
Change effective after next registration or energy economy group negotiation

Recommendations

If the organisation has terminals in the individual mode and in the group call mode, set the organisation
parameter Maximum group EG to the highest value that any of the organisation’s terminals may request
when interested in receiving group addressed signalling (consult terminal manufacturers).

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

50/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Example

Table 4 : Values requested by terminals in group call and individual call modes

MS1 MS2 MS3

Group calls mode 2 1 5
Individual calls mode 5 4 5

If Maximum Group EG is set according to MS1 and MS2 to value 2, then MS3 may miss some group
communication if the energy economy mode defined for the organisation block it belongs to is less than 5. If
Maximum Group EG is set to 5, then MS2 will not be able to use EG4 in individual call mode if the energy
economy mode defined for the organisation block it belongs to is less than 4 and thus its energy economy is
not optimal.

For more information see document Subscriber Management, DN00126515, Appendix B.

2.2.2.15 On tab Parameters: Group Call Service Interaction

Defines whether the group call service interaction (offering group call to ongoing individual call) is active or not.

When this optional parameter is enabled, the TETRA system offers a group call to an MS that is engaged in
an individual voice call. The organisation can enable and disable the group call service interaction for its
subscribers with this parameter.

The MS may accept or ignore this offered group call.

Type changeable
Default value Disabled
Legal values Disabled
Enabled
Related Organisation parameter Individual Call Service Interaction
parameters
Change effective immediately

2.2.2.16 On tab Parameters: Individual Call Service Interaction

Defines whether the individual call service interaction (offering individual call to ongoing individual call) is
active or not.

When this optional parameter is enabled, the TETRA system offers an individual call to an MS that is engaged
in an individual voice call. The organisation can enable and disable the individual call service interaction
for its subscribers with this parameter.

With this parameter a radio user in an individual call becomes aware of a second individual call which is
being offered to him/her. The MS or user may accept, reject, or ignore the offered individual call. If the new
offered call is accepted, the old call is disconnected.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 51/466
Note

An individual call can be offered to an ongoing individual call, if the calling organisation has set the value Call
Offer and the called organisation has set the value Call Wait.

Type changeable
Default value Empty
Legal values Disabled
Call Offer
Call Wait
Both
Special values Meaning of parameter values
Disabled: individual calls made by the users of this
organisation are not offered to anyone participating in
an individual call and incoming individual calls are not
offered to the users of this organisation when they are
participating in an individual call.
Call Offer: individual calls made by the users of this
organisation are permitted to be offered to others
participating in an individual call but incoming individual
calls are not offered to the users of this organisation when
they are participating in an individual call.
Call Wait: individual calls made by the users of this
organisation are not offered to others participating in an
individual call but incoming individual calls are permitted
to be offered to the users of this organisation when they
are participating in an individual call.
Both: individual calls made by the users of this
organisation are permitted to be offered to anyone
participating in an individual call and incoming individual
calls are permitted to be offered to the users of this
organisation when they are participating in an individual
call.
Related Organisation parameter Group Call Service Interaction
parameters System parameter Call waiting and call forwarding
indication
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.2.17 On tab Parameters: MSISDN used as CPI/TPI in Individual Calls and

SDS/Status Message

Defines whether the provisioned default MSISDN number is used also in ITSI/ISSI dialled individual calls,
SDS and status sending.

Although all radio subscribers (Radio Subscribers and Alias Identities) in the TETRA system are identified
by their individual SSI (ITSI) numbers, they can still have one default MSISDN identity that can be used as
CPI/TPI in communication and as a RUI (Radio User Identity) in RUA instead of SSI (ITSI).

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

52/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note
Regardless of this parameter value, the default MSISDN number of the calling party is used as the CPI and
TPI in individual calls and individually addressed SDS/Status messages when the called party is given as
MSISDN address.

Type changeable
Default value Disabled
Legal values Enabled
Disabled
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.2.18 On tab Parameters: Allow pre-emptive speech items over ISI

Defines whether pre-emptive speech item requests coming over ISI are treated with normal or pre-emptive
priority. The parameter is operated by TCS API.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value F
Legal values T = Pre-emptive priority enabled
F = Pre-emptive priority disabled
Related Organisation parameter ISI speech item priority
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.2.19 On tab Parameters: ISI speech item priority

Defines the priority of a speech item request received over ISI. This priority value is used for normal and
pre-emptive speech item request. The parameter is operated by TCS API.
Type changeable
Default value 3
Legal values integers from 1 to 20; with the increment of 1
Related Organisation parameter Allow pre-emptive speech items
parameters over ISI
Change effective from the next call setup

2.2.2.20 On tab Parameters: Allow lower AI security with ISI

This parameter is for future use.

2.2.2.21 On tab Parameters: CLI included in AL calls

Defines if the CLI is sent to the called party in D-SETUP PDU in Ambience Listening calls. The CLI is included
for End-to-end Encryption key management purposes.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 53/466
 Type changeable
Default value 0 = CLI not included
Legal values 0 = CLI not included
1= CLI included
Change effective from the next call setup

Note

This parameter can be modified only using the Tactilon® Management application.

2.3 Default organisation parameters

With default organisation parameters the operator can set the correct default values for all the
organisation-specific parameters described in Sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 . These default organisation
parameter values are used for each organisation if no organisation-specific values are given during the
creation of the organisation or later on. The default organisation parameters are handled with the PM
command group. The values are changed using a CCITT MML session. The default organisation parameters
and their values are specified using decimal numbering format or hexadecimal numbering format. For further
details, please refer to the respective DXT Command Reference Manual.

You can assign organisation specific parameters and their values to individual organisations with the
Organisation Management application of the DWS or TCS client or by MML depending on the parameter (see
Sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 ), either within the creation of the organisation or later on. If a default organisation
parameter value is later changed using the MMI, the new default value is used for organisations that are
created after the change and for those that have not changed the default value to some other value; see
the following example.

Example

1. The default parameter value for the parameter Individual call setup time for called MS is 60 seconds.

Organisation A does not use the default value but has this parameter set to 30 seconds. Organisation
B was created without giving any value to this parameter, meaning it uses the default value 60 seconds
as the current value.

2. For organisation A the value of this parameter is set to 60 seconds. Both A and B now have 60 seconds
as current value. The default value is then changed to 120 seconds using the MMI. After this, the
current value in organisation block B changes accordingly, but the value of A remains unchanged (in
A - 60 seconds, in B - 120 seconds).

3. If a new organisation C is created without giving a value to this parameter, the new default value 120
seconds is assigned for this parameter for the new organisation.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

54/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
2.4 Organisation block attributes
Organisation blocks are used to plan the organisation structure based on the needed rights allocations.
Several rights can be allocated as a list of organisation blocks.
The organisation-block attributes listed in the following sections and subsections are set with the DWS GUI
or, respectively, with the user interface of the 3rd-party application.
Users with sufficient rights set the organisation-block attributes; they do not have any default values in
the system.

2.4.1 Identification

2.4.1.1 Identifier

Organisation blocks have numeric identifiers. The numeric identifier consists of up to six numbers separated
by hyphens. A six-number identifier, for example, 1-2-3-4-5-6, represents an organisation block in the lowest
possible level. A one-number identifier, for example 10, represents a top-level organisation.
Type unchangeable after creation
Legal values level number is any integer from 0 to 32767
Range from 0 to 32767

Recommendations

Plan the structure of the rights prior to setting the parameters. Define the parameters during the pilot phase of
the system.

Additional information

You cannot change the organisation block number after the block has been created.

2.4.1.2 Mnemonic

A mnemonic is a descriptive, short set of up to 31 alphanumeric characters given to an organisation block.

Mnemonics are used in user interfaces in addition to the organisation numbers in order to simplify the
identification.
Type changeable
Legal values a text string having maximum of 31 characters
Characters < and > are not allowed to be used. See Appendix 'Character
Set for Workstation User Names and Passwords' in DWS Management
User's Guide for a list of the allowed values for a mnemonic.
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

The TETRA system allows to use the same mnemonic with several organisation blocks. It is, however,
recommended that each organisation block has a unique mnemonic. Define the parameters during the
pilot phase of the system.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 55/466
2.4.1.3 Home Exchange

Defines the home DXT of the organisation block.

Type unchangeable
Legal values any DXT in the system

Additional information

You cannot change the home DXT of an organisation block after the block has been created.

2.4.2 Communication

2.4.2.1 Pre-emptive Services: Pre-emptive Rights Allowed

Defines whether the subscribers (radio subscribers and workstation users) or groups belonging to the
organisation block can have pre-emptive service rights.
Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On or Off
Related Organisation-specific parameter Main organisations right for pre-emption
parameters Organisation block attribute Pre-emptive Rights Allowed
Workstation user parameter Allow pre-emptive services
Radio subscriber parameter Allow Pre-emptive Speech Items
Radio subscriber parameter Allow Pre-emptive Speech Services
Group parameter Allow Pre-emptive Speech Services
Change effective from the next call setup

Note

This parameter can be set to value On only when the organisation-specific parameter Main organisations
right for pre-emption is set to value 1 (T) (sub-organisations can have the right to use pre-emptive services).

2.4.2.2 Call Transfer by Dispatcher: Call Authorised Address (SSI)

With the Call Authorised Address (SSI) organisation-block attribute you set the client application ISSI of a
pre-defined dispatcher or a group SSI to which all the call transfer requests are automatically routed if the A
subscriber (the original caller) does not have the rights to perform a call.

Call Authorised Address (SSI) is an optional field which may be left blank.
Type operational
Default value 0
Legal values The pre-defined SSI number.
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

56/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
2.4.2.3 Resource Usage: User Group Identifier

For future use.

Defines to which user group (if any) this organisation belongs to.

With this attribute the WS user can take into use one of those user groups that have been defined with MML
for the organisation in question. Only one user group can be selected for one sub-organisation.
Type unchangeable
Default value 0 = None
Legal values 0 = None
1 – 15 (logical values)
Related Organisation parameter Allowed user groups
parameters Radio network parameter User group identifier
Radio network parameter Amount of channels
System parameter Guaranteed channels activation
Change effective immediately

Additional information

This parameter relates to the guaranteed channels feature, which allows the system to prioritise some user
groups above others so that they can have a defined amount of channels in specified cells always available.
The term user group here means a collection of organisation blocks whose members (subscribers and
groups) are always authorised to access the defined amount of channels. The term has nothing to do with the
group concept of the Airbus DS TETRA system.

Keywords: *guaranteed channels

2.4.2.4 Energy Economy Group: Energy Saving Mode

This parameter together with the parameter Energy Economy Group: Start Point Frame Number defines
the energy economy group for an organisation block. The energy economy group specifies the frames
during which the terminal listens to the control channel. During all other frames the terminals are in the
energy saving mode.

The Energy Economy Group defined by these two parameters can be used for group-addressed signalling
within the organisation block, and may also determine which value is negotiated for subscriber-specific energy
economy group. If the radio terminal is assumed to be interested in group communication, a compatible
energy economy value is allocated to it. The radio terminals may, however, request and get a different energy
economy group depending on the organisation-based Maximum Group EG.
Type changeable
Default value EG0
Legal values EG0 – EG5

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 57/466
 Special values EG0 = stay-alive (no energy economy used)
Related Main organisation parameter Maximum Group EG
parameters Organisation block attribute Energy Economy Group: Start Point Frame
Number
System parameter EE mode for background groups
Group parameter Energy Economy

Note
System parameter EE mode for background groups limits the highest Energy Economy Group: Energy
Saving Mode value that can be defined for an organisation block when creating it. When the values of an
existing organisation block are modified, values from EG0 to EG5 are possible, but is recommended to use
only EG0 and EG1. See document Subscriber Management, DN00126515, Appendix B.

Note
Energy economy is applicable to both the MCCH and the common SCCH.

2.4.2.5 Energy Economy Group: Start Point Frame Number

Defines the energy economy group start point frame number for the organisation block, that is, the first frame
within a multiframe that a terminal should listen to.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values from 0 to 18
Related Organisation block attribute Energy Economy Group: Energy Saving
parameters Mode

Note
If the Energy Economy Group: Energy Saving Mode value is other than EG0 or there is a background
group in this organisation block, the value of the parameter Start Point Frame Number must also be other
than 0. Set the starting frame so that signalling in different energy economy groups is evenly distributed to
frames 1 to 18 of the control channel.

2.4.2.6 Dual Watch Absence Period

The Dual Watch (DW) feature is an additional feature. The terminals that are capable of DW can receive calls
from the DMO (Direct Mode Operation) when they are in TMO (Trunked Mode Operation), and vice versa.
When MS requests dual watch mode, the system allocates the requested EG, provided that it is compatible
and not greater than the terminal’s organisation block attribute Dual Watch Absence Period.
Type operational
Default value EG0 (no Dual Watch)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

58/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values EG0 – EG5
Change effective at the next location update or dual–watch negotiation attempt
Related Organisation block attribute Energy Economy Group: Start Point Frame
parameters Number

Additional information

Dual Watch and Energy Economy cannot be activated at the same time for the same radio terminal. If MS
requests normal Energy Economy then Dual Watch is deactivated.

2.4.2.7 Common Secondary Control Channels: SCCH Class

Defines the class value by which the MS population is divided to common control channels. It means that the
MS population may be divided either based on organization block (OB) specific SCCH class or common
control channel load. This parameter may also affect group address signalling. The authorised WS user can
define the SCCH class for an organisation block.
Type operational
Default value 0 = MCCH is used
Legal values 0 – 11,
Load based SCCH
Special values 0 = MCCH is used.
If the CSCCH functionality is not wished to be used, then the parameter
value can be set to 0, which means that the MCCH is used in this
organisation block.
Related Organisation parameter SCCH class bit mask (121)
parameters Group parameter Secondary Control Channel use
Change effective immediately

Note

When the SCCH class of the organization block (OB) is changed with the parameter Common Secondary
Control Channels: SCCH Class, in the group traffic the new SCCH class value is taken into use at a
different time by different group members. Therefore it is recommended to make the change according
to the process below:

1) Change the SCCH group parameter Secondary Control Channel use to indicate that the group addressed
DL messages are sent on all CCCHs (value 0).

2) Change the SCCH class in the OB data by using parameter Common Secondary Control Channels: SCCH
Class. (The SCCH class of the MS and the group, where the MS is a member, should be the same.)

3) Return the SCCH group parameter to value 1 "sent only on the selected CCCH" or value 2 "on selected
CCCH and on MCCH" (as it was before starting the procedure) after it is assumed that all group members
have re-registered at least once after the step 2.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 59/466
2.4.3 Data Service

2.4.3.1 IP Address Ranges

Specifies a list of IP addresses that can be allocated for the radio subscribers who belong to the organisation
block and do not have a static IP address defined. Each range has a lower boundary and an upper boundary.
The ranges can overlap between different organisation blocks. An IP address can be allocated from the
organisation block’s IP address range for a radio subscriber that does not have a static IP address defined.
Type changeable
Default value No
Legal values up to 30 ranges
The format of an IP address is “aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd”, where “aaa”, “bbb”,
“ccc”, “ddd” can be any numbers between 0 and 255.
Range A range can be defined by giving the start and the end number. The
value of the Lower Boundary cannot be higher than the Upper Boundary.
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

Note
IP address range defined for an organisation block must fall within address space defined in the DXT's subnet.

2.4.3.2 Access Point: Default

An organisation block can have one static access point name (APN) that can be used by subscribers who
belong to the organisation block and do not have a subscriber-specific APN selection defined.
Type changeable
Legal values Any APN from the APN pools allowed for the workstation user
Related Workstation user parameter Access Point Name (APN) pool
parameters management rights
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

2.4.3.3 Access Point: Pools

Organisation block can have several access point name (APN) pools that can be used by the subscribers
who belong to the organisation block and are allowed to select APNs. If there are no APN pools defined
for the organisation block which the radio subscriber belongs to, the APN pool setting defined for the next
upper-level organisation block that has those settings defined will be used.
Type changeable
Legal values any APN pool to which the workstation user has management rights
(up to 10 APN pools)
Related Workstation user parameter Access Point Name (APN) pool
parameters management rights
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

60/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
2.4.4 Operating Range

2.4.4.1 Subscriber Class Definition: Default Value

Defines the default value of Subscriber Class for the radio subscribers that are created in the organisation
block.
Type changeable
Default value For top-level organisation block: check the boxes Preferred (3),
Preferred (4), Normal (5 to 12) On, the others Off.
For sub-organisation block: the default value is the Subscriber Class
Definition: Default Value of the top-level organisation block in the same
organisation.
Legal values Each of the 16 check boxes can be set to On or Off

Note
When creating or modifying a sub-organisation block, the allowed values are restricted by the top-level
organisation block’s subscriber class definitions. If the user gives an incorrect value to the attribute, the
system corrects the given value.

2.4.4.2 Subscriber Class Definition: Locked

Defines which bits of the subscriber class default value are changeable when defining Subscriber class
for the radio subscribers of the organisation block.
Type changeable
Default value for top-level organisation blocks, default = 0x0000
for sub-organisation blocks, default = the value of the Locked values of
subscriber class attribute of its top-level organisation block
Legal values from 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Special values 0 and 1 (see additional information below)

Note

When creating or modifying a sub-organisation block, the allowed values are restricted by the top-level
organisation block’s parameter Locked values of subscriber class. If the user gives an incorrect value in
respect of the top-level organisation block’s value, the system will correct the given value.

Additional information

If a bit is set to 1, it means that the corresponding bit in the parameter Subscriber Class: Default value is
changeable. If a bit is set to 0, it means that the corresponding bit in the parameter Subscriber Class:
Default value is not changeable.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 61/466
2.4.5 Visibility

2.4.5.1 Organisation Visibility

Defines the visibility of the organisations to other organisations. An organisation can be set visible to all
organisations, which means that all workstation users in the system can see the structure of the organisation.
Another possibility is to set the organisation visible only to some selected organisations. This means that
workstation users belonging to the selected organisations can see the structure of the organisation.
Type changeable
Default value Visible to All Organisations
Legal values Visible to All Organisations
Visible to Following Organisations
Change effective immediately

Note
The organisation of the managing WS user is always automatically selected on the list, ensuring that the
organisation is always visible to someone.

Note
The organisation is not automatically visible to itself. Workstation users can see the structure of their own
organisation only if their organisation is defined to be visible to itself (that is, their own organisation is visible
to all organisations or the organisation itself is included in the selected organisations).

Note
The organisation visibility attributes have effect only on appearance of the organisation block tree in the DWS.
The organisation and its structure can be hidden from unauthorized WS users by defining the visibility settings
correctly. However, the visibility settings do not affect the rights checking in the system. This means that a
WS user may have management or communication rights to a hidden organisation block (= organisation
block that is not visible to the WS user) and thus the authorisation to access the data of the objects belonging
to a hidden organisation. This can be done, for example, with the search dialogue in the DWS management
applications despite the organisation of the managed object is not visible in the organisation block tree.
In addition to the visibility setting also the management and communication rights of the WS users in the
system have to be set accordingly when there is a need to hide an organisation and prevent unauthorised
users from accessing the data belonging to the organisation.

2.4.6 Timers
For the description of the parameters under the Timers tab, see the following sections:
• Absence time for visiting members: see Section 2.2.2.1 .
• Direct call inactivity time: see Section 2.2.2.2 .

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

62/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 • Ind call setup time for called MS: see Section 2.2.2.3 .

• Ind call setup time for called TCS client: see Section 2.2.2.4 .

• Max duration for emergency call: see Section 2.2.2.5 .

• Max duration for normal individual call: see Section 2.2.2.6 .

• Max handover time for individual calls: see Section 2.2.2.7 .

• ISI group call setup response time: see Section 2.2.2.8

• ISI originating setup response time: see Section 2.2.2.9

2.4.7 Parameters

For the description of the parameters under the Parameters tab, see the following sections:

• Emergency Target: see Section 2.2.2.10 .

• Recovery for Tracked MSs only: see Section 2.2.2.11 .

• Tracking Recovery Period: see Section 2.2.2.12 .

• Registration Period: see Section 2.2.2.13 .

• Maximum Group EG: see Section 2.2.2.14 .

• Group Call Service Interaction: see Section 2.2.2.15 .

• Individual Call Service Interaction: see Section 2.2.2.16 .

• MSISDN used as CPI/TPI in Individual Calls and SDS/Status Message: see Section 2.2.2.17

• Allow pre-emptive speech items over ISI: see Section 2.2.2.18

• ISI speech item priority: see Section 2.2.2.19

• Allow lower AI security with ISI: Section 2.2.2.20 (the parameter is for future use)

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 63/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

64/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
3 Workstation user parameters
This chapter describes the workstation user parameters. These parameters are also described in the DWS
Management User's Guide, DN00132209.

3.1 Managing the workstation user parameters

The following table shows what you need to manage the workstation user parameters.

Table 5 : Managing the workstation user parameters

Topic Information
Tools The Workstation User Management Application runs in the DWS, or
in a 3rd-party TCS client.
User interface GUI running on Microsoft Windows (the interface consists of a series
of windows, dialogues, and menus)
Required rights The user must have rights to the organisation block to which
the workstation user belongs. These rights are set by using the
Workstation user specific attributes: administrative rights related to
workstation users.
When the values are The workstation user parameters are defined when the subscriber is
given added to the system.

3.2 Parameters

3.2.1 Identification

3.2.1.1 Organisation Block

Each workstation user belongs always to one organisation or suborganisation (organisation block). Other
workstation users can manage this user if they have the needed data management rights to the organisation
block to which this user belongs.
Type unchangeable, the end user organisation or the technical operator
defines
Default value depends on the procedure to create the workstation user
Legal values any organisation block created in the system to which the managing
workstation user has workstation user management rights

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 65/466
 Related parameters related to radio subscribers' communication rights,
parameters workstation user's administrative and communication rights
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *user rights

3.2.1.2 User name

Identifies the workstation user. The workstation users do not have an ISSI or a mnemonic which are attributes
of the WSs they are using. Other dispatchers will see this name on their WSs. Radio subscribers can,
however, see the workstation's mnemonic when communicating with a dispatcher (see Section 7.2.1.8 ) - not
this username, provided that the mnemonic has been programmed to the radio terminal.

The workstation user's rights and priorities are bound to the username. When users log on to a DWS, their
rights depend on the user name used in the login, not on the workstation.

The same user names can be defined in several DXTs. However, the user names are DXT-specific. This
means that the rights of a user name can be defined in a different way in each DXT.
Type not changeable after creation, the end user organisation or the technical
operator defines
Legal values Text string from 6 to 15 characters. The text string has to be unique.
User name is case sensitive.
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Airbus DS recommends that each dispatcher or person using the DWS has a personal user name. However,
several users can log on the system through different WSs using the same user name.

3.2.1.3 Password

The workstation user logs onto the TETRA system with username and password. This password is not the
same password used to log on the Windows operating system.
Type changeable, the end user organisation or the technical operator defines
Legal values Text string from 6 to 255 characters. If non-encrypted passwords are
used, only the first 15 characters of the password are taken into account.
Password is case sensitive.
The same text string must be entered in the Confirm password field.
Change effective immediately

Additional information

A workstation user changes the user's own password with the Airbus DS TETRA Dispatcher Workstation
Application and can change other users' passwords with the Workstation User Management Application.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

66/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
3.2.2 Communication Rights

3.2.2.1 Alias Assignment

Specifies the list of organisation blocks where the workstation user is allowed to make Radio User
Assignment (RUA) and Radio User Dis-assignment (RUD). The workstation user needs rights to Terminal
identity and Alias identity.
You define the rights as a list of organisation blocks. The definition can also be All organisation blocks or
None.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value none
Legal values values no rights/full rights defined for all organisation blocks, or for a
list of organisation blocks up to 10
Change effective from the next call setup

3.2.2.2 Ambience Listening

Defines in which organisation blocks the workstation user can use ambience listening. You define the rights
as a list of organisation blocks. The definition can also be All organisation blocks or None.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value no rights
Legal values values no rights/full rights defined for all organisation blocks, or for a
list of organisation blocks up to 75
Change effective from the next call setup

3.2.2.3 Group Communications

Specifies to which groups the workstation user has communication rights. You define the rights as a list of
organisation blocks. The definition can also be All organisation blocks or None.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value full rights for all organisations
Legal values values no rights/full rights defined for all organisation blocks, or for a
list of organisation blocks up to 75
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

A workstation user may select a group for event monitoring if he/she has communication rights to that group.

3.2.2.4 Individual Calls

Specifies to whom a workstation user is allowed to make individual calls and from whom the workstation
user is allowed to receive individual calls. Rights for making and receiving individual calls can be defined

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 67/466
independently. You define the individual call rights as a list of organisation blocks. The definition can also
be All organisation blocks or None. For each organisation block (or all organisation blocks), you define
the allowed individual call direction (that is, making, receiving, or both). If the workstation user has the
right to make (or receive) individual calls to (or from) an organisation block, the workstation user has the
right to make (or receive) individual calls to (or from) any subscriber belonging to this organisation block or
to its sub-organisation blocks.
Type changeable, typically the end user organisation
Default value full rights defined for all organisation blocks
Legal values values make, receive or both (= full rights) defined for all organisation
blocks, or for a list of existing organisation blocks (up to 75)
Special values all organisation blocks
Change effective from the next call setup

Note

Communication rights of the workstation users in granted organisation blocks have effect on the individual
communication of the workstation user whose communication rights you are defining. For example, if you
define full rights (receive and make) for a workstation user, but the granted workstation users do not have
rights to receive individual call from this workstation user, the calls are not established.

Recommendations

Use short and simple lists. Before giving one-way communication rights (this is making or receiving
exclusively), consider carefully since they can confuse the users.

Additional information

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the workstation
user. For further information, refer to document DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209.

Keywords: *user rights

3.2.2.5 ISI Communications

Defines rights to be applied if the other party in an individual call or within SDS or Status message sending is
not provisioned to this network.
Type changeable, typically the end user organisation
Default value no rights
Legal values no rights / all ISI connections / list of ISI connections (up to 10
connection groups)
Rights can be allocated as: making / receiving / full for all ISI
connections or per each ISI connection.
Change effective from the next call setup, SDS or Status message

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

68/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
3.2.2.6 PABX Calls

Specifies the PABX connections to which a workstation user is allowed to make calls and from which
the workstation user is allowed to receive calls. Rights for making and receiving calls can be defined
independently. You define the PABX call rights as a list of PABX connection groups. For each connection
group, you define the allowed call direction (that is, making, receiving, or both).
Type changeable, typically the end user organisation defines
Legal values values make, receive, both (=full rights) defined for the existing PABX
connections groups (up to 30)
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

Use short and simple lists. Before giving one-way communication rights (making or receiving exclusively),
consider the matter carefully.

Additional information

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the workstation
user. For further information, refer to document DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209.

Keywords: *user rights, *PSTN and PABX calls

3.2.2.7 PSTN Calls

Specifies the PSTN connections to which a workstation user is allowed to make calls and from which
the workstation user is allowed to receive calls. Rights for making and receiving calls can be defined
independently. You define the PSTN call rights as a list of PSTN connection groups or all PSTN connection
groups. For each connection group, you define the allowed call direction (that is, making, receiving, or both).
Type changeable, typically the end user organisation
Legal values values make, receive or both (=full rights) defined for all PSTN
connection groups, or for a list of PSTN connection groups (up to 30)
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

Use short and simple lists. Before giving one-way communication rights (this is making or receiving
exclusively), consider the matter carefully.

Additional information

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the workstation
user. For further information, refer to document DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209.

Keywords: *user rights, *PSTN and PABX calls

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 69/466
3.2.2.8 Requests and Status Messages

Specifies what kinds of requests and status messages the workstation user is allowed to send and receive.
Rights for sending and receiving can be defined independently. The requests and status messages are
divided into the following groups:

• Callback request

• Status indicator

• Urgent request

• User-defined

Type changeable, typically the end user organisation defines

Default value right to send and to receive every request and status message
Legal values There are three possible values, which are defined for every request
and status message or for each group of requests and status messages:
none, send, and receive both (=full rights).
Special value all request and status message rights
Related Workstation user parameter SDS Messages
parameters Parameters class 45 (WO command group) parameter Extended VPN
for communication rights (141). If this parameter is activated, the WS
user’s and radio subscriber’s rights to send and receive request and
status messages are also restricted by the SDS Messages right in
addition to this right definition.
Change effective immediately

Additional information

The system checks the right to receive requests and status messages only when the request or status is
sent to the workstation's individual address. The workstation user may receive other requests or status
messages if they were addressed to a group and the user has sent a subscription for group addressed
status and SDS messages.

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the subscriber.
For further information, refer to document DWS Management User's Guide , DN00132209.

Keywords: *user rights, *data messages

3.2.2.9 SDS Messages

Specifies if the workstation user is allowed to send and receive short data messages (SDS). Rights for
sending and receiving can be defined independently.

You define the SDS rights as a list of organisation blocks, or you can write All organisation blocks. For
each organisation block (or all organisation blocks), you define an allowed SDS direction (that is, sending,
receiving, or both). If the user has right to send (or receive) SDS messages to an organisation block, the user
has the right to send (or receive) SDS messages to (or from) any subscriber belonging to this organisation
block or to its suborganisation blocks.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

70/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value rights to send and to receive SDS messages from everyone
Legal values values send, receive, and both (=full rights) defined for all organisation
blocks, or for a list of existing organisation blocks (up to 75)
Related Workstation user parameter Requests and Status Messages
parameters Parameters class 45 (WO command group) parameter Extended VPN
for communication rights (141). If this parameter is activated, the WS
user’s rights to send and receive request and status messages are also
restricted by this right in addition to the Requests and Status Messages
right definition.
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the workstation
user. Read the DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209 for more information.

Keywords: *user rights, *data messages.

3.2.2.10 Selectable Message Sending Profiles

Specifies which profiles a WS user can use to send messages.

Type changeable
Default value 3 = Repeating, Normal, Dedicated and Important profiles
Legal values 0 = Only Repeating profile
1 = Only Dedicated profile
2 = Repeating, Normal and Dedicated profiles
3 = Repeating, Normal, Dedicated and Important profiles
4 = Repeating, Normal, Dedicated and Paging profiles
5 = All profiles
Change effective immediately

3.2.3 Administrative Rights

3.2.3.1 APN Pools

Defines to which APN pools the workstation user has rights. From these pools the workstation user can give
APN pools to organisation blocks and default APNs to radio subscribers and organisation blocks.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value no rights
Legal values full rights/no rights defined for all APN pools, or for a list of APN pools
which includes up to 10 separate APN pools
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 71/466
Additional information

If a workstation user wants to define a static APN for a radio subscriber, the workstation user must have the
rights to create or modify the attributes of the radio subscriber defined with the parameter Administrative
rights: Radio subscriber.

To define a default APN or APN pools to an organisation block, the workstation user must have the rights to
manage the organisation block, defined with the parameter Administrative rights: Organisation blocks.

3.2.3.2 Client Applications

Specifies whether the workstation user is allowed to create, modify, and delete client applications.
Type changeable, the technical operator or the end user organisation defines
Default value no rights
Legal values full rights to all client applications or no rights
Related parameter SSI Ranges (to create a subscriber you must have rights to a certain
numbering space)
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *user rights

3.2.3.3 Groups

Specify the following workstation users' rights:

• right to create, modify, and delete groups

• right to modify groups' attributes

• right to manage group memberships

• right to communicate in the group

You define these rights as a list of organisation blocks, or the definition is all organisation blocks. If a
workstation user has rights in an organisation block, he or she also has the same rights in the suborganisation
blocks of that organisation block.

Table 6 describes the types of rights that will be valid in those organisation blocks given for the workstation
user.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

72/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 6 : Managing the organisation parameters

Right Create, modify, Change the Manage group Communicate

and delete attributes memberships (1)
Full Rights yes yes yes yes
Full Management yes yes no no
Group no no yes no
Management
Modify no yes no no

(1) To be able to add and remove subscribers and G4WIFs to and from groups, the workstation user must
have the right to manage group memberships for the group and the right to change group memberships for
the subscribers or G4WIFs. If the Extended VPN for communication rights (141) parameter is set on, the
G4WIF rights are restricted based on the initial characters of the mnemonic.
Note

Other combinations of rights are possible as well.

Type changeable
Default value no rights
Legal values values described in Table 6 defined for all organisation blocks, or for a
list of existing organisation blocks (up to 75)
Related parameter SSI Ranges (to create a group you must have rights to a certain
numbering space)
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *user rights

3.2.3.4 Group Combining

Specifies if the workstation user has the right to combine groups.

Type changeable
Default value no
Legal values yes, no

3.2.3.5 Organisation Blocks

Specifies how the workstation user may use the Organisation Management Application. It covers the rights to
create and delete organisation blocks, and rights to modify their attributes.

For information about organisation block attributes, see Section 2.4 .

Type changeable, the technical operator or the end user organisation defines
Default value No rights

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 73/466
 Legal values full rights to all organisation blocks or no rights
Related Parameters class 45 (WO command group) parameter Extended VPN
parameters for communication rights (141). If this parameter is activated, the
value 'full rights' given for the organisation blocks further restricts the
permission to own organisation block and the organisation blocks below
it.
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *user rights

Note
If the workstation user has full rights to all organisation blocks, he can modify organisation block attributes
(see Section 2.4 ).

3.2.3.6 Organisation Parameters

Specifies whether the workstation user is allowed to modify or view the organisation-specific parameters.
For information about organisation parameters, see Section 2.2.2
Type changeable, typically the technical operator or the end user organisation
defines
Default value no access
Legal values full rights, view, no access
Related Parameters class 45 (WO command group) parameter Extended VPN
parameters for communication rights (141). If this parameter is activated, the value
'full rights' or 'view rights' given for the organisation parameters further
restricts the permission to own organisation only, and only if the WS
user belongs to the highest organisation-block level of the organisation.
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *user rights

3.2.3.7 Radio Subscribers

Specifies the following workstation user's rights:

• right to create, modify, and delete radio subscribers;
• right to modify radio subscribers;
• right to change group memberships, that means, rights to add, delete, and move members from
one group to another.

You define this right as a list of organisation blocks, or the definition is all organisation blocks. If a
workstation user has rights in an organisation block, he or she also has the same rights in the suborganisation
blocks of that organisation block.
Table 7 describes the types of rights that will be valid in those organisation blocks given for the workstation
user.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

74/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 7 : Managing the organisation parameters

Right Create, modify, and Change the attributes Manage group

delete memberships (1)
Full Rights yes yes yes
Full Management yes yes no
Modify no yes no
Change group no no yes
memberships

(1) The workstation user must have the right to manage both the subscribers and groups.
Note
Other combinations of rights are possible as well.

Type changeable, typically end used organisation defines

Default value no rights
Legal values values described in Table 7 defined for all organisation blocks, or for a
list of existing organisation blocks (up to 100)
Related parameter SSI Ranges (to create a subscriber you must have rights to a certain
numbering space)
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *user rights

3.2.3.8 Workstation Users

Specifies if the workstation user is allowed to create and delete workstation users and change attributes of
the workstation users.
You define this right as a list of organisation blocks, or the definition is every workstation user. If a workstation
user has right to create and delete workstation users in an organisation block, he also has rights to create and
delete workstation users in the suborganisation blocks of that organisation block.
For security reasons, there are two restrictions for using this right:
• A workstation user cannot give higher (or more) administrative rights, ambience listening rights, or
group communication rights to another workstation user than the user's own rights.
• Workstation users cannot change their own attributes except the password, and they should not
delete themselves.

Type changeable, typically the end user organisation defines

Default value no rights
Legal values full rights or no rights defined for all organisation blocks, or for a list
of organisation blocks (up to 75)
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 75/466
Keywords: *user rights

3.2.4 Communication

3.2.4.1 Normal Priority

This parameter specifies how the system serves this workstation user compared to groups, radio subscribers,
and other workstation users. The system uses priorities in the following situations:

• How fast the system provides signalling space for individual call setup or other messages.

• How certainly the resources allocated for the connection can be retained if there are pre-emptive calls.

• How fast a connection is formed if the call resources are heavily loaded.

Type changeable, the end-user organisation defines

Default value 3
Legal values integers from 1 to 20
Range from 1 to 20
Special values 1 represents the lowest priority and 20 – the highest priority
Related Radio subscriber parameter Normal Priority
parameters Group parameter Priorities: Group Priority
Change effective Regarding groups, radio subscribers and other workstation users: from
the next call setup.
Regarding other workstation users: from the next speech item.

Keywords: *priorities

3.2.4.2 Speech Item Priority

This parameter affects who is granted a speech item in an ongoing group call if there are several simultaneous
requests (compared to other radio subscribers and workstation users).
Type changeable, the end-user organisation defines
Default value Speech Item Priority = 13
Legal values integers from 1 to 20
Range from 1 to 20
Special values 1 represents the lowest priority and 20 the highest priority
Related Radio subscriber parameter Radio User: Speech Item Priority
parameters WS parameter Normal Priority
Change effective Regarding groups, radio subscribers and other workstation users: from
the next call setup.
Regarding other workstation users: from the next speech item.
Regarding RS users: from next speech item.

Keywords: *priorities

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

76/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
3.2.4.3 Allow Pre-emptive Services

Defines whether the workstation user can make pre-emptive calls. When the call is pre-emptive and all system
resources are reserved, a lower priority call or packet data transfer is released to setup the pre-emptive call.
Type changeable
Default value No
Legal values No/On User Request/Unconditional
Change effective from the next call setup

Note
If the Pre-emptive Rights Allowed attribute of the organisation block which the workstation user belongs to
is set to the value No, the only valid value for this parameter is No.

Note
Pre-emptive services should be used only when genuinely needed because the pre-emption gives a negative
impression to the participants of the interrupted call.

3.2.4.4 Pre-Emptive Resource Priority

This parameter defines the workstation user resource reservation pre-emption priority. Higher pre-emption
priority request pre-empts lower level resource reservation. When values are equal, normal resource
reservation priority defines the place in the resource reservation queue. Pre-emption priority levels takes
place in traffic channel reservations as well as in speech line reservations between DXTs.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 1–20
Related Organisation parameter Main org max resource pre-emption level
parameters Workstation user parameter Allow Pre-emptive Services
If Allow Pre-emptive Services is set to No, Pre-emptive Resource
Priority is disabled.
Change effective from the next call setup

3.2.4.5 Incoming Communication: Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)

The Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) attribute specifies whether the calling party's number is
shown to the called party, provided that the calling party's number is available and the presentation is not
restricted. This is a feature of the called party. This parameter concerns only individual calls.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value On
Legal values On, Off

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 77/466
 Related Workstation user parameter Incoming Communication: Override Calling
parameters Line Identification Restriction (CLIR Override)
Workstation user parameter Outgoing Communication: Calling Line
Identification Restriction (CLIR) for ITSI
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

If the calling party has CLIR activated, the calling party's number is not shown unless the called party has
activated CLIR Override.

3.2.4.6 Incoming Communication: Override Calling Line Identification Restriction

(CLIR Override)

The Override Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR Override) parameter specifies whether the called
party can see the calling party's number even though the calling party's CLIR (see Section 3.2.4.7 ) is set to On
in incoming calls. CLIR Override can be defined if the calling line identification presentation (CLIP, see Section
3.2.4.5 ) is set to On. This is a feature of the called party. This parameter concerns only individual calls.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Off
Legal values On or Off
Related Workstation user parameter Incoming Communication: Calling Line
parameters Identification Presentation (CLIP)
Workstation user parameter Outgoing Communication: Calling Line
Identification Restriction (CLIR) for ITSI
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

The number of the calling party is shown even if the calling party has activated the CLIR function. It is also
required that the called party has activated the CLIP function.

3.2.4.7 Outgoing Communication: Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for

ITSI

The Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for ITSI parameter specifies whether the calling party's
Individual TETRA Subscriber Identity or Individual Short Subscriber Identity may be sent to the called party
in outgoing calls. See also Section 3.2.4.5 and Section 3.2.4.6 . This is a feature of the calling party. This
parameter concerns only individual calls.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Off (identity will be sent)
Legal values On (identity will not be sent) or Off (identity will be sent)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

78/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related Workstation user parameter Incoming Communication: Calling Line
parameters Identification Presentation (CLIP)
Workstation user parameter Incoming Communication: Override Calling
Line Identification Restriction (CLIR Override)
Change effective from the next call setup

3.2.4.8 Outgoing Communication: Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for

FSSN

Defines if the calling party's FSSN may be sent to the called party in outgoing individual calls when the
dialled number is an FSSN.
Type changeable
Default value Off (identity will be sent)
Legal values On (identity will not be sent)
Off (identity will be sent)
Change effective from the next call setup

3.2.4.9 Outgoing Communication: Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for

MSISDN

Defines if the calling party's MSISDN number may be sent to the called party in outgoing individual calls
when the dialled number is an MSISDN.
Type changeable
Default value Off (identity will be sent)
Legal values On (identity will not be sent)
Off (identity will be sent)
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

When calling to MSISDN number and when the calling party has no MSISDN number, the parameter Calling
Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for ITSI defines whether the calling party's identity is sent.

3.2.4.10 Short Data Services: Right to Use Gateway with External Networks

Specifies if the workstation user has rights to use the gateway for messages between TETRA and GSM
networks.
Type changeable
Default value No Rights
Legal values No Rights / Sending / Receiving / Full Rights
Related Workstation user parameter Short Data Services: Allow Using Storage
parameters
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 79/466
3.2.4.11 Short Data Services: Allow Using Storage

Specifies if the work station user has rights to use the storage (and retrying) for messages that do not reach
the destination, either inside a TETRA network or between TETRA and GSM networks.
Type changeable
Default value On
Legal values On / Off
Related Workstation user parameter Short Data Services: Right to Use Gateway
parameters with External Networks
Change effective immediately

3.2.4.12 Allow Call Transfer

Defines whether the workstation user has the right to transfer calls. If the calling party is an Airbus DS TETRA
system subscriber, a dispatcher may transfer the call to a radio subscriber, a dispatcher or to an external
subscriber (PSTN/PABX). In case the calling party is an external subscriber, the dispatcher can transfer the
call to a radio subscriber or a dispatcher. Calling or target party cannot be located on the other network behind
ISI, but call can be transferred to the other network’s subscriber which is currently migrated to this network.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value no
Legal values no/yes
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *user rights, *call transfer

3.2.4.13 Allow Forced Release of Individual Call

Defines whether the workstation user has the right to make a forced individual call release.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value no
Legal values no/yes
Change effective immediately

Additional information

When the value of this parameter is set to Yes, the workstation user is allowed to perform forced release of
radio subscribers’ individual calls if, in addition, the dispatcher has the administrative right change the group
membership configured with DWS’s Workstation user management application for the radio subscribers of
that organisation block.
Keywords: *user rights, *individual call release

3.2.4.14 Enable Participation in End-to-End Encrypted Calls

Specifies if end-to-end encryption is allowed for the workstation user or not.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

80/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
If end-to-end encryption is not allowed, the workstation user is not allowed to be a member of groups where
Encryption Mode is set to Always End to End Encrypted or Clear Voice Override Allowed.

If end-to-end encryption is allowed then Clear Voice Override (CVO) is also allowed.
Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On / Off
Related Group parameter Encryption Mode
parameters
Change effective from next setup

3.2.4.15 Individual Call Maximum Duration for Calling Party

Defines how long individual calls a user can make. Some users need to make longer or shorter individual
calls than others for performing their tasks, so they are allowed to also make longer or shorter calls than
others. For the users in the organisation for whom this parameter is left undefined, the shortest of the calling
and called parties’ organisation-specific values is used.
Type changeable
Default value not defined (organisation parameter is used)
Legal values not defined
from 1 to 1440 minutes
Change effective

3.2.5 Ranges

3.2.5.1 Fleet Specific Short Number Domain Numbering

Defines from which ranges this workstation user can give FSSN domain to radio subscribers and client
applications. One range contains a start and end FSSN Domain Identifier value. The start value cannot be
bigger than the end value. In addition to this attribute, the allowed numbers depend on the numbering plan
used in the Airbus DS TETRA system.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value no ranges allowed
Legal values can have up to 75 FSSN domain ranges
Change effective immediately

3.2.5.2 Mobile Subscriber ISDN Numbering

Defines from which ranges this workstation user can give MSISDN to radio subscribers and client
applications. One range contains a start and an end MSISDN value. The start value cannot be bigger than
the end value. In addition to this attribute, the allowed numbers depend on the numbering plan used in
the Airbus DS TETRA System.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 81/466
 Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value no ranges allowed
Legal values can have up to 75 MSISDN ranges
Change effective immediately

3.2.5.3 Short Subscriber Identity Numbering

Specifies which SSIs the workstation user is allowed to use when creating subscribers, allocating ITSIs to
WSs, or when creating groups or group overlays. In addition to this attribute, the allowed numbers depend on
the numbering plan used in your Airbus DS TETRA system.
Type changeable, the technical operator or the end user organisation defines
Default value no ranges allowed
Legal values max 75 ranges. The exact allowed values depend on the numbering
scheme used in the system. In normal case the range limits must be
among 1 and 9999999.
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *user rights, *numbering

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

82/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
4 Radio subscriber parameters
This chapter describes the radio subscriber parameters. These parameters are also described in documents
DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209 and DWS Communication User's Guide, DN00132181.

4.1 Managing the radio subscriber parameters

The following table shows what you need to manage the radio subscriber parameters.

Table 8 : Managing radio subscriber parameters

Topic Information
Tools The Radio Subscriber Management Application; typically the
application runs in the DWS, or in a 3rd-party TCS client.
User interface GUI running on Microsoft Windows (the interface consists of a series
of windows, dialogues, and menus).
Required rights The workstation must have rights to organisation block to which
the radio subscriber belongs. These rights are set by using the
workstation user specific attributes: administrative rights related to
the radio subscribers.
When the values are The radio subscriber parameters are defined when the subscriber is
given added to the system.

Note
When creating or modifying a radio subscriber, some fields of the subscriber profile can be hidden and/or
disabled according to the subscriber type: Radio Subscriber or Alias Subscriber. If a parameter is applicable
to one subscriber type only, this is indicated in the descriptions below. See Section 4.2 .

4.2 Parameters

4.2.1 Identification

4.2.1.1 Subscriber Type

This parameter indicates the selected the subscriber type: Radio Subscriber or Alias Subscriber. The selected
subscriber type defines the set of parameters available in the Radio Subscriber Management Property Sheet.
Type unchangeable after creation
Default value Radio Subscriber

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 83/466
 Legal values Radio Subscriber / Alias Subscriber
Related Parameters visible to the selected subscriber type in the Radio
parameters Subscriber Management Property Sheet
Change effective immediately

4.2.1.2 Organisation Block

Each subscriber (RS) always permanently belongs to one organisation or sub-organisation (organisation
block): Permanent Org Block.

The subscriber's organisation block affects the following:

• Other subscribers can make and receive individual calls to and from this subscriber only if they have
rights to this organisation block or blocks hierarchically above it. How they can communicate is defined
with their communication rights attributes. Organisation parameters also affect the communication, for
example, time limits.

• Dispatchers and other workstation users can operate and manage this subscriber if they have the
needed call and data management rights to the organisation block to which this subscriber belongs.

• Subscriber's right to join groups (right toattach) is organisation-dependent. This is defined with the
group parameter Entry rights.

Type unchangeable after creation, the end user organisation defines

Default value depends on the procedure of creating the subscriber
Legal values any organisation block created in the system
Related parameters related to radio subscribers' communication rights, and
parameters workstation users' administrative and communication rights
Change effective immediately

4.2.1.3 Visiting Org Block

An RS may temporarily be a member of an Organisation Block which is called different from his/her
permanent Organisation Block. It is called Visiting Org Block. If an RS has to join another Organisation
Block, the permanently managing dispatcher has to pass the management rights of that RS to the temporarily
managing dispatcher, and the temporarily managing dispatcher needs to accept them. Whether the
temporarily managing dispatcher has accepted the managing rights can be seen with the Passing Acceptance
Status attribute, see Section 4.2.1.4 .

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value no OB defined
Legal values any organisation block created in the system
Related Passing Acceptance Status
parameters Radio Subscriber: Organisation Block
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

84/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
4.2.1.4 Passing Acceptance Status

This parameter shows whether or not the passing of management rights of an RS from one Organisation
Block to another, visited Organisation Block is accepted, also see Section 4.2.1.3 .
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value not defined
Legal values not defined
Accepted, Not Accepted
Related Radio Subscriber: Organisation Block
parameters Visiting Org Block
Change effective immediately

4.2.1.5 Individual TETRA Subscriber Identity (ITSI) (MCC; MNC; ISSI)

Uniquely identifies a subscriber in a TETRA network. Each TETRA subscriber has an ITSI of its own. This
number must match with the number programmed to the radio terminal. The ITSI consists of the following
three parts:

• MCC (Mobile Country Code)

• MNC (Mobile Network Code)

• ISSI (Individual Short Subscriber Identity)

Type unchangeable after creation, the end user organisation defines

Legal values MCC: 10-bit number (1...1023)
MNC: 14-bit number (1...16383)
ISSI: 24-bit number (1...16777215)
Related Radio-terminal–specific parameter ITSI
parameters System parameter Country code
System parameter Network code
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Use the numbering plan if available.

Additional information

When only ISSI is given, the system automatically defines MCC and MNC to correspond with the MCC and
MNC values of the network.

Note

After saving a new subscriber, you cannot change the ITSI. To change the ITSI, you have to delete the
subscriber and create it again using a different ITSI.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 85/466
4.2.1.6 Fleet Specific Short Number (FSSN)

A number that allows the radio subscriber to use a short number when communicating with each other
inside the same FSSN domain.

The Fleet Specific Short Number (FSSN) consists of the following parts:

• Domain

• Fleet Identifier

• Member Identifier

If 'Domain' has been set then also the 'Fleet Identifier' and 'Member Identifier' must be set. Together the Fleet
Identifier and Member Identifier consititute the FSSN number. The FSSN number is 6 characters long at
maximum. Fleet Identifier is 1 to 5 characters long and the rest of the number is the Member Identifier. Fleet
Identifier is an optional field. Fleet Identifier and Member Identifier are disabled until a Domain is selected.

The length of the Fleet Identifier and Member Identifier are checked while typing them, so that the maximum
length of the FSSN number is not exceeded. The Member Identifier may contain zeros in the beginning of the
number, whereas the Fleet Identifier may not. However, if the user is trying to enter only zeros to either field,
they are removed after the focus is shifted to another field. In case of the Member Identifier, a valid number
must be given until the tab may be changed or the OK button pressed.
Type changeable
Default values Domain: <Undefined>
Legal values Domain: List of possible FSSN domains that can be selected.
Fleet Identifier: 1 to 5 digits
Member Identifier: 1 to 5 digits (the rest of the FSSN number is member
identifier).
Member Identifier may contain zeros in the beginning of the number,
whereas Fleet Identifier may not.
Related Radio subscriber parameter PABX Numbering Integrated to Fleet
parameters
Change effective immediately

4.2.1.7 PABX Numbering Integrated to Fleet

Specifies if a radio subscriber can make calls to PABX using FSSN numbering, that is, if that fleet's PABX
extension numbers are included in calling subscriber's FSSN numbering scheme.

PABX Numbering Integrated to Fleet is disabled until 'Domain' is selected and 'Member Identifier' is set for the
related parameter Fleet Specific Short Number (FSSN).

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value off
Legal values on, off

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

86/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related Radio subscriber parameter Fleet Specific Short Number (FSSN)
parameters
Change effective immediately

4.2.1.8 Mobile Subscriber ISDN Numbering (MSISDN)

This parameter specifies the numbers that allow the radio subscriber to communicate with other public
networks outside the Airbus DS TETRA network as well as with other subscribers within the Airbus DS
TETRA network.

The Mobile Subscriber ISDN Number (MSISDN) is added by typing it in the 'New Number' field and clicking
Add. The added numbers are listed in the 'Defined Numbers' list. One radio subscriber can have up to five
MSISDNs.

One of the MSISDNs must be set as default. This is done by selecting a MSISDN from the 'Defined Numbers'
list and clicking Set as Default. If there is only one number in the list, that number is automatically used as
default. If the default number is removed, the first number in the list becomes default.

MSISDN numbers can be removed by selecting one in the 'Defined Numbers' list and clicking Remove.
Type changeable
Legal values Up to 5 MSISDNs. One MSISDN number can have up to 15 digits.
One must be set as default.
Change effective immediately

Note
Only one MSISDN number is used as CPI (Calling Party Identity).

4.2.1.9 Mnemonic

Specifies an alias name given to a radio subscriber. Mnemonics are shown to the workstation users, in
addition to ISSIs, in order to simplify the subscriber identification.
Type changeable
Legal values a text string having maximum of 15 characters
Change effective immediately

Additional information

The Airbus DS TETRA system allows you to use the same mnemonic with several subscribers. To the Airbus
DS TETRA radio terminals the mnemonics are programmed using the Parametering and Configuration
software.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 87/466
4.2.2 Aliasing

4.2.2.1 Radio User Assignment Services: Radio User Assignment Required in

Registration

Defines whether the user of the terminal is supposed to make an assignment, that is, whether alias
assignment is required from that terminal in registration.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type changeable
Default value No
Legal values No / Using SSI / Using MSISDN
Related Radio subscriber parameter Radio User Assignment Services: Radio
parameters User Assignment Signalling Supported
Change effective from the next registration

4.2.2.2 Radio User Assignment Services: Radio User Assignment Signalling

Supported

Defines if the radio terminal supports Radio User Assignment (RUA) signalling.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type changeable
Default value No
Legal values Yes / No
Change effective from the next assignment / dis-assignment

4.2.2.3 Assigned Identities: Primary Assigned Identity

This parameter is a read-only value indicating the primary i.e. latest alias identity assigned to the radio
terminal.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type unchangeable
Default value None
Legal values • None

ISSI of an Alias Identity

4.2.2.4 Assigned Identities: Secondary Assigned Identity

A Secondary Assigned Identity can be assigned to a radio terminal besides the Primary Alias Identity.
This parameter is read-only.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

88/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type unchangeable
Default value None
Legal values • None

ISSI of an Alias Identity

4.2.2.5 Alias Identity: Profile Id

The Profile Id is informed to the radio terminal within the Radio User Assignment (RUA) procedure to be
optionally used by the terminal.

This parameter is for Alias Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0–255
Special values 0 = No profile id
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.2.6 Alias Identity: PIN For Alias Identity

Defines a password (PIN) that is used for user authentication within the Radio User Assignment (RUA)
procedure.

This parameter is for Alias Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value Empty
Legal values Values from 0 to 99999
Empty indicates no PIN

4.2.2.7 Assigned Identities: Terminal Identity

This is the identity of a radio terminal to which an Alias Identity has been assigned: if an Alias Identity is
assigned to a radio terminal, ISSI of the radio terminal is displayed in the 'Terminal Identity' field. Otherwise,
<Undefined> is displayed.

This parameter is read-only.

This parameter is for Alias Subscriber only.

Type unchangeable
Default value Undefined
Legal values ISSI

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 89/466
4.2.3 Communication Rights

4.2.3.1 Broadcast Calls

Broadcast Calls lists the organisation blocks of which broadcast and background groups the subscriber
can make calls to.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value none
Legal values none
from 1 to 10 Organisation Blocks
Change effective immediately

Note
The feature-specific maximum number of OBs in the OB list defining the subscriber’s right to broadcast calls
is 10. However, the maximum number of OBs for all OB-based rights of one subscriber must not exceed the
maximum length of the OB list of one subscriber.

Additional information

See DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209 for more information.

Keywords: *user rights

4.2.3.2 Individual Calls

Specifies to whom and from whom a subscriber is allowed to make and receive individual calls. Rights for
making and receiving individual calls can be defined independently.

You define the individual call rights as a list of organisation blocks, or you can use the definition All
organisation blocks. For each organisation block (or all organisation blocks), you define an allowed individual
call direction (that is, making, receiving, or both.) If the subscriber has the right to make (or receive) individual
calls to (or from) an organisation block, the subscriber has the right to make (or receive) individual call to any
subscriber belonging to this organisation block or to its sub-organisation blocks.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value all organisation blocks: Full Rights (making and receiving individual
calls to and from all subscribers)
Legal values all organisation blocks: make, receive, or both
or
list of maximum 20 organisation blocks: make, receive or both for every
organisation block
Special values all organisation blocks: all subscribers in the system
Change effective from the next call setup

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

90/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Recommendations

Use short and simple lists. Before giving one-way communication rights (making or receiving exclusively),
consider the matter carefully.

Additional information

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the subscriber.
Read the DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209 for more information.

Keywords: *user rights

4.2.3.3 ISI Communications

Defines rights to be applied if the other party in an individual call or within SDS/Status sending is not
provisioned to this network.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value No Rights
Legal values No Rights / All ISI connections / list of ISI connections (up to 10
connection groups)
Rights can be allocated as: making / receiving / full for all ISI
connections or per each ISI connection
Change effective from the next call setup / SDS or Status message

Additional information

Read the DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209 for more information.

Keywords: *user rights

4.2.3.4 PABX Calls

Specifies the PABX connections to which a radio subscriber is allowed to make calls and from which the radio
subscriber is allowed to receive calls. Rights for making and receiving calls can be defined independently.

You define the PABX call rights as a list of the PABX connection groups. For each connection group, you
define the allowed call direction: making, receiving, or both.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Legal values existing PABX connections groups (up to 60); make, receive, both
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

Use short and simple lists. Before giving one-way communication rights (making or receiving exclusively),
consider the matter carefully.

Additional information

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the subscriber.
Read the DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209 for more information.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 91/466
4.2.3.5 PSTN Calls

Specifies the PSTN connections to which a radio subscriber is allowed to make calls and from which the radio
subscriber is allowed to receive calls. Rights for making and receiving calls can be defined independently.
You define the PSTN call rights as a list of the PSTN connection groups. For each connection group, you
define the allowed call direction (that is, making, receiving, or both). The definition can also be all PSTN
connection groups.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Legal values existing PSTN connection groups (up to 60); make, receive, both
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

Use short and simple lists. Before giving one-way communication rights (making or receiving exclusively),
consider the matter carefully.

Additional information

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the subscriber.
Read the DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209 for more information.
Keywords: *user rights, *PSTN and PABX calls

4.2.3.6 Requests and Status Messages

Specifies what kinds of requests and status messages the subscriber is allowed to send and receive. Rights
for sending and receiving can be defined independently.
You will not define rights for each request or status message separately but for a group of them. Requests
and status messages are divided into the following groups:
• Callback request
• Status indicator
• Urgent request
• User-defined

Type changeable, the end user organisation defines

Default value right to send and receive every request and status message
Legal values all requests and status messages: none, send, receive, both; or the
same values for each group of requests and status messages
4 different types of messages for a Radio Subscriber, 1 type for an Alias
Subscriber (global rights only)
Related radio subscriber parameter SDS Messages
parameters Parameters class 45 (WO command group) parameter Extended VPN
for communication rights (141). If this parameter is activated, the radio
subscriber’s rights to send and receive request and status messages
are also restricted by SDS Messages in addition to this right definition.
Change effective from the next request or status message sending

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

92/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Additional information

The system checks the right to receive requests and status messages only when the request or status is sent
to the subscriber's individual address. The subscriber may also receive other requests or status messages if
they were addressed to a group and the subscriber has the group in scanning.

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the subscriber.
Read the DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209 for more information.

Keywords: *user rights, *data messages

4.2.3.7 SDS Messages

Specifies if the subscriber is allowed to send and receive short data messages (SDS). Rights for sending and
receiving can be defined independently.

You define the SDS rights as a list of organisation blocks, or the definition can be all organisation blocks.
For each organisation block (or all organisation blocks), you define an allowed SDS direction (that is, sending,
receiving, or both). If the subscriber has the right to send (or receive) SDS messages to an organisation
block, the subscriber has the right to send (or receive) SDS messages to any subscriber belonging to this
organisation block or to its suborganisation blocks. SDS messages include text messages.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value rights to send and to receive SDS messages to and from every
organisation block
Legal values all organisation blocks: send, receive, both; or a list of organisation
blocks, with specific values send, receive or both for every organisation
block
20 organisation blocks for a Radio Subscriber, 1 for an Alias Subscriber
(global rights only)
Related radio subscriber parameter Requests and Status Messages
parameters Parameters class 45 (WO command group) parameter Extended VPN
for communication rights (141). If this parameter is activated, the radio
subscriber’s rights to send and receive request and status messages
are also restricted by this right in addition to the Requests and Status
Messages right definition.
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the subscriber.
See the DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209, for more information.

Keywords: *user rights, *data messages

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 93/466
4.2.4 Incoming

4.2.4.1 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)

The Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) attribute specifies whether the calling party's number is
shown to the called party, provided that the calling party's number is available and the presentation is not
restricted. This is a feature of the called party. This parameter concerns only the called party and individual
calls.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Off
Legal values On, Off
Related Workstation user parameter Incoming Communication: Calling Line
parameters Identification Presentation (CLIP)
Workstation user parameter Outgoing Communication: Calling Line
Identification Restriction (CLIR) for ITSI
Radio subscriber parameter Override Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR Override)
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

If the calling party has activated the CLIR function, the calling party's number is not shown unless the called
party has activated CLIR Override.

4.2.4.2 Override Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR Override)

The Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) Override attribute specifies whether the called party can
see the calling party's number even though the calling party's CLIR is set to On in incoming calls (see
Sections 3.2.4.7 and 4.2.5.9 ).

CLIR Override can be defined if the calling line identification presentation (CLIP) is set to On (see Sections
3.2.4.5 and 4.2.4.1 ). This parameter concerns only the called party and individual calls.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Off
Legal values On
Off
Related Workstation user parameter Incoming Communication: Calling Line
parameters Identification Presentation (CLIP)
Workstation user parameter Outgoing Communication: Calling Line
Identification Restriction (CLIR) for ITSI
Radio subscriber parameter Calling Line Identification Presentation
(CLIP): if CLIP is not selected CLIR Override is disabled.
Change effective from the next call setup

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

94/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Additional information

If this parameter is set to value On, the number of the calling party is shown even if the calling party has
CLIR active. It is also required that the called party has CLIP active.

4.2.4.3 Call Forwarding on All Calls

Activates forwarding of all individual calls. This will override all other call forwarding services.
Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On, Off
Related Radio subscriber parameters Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
parameters Number), Forwarded to number (TETRA Number), Gateway SSI
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.4.4 Call Forwarding on Busy

Activates call forwarding in the case the called party is busy with another call or rejects the call setup. This
parameter concerns only individual calls.
Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On, Off
Related Radio subscriber parameters Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
parameters Number), Forwarded to number (TETRA Number), Gateway SSI
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.4.5 Call Forwarding on No Answer

Activates call forwarding if the called party does not answer within a certain time period defined with the
system parameter CFNRy timer for MS subscribers. This parameter concerns only individual calls.
Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On, Off
Related Radio subscriber parameters Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
parameters Number), Forwarded to number (TETRA Number), Gateway SSI
System parameter CFNRy timer for MS subscribers
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.4.6 Call Forwarding on Not Reachable

Activates call forwarding if called party is not reachable. Subscriber is not reachable when there is ongoing
group call, subscriber is not registered to the network or is outside of network coverage area. This parameter
concerns only individual calls.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 95/466
 Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On, Off
Related Radio subscriber parameters Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
parameters Number), Forwarded to number (TETRA Number), Gateway SSI
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.4.7 Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External Number)

The destination number where the calls to the called party are forwarded if some of the above call forwarding
services is enabled. This can be a voice mail number, any PSTN/PABX number or an MSISDN number
of a TETRA subscriber.
Type changeable
Legal values maximum of 24 digits (including country and network codes and
prefixes)
Related Radio subscriber parameters PSTN Calls, PABX Calls
parameters Radio subscriber Call Forwarding parameters
System parameter CFNRy timer for MS subscribers
Change effective from the next call setup

Note

To listen to the messages left in the voice mail service, the radio subscriber must have rights to call the
voice mail number.

4.2.4.8 Forwarded to number (TETRA Number)

The alternative destination number where the calls to the called party are forwarded if some of the above call
forwarding services is enabled. This can be an ITSI or ISSI number of a TETRA subscriber.
Type changeable
Legal values ITSI = MCC + MNC + ISSI
Related Radio subscriber Call Forwarding parameters
parameters System parameter CFNRy timer for MS subscribers
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.4.9 Gateway SSI

The parameter is used to select the needed destination in the case the forwarded to number is a PSTN/PABX
number.
Type changeable
Legal values maximum of 8 digits

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

96/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related Radio subscriber parameter Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
parameters Number)
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.5 Outgoing

4.2.5.1 Normal Priority

This parameter specifies how the system serves this subscriber compared to other subscribers, workstation
users, or groups. The system uses priorities, for example, in the following situations:

• How fast a connection is formed in an individual call if call resources are heavily loaded.

• How certainly the resources allocated for an individual call can be retained if there are pre-emptive calls.

Type changeable, the end user organisation defines

Default value 3
Legal values integers from 1 to 20
Range from 1 to 20
Special values '1' represents the lowest priority and '20' the highest priority
Related Workstation user parameter Normal Priority
parameters Group parameter Priorities: Group Priority
Change effective from the next call setup

Keywords: *user rights, *priorities

Note

This parameter is not applicable for packet data transfer on QAM PDCH.

4.2.5.2 Speech Item Priority

This parameter affects who is granted a speech item in an ongoing group call if there are several simultaneous
requests (compared to other radio subscribers and workstation users).
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value 3
Legal values integers from 1 to 20
Range from 1 to 20
Special values '1' represents the lowest priority and '20' the highest priority
Special value 20 authorizes a radio subscriber to disconnect an
emergency call and pre-empt emergency speech items if the MS special
priority parameter is enabled.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 97/466
 Related Workstation user parameter Speech Item Priority
parameters DXT parameter modified with the WO command group (Parameters
Class 45): MS special priority
Radio subscriber parameter: Allow Pre-emptive Speech Items
DXT parameter modified with the WO command group (Parameters
Class 45): Speech item priority and priority value range 1 – 20 in use
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.5.3 Allow Pre-emptive Speech Items

Specifies whether a radio subscriber is allowed to request a pre-emptive speech item. If the current speaker
has a lower-priority speech item, it is immediately interrupted and the speech item is granted to the radio
subscriber with a pre-emptive request.
Type changeable
Default value no
Legal values yes/no
Related Radio subscriber parameter: Speech Item Priority
parameters DXT parameter modified with the WO command group (Parameters
Class 45): Speech item priority and priority value range 1 – 20 in use
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.5.4 Allow Pre-emptive Services

Defines whether the radio subscriber can make pre-emptive calls or packet data transfer. When calls or
packet data transfer are pre-emptive and all system resources are reserved, a lower priority call or packet
data transfer is released to setup the pre-emptive call or packet data transfer. Pre-emptive rights can be
allowed by request, always for voice calls, or always for voice calls and packet data transfer.
Type changeable
Default value No
Legal values No / On User Request / Unconditional / Unconditional for Voice
Change effective from the next call setup / next PDP context activation

Note

This parameter is not applicable for packet data transfer on QAM PDCH.

4.2.5.5 Pre-emptive Resource Priority

This parameter defines the radio subscriber resource reservation pre-emption priority. Higher pre-emption
priority request pre-empts lower level resource reservation. When values are equal, normal resource
reservation priority defines the place in the resource reservation queue. Pre-emption priority levels takes
place in traffic and packet data channel reservations as well as in speech line reservations between DXTs.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

98/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 1–20
Related Organisation parameter Main org max resource pre-emption level
parameters Radio subscriber parameter Allow Pre-emptive Services: if Allow
Pre-emptive Services is set to No, Pre-emptive Resource Priority is
disabled.
Change effective from the next call setup / next packet data transfer

Note
This parameter is not applicable for packet data transfer on QAM PDCH.

4.2.5.6 Allow Resource Pre-emption by Normal Priority Resource

This parameter defines whether a normal priority resource can be pre-empted by another normal priority
resource request. When this parameter is activated for a radio subscriber, the services defined in main
organisation parameters to be able to pre-empt other normal priority resource reservations can pre-empt
this radio subscriber call in resource reservation compete situation.
Type changeable
Default value no
Legal values yes/no
Related Organisation parameters:Priority category packet data, Priority category
parameters telephone style call, Priority category group call, Priority category
external network call, Priority category emergency individual call, Priority
category direct call, Priority category broadcast call, Priority category
dedicated data channels
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.5.7 Allow Duplex Calls

Specifies whether the radio subscriber is allowed to make individual calls using duplex channel. The flag
does not affect group calls or calls to PSTN or PABX connection groups. This parameter does not affect
emergency calls.
Type changeable
Default value On
Legal values On, Off
Related System parameter MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via PSTN
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

MSISDN individual duplex calls via PSTN are allowed regardless of the value of this parameter.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 99/466
4.2.5.8 Allow Semi-Duplex Calls

Specifies whether the radio subscriber is allowed to make individual calls using semi-duplex channel. The
flag does not affect group calls or calls to PSTN or PABX connection groups. This parameter does not
affect emergency calls.
Type changeable
Default value On
Legal values On or Off
Related System parameter MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via PSTN
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

MSISDN individual duplex calls via PSTN are allowed regardless of the value of this parameter.

4.2.5.9 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for ITSI

The Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) attribute specifies whether the calling party's Individual
TETRA Subscriber Identity (ITSI) will be sent to the called party in outgoing calls. See also Sections 3.2.4.5 ,
3.2.4.6 , 4.2.4.1 and 4.2.4.2 . This parameter concerns only the calling party and individual calls.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Off (identity will be sent)
Legal values On (identity will not be sent)
Off (identity will be sent)
Related Radio subscriber parameter Calling Line Identification Presentation
parameters (CLIP)
Radio subscriber parameter Override Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR Override)
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

If the called party has CLIR Override set on, the calling party's identity is sent regardless of the value of this
parameter.

4.2.5.10 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for FSSN

Defines if the calling party's Fleet Specific Short Number (FSSN) is sent to the called party in outgoing
individual calls when the dialed number is an FSSN.
Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On, Off

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

100/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related System parameter MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via PSTN
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.5.11 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for MSISDN

Defines if the calling party's Mobile Subscriber ISDN Number (MSISDN) is sent to the called party in outgoing
individual calls when the dialled number is an MSISDN.
Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On, Off
Related System parameter MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via PSTN
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

If the calling party has no MSISDN address defined, the calling party's ITSI is sent to the called party unless
defined otherwise with the radio subscriber parameterCalling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) for ITSI.

4.2.5.12 Individual Call Maximum Duration for Calling Party

Defines the maximum length of individual calls a radio subscriber can make.
Some radio subscribers within an organisation need to make longer individual calls than the other for
performing their tasks, so they are allowed to also make longer calls than others.
For the radio subscribers in the organisation for whom this parameter is left undefined, the shortest of the
calling and called parties’ organisation-specific values is used.
Type changeable
Default value not defined (organisation parameter is used)
Legal values not defined (the field is empty)
from 1 to 1440 minutes
Related
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.5.13 Emergency Target: TETRA Network

Specifies the subscriber-specific SSI (Short Subscriber Identifier) number that defines where the emergency
calls from the radio subscriber are directed when the subscriber makes an emergency call, and where the
radio terminal is programmed to send the emergency ident.
Instead of using the emergency ident, the emergency target can be programmed to the radio terminals.
If the emergency call to this radio-terminal programmed number cannot be set up, the call is routed to
the number defined with this attribute.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 101/466
The emergency target is also used in the following situations. First, the radio subscriber tries to make an
emergency call to a number for which the subscriber has no rights. Second, the subscriber tries to make
emergency calls to a number not allowed in the Airbus DS TETRA system.
If the emergency call cannot be made to the number defined with this attribute or if this attribute is not given,
the call is routed to an organisation-specific default emergency number.
If the SSI is a PSTN or PABX gateway number, you should enter the actual target number in the external
network with parameter Emergency Target: External Network.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Note
This parameter must be defined during the pilot phase of the system.

Type changeable, the end user organisation defines

Default value None
Legal values Any valid individual, group, or PSTN/PABX SSI (gateway)
Special values Selected group specified with the system parameter Selected group
ident
Related Radio subscriber parameter Emergency Target: External Network
parameters System parameter Emergency ident
System parameter Selected group ident
Airbus DS TETRA radio terminal parameter Emergency address
Change effective for emergency calls set up after the moment of change

Additional information

For further information, see document Voice Communication, DN00126496.

Keywords: *emergency call

4.2.5.14 Emergency Target: External Network

Specifies the target number in an external network when the subscriber-specific Emergency Target: SSI is a
gateway SSI number.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Legal values Valid phone number to the PSTN network. The number can have up
to 24 digits.
Related System parameter Emergency ident
parameters Airbus DS TETRA radio terminal parameter Emergency address:
Outgoing Communication: Emergency Target: SSI
Change effective for emergency calls set up after the moment of change

Additional information

Keywords: *emergency call

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

102/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
4.2.5.15 Emergency Target: Emergency Target of Organisation Block

Specifies whether the emergency calls are routed to the default emergency address of the organisation which
the radio subscriber belongs to. In case no other target is specified, the emergency calls are routed to
the mentioned address.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value On
Legal values On or Off
Related Radio subscriber parameter Emergency Target: TETRA Network
parameters Radio subscriber parameter Emergency Target: External Network
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.6 Data Service

4.2.6.1 Activate Data Service

Defines whether the subscriber can use packet data services or not.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On/Off
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

4.2.6.2 Obtain an IP Address Automatically

If attribute Obtain an IP address automatically is selected, the system reserves an IP address for this
subscriber from the IP address pool allocated for the organisation block this subscriber is belonging to. The
IP address ranges for radio subscribers are defined using the Organisation Management application.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value On, if the subscriber is allowed to use data services.
Legal values On / Off
Related Radio subscriber parameter Specify an IP Address
parameters
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

Additional information

If Obtain an IP address Automatically is set On, Specify an IP Address is automatically set Off.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 103/466
4.2.6.3 Specify an IP Address

If the attribute Specify an IP Address is selected, you must specify an IP address to this subscriber by typing
it in the IP Address box. This address will always be used when the subscriber is using packet data services.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On / Off
Related Radio subscriber parameter Obtain an IP Address automatically
parameters
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

Additional information

If Obtain an IP Address Automatically is set On, Specify an IP address is automatically set Off.

4.2.6.4 IP Address

Consists of four 3-digit numbers (between 0 and 255) separated by a period. If the radio subscriber wants to
use a static IP address, the IP address must be specified and reserved permanently for this subscriber. In
enhanced mode packet data, the allowed IP addresses depends upon the configuration of the IP network.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Legal values An IP address within the range of the organisation block into which
this subscriber is created.
Special values The IP address 0.0.0.0 is a broadcast address and it cannot be given
to an individual subscriber as a static address. The value 0.0.0.0 is
not illegal value as a subscriber's IP address, but here the IP address
0.0.0.0 is used as a mark that the subscriber uses dynamic IP address
allocation.
Related Radio subscriber parameter Specify an IP Address
parameters Radio subscriber parameter Obtain an IP Address Automatically
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

4.2.6.5 International Mobile Subscriber Identifier (IMSI)

The International Mobile Subscriber Identifier (IMSI) is used for identifying a subscriber in the GSM network
so that packet data messages can be routed through it. The number must be unique for each radio subscriber
in the Airbus DS TETRA system, or otherwise packet data service does not work properly in the network.
IMSI = MCC + MNC + MSIN.

If Activate Data Service is set then the International Mobile Subscriber Identifier number must be given.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

104/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Legal values maximum of 15 digits. From this the MSIN is maximum 10 digits
Related Radio subscriber parameter Activate Data Service
parameters
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

Note

The IMSI number must be unique for each radio subscriber in the Airbus DS TETRA.

4.2.6.6 Default Access Point Name

This is the identifier of the Access Point Name. A radio subscriber can have one static Access Point Name
(APN) that is used when APN selection is not allowed, or when APN selection is allowed, but no APN
is selected.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Legal values any APN from the APN pools allowed for the workstation user
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

4.2.6.7 Allow Radio Subscriber Change Access Point Name (APN)

Specifies if the subscriber is allowed to select the Access Point Name.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On / Off
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

4.2.6.8 Short Data Services: Allow Using Storage

Specifies if the radio has rights to use the storage (and retrying) for messages that do not reach the
destination, either inside a TETRA network or between TETRA and GSM networks.
Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On / Off
Related Radio subscriber parameter Short Data Services: Right to Use Gateway
parameters with External Systems
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 105/466
4.2.6.9 Short Data Services: Right to Use Gateway with External Systems

Specifies if the radio subscriber has rights to use the gateway for messages between TETRA and GSM
networks.
Type changeable
Default value No Rights
Legal values No Rights / Sending / Receiving / Full Rights
Related Radio subscriber parameter Short Data Services: Allow Using Storage
parameters
Change effective immediately

4.2.6.10 Short Data Services: Acknowledgement for Messages

Specifies whether the DXT sends receipt acknowledgements to the radio subscriber for the following status
messages:
• Callback requests
• Emergency status messages
• Urgent requests
• Status indicators
• General acknowledged status messages.

Type changeable, the end user organisation defines

Default value Off
Legal values On (receives acknowledgements) and Off (does not receive)
Change effective immediately

Additional information

The radio subscriber receives an acknowledgement for the sent message when the receiving party is a
workstation user, radio subscriber, or a group. (The group must be in use, that is, it is selected for use or
active use by at least one workstation user.)
The identity of the sending party is not shown to the receiving party except if the receiving party has CLIR
Override active.
Radio terminals of other manufacturers than Airbus DS may not support this feature.
For further information, see document Data Message Services, DN00126503.

4.2.6.11 TEDS: Allowed TEDS Functionality

Specifies if TEDS (TETRA Enhanced Data Service) is allowed for the radio subscriber.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type changeable
Default value Not Allowed

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

106/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values Not Allowed / Shared
(Shared = TEDS service is allowed and the QAM PDCH can be shared
by several radio terminals at the same time.)
Change effective from the next PDP context activation

4.2.6.12 TEDS: Ready Timer

Defines the maximum time how long the radio terminal stays on the QAM PDCH after the active packet data
transfer. This Ready Timer value is also sent to the radio terminals in the PDP context negotiation.

In the TEDS service, several packet data users can share the same PDCH and therefore the TEDS: Ready
Timer value can have quite big values; the default value is 10 seconds.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value 10 s
Legal values 3s
5s
10 s
20 s
30 s
60 s
120 s
180 s
300 s
Related Radio subscriber parameter TEDS: Allowed TEDS Functionality
parameters

Change effective from the next PDP context activation

Note
It is recommended to use value 10 s.

Note

On the phase-modulated packet data channel, the system parameter Pd - inactivity timer (122) and Pd -
ready timer (55) are used. See Sections 16.2.8.17 and 16.2.8.11 .

4.2.7 Security
The Security feature is for Radio Subscriber only.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 107/466
4.2.7.1 Authentication Key Defined

Specifies whether there is an authentication key defined for this subscriber in the system. Authentication
key is a logical component, a shared secret with the MS, which is allocated to the subscriber's ISSI. During
authentication, the system sends a random challenge to the MS. Both parties calculate a result based on this
random challenge and knowledge of the authentication key. The MS sends the result back to the system, and
if the result is correct the MS's registration to the system is accepted.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type unchangeable
Default value Undefined
Legal values Defined or Undefined (depends on the ISSI)
Change effective immediately

4.2.7.2 Authentication Required

Specifies whether this subscriber is authenticated during registration. If the subscriber has an authentication
key defined, it is reasonable to set this value to On.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type changeable
Default value On
Legal values On / Off
Change effective immediately

4.2.7.3 Authentication Triplet: Usage Times

Specifies the maximum count until which the authentication triplet may be used.
If this radio-subscriber parameter is not defined during the creation of the subscriber account, system
parameter Default authentication data use count is used.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type changeable
Default value System parameter value Default authentication data use count
Legal values from 0 to 1000
Special values Value 0 means that the counter is not used at all.
Value 1000 means that the same triplet is always used
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

It is not recommended to use systematically low values to delimit the system load. The default value of the
system parameter Default authentication data use count is 100.
If the subscriber is a visitor from another network and the authentication triplet comes from the home network
via the ISI link, use value 0. This parameter is then not used.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

108/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Additional information

Regardless of the value of this parameter, NO successive authentication will be identical. A different locally
generated random challenge is used in every authentication.

For further information, see document DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209.

4.2.7.4 Authentication Triplet: Period of Validity

Specifies the maximum amount of time (hours, days, weeks) during which the authentication triplet can be
used and the number of times it can be used within this period. For the home network subscribers, the
authentication triplet may still be used once even if the validity time has expired.

If this radio-subscriber parameter is not defined during the creation of the subscriber account, the system
parameter Default authentication data validity period is used.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value System parameter value Default authentication data validity period
Legal values 1–32 (period of validity)
Once/Hours/Days/Weeks/No limit (time unit)
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

It is not recommended to use systematically low values to delimit the system load. The default value of the
system parameter Default authentication data validity period is 1 day.

If the subscriber is a visitor from another network and the authentication triplet comes from the home network
via the ISI link, do not change the values of this parameter. The validity time then comes with the triplet
from the home network of the subscriber.

Additional information

Regardless of the value of this parameter, NO successive authentication will be identical. A different locally
generated random challenge is used in every authentication.

For further information, see document DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209.

4.2.7.5 Air Interface Encryption Method

Specifies the air interface encryption algorithm used for the radio subscriber. The parameter value must be
supported by the system and it should be set to a value supported by the subscriber's terminal.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value No Encryption
Legal values No Encryption/TEA1/TEA2/TEA3
Change effective when the radio subscriber registers the next time

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 109/466
Note

For TEDS terminals the value shall be set to No encryption.

4.2.7.6 Enable Participation in End-to-End Encrypted Calls

Specifies whether end-to-end encryption is allowed for the radio subscriber or not.

If end-to-end encryption is not allowed, the subscriber is not allowed to be a member of groups where
Encryption Mode is set to Always End to End Encrypted or Clear Voice Override Allowed.

If end-to-end encryption is allowed then Clear Voice Override (CVO) is also allowed.

This parameter was previously called Allow end-to-end encryption.

Type changeable
Default value On
Legal values On / Off
Related Group parameter Encryption Mode
parameters
Change effective from next setup

4.2.7.7 Periodic Registration: Subscriber Registration Checked by

Specifies how the periodic registration of the radio subscriber is carried out in the system, i.e. who initiates
the registration, if any.

This parameter was previously called Subscriber polling.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value Terminal
Legal values None / Terminal / System Only
Related System parameter Minimum allowed registration and recovery period
parameters Organisation parameter Registration Period
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *periodic registration

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

110/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
4.2.7.8 Terminal Enable/Disable: Reason for Disabling the Terminal

Specifies whether the radio subscriber is temporarily disabled due to any of the following reasons:
• the telephone bill is unpaid or the pre-paid amount is used
• the terminal is stolen or lost
• other reason

Several disabling reasons can be selected at a time. If any of the disabling reasons for the terminal is
checked, the disabling will take place.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type changeable
Default value Unpaid Bill / Pre-paid Amount Used: Off
Stolen / Lost: Off
Other: Off
Legal values Unpaid Bill / Pre-paid Amount Used: On / Off
Stolen / Lost: On / Off
Other: On / Off
Related Radio subscriber parameter Terminal Enable/Disable: Terminal
parameters Supports Enable/Disable Over the Air
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.7.9 Terminal Enable/Disable: ITSI Permanently Disabled

Specifies if the radio subscriber is permanently disabled.

Since permanent disabling is much more powerful than the temporary disabling operations, a separate
warning dialog is presented if the ITSI Permanently Disabled option is selected: "Disabling the ITSI
permanently means that all the keys shall be destroyed from the terminal, and that the terminal is permanently
unusable after that. The terminal can then be recovered only by the manufacturer. Are you sure you want to
disable the ITSI permanently?" (Yes/No).
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type changeable
Default value Off
Legal values On / Off
Change effective from the next call setup

4.2.7.10 Terminal Enable/Disable: Terminal Supports Enable/Disable Over the Air

Specifies whether the terminal supports the Enable/Disable Over the Air function or not.
This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.
Type changeable
Default value Off

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 111/466
 Legal values On / Off
Related Radio subscriber parameter Reason for Disabling the Terminal
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

An authentication challenge is always included in the disable and enable commands. If authentication of
the MS is not possible, enable or disable over the air is not attempted.

4.2.7.11 Terminal Enable/Disable: TETRA Equipment Identity (TEI) Status

Specifies if the radio subscriber is disabled because of disabling of the TETRA Equipment Identity (TEI).

This status value cannot be set with the application. The value is set by using MML commands and can
be read with the application.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type unchangeable
Legal values TEI Enabled
TEI Permanently Disabled (can be set/reset only with MML)
TEI Temporarily Disabled (can be set/reset only with MML)

4.2.7.12 Terminal Enable/Disable: Over the Air Status

Specifies the status sent by the radio terminal over the air as a response to a Disabling or Enabling command
sent by the Airbus DS TETRA system.

This status value is read-only and cannot be set with the application.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type unchangeable
Legal values ITSI Enabled / ITSI Disabled
TEI Enabled / TEI Disabled

4.2.8 Operating Range

4.2.8.1 Subscriber Class Definition

Specifies the access and restrictions of the radio subscriber in using the network.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value the default subscriber class of the parent organisation block (corrected
by the system with the subscriber class of the top-level organisation
block)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

112/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values A set of 16 check boxes: On / Off
Change effective change effective immediately, MS restrictions effective after next
registration

4.2.8.2 Individual Call Area

This parameter provides a possibility to restrict the area within which the radio subscriber may make or
receive individual calls. A dispatcher can define the individual call area for each radio subscriber separately.
The individual call area is defined by using an existing group and its area definitions. The individual call area
is checked for both on/off hook and direct individual calls, and the area is always checked for the radio
subscribers even though the other party is a dispatcher or a PSTN/PABX subscriber. However, individual call
area is not checked in dispatcher calls (individual call to dispatchers of a group).
Type changeable
Default value empty
Legal values GSSI values
Change effective in every call setup and handover

4.2.8.3 Migration Allowed

Defines whether a home subscriber of this network is allowed to migrate to another TETRA network
connected to this TETRA network with an ISI connection.

This parameter is for Radio Subscriber only.

Type changeable
Default value Yes
Legal values Yes / No
Change effective next migration attempt

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 113/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

114/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
5 Group parameters
This chapter describes the group parameters. These parameters are also described in the DWS Management
User's Guide, DN00132209.

5.1 Managing the group parameters

The following table shows what you need to manage the group parameters.

Table 9 : Managing the group parameters

Topic Information
Tools The Group Management Application; typically the application runs in
the DWS, or a in 3rd-party TCS client.
User interface GUI running on Microsoft Windows (the interface consists of a series
of windows, dialogues, and menus).
Required rights The workstation must have rights to the organisation block to which
the group belongs. These rights are set by using the workstation user
specific attributes: administrative rights related to groups.
When the values are The group parameters are defined when the group is added to the
given system.

5.2 Parameters

5.2.1 Identification

5.2.1.1 Organisation Block

Each group always belongs to one organisation or suborganisation, that is, to an organisation block.

Dispatchers and other workstation users can operate and manage this group if they have the required
communication and administrative rights to the organisation block to which this group belongs. The group can
include members also from any organisation block.
Type unchangeable after creation, the end user organisation defines
Default value depends on the group-creation procedure
Legal values any organisation block created in the system

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 115/466
 Related If the group parameter Dispatcher Call has the setting Individual
parameters call rights, the radio subscribers who have call rights to the group's
organisation block can make individual calls to the group's dispatcher.
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Default values shown on the user interface may depend on the selected procedure of creating the group.

5.2.1.2 Group TETRA Subscriber Identity

Uniquely identifies a group in a TETRA network. Each group has a Group TETRA Subscriber Identity (GTSI)
of its own. The GTSI consists of the following three parts:
• Mobile Country Code (MCC), which is the same for all subscribers in one TETRA system
• Mobile Network Code (MNC), which is the same for all subscribers in one TETRA
• Group Short Subscriber Identity (GSSI), which is unique for each group in one TETRA system. As a
result, the GSSI is used as a group identifier in the Airbus DS TETRA system.

When you define the GTSI of a group, you type the GSSI. The others, MCC and MNC, are filled in
automatically. You cannot change the MCC or MNC.
Type unchangeable after creation, the end user organisation defines
Default value no
Legal values non-reserved numbers from 1 to 9999999 with integer of 1; additionally
depends on the numbering scheme
Range from 1 to 9999999
Related System parameters: Country code and Network code
parameters
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Consult the numbering plan if available.

Additional information

ITSI and GTSI are selected from the same numbering space.
Note
After saving a new group, you cannot change the GTSI. To change the GTSI, you must delete the group and
then create it again using a different GTSI.

Keywords: *numbering

5.2.1.3 Home Exchange

Defines which DXT is the master DXT of the group.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

116/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type unchangeable after creation, the end user organisation defines
Legal values any DXT in the system
Related System parameter Country code
parameters System parameter Network code

Additional information

Each group must have a home DXT, and this relation cannot be changed after the group creation. However,
group area always includes the group home even though the nominated DXT would not have been defined by
the attribute Area as belonging to the group area. In that case the area definition applied for the group home
is No area meaning that workstation users and G4WIFs can be connected there to the group.

The group home controls the group calls of the group, that is, reserves all required resources for a group
call in the call setup, grants speech items, and manages speech item queues. If the group home is not
available in the group call setup, the group call takes place only in the calling party DXT. To maximise
reliability and to minimise call setup time and needed MTP signalling and voice line resources, the group
home should be selected in a way where typically most of the group members are registered in the group
home during group calls.

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure of creating a group.

5.2.1.4 Mnemonic

Specifies an alias name given to a group. Mnemonics are used in user interfaces in addition to GSSIs in
order to simplify the group identification. The mnemonics are displayed:

• In the Groups dialogue of the Airbus DS TETRA DWS Application.

• In Airbus DS TETRA radio terminals, provided that a dispatcher joins the subscriber to the group, and
that group parameter Downloading Used is set to On.

Type changeable, the end user organisation defines

Legal values a text string having maximum of 15 characters
Related Group parameter Download group to radios
parameters
Change effective immediately

Additional information

The Airbus DS TETRA system allows to use the same mnemonic with several groups. If mnemonic is
changed, the current radio subscriber members of the group will not be informed.

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the group.
Note

You may be unable to change the mnemonic of a group preprogrammed to the radio with the Parametering
and Configuration application using the Group Management application depending on the terminal used.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 117/466
5.2.2 Area

5.2.2.1 Area Type

Specifies the type of the geographical area. The system supports two area types: fixed area and shifting area.

When the fixed area is selected, the system reserves resources on all pre-defined location areas for a
group call.

When the shifting area value is selected, resources are reserved only on location areas where there are
subscribers belonging to this group, and fulfilling the criteria defined with the group parameter Minimum
Priority. In this way, the group call does not necessarily reserve all pre-defined location areas, thus saving
system resources.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Shifting Area
Legal values Fixed Area and Shifting Area
Related Group parameter Priority Scanning: Default Scanning Priority
parameters Group parameter Minimum Priority
Group parameter Area Definition
Change effective from the next call setup

Note

When the value of the attribute Priority Scanning: Default Scanning Priority is set to 7 (Background group),
value of this attribute must be set to fixed.

Additional information

Group area always includes also the group home exchange even though the nominated DXT would not have
been defined by the attribute Group area as belonging to the group area. In that case the Area Definition
parameter applied for the group home is No Area meaning that workstation users and G4WIFs can be
connected there to the group.

5.2.2.2 Minimum Priority

Specifies the minimum scanning priority for shifting area group call.

Radio subscribers who have set priority scanning higher than or equal to the value of this attribute and
have scanning activated can join the group call.

Also group members that have smaller scanning priority than specified with this parameter can join the group
call in that cell if they are located in the same cell with other radio subscribers that meet the requirements.

This attribute affects only shifting area type.

Type changeable
Default value Low Priority
Legal values Low Priority, Normal Priority, Selected Group

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

118/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related Group parameter Area Type
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

The default value is recommended.

Note

This parameter affects only group communication in organisations where the attribute Area Type is set
to value Shifting Area.

Note

Changes in the parameter value do not affect ongoing group calls.

CAUTION
When using the maximum value (Selected Group), only members who have selected the group or have the
maximum scanning priority for the group can listen to the group communication reliably.

5.2.2.3 Area Definition

Specifies the geographical area where the members of a group can communicate using the group address.
Group area is defined as a list of exchanges and location areas, or the definition is Whole Network. If an
exchange or a location area belong to a group area, it can be part of core and maximum areas, or only part
of maximum area of the group. The core area is always part of the maximum area. Also the value Whole
Network has the settings Core and Maximum.

Priority scanning is effective only in the core area. The late entry message is sent in the maximum area.

Whole Network and Exchanges have also a third setting, No Area. This value means that air interface
channels are not reserved for group communication in the area of the DXT. Only dispatchers (and G4WIFs)
that are directed to the DXT can participate in group communication if they have the required rights. Radio
subscribers in the area of that DXT cannot participate in group communication. If the setting No Area is
set to the value Whole Network, only dispatchers (and G4WIFs) in the network can participate in group
communication if they have the required rights.

Note
Each location area belongs to one DXT, and for one DXT there can be several location areas. If a DXT is
defined to be a part of a group area, the DXT definition overrides the group area definitions for the location
areas of that DXT. Correspondingly, the value Whole Network overrides all other definitions.

Type changeable
Default value No Area = the group has no area

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 119/466
 Legal values Whole Network, list of Exchanges and Location Areas, with the scope
No Area, Maximum, and Core.
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.3 Communication

5.2.3.1 Group Priority

The Group Priority specifies how the system serves this group compared to other groups, radio subscribers,
and WS users. The attribute value is effective in case of heavy load on the radio network:

• When a pre-emptive emergency call or ambience listening appears in the system, the system releases
the necessary resources starting from the call (individual or group call) with the lowest priority.

• When several calls are queuing for call resources, the one with the highest call priority is served first.

This attribute is used to define the resource priority values of this group call.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value 3
Legal values integers from 1 to 10. Number 1 represents the lowest priority and 10
the highest priority.
Related Workstation user parameter Normal Priority
parameters Radio subscriber parameter Normal Priority
Change effective from the next call setup

Keywords: *priorities

5.2.3.2 Allow Pre-emptive Services

Defines whether calls in this group are pre-emptive or not. When the group is pre-emptive and when all
system resources are reserved, a lower priority call or packet data transfer is released to setup the call
of a pre-emptive group.
Type changeable
Default value No
Legal values No, Unconditional
Change effective from the next call setup

Note
If attribute Pre-emptive Rights Allowed of the organisation block which the group belongs to is set to the value
No, the only valid value for this parameter is No.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

120/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note

Pre-emptive calls should be only made when needed, because pre-emption gives a negative impression to
the participants of the interrupted call.

5.2.3.3 Pre-Emptive Resource Priority

This parameter defines the group resource reservation pre-emption priority. Higher pre-emption priority
request pre-empts lower level resource reservation. When values are equal, normal resource reservation
priority defines the place in the resource reservation queue. Pre-emption priority levels takes place in traffic
and packet data channel reservations as well as in speech line reservations between DXTs.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values integers from 1 to 20. Number 1 represents the lowest priority and 20
the highest priority.
Related Organisation parameter Main org max resource pre-emption level
parameters Group parameter: Allow Pre-emptive Services
If Allow Pre-emptive Services is set to No, Pre-Emptive Resource
Priority is disabled
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.3.4 Allow Resource Pre-Emption by Normal Priority Resource

This parameter defines whether a normal priority resource can be pre-empted by another normal priority
resource request. When this parameter is activated for a group, the services defined in main organisation
parameters to be able to pre-empt other normal priority resource reservations can pre-empt this group call in
resource reservation compete situation.
Type changeable
Default value No
Legal values No, Yes
Related Organisation parameters:Outgoing Communication: Normal priority,
parameters Priority category telephone style call, Priority category group call,
Priority category external network call, Priority category emergency
individual call, Priority category direct call, Priority category broadcast
call, Priority category dedicated data channels
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.3.5 Previous User's Speech Item Prioritised

Specifies how the system handles continuous discussion between two group members: this parameter
allows for a speech item to alternate between two group members even if there are several subscribers
with the same priority.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 121/466
A speech item request is placed first (highest) among equal priority requests in the speech item queue if the
requesting subscriber had the speech item just before the latest or ongoing speech item.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value not marked; the Previous User's Speech Item Prioritised is not selected
(off ).
Legal values marked or an empty check box. If you mark the check box, the Previous
User's Speech Item Prioritised is selected (on).
Related Radio subscriber parameter Normal Priority
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

This parameter is effective only in group calls and it affects the speech item allocation.

Keywords: *priorities

5.2.3.6 Pre-Emption Speech Item Levels in Use

This parameter defines whether the pre-emption speech item levels are in use in group call. If pre-emption
speech item levels are defined into use in group call, pre-emption speech item levels defined for each group
member takes place (as defined for subscriber) in speech item requests during group call. If pre-emption
speech item levels are not defined into use, all pre-emptive speech item requests in group call are equal. In
both cases pre-emptive speech item request from work station user has higher priority than any pre-emptive
speech item request (not emergency) from radio subscriber.
Type changeable
Default value No
Legal values No, Yes
Related Radio subscriber parameter: Pre-Emptive Resource Priority
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.3.7 Group Mode

This parameter defines the mode of the group.

For the normal group the mode can be changed to semi-conference mode and back whenever needed, even
during the call, and the change is effective immediately. Semi-conference mode is allowed only for normal
groups, not for background or broadcast groups.

If a group is used for announcements, group mode should be defined to be either background or broadcast
group. Background group mode can be set to the group in the creation and it cannot be changed afterwards.
Type changeable
Default value Normal

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

122/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values Normal
Semi Conference
Broadcast
Background
Related Group parameter: Default Scanning Priority
parameters
Change effective immediately

Note

When group is defined to be broadcast group then those TCS Clients using Rel5 or lower level TCS API will
still see the group as normal group but they cannot change the group mode to semi-conference mode.

Additional information

When group mode is background, Default Scanning Priority must have value Always scanned. Always
scanned value can also be used for broadcast groups.

5.2.3.8 Talking Party Identifier

Specifies which number is used to identify radio subscribers and workstation users in group call.
Type changeable
Default value ITSI
Legal values ITSI, FSSN, MSISDN
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.3.9 Dispatcher Call

Specifies whether and who of the radio subscribers are allowed to make individual calls to the group
dispatchers using the GSSI. This parameter is not used in emergency calls. For more detailed information,
see document Voice Communication, DN00126496.

Table 10 : Explanations for the parameter Dispatcher Call

Value Explanation
No Rights No radio subscriber can use the GSSI to make an
individual call to a group's dispatcher.
Individual Call Rights Applies to those radio subscribers who have individual
call rights to the organisation block to which the group
belongs.
Full Rights All radio subscribers can make calls.

Type changeable, the end user organisation defines

Default value Full Rights

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 123/466
 Legal values No Rights, Individual Call Rights, Full Rights
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

If the group number is used for the dispatchers' common number, give either Individual Call Rights or
Full Rights.
Parameter value should be defined during the pilot phase of the system.
Keywords: *group management, *user rights

5.2.3.10 Emergency Call Type

Specifies how an emergency call is established by using the organisation parameter Emergency Target and
the radio subscriber parameter Emergency Target: TETRA Network.
Table 11 explains the parameter values.

Table 11 : Explanations for the parameter Emergency Call Type

Value Explanation
Dispatcher Call Individual call to group's dispatcher.
Group Call Group call is established.
Defined in Radio If the setup request has communication mode
point-to-multipoint, a group call is made. If the setup
request has communication mode point-to-point, a call
to the group's dispatcher is made.

Type changeable, the end user organisation defines

Default value Group Call
Legal values Dispatcher Call, Group Call, or Defined in Radio
Related Radio terminal parameter Emergency Type
parameters Organisation parameter Emergency Target
Radio subscriber parameter Emergency Target: TETRA Network
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

Define this parameter during the pilot phase of the system.

Keywords: *emergency call

5.2.3.11 Dedicated Data Group

Dedicated data groups are special kind of groups which are used only for data messaging. Data application
uses dedicated data group to reserve traffic channels (i.e. dedicated data channels) from the group area
for data messaging purposes, instead of using control channels. Dedicated data group cannot be used for
voice communication.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

124/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value No
Legal values No, Yes
Related Group parameter Call Duration
parameters
Change effective Next call setup

5.2.3.12 Status Messages (Callback and Emergency Status)

Specifies whether the group addressed callback requests and emergency status messages from a radio
terminal are sent to the group dispatchers or to all group members.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Send to All Group Members
Legal values Send to Dispatchers, Send to All Group Members
Change effective immediately

Table 12 : Receivers of different data messages sent by a radio unit when the attribute Status
Messages is set to value Send to Dispatchers

Sender Explanation Receiver

Radio unit Status message Whole group
Callback request Dispatcher(s)
Urgent request Dispatcher(s)
Emergency status message Dispatcher(s)
Text Message Whole group

When the attribute is set to Send to All Group Members, all message types described in the table will be
received by all group members regardless of who the sender is: a radio unit or a DWS.

Note

Status messages from a DWS are always sent to the whole group.

5.2.3.13 Time for Delivery Reports

This parameter restricts the delivery time of SDS messages on the air by the base stations. If the used
channel is so congested that delivery is not successful within this time, then the sending is cancelled. A
failure is reported to an application that sent the message; radio terminals do not receive delivery reports for
group addressed SDSs.

When long concatenated (multipart SDS) messages are sent or downlink channels are congested the delivery
time should be increased to avoid failures due to timeout. Due to queuing mechanisms the parameter's value
should not be less than 40s if a message's delivery is more important than the message's age on arrival.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 125/466
If the user has SDS maximum delivery time requirements, then this parameter should be set accordingly.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Unit seconds
Default value 15 seconds
Legal values integers from 1 to 60 seconds, with the increment of 1 second.
Range from 1 to 60 seconds. See the note below.
Change effective from sending the next data message

Keywords: *data messages

Note

The minimum value of this parameter is 1 seconds, but this is not a reasonable setting. Therefore, the actual
minimum value is 5 seconds: with all parameter values less than 5s, DXT uses internally 5s.

5.2.3.14 Message Delivery to Combination of Groups

Defines whether group addressed status and SDS messages are sent to the whole combined group or
only to the original group.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value None
Legal values None, Status Messages, SDS Messages, and Both (Status & SDS)
Change effective from sending the next data message

Note
The parameter is effective only when the data message is sent to a member group. When the message is
sent to the base group, it is always sent to each constituent group.

5.2.3.15 Download Group to Radios

Specifies how the changes made to a group are downloaded to the radio units.

Table 13 explains the meanings of the parameter values in relation to certain group operations.

Table 13 : Values of the parameter Download Group to Radios

Operation Downloading Used Downloading not Used

Adding a member to a group Addition with DGNA* No downloading
Removal of members Removals with DGNA* No downloading
Deletion of a group Deletion with DGNA* No downloading

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

126/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 13: Values of the parameter Download Group to Radios (cont'd.)

Operation Downloading Used Downloading not Used

Roaming indication (in) of a Activation with **) No downloading
mobile subscriber D-ATTCH-DETACH
Roaming indication (out) of a Deactivation with **) No downloading
mobile subscriber D-ATTACH-DETACH

*) DGNA message stands for Dynamic Group Number Assignment, defined by TETRA Supplementary
Service standard

**) TETRA D-ATTACH-DETACH-GROUP-ID - message

Parameter value Downloading Used tells the system whether system-initiated signalling is used or not. If
downloading is not used, there will be no activations or deactivations due to roaming or due to DWS-initiated
group or member operations.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Downloading used (marked)
Legal values Downloading used (marked)
Downloading not used (not marked)
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

For information on how to use different group concepts (normal group, common number for dispatchers,
background group or status display), refer to document Group Management, DN00126433.

Keywords: *group management

5.2.3.16 Notification to Last Dispatcher

Specifies whether the last dispatcher is informed when he/she is leaving the group. It is not necessary to
have a dispatcher in the group.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value no marked; notification will not be sent
Legal values marked; notification will be sent
not marked; notification will not be sent
Change effective immediately

5.2.4 ISI talk group linking

5.2.4.1 Local ISI group linking mode

Defines whether the group takes part in an ISI group linking, that is, group communication is expanded
over ISI.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 127/466
 Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Not linked
Legal values Not linked / Participating / Controlling
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.4.2 GTSI of the groups taking part in the link

Defines the list of participating groups to which this group is linked when this group is in the controlling mode
for the ISI link. It is mandatory to list at least one group address of another TETRA network.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value None
Legal values 1 to 10 GTSI
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.4.3 GTSI of the group controlling the link

Defines the GTSI of the controlling group address to which this group is linked when this group is in
participating mode for the ISI link. It is mandatory to define one group address of another TETRA network.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value None
Legal values 1 GTSI
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.5 Signalling

5.2.5.1 Call Setup Time

A group call is started immediately when all required resources are allocated. The Call Setup Time parameter
specifies the time after which a group call is started although all resources are not allocated for other than the
call-initiating group member (that is, all active group members and dispatchers will not hear the group call
from the beginning but they join the group call when the resources are allocated).

Starting conditions concerning the party initiating the group call are determined by the system parameter
Max resource queuing time.

Call Setup Time defines the additional time for queuing the other group call resources after the calling
party resources have been obtained (see system parameter Max resource queuing time). After the timer
expires, the group call is started, and the missing resources will be queued until they have been obtained,
or until the call ends. However, if all resources for the group call are obtained, the group call is started
immediately despite the timer values.

This parameter is not used in emergency calls. Emergency group call is started immediately after the calling
party resources have been obtained.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

128/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Unit milliseconds, seconds, and minutes
Default value 2 seconds
Legal values integers from 0 milliseconds to 60 minutes, with the increment of 10 ms
Special values 0: the call is started quickly, and it is possible that not all the group
members will hear the speech item from its beginning. Late Entry allows
them to join the call later.
Related System parameter Max resource queuing time
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

Define this parameter during the pilot phase of the system.

Table 14 : Using the parameters for group calls

System parameter Max Resource Queuing Time Group parameter Call Setup Time
– used in individual calls for calling and called used for called subscribers (other than the call
subscriber in all queuing initiating group members) in group calls
– used for calling subscriber (group call initiating
subscriber) in group call setup

Table 15 : Interdependency of Time limits: Call Setup Time and Max Resource Queuing Time

Your preference System Parameter Max Group parameter Time limits:

Resource Queuing Time Call setup time
how fast to set up the call long period (e.g.> 30 seconds) short period (even 0 seconds)
as many group members as long period (e.g.> 30 seconds) medium (e.g. from 5 to 10
possible to join the call from the seconds)
beginning

Keywords: *timeouts

5.2.5.2 Call Duration

Specifies the maximum duration of one group call in this group. After this, the call resources are released.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Unit days, hours and minutes
Default value For normal groups 2 hours
For dedicated data groups 30 days
Legal values from 1 minute to 30 days, with the increment of 1 min.
Range from 1 minute to 30 days
Change effective from the next call setup

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 129/466
Additional information

Does not affect emergency calls

The call will normally be terminated as defined with the group parameters Call Control Resource and Radio
Path. However, if frequent speech items occur, the call will be terminated as defined with this parameter.
Keywords: *timeouts

5.2.5.3 Speech Item Duration

Specifies the maximum time for one speech item in this group's group calls.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Unit minutes and seconds
Default value 1 minute
Legal values integers from 1 second to 60 minutes, with the increment of 1 second
Range from 1 to 3600
Related parameter System parameter Refresh time for speech items
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

Does not affect emergency calls.

Keywords: *timeouts

5.2.5.4 Latency Time

Specifies the time before granting a new speech item after a speech item has just ended, that is the minimum
time between two successive speech items.
During the latency time several group members may press the PTT to request for a speech item, and their
requests are added to the speech item queue. After the latency time, the system gives the speech item to the
subscriber with the highest priority. The recent user priority parameter is also taken into consideration when
selecting the next speaker. If several subscribers have the same priority, the system uses the arrival times
of their speech item requests.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Unit milliseconds
Default value 400
Legal values integers from 0 to 3000 , with the increment of 100
Range from 0 to 3000
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

Define the parameter during the pilot phase of the system.

Keywords: *timeouts

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

130/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Additional information

Using a fairly short latency time does not slow down the conversation rhythm considerably. It increases the
system's possibility to perform signalling on the traffic channel, for example priority scanning, neighbour
cell broadcasts and status messages.
The latency time is added to the call release time (see Section 5.2.5.13 ).

5.2.5.5 Activate Late Entry

Specifies how the system handles those group members who could not join in a group call from the
beginning. Such members are those:
• who were outside the group area
• whose radios were turned off
• who were in an individual call or in another group call, in packet data transmission
• whose signalling reception was prevented temporarily because of a fading, failure, or shadow area
on the radio path
• who started scanning or changed scanning list or priorities, or
• who have joined the group after the call was set up.

Type changeable, the end user organisation defines

Default value not marked; Late Entry is not activated
Legal values marked or an empty check box. If you mark the check box, Late Entry
Enabled is activated
Related Group parameter Activate Priority Scanning
parameters Group parameter Late Entry: Fast Period: Number of Messages,
Messages Interval; Slow Period: Messages Interval
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

Late entry signalling is done on the control channel in the group's maximum area on the cells from which
the traffic channel has been reserved for the call.

Recommendations

Define this parameter during the pilot phase of the system.

5.2.5.6 Late Entry: Fast Period: Number of Messages, Messages Interval; Slow
Period: Messages Interval

Specify the timing of the Late Entry messaging on control channels. Two intervals are used: one for fast and
one for slow periods. Fast period is controlled by parameters Number of Messages and Messages Interval:
LE messages are sent as many times as defined with the parameter Number of Messages, and at intervals
defined with the parameter Messages Interval. During slow period, LE messages are sent at intervals
defined with the parameter Slow Period: Messages Interval until the call is released from the air interface
(approximate value). These attributes are effective only when the Activate Late Entry attribute is set to on.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 131/466
 Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value 1
Related Group parameter Activate Late Entry
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

Table 16 : Late Entry attributes

Attribute Specifies Allowed values Default value

Fast Period: sending interval at the from 100 ms to 2000 800 ms
Messages beginning of the call, ms, with the increment
Interval that is the fast period of 100 ms
Fast period: specifies the number of from 1 to 5 1
Number of messages sent during
Messages the fast period
Slow Period: sending interval after from 100 ms to 5000 2 000 ms
Messages the fast period, that is ms, with the increment
Interval the slow period of 100 ms

CAUTION
Do not change the settings if you do not know the effects in the network. Unnecessary short times may
cause overload in the system.

Note

If two or three constituent groups participate in the combined group call, the value of Fast Period: Number
of Messages is one.

If more than three constituent groups participate in the combined group call, the value of Fast Period:
Number of Messages is zero (Fast Period is not in use).

Recommendations

Define this parameter during the pilot phase of the system.

5.2.5.7 Default Scanning Priority

Specifies the default scanning priority for the group's members. When new members are added to this group,
the system will set the group's scanning priority to this value for each added member.

This parameter is effective only

• if the group parameter Downloading Used is set to On and the dispatcher adds the radio to the
group, and

• if the radio terminal will accept the Class of Usage (CoU) setting from the system.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

132/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Normal Priority
Legal values Not Scanned, Low Priority, Normal Priority, High Priority, Background
Group, Selected Group
Related Group parameters Area Type and Group Mode
parameters
Change effective when new members are added to the group

Note
When defining background group to the system, the value of this parameter must be Background Group,
the Group Mode parameter must be set to Background and Area Type to fixed.

Note

Background Group value can be selected only in group creation and it cannot be changed afterwards.

Note

The Selected Group value enables the Dispatcher to select a talk group on behalf of radio terminal users.
The system uses the Default Scanning Priority value Selected Group when members are added to this group.
This operation does not work, however, if the Group Mode parameter has the value Backround Group.

5.2.5.8 Activate Priority Scanning

Specifies whether the radio subscribers can priority-scan this group.

Enabling priority scanning means that when a call starts in this group, the Late Entry message will be sent
on the traffic channels of the other group calls. Radio subscribers who are engaged in another group call
start to receive traffic from this group if 1) the radio subscribers have scanning on, and 2) the priority of this
group is higher than in the user's current group call.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value not marked; Priority scanning is not activated
Legal values marked or an empty check box. If you mark the check box, Priority
scanning is activated
Related Group parameter Activate Late Entry
parameters Group parameter Late Entry: Fast Period: Number of Messages,
Messages Interval; Slow Period: Messages Interval
Radio terminal parameter Tx scanning enabled
Change effective from the next call setup

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 133/466
Note

The priority scanning is effective in the core area of the group on the cells from which the traffic channel
has been reserved for that call.

Additional information

The Activate priority scanning parameter is effective when parameter Activate Late Entry must be set to on.

Recommendations

Define this parameter during the pilot phase of the system.

5.2.5.9 Priority Scanning: Scope

Specifies the scope of priority scanning.

Type changeable
Default value All Groups
Legal values - All Groups: The priority scanning is sent on all traffic channels
reserved for group calls.
- Only Same Organisation: The priority scanning is sent on the
traffic channels that are reserved for groups belonging to the same
organisation.
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.5.10 Priority Scanning: Setup Priority

Priority to send first D-SETUP message related priority scanning.

Type changeable
Default value Immediate Stealing
Legal values - Immediate Stealing: Specifies that the priority for sending first Setup
messages on traffic channels allows immediate stealing from the traffic
(may cause disruption to voice quality)
- Steal when Convenient: Specifies that the priority for sending the
first setup message on traffic channels allows stealing from the traffic
after some time from previous stealing (may cause minor disruption
to the voice quality)
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.5.11 Priority Scanning: Fast Period: Priority

Priority to send fast period D-SETUP message related to priority scanning.

Type changeable
Default value Steal when Convenient

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

134/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values - Steal when Convenient. Specifies that the priority for sending Late
Entries on traffic channels with 'fast period' allows stealing from the
traffic after some time from previous stealing (may cause minor
disruption to the voice quality)
- No Stealing. Specifies that the priority for sending Late Entries on
traffic channels with 'fast period' is normal priority message (no stealing
from traffic, that is, no disruption to the voice quality)
Change effective from the next call setup

5.2.5.12 Priority Scanning: Fast Period: Number of Messages, Messages Interval;

Slow Period: Messages Interval

Specify the timing of the Late Entry messaging on traffic channels. Two intervals are used: one for fast and
one for slow periods. Fast period is controlled with the parameters Priority Scanning: Fast Period: Messages
Interval and Priority Scanning: Fast Period: Number of Messages. Late entry messages are sent as many
times as defined with the parameter Priority Scanning: Fast Period: Number of Messages, and at intervals
defined with the parameter Priority Scanning: Fast Period: Messages Interval. By defining the value of the
parameter Priority Scanning: Fast Period: Number of Messages as 0, only slow period is used. During slow
period, Late Entry messages are sent at intervals defined with the parameter Priority Scanning: Slow Period:
Messages Interval until the call is released from the air interface. These attributes are effective only when
the Activate Priority Scanning attribute is set to On.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default and legal Table 17 provides explanations, allowed values, and default values
values for these attributes
Related Group parameter Activate Priority Scanning
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

Table 17 : Late entry intervals: Priority Scanning attributes

Attribute Specifies Allowed values Default value

Priority Scanning: Fast sending interval at from 100 ms to 2000 800 ms
Period: Messages the beginning of the ms, with the increment
Interval call, that is the fast of 100 ms
period
Priority Scanning: Fast number of messages from 1 to 5. Special 1
Period: Number of sent during the fast value 0 (= only the LE
Messages period slow period is in use)
Priority Scanning: sending interval after from 2000 ms to 5000 2 000 ms
Slow Period: the fast period, that ms, with the increment
Messages Interval is the slow period of 100 ms (see Note 1)

Note 1: Even though Slow Period accepts lower interval entries than 2000ms, normally the lowest interval
in the air interface is 2000ms.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 135/466
CAUTION
Do not change the settings if you do not know the effects in the network. Too short times may cause
overload in the system.

Note

If two or three constituent groups participate in the combined group call, the value of Fast Period: Number
of Messages is one.

If more than three constituent groups participate in the combined group call, the value of Fast Period:
Number of Messages is zero (Fast Period is not in use).

Recommendations

Define this parameter during the pilot phase of the system.

5.2.5.13 Radio Path

When the timer expires, the group call is released from the radio path. A new speech item request before the
timer's expiration resets the radio path timer. Specifies the maximum time for an active POC group call on
a radio path without a speech item. The radio path timer starts when the speech item and the associated
latency time end, and there are no requests in the speech item queue. When the timer expires, the group
call is released from the radio path. A new speech item request before the timer's expiration resets the
radio path timer.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Unit seconds
Default value 6 seconds
Legal values integers from 1 to 60 seconds, with the increment of 1 second
Range from 1 to 60 seconds
Related Group parameter Call Control Resource
parameters Group parameter Latency Time
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

Unnecessary short times may cause load in the system.

This parameter is not in use when making an emergency call.

Recommendations

Define this parameter during the pilot phase of the system.

Keywords: *timeouts

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

136/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
5.2.5.14 Call Control Resource

Expiration of the call control resource timer causes total release of the group call. The difference to the radio
path timer is that when the radio path timer releases a call from the radio path, all other resources (for example,
speech lines between DXTs and call software instances) remain until the call control resource timer expires.

If the call control resource timer expires before the radio path timer, the call is also released from the radio
path. The call is reactivated, causing a timer reset, when a new setup or speech item request is received
before the timer expires.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Unit seconds
Default value 10 seconds
Legal values integers from 1 to 60 seconds, with the increment of 1 second.
Range from 1 to 60 seconds
Change effective from the next call setup

Note

The timer Call Control Resource is not active if a PSTN/PABX subscriber participates in a group call.
When the PSTN/PABX subscriber is not anymore involved in the group call, the parameter Call Control
Resource is enabled.

Additional information

Unnecessary short times may cause load in the system.

This parameter is not in use when making an emergency call.

Recommendations

Define the general use of the parameter during the pilot phase of the system.

Keywords: *timeouts

5.2.5.15 Energy Economy

Specifies in which way the group-addressed signalling is sent: immediately, group-specific, or both. The
group-specific value means that the group signalling is sent according to the organisation block specific
Energy Economy Group parameters.
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value Immediate
Legal values Immediate, Group Specific, Both
Related Organisation block parameters:
parameters Energy Economy Group: Energy Saving Mode
Energy Economy Group: Start Point Frame Number

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 137/466
Note
In combined group calls, the parameter value Both is interpreted as value Group Specific. That is, the
Immediate sending is disregarded in that case.

5.2.5.16 Secondary Control Channel use

This parameter defines the Secondary Control Channel (SCCH) use for the group traffic (call setups and
SDS/status).
Type changeable, the end user organisation defines
Default value 1 = Allocated CCCH (group addressed messages sent only on the
selected Common Control Channel (MCCH or CSCCH)
Legal values 0-2
0 = All CCCH (group addressed messages sent on all CCCHs)
1 = Allocated CCCH (group addressed messages sent only on the
selected CCCH)
2 = Allocated CCCH and MCCH (for the mobile station which does not
support CSCCH)
Related Organisation block attribute Common Secondary Control Channels:
parameters SCCH Class
Change effective immediately

Note
Only value 0 (group addressed messages sent on all CCCHs) is applicable, if the Load based SCCH is used
for the group. Refer to Organisation block attribute Common Secondary Control Channels: SCCH Class.

WARNING
The value 0 (group addressed messages sent on all CCCHs) has to be used, if not sure that all group
members belong to the same SCCH Class. Otherwise there is a risk that group members miss group calls or
group addressed SDS/status messages.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

138/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note

When the SCCH class of the organization block (OB) is changed with the parameter Common Secondary
Control Channels: SCCH Class, in the group traffic the new SCCH class value is taken into use at a
different time by different group members. Therefore it is recommended to make the change according
to the process below:

1) Change the SCCH group parameter Secondary Control Channel use to indicate that the group addressed
DL messages are sent on all CCCHs (value 0).

2) Change the SCCH class in the OB data by using parameter Common Secondary Control Channels: SCCH
Class. (The SCCH class of the MS and the group, where the MS is a member, should be the same.)

3) Return the SCCH group parameter to value 1 "sent only on the selected CCCH" or value 2 "on selected
CCCH and on MCCH" (as it was before starting the procedure) after it is assumed that all group members
have re-registered at least once after the step 2.

5.2.6 Entry Rights

Specifies the following rights:

• Right for the radio subscribers of the selected organisation blocks to join this group by themselves.

• Right for the radio subscribers of the selected organisation blocks to make emergency calls to this
group.

You define this right as a list of organisation blocks, or the definition is All Organisations or None. If a
radio subscriber has the right in an organisation block, the radio subscriber of the defined block and its
suborganisations have the right, too. The value All Organisations overrules all other definitions and can be
used, for example, in a special situation where there is a need for a flexible group formation.
Type changeable
Default value no rights
Legal values all organisations, list of organisations (up to 75), no organisation blocks
(=no rights)
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Value none is used, for example, when a common number for dispatchers is created.

Recommendations

For information on how to use different group concepts (normal group, common number for dispatchers,
background group or status display), refer to document Group Management, DN00126433.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 139/466
5.2.7 Security

5.2.7.1 Encryption Mode

Specifies the usage of end-to-end encryption in group calls.

Type changeable
Default value Clear Voice Override Allowed
Legal values No End to End Encryption, Clear Voice Override Allowed, and Always
End to End Encrypted.
Related System parameter Clear emergency call in always E2EE group (298)
parameters

Note

Only those subscribers with the parameter Enable Participation in End-to-End Encrypted Calls set to On
can be members of a group which has the parameter set to Always End to End Encrypted or Clear Voice
Override Allowed.

5.2.7.2 Encryption Type

Specifies whether the group communication is air-interface-encrypted or not. If encryption is used, this
parameter also tells the group-communication encryption algorithm.
Type changeable
Default value No Encryption
Legal values No Encryption, TEA1, TEA2, TEA3
Related Radio subscriber parameter Air Interface Encryption Method
parameters
Change effective from the next call setup in case of a call setup
immediately in case of registering a subscriber as a member of a group

Note
The values of the group parameter Encryption Type and the radio subscriber parameter Air Interface
Encryption Method must be same, or the value of the group parameter Encryption Type must be set to value
No Encryption to enable the radio subscriber to join the group. After the value of the radio subscriber
parameter has been changed, the radio subscriber must re-register to join the group.

5.2.8 Lifetime

5.2.8.1 Lifetime in Use

This parameter specifies whether the group lifetime is used or not.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

140/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Default value Yes
Legal values Yes, No

5.2.8.2 Group Lifetime

If the lifetime for group is in use, this parameter specifies when the system automatically deletes the group
at a definite time in the future.
Type changeable
Unit days
Default value No default value
Legal values 0 — 366
Related Group parameter Lifetime in Use
parameters

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 141/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

142/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
6 Group overlay parameters
This chapter describes the group overlay parameters. These parameters are also described in the DWS
Management User's Guide, DN00132209.

6.1 Managing the group overlay parameters

The following table shows what you need to manage the group overlay parameters.

Table 18 : Managing the group overlay parameters

Topic Information
Tools The Group Overlay Management Application; typically the application
runs in the DWS, or in a 3rd-party TCS client.
User interface GUI running on Microsoft Windows (the interface consists of a series
of windows, dialogues, and menus).
Required rights The workstation must have rights to organisation block the group
belongs. These rights are set by using the workstation user specific
attributes: administrative rights related to groups.
When the values are The group parameters are defined when the group is added to the
given system.

6.2 Parameters

6.2.1 Identification

6.2.1.1 Organisation block

Each group always belongs to one organisation or suborganisation, that is, to an organisation block.

Dispatchers and other workstation users can operate and manage this group if they have the required
communication and administrative rights to the organisation block to which this group belongs. The group can
include members also from any organisation block.
Type unchangeable after creation, the end user organisation defines
Default value depends on the group-creation procedure
Legal values any organisation block created in the system

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 143/466
 Related if the group parameter Calls: Dispatcher call has the setting Individual
parameters call rights, the radio subscribers who have call rights to the group's
organisation block can make individual calls to the group's dispatcher.
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the group.

6.2.1.2 Group Overlay Identity

Uniquely identifies a group in a TETRA network. Each group has a identity of its own. It consists of the
following three parts:

• MCC (Mobile Country Code), which is the same for all subscribers in one TETRA system;

• MNC (Mobile Network Code), which is the same for all subscribers in one TETRA system;

• GSSI (Group Short Subscriber Identity), which is unique for each group in one TETRA system. As a
result, the GSSI is used as a group identifier in the Airbus DS TETRA system.

When you define the identity of a group, you type the GSSI. The others, MCC and MNC, are filled in
automatically. You cannot change the MCC or MNC.
Type unchangeable after creation, the end user organisation defines
Default value no
Legal values non-reserved numbers from 1 to 9999999 with integer of 1; additionally
depends on the numbering scheme
Range from 1 to 9999999
Related System-specific parameters Country code and Network code
parameters
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Consult the numbering plan if available.

Additional information

ITSI and GTSI are selected from the same numbering space.

Note
After saving a new group, you cannot change the GTSI. To change the GTSI, you have to delete the group
and then recreate the group using a different GTSI.

Keywords: *numbering

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

144/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
6.2.1.3 Mnemonic

Specifies an alias name given to a group. Mnemonics are used in user interfaces in addition to GSSIs in
order to simplify the group identification. The mnemonics are displayed:

• In the Groups dialogue of the Airbus DS TETRA Dispatcher Workstation Application.

• In Airbus DS TETRA radio terminals, provided that a dispatcher joins the subscriber to the group, and
that the group parameter Download group to radios is set to Downloading used.

Type changeable, the end user organisation defines

Legal values a text string having maximum of 15 characters
Related Group parameter Download group to radios
parameters
Change effective immediately

Additional information

The Airbus DS TETRA system allows to use the same mnemonic with several groups. If the mnemonic is
changed, the current radio subscriber members of the group will not be informed.

Default values shown on the user interface can depend on the selected procedure to create the group.

Note

You may be unable to change the mnemonic of a group preprogrammed to the radio with the Parametering
and Configuration application using Group Management application (this depends on the terminal).

6.2.2 Communication

6.2.2.1 Individual calls allowed

Specifies whether the user can activate the individual call rights service for the group overlay. Thus, the radio
subscribers that are in group overlay area can make individual calls to the local group through the group
overlay.
Type changeable
Default value off
Legal values on, off

6.2.2.2 Cover group

Cover group is a talk group which is used in terminal devices when they want to use location-based group call
service. All members can set up a call to the same cover group but the call is established only locally.

A cover group is provisioned to the system as a normal talk group and it is linked to the group overlay. The
cover group is used to define memberships for the location-based group call.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 145/466
 Type unchangeable after creation
Default value —
Legal values GSSI
Range GSSI
Related Parameters class 45 (WO command group): Location-based group
parameters call in use (133)
Change effective immediately

Additional information

In management applications, the link will be visible within cover group and group overlay properties.

In communication applications, cover groups and local groups can be distinguished from the other normal
talk groups with appropriate mnemonics In communication application.

Note

You can link a group to a group overlay (in order to create a cover group) only after the group overlay is
created, not during the group-overlay creation phase.

Keywords: *numbering

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

146/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
7 Client application parameters
This chapter describes the Client application parameters.

7.1 Managing the Client application parameters

The following table shows which tools and rights you need to manage the Client application parameters.

Table 19 : Managing the Client application parameters

Topic Information
Tools Client Application Management application for identification
parameters; typically the application runs in the DWS, or in a 3rd-party
TCS client.
User interface GUI running on Microsoft Windows (the interface consists of a series
of windows, dialogues, and menus).
Required rights DWS management rights.
When the values are Typically during the commissioning prior to taking the workstation into
given use.

7.2 Parameters

7.2.1 Identification

7.2.1.1 Organisation block

Each client application belongs always to one organisation or suborganisation, that is, to one organisation
block. The client application's organisation block affects the following:

• When a subscriber is making an individual call to a dispatcher using the client's ISSI, the workstation
user is allowed to receive the call if the calling subscriber has adequate communication rights to the
organisation block to which the client application belongs.

• Also the called party must have rights to receive calls from the organisation block to which the client
belongs.

The organisation block parameter Identifier uniquely identifies an organisation block in the system. The
number can consists of maximum six integers where each integer represents an organisation level and
identifies an organisation block in that level uniquely. The displaying format of the number is: a string in which
the level IDs are separated by a hyphen, for example: 100 - 12 - 34 - 1234 - 22 - 2345.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 147/466
 Type unchangeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value The level identifiers of the organisation blocks can be defined as an
integer number in range.
Legal values any existing organisation block
Change effective immediately

7.2.1.2 Home Exchange

Specifies the home DXT of the client application.

Type unchangeable after creation, the end user organisation defines
Legal values shown in the Select home DXT selection box in the Client application
Change effective immediately

7.2.1.3 Individual Short Subscriber Identity (ISSI)

Identifies the client application in the system.

Type unchangeable after creation, the end user organisation defines
Legal values non–zero 24–bit number from 1 to 9 999 999
Change effective immediately

7.2.1.4 Fleet Specific Short number (FSSN) domain

A number that uniquely defines an FSSN domain in the system.

Type changeable
Legal values from 1 to 6 digits
Change effective from the next call setup

7.2.1.5 Fleet Specific Short number (FSSN) Fleet Identifier

A number that allows the client application to use a short number when communicating with each other
inside the same FSSN domain. If the FSSN domain contains several fleets, the FSSN is divided into fleet
identifier (FID) and member identifier (MID). FID a identifies a fleet inside the FSSN domain. MID identifies
a subscriber inside one fleet.
Type changeable
Legal values The number can have 1 to 6 digits. Fleet identifier can be 1 to 5 digits
and rest of the FSSN number is member identifier.
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

148/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
7.2.1.6 PABX numbering integrated to fleet

Specifies if the client can make/receive calls to PABX using FSSN numbering, that is, if that fleet's PABX
extension numbers are included in calling party's FSSN numbering scheme.
Type changeable
Default value off
Legal values on, off
Change effective immediately

Note
If the FSSN is not specified, PABX numbering integrated to fleet cannot be used.

7.2.1.7 Mobile subscriber ISDN numbers (MSISDN)

Numbers that allow the client application to communicate with other public networks outside the Airbus DS
TETRA network.
Type changeable
Legal values up to 5 MSISDNs. One MSISDN number can have up to 15 digits.
Change effective immediately

Additional information

There may be several MSISDN numbers, from which one is selected as default value.

7.2.1.8 Mnemonic

Specifies an alias name given to a client. The mnemonic is shown in the Client Application Management
application.
Type changeable
Legal values a text string having maximum of 15 characters
Change effective immediately

Additional information

The Airbus DS TETRA system allows you to use the same mnemonic with several clients.

7.2.2 Communication

7.2.2.1 Voice Communication enabled

Specifies whether the client application uses voice communication features or not.
Type changeable
Default value off

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 149/466
 Legal values on, off
Change effective immediately

7.2.2.2 Interface unit

This parameter specifies the interconnecting units, the TDSCs in the DSC, which connect the workstation
to the network. The DSC and the TDSC units can be either physical or virtual. For details see manual
Integrating the TETRA System, DN05225513.

The setting of this parameter (TDSC identification) is derived from the DXT equipment database. The
identification is defined using a CCITT MML session.
Type changeable using a CCITT MML session, typically defined by the
technical operator
Legal values shown in the Select TDSC Interface Unit dialogue in the Client
Application Management application
Range TDSCn-m, where n can be from 0 to 127, and m can be from 0 to 5
Change effective immediately

Additional information

For further information, see document DWS Management User's Guide, DN00132209.

7.2.2.3 Call Forwarding on All Calls

Activates forwarding of all individual calls. This will override all other call forwarding services.
Type changeable
Default value false
Legal values true, false
Related Client application parameters Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
parameters Number), Forwarded to number (TETRA Number), Gateway SSI
Change effective from the next call setup

7.2.2.4 Call Forwarding on No Answer

Activates call forwarding if the called party does not answer within a certain time period defined with the
system parameter CFNRy timer for WS subscribers. This parameter applies only to individual calls.
Type changeable
Default value false
Legal values true, false
Related Client application parameters Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
parameters Number), Forwarded to number (TETRA Number), Gateway SSI
System parameter CFNRy timer for WS subscribers
Change effective from the next call setup

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

150/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
7.2.2.5 Call Forwarding on Not Reachable

Activates call forwarding if called party is not reachable. The called party is not reachable when he/she is not
registered to the network, or is outside of network coverage area. This parameter concerns only individual
calls.
Type changeable
Default value false
Legal values true, false
Related Client application parameters Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
parameters Number), Forwarded to number (TETRA Number), Gateway SSI
Change effective from the next call setup

7.2.2.6 Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External Number)

The destination number where the calls to the called party are forwarded if some of the above call forwarding
services is enabled. This can be a voice mail number, any PSTN/PABX number or an MSISDN number
of a TETRA subscriber.
Type changeable
Legal values maximum of 24 digits (including country and network codes and prefixes)
Related System parameter CFNRy timer for WS subscribers
parameters Client application Call Forwarding parameters
Change effective from the next call setup

7.2.2.7 Forwarded to number (TETRA Number)

The alternative destination number where the calls to the called party are forwarded if some of the above call
forwarding services is enabled. This can be an ITSI or ISSI number of a TETRA subscriber.
Type changeable
Legal values ITSI = MCC + MNC + ISSI
Related Client application Call Forwarding parameters
parameters System parameter CFNRy timer for WS subscribers
Change effective from the next call setup

7.2.2.8 Gateway SSI

The parameter is used to select the needed destination in the case the forwarded to number is a PSTN/PABX
number.
Type changeable
Legal values maximum of 8 digits
Related Client application parameter Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
parameters Number)
Change effective from the next call setup

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 151/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

152/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
8 External line and connection group parameters
This chapter describes the external line and connection group parameters. External lines are physical lines
and connection groups are logical entities used for routing calls between external telephone systems and
the Airbus DS TETRA network.

8.1 Managing the external line and connection group parameters

The following table lists what you need to manage the external line and connection group parameters.

Table 20 : Managing the external line and connection group parameters

Topic Information
Tools MML session through an MML terminal
User interface MMI (man machine interface)
Required rights rights to MML session and to the appropriate MML commands
When the values are Typically during the system integration.
given

For further details, please refer to the respective Command Reference Manual for the DXT.

8.2 External line parameters (PPC, PPD, PPE, PPI and PPM
commands)
External line parameters are used when creating, deleting, copying, interrogating and modifying the settings
of the external line (PPC, PPD, PPE, PPI and PPM commands).
• For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PP External Line Parameter Handling,
DN9838035.

Notice that a separate set of external line parameters is also used when adding or removing analog, ISDN,
ISI PCM, FNIM ET PCM or SIP gateway lines to a TETRA exchange (PGS and PGE commands). For more
information, see Section 8.5 Connection group parameters. See also DXT Command Reference Manual:
PG Connection Group Data Handling, DN0171487.

8.3 External line state parameters (PSI and PSM commands)

The parameters in the PS command group (PSI and PSM commands) are used for modifying and
interrogating external line states.
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PS External Line State Handling, DN9837975.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 153/466
8.4 Special route parameters (PUC, PUM and PUI commands)
The parameters in the PU command group (PUC, PUM and PUI commands) are used for handling special
route definitions in the TETRA exchange.
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PU Special Route Definition for Number
Analysis Handling, DN0218485.

8.5 Connection group parameters (PGA, PGC, PGD, PGE, PGI,

PGM, PGR and PGS commands)
The parameters in the PG command group (PGA, PGC, PGD, PGE, PGI, PGM, PGR and PGS commands)
are used for handling connection groups in the TETRA exchange. They are also used to add, remove and
interrogate gateways, external lines, ISDN PCM, ISI PCM and SIP GW lines related to the connection group.
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PG Connection Group Data Handling,
DN0171487.

8.5.1 Connection group identifier

A numeric identifier of the selected connection group.
Type changeable
Legal values integers from 1 to 65535
Range from 1 to 65535
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

8.5.2 Line type

Identifies the type of lines for analog, ISDN PCM, ISI PCM, FNIM ET PCM, or SIP GW addition or removal.
Type changeable
Legal values ANL = analog line
ISP = ISDN PCM line
ISI = ISI PCM line
ETP = FNIM ET PCM line
SIP = SIP GW line

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

8.5.3 FNIM unit

Identifies the Fixed Network Interface Module (FNIM) to which or from which the external lines are added
or removed.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

154/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values index number of FNIM from 0 to 3
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Used only with analogue circuits.

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls

8.5.4 FNIM card

Identifies the used slot in Fixed Network Interface Module (FNIM).
Type changeable
Legal values card number (piu index) from 1 to 12
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Used only with analogue circuits.

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls

8.5.5 External line index

Specifies the used external line. For FNIM, this is the index of the line in the TLIA or TLIC plug-in unit (0..3).
For FNIM ET, this the index of the timeslot on the related PCM (0..29).
Type changeable
Legal values • for FNIM: from 0 to 3

• for FNIM ET: from 0 to 29

Change effective immediately

Additional Information

Used with analogue and FNIM ET circuits.

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls

8.5.6 PCM number

PCM circuit number to which the external lines are connected.
Type changeable
Legal values from 32 to 255

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 155/466
Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

8.5.7 Traffic channel reservation

Specifies the phase of the setup in which the traffic channels are reserved.

The PSTN may provide announcements and tones during the call set-up phase. In outgoing calls, when
the external network sends an indication that inband information is available, the TETRA call control may
connect the MS to the call so that the MS user is able to hear the announcements and tones from the PSTN.
This is possible when this parameter has been set to value Inband (I).

When the parameter has the value Offhook (O), the traffic channel is reserved when the called party answers.
Type changeable
Legal values I = Inband
O = Offhook
Special values In the case that a SIP GW line is selected, the only allowed value is
I = Inband.

Additional information

Used with ISDN PCM and ISI PCM circuits and with SIP GW lines.

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

8.5.8 Called party prefix

Called party prefix is a digit sequence which directs the call to the external line. The system adds these digits
to the called party number dialled by the calling TETRA subscriber. For example, these digits can be an
area code.
Type changeable
Default value no digits
Legal values up to ten digits with values from 0 to 9
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

8.5.9 Utilised Service

Specifies whether voice, voice and data or just data are used on the external lines.
Type changeable
Default value V = Voice
Legal values V = Voice
VD = Voice and data
D = Data

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

156/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Special values In the case that a SIP GW line is selected, the only allowed value is
V = Voice.
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

8.5.10 SIP GW identifier

Specifies the SIP GW identifier number. This parameter is used for TETRA IP transmission with the optional
SIP trunk for PSTN/PABX gateway feature.
Type changeable
Legal values from 1 to 5
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls

8.5.11 Related data

Specifies the related data to be displayed for connection groups.
Type changeable
Default value all connection group parameters (ALL)
Legal values • value for GW:

gateways

• values for LINE:

ISDN PCM

ISI PCM

• values for ALL:

all gateways

analogue line

ISDN PCM line

ISI PCM line

FNIM ET PCM line

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

Note

Value ALL is possible only when the connection group identifier has been given.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 157/466
Additional information

Information on this parameter is available only temporarily during the execution of the interrogate command.

8.5.12 Mnemonic
A Mnemonic is an alias name given to a connection group. The mnemonic is not unique in the system.
Type changeable
Legal values a text string having maximum of 31 characters
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

8.5.13 Connection type

Specifies the connection type.
Type unchangeable
Default value PABX
Legal values PABX = Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PSTN = Public Switched Telephone Network
ISI = Inter-System-Interface

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

8.5.14 Amount of extracted digits

Specifies the number of extracted digits of calling party's subscriber number when a TETRA subscriber is
calling out of TETRA network via this connection group.
Type unchangeable
Default value 0
Legal values from 0 to 10

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

8.5.15 Calling party prefix

Specifies, together with external line and connection group parameter Amount of extracted digits, the calling
line identification that can be shown to the called subscriber in the external system.
The Calling party prefix is a digit sequence which the system adds to the TETRA subscriber's number (calling
party's number) when the TETRA subscriber is calling out of a TETRA network via this connection group.
For example, if
• the TETRA subscriber's number is 1234567,

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

158/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 • the calling party prefix given with this parameters is 88, and
• the amount of extracted digits is 3 (see Section 8.5.14 )

the calling party identification that is forwarded to the external network is 88 4567.
Type changeable
Default value no digits
Legal values up to ten digits with values from 0 to 9
Related External line and connection group parameter Amount of extracted
parameters numbers
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Whether the calling line identification is shown in the external system, depends on connection between the
Airbus DS TETRA system and the external network.
Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

8.5.16 ISI version

Defines how the SDS and status messages are coded in the ISI interface and how authentication is done
for the migrating subscribers.
Type changeable
Default value Rel5.5 compatible
Legal values 0 = Rel5.5 compatible, 1 = Rel 6.0 compatible
Change effective immediately

8.5.17 Start tree for incoming CPI analysis

Defines the number analysis tree to be used for modifying the calling party number for incoming calls from
this connection group. Start tree for incoming CPI analysis is used in connection types ISI, PABX and PSTN.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0, and legal values integers from 101 to 9 999; with the increment of 1
Range Range from 0 to 9 999
Special values Special values value 0 reserved for the meaning “tree not defined”
Change effective immediately

8.5.18 Gateway ISSI

Specifies the ISSI (Individual Short Subscriber Identity) of a gateway. Used for the calling party number on
incoming calls from this connection group together with the number received from the external line.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 159/466
 Type changeable
Legal values from 1 000 000 to 16 777 215
default range from 16 767 000 to 16 777 199 with the increment of 1
Related System parameter Num gateway SSI range lower limit
parameters System parameter Num gateway SSI range higher limit
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *PSTN calls, *PABX calls, *ISI calls

Additional information

The value must be the same as in the radio terminals.

8.6 Interexchange speech line state handling parameters (POM

and POI commands)
The parameters in the PO command group (POM and POI commands) are used when modifying
interexchange speech line states between two TETRA exchanges (DXTs) using Pulse Code Modulated
(PCM) lines.
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PO Interexchange Speech Line State
Handling, DN00132396.

8.7 ET audio interface parameters (P1C, P1I and P1D commands)

The parameters in the P1 command group (P1C, P1I and P1D commands) are used for handling ET audio
interfaces.
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: P1 ET Audio Interface Handling,
TRADXTAPP00001.

8.7.1 Unit type

Defines the type of the unit.
Type changeable
Default value TDCS
Legal values TDCS
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *ET audio interface

8.7.2 Cartridge number

Defines the number of the cartridge

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

160/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Legal values Decimal number 0...127
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *ET audio interface

8.7.3 Card number

Defines the number of the card.
Type changeable
Legal values Decimal number 0...5
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *ET audio interface

8.7.4 Transcoding mode

Defines the mode of transcoding.

PCM coding means that one 64 kbits/second timeslot is reserved for each monitoring line.

TETRA coding means that one 8 kbits/second sub-timeslot is reserved for each monitoring line.
Type changeable
Legal values PCM = PCM coding
TETRA = TETRA coding
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *ET audio interface

8.7.5 PCM number and Time slot

Defines the PCM number ( = ET number) and the first time slot of the PCM. The PCM parameter accepts a
decimal number in the range from 32 to 1023 and the first time slot parameter accepts a decimal number in
the range from 1 to 31.
Type changeable
Legal values PCM: 32...1023
TSL: 1...31
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *ET audio interface

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 161/466
8.7.6 Number of monitoring lines

Defines the number of the monitoring lines. The parameter can be used in the PCM and TETRA transcoding
modes. The allowed value range depends on the connection type and the purpose for which the connection
is used. The parameter value is given as a decimal number.
Type changeable
Legal values PCM:
1…16
Archive recording: 1…30
TETRA:
LAPD connected client: 2, 10, 16
ET audio: 3, 7, 15, and with commercial option for enhanced capacity:
23, 31
Archive recording: 3, 7…247 (with the increase of eight: 7, 15, 23,
31…247)
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *ET audio interface

8.7.7 Sub timeslot

If TETRA transcoding is used with 3 selected monitoring lines, only half of the timeslot is used.
Type changeable
Default value the current value
Legal values LOW...SUB TIMESLOTS 0-3
HIGH...SUB TIMESLOTS 4-7
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *ET audio interface

8.7.8 Audio adjustment parameters

The audio adjustment parameters are:

• Tone volume

• Decoded speech volume

• Encoded speech volume

8.7.8.1 Tone volume

Defines the tone volume. The parameter is used when sending tones from the DXT.

The lowest tone volume value is 0 (= -20 dB) and the highest 40 (= +20 dB). The values of the tone volume
are accepted at intervals of 1. The default value is the current value.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

162/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Default value the current value
Legal values From 0 (= -20 dB) to 40 (= +20 dB) with the increment of 1
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *ET audio interface

8.7.8.2 Decoded speech volume

Defines the decoded speech volume. The parameter is used for outgoing speech.

The lowest volume value is 0 (= -20 dB) and the highest 40 (= +20 dB). The values of the tone volume are
accepted at intervals of 1. The default value is the current value.
Type changeable
Default value the current value
Legal values From 0 (= -20 dB) to 40 (= +20 dB) with the increment of 1
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *ET audio interface

8.7.8.3 Encoded speech volume

Defines the encoded speech volume. The parameter is used for incoming speech.

The lowest volume value is 0 (= -20 dB) and the highest 40 (= +20 dB). The values of the tone volume are
accepted at intervals of 1. The default value is the current value.
Type changeable
Default value the current value
Legal values From 0 (= -20 dB) to 40 (= +20 dB) with the increment of 1
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *ET audio interface

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 163/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

164/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
9 ISDN and ISI PCM parameters
This chapter describes the ISDN and ISI PCM parameters.

9.1 Managing the ISDN and ISI PCM parameters

The following table shows what you need to manage the ISDN and ISI PCM parameters.

Table 21 : Managing the ISDN and ISI PCM parameters

Topic Information
Tools MML session through an MML terminal
User interface MMI (man machine interface)
Required rights rights to MML session and to the appropriate MML commands
When the values are during network configuration
given

9.2 ISDN and ISI PCM parameters (PQC, PQD, PQE, PQI and
PQM commands)
The parameters in the PQ command group (PQC, PQD, PQE, PQI and PQM commands) are used for
handling ISDN and ISI PCM parameters.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PQ ISDN and ISI PCM Parameter Handling,
DN0171545.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 165/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

166/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
10 Radio network parameters
This chapter describes the radio network parameters. These parameters are defined to the DXTs and
a TBS receives them when the TBS is powered on or when the TBC or TTRX units have been restarted.
These parameters are grouped as follows:
• Location area parameters (Section 10.2 )
• Frequency parameters (Section 10.3 )
• Cell configuration parameters (Section 10.4 )
• Neighbour cell parameters (Section 10.5 )

10.1 Managing the radio network parameters

The following table shows what you need to manage the radio network parameters.

Table 22 : Managing the radio network parameters

Topic Information
Tools MML session through an MML terminal or DWS management
connected to DXT
User interface MMI (man machine interface)
Required rights rights to MML session and to the appropriate MML commands
When the values are during radio network configuration and when adding new TBSs to
given the system

10.2 Location area parameters (PLA, PLD, PLM, and PLI

commands)
The parameters in the PL command group (PLA, PLD, PLM and PLI commands) are used for defining
location areas of the DXT in the TETRA System.
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PL Location Area Configuration Handling,
DN98628196.

10.3 Frequency parameters

This section describes the frequency parameters.
The following figure illustrates the use of frequencies in phase-modulated channels and QAM channels.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 167/466
 Center f requency
Phase-modulated Ch of 50 kHz QAM Ch
or Given
25 kHz QAM Ch QAM Ch Ch not available
Ch X Ch X + 1 Ch X + 2 Ch X + 3 Ch X + 4

12 ,5 kHz 12 ,5 kHz

25 ,00 kHz 50 ,0 kHz

Figure 1 : Frequencies in phase-modulated channels and QAM channels

The principles presented in the figure apply to the parameters in this section. Notice that for the 50 kHz QAM
channel, the given frequency is Ch X + 2, even if the center frequency of the QAM channel is 12.5 kHz higher
than that. Also notice that in this case the channel Ch X + 3 must be left 'unused'.

10.3.1 Duplex spacing parameters (PFC and PFD command groups)

10.3.1.1 Duplex space index

This parameter specifies the duplex space as a decimal number. The index is expressed in the system with
record that can be handled by the system software. The index value and the duplex spacing given as kHz
(next parameter) form a pair.

TETRA allows to use eight different duplex spaces within one network.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Legal values integers from 0 to 7 with increment of one
Related Radio network parameter Duplex space
parameters

Note
Use the same duplex space index / duplex space definition throughout the network.

10.3.1.2 Duplex space

Specifies the frequency difference between uplink and downlink carriers. The duplex spacing and the duplex
space index value (previous parameter) form a pair. Figure 2 illustrates the duplex space.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

168/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Figure 2 : Duplex space

TETRA allows to use eight different duplex spaces within one network.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Legal values from 5 000 kHz to 100 000 kHz with the increment of 1 kHz
Range from 5 000 kHz to 100 000 kHz
Related Radio network parameter Duplex space index
parameters

Note
Use the same duplex space index / duplex space definition throughout the network

10.3.2 Frequency band (PFA and PFR commands)

Define the duplex spacing parameters before the frequency band definitions.

10.3.2.1 Frequency band index

Specifies a downlink frequency band used in the network as a decimal number. The index is expressed in the
system with a 4-bit record that can be handled by the system software. This index should correspond to
the band defined with the base and end frequencies given with radio network parameters Base frequency
and End frequency.
TETRA allows to define 16 bands in one network (for the used frequency bands, see the legal values below).
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the
radio–network configuration defines
Legal values 3 = 300 MHz
4 = 400 MHz
8 = 800 MHz
All other values = reserved.
Range from 0 to 15
Related Radio network parameter Base frequency
parameters Radio network parameter End frequency

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 169/466
Note
Use identical frequency band definitions throughout the network.

10.3.2.2 Base frequency

Specifies the lower end of the downlink frequency band. The uplink and its carriers are calculated using the
downlink parameters and duplex space.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Legal values depend on the frequency band allocated for the network and the band
of the base station
Range from 30 000 to 2 000 000 kHz

10.3.2.3 End frequency

Specifies the higher end of the downlink frequency band.

Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Legal values depend on the frequency band allocated for the network and the band
of the base station
Range from 30 000 to 2 000 000 kHz

10.3.2.4 Offset

Specifies the frequency offset. It allows to adjust the carrier frequencies so that the frequency band can be
fully used. Figure 3 illustrates the frequency offset.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

170/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Figure 3 : Frequency offset

Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio

network configuration defines
Default value 0 (no offset)
Legal values 0 (no offset), 1 (+6.25 kHz), 2 (-6.25 kHz), 3 (+12.5 kHz)
Range from 0 to 3

10.3.2.5 Reverse operation

Specifies whether the band allocated for uplink carriers uses lower frequencies than the band allocated for
downlink carriers (see Figure 4 ).

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 171/466
Figure 4 : Reverse operation

Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio

network configuration defines
Default value N (normal operation)
Legal values N (normal operation), R (reverse operation)
Related radio terminal parameters
parameters

10.3.3 Carrier pair (PFT and PFV commands)

Prior to giving the following parameters, you need to enter the frequency band index of the downlink band,
carriers of which you are defining.

10.3.3.1 Carrier pair numbers or frequencies

Specifies the format, either number of frequency, that you will use when you define carriers of the frequency
band.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Legal values NUM (numbers), FREQ (frequencies in kHz)
Change effective immediately

10.3.3.2 Carrier numbers

Specifies the downlink carriers of the frequency band using number, that is coefficients, instead of
frequencies. This parameter is used if you selected the value Numbers with the radio network parameter
Carrier pair numbers or frequencies.

The downlink carrier frequencies are calculated using the numbers given with this parameter and the radio
network parameters 10.3.2.2 , and 10.3.2.4 . The uplink carrier frequencies are calculated using the downlink
carrier frequencies and the radio network parameter 10.3.1.2 . Also the radio network parameter 10.3.2.5
affects how the frequencies are calculated.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

172/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 23 shows how the frequencies of the downlink/uplink pairs are calculated.

Table 23 : Calculating the carrier frequencies

Frequency Calculation
Downlink carrier frequencies base frequency + n x 25 kHz + offset ( n = setting given
with this parameter)
Uplink carrier frequency (Normal downlink carrier frequency - duplex space
operation)
Uplink carrier frequency (Reverse downlink carrier frequency + duplex space
operation)

Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration

defines
Legal values from 0 to 4095 with the increment of 1, depending on the frequency band
Related Radio network parameter End frequency
parameters
Change effective immediately

10.3.3.3 Carrier frequency

Specifies the downlink carriers of a frequency band in kHz. This parameter is used if you select the value
Frequencies in kHz with the radio network parameter Carrier pair numbers or frequencies.

Do not add or subtract the offset, since the system calculates the actual center frequencies of the downlink
carriers using the values given with this parameter and the radio network parameter 10.3.2.4 . Table 24
shows an example when the base frequency is 380 MHz, end frequency 381 MHz, and the offset +12.5 kHz.

Table 24 : An example of carrier frequencies

Frequencies given with this Actual centre frequency of Carrier number calculated by
parameter the carrier (in kHz) the system
380000 380012.5 0
380025 380037.5 1
380050 380062.5 2
380075 380087.5 3
... ... ...
380950 380062.5 38
380975 380087.5 39

The uplink carrier frequencies are calculated using the downlink carrier frequencies and the duplex spacing
(see Section 10.3.1.2 ). Also radio network parameter 10.3.2.5 affects how the frequencies are calculated,
see Table 23 .

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 173/466
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Legal values within the given frequency band
Change effective immediately

10.4 Cell configuration parameters

10.4.1 Identification parameters (PCA, PCC, PCN, PCR, PCD and PCI
commands)

The parameters in the PCA, PCC, PCN, PCR, PCD and PCI commands are used when adding, copying,
modifying, removing or deleting a cell. The parameters can also be used for interrogating cell definitions.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.2 Base station parameters (PCB command)

The parameters in the PCB command are used when defining a base station to a cell.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.2.1 Base station number

Specifies the base station of the cell you are configuring. The DXT will show a list of free base stations.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Legal values free base station created to the DXT equipment database

10.4.2.2 Combiner type

Specifies the type of the combiner system used in the base station defined with the previous parameter.
Type not changeable, defined when a base station is defined for a cell
Default value CAVITY
Legal values CAVITY, HYBRID, AUTO
Range CAVITY (cavity combiner, tuning of frequencies must be performed
manually at the base station site) AUTO (autotuning combiner that is
capable of tuning frequencies automatically,) HYBRID (hybrid combiner,
no need to tune)
Change effective immediately after base station definition

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

174/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Additional information

This parameter has no influence on the system software and it is used only for informative purposes.

10.4.3 Transceiver parameters (PCT and PCW commands)

The parameters in the PCT and PCW commands are used when defining or modifying the carrier and
transmitting power of a transceiver and the cell-specific ranking value of the carrier used by the given
transceiver.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.3.1 Base station number

Specifies the number of a TETRA base station, unique within the DXT.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Legal values from 0 to 251

10.4.3.2 TTRX index

Identifies the TTRX (TETRA transceiver) the parameters of which you are defining. A TBS can include from
one to eight TTRX, each of which provides one carrier pair.

The TTRX index is assigned based on the position of the TTRX unit in the TBS cabinet or cabinets. The
TTRXs are assigned numbers, starting at 0, from left to right. The one-cabinet TBS uses numbers from 0 to
3, and the two-cabinet TBS numbers from 0 to 7.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Legal values • integers from 0 to 3 for a one-cabinet TBS

• integers fro 0 to 7 for a two-cabinet TBS

10.4.3.3 Frequency band index

The frequency band index specifies the frequency band of the carrier pair. An identification of a carrier pair
consists of two parts: the Frequency band index and the Carrier number.

The frequency band needs to be identified to the network, see the frequency band parameter with the
same name (Section 10.3.2.1 ).
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Legal values from 0 to 15

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 175/466
 Related Radio network parameter (frequency band parameter) Frequency band
parameters index
Change effective after changing the TTRX state to WO-EX

Additional information

Before changing this parameter, set the TTRX to BL (blocked) or SE (separated) state.

Note

The combiner may require manual tuning.

10.4.3.4 Carrier number

Specifies the carrier pair used by the TTRX (TETRA Transceiver). An identification of a carrier pair consists
of the two parts: Frequency band index and Carrier number.

The frequency band need to include the carrier number you will enter with this parameter, see radio network
parameter 10.3.3.2 . The network-specific frequency plan defines how often the carriers can be reused in
a network.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Legal values carrier numbers of the frequency band as defined in the radio network's
frequency plans

Range from 0 to 4095 with the increment of 1, depending on the frequency band
Related Radio network parameter Carrier numbers
parameters
Change effective after changing the TTRX state to WO-EX

Additional information

Before changing this parameter, set the TTRX to BL (blocked) or SE (separated) state.

Note

The combiner may require manual tuning.

10.4.3.5 TX power

This parameter can be used for both phase modulated carriers and QAM carriers. The latter one is used in
TETRA Enhanced Data Service (TEDS).

The parameter specifies the transmitting power of the TTRX (TETRA transceiver). Mostly, all TTRXs in one
base station use the same setting. Setting of this parameter is an output of the radio network planning.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

176/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit W
Default values Phase modulated carriers: 2 = 25 W (with cavity combiner)
QAM carriers: 4 = 10 W (with cavity combiner)
Legal values see Tables 25 and 26
Change effective after changing the TTRX state to WO-EX

Table 25 : TX power class in phase modulated carriers

Setting in dB in W
1 46 40
2 44 25
3 42 15
4 40 10
5 38 6.3
6 36 4.0
7 34 2.5
8 32 1.6
9 30 1.0
10 28 0.6

Table 26 : TX power class in TEDS TTRX

Setting in dB in W
3 42 15 (only with
combiner
by-pass)
4 40 10
5 38 6.3
6 36 4.0
7 34 2.5
8 32 1.6
9 30 1.0
10 28 0.6

Additional information

Before changing this parameter, set the TTRX to BL (blocked) or SE (separated) state.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 177/466
10.4.3.6 Ranking value

With this parameter the user can define the order in which carriers used by a given transceiver are selected
for the TCH/MCCH use.

Note

Defining the preferred/prioritized MCCH selection is possible only if the commercial option for the preferred
MCCH functionality is bought. If the commercial option is not purchased, it is possible to define only the TCH
selection, i.e. determine the order in which the TCH channels are allocated.

Traffic channel selection:

The traffic channels of the primary class will be allocated first when traffic channels are allocated from the
cell. However, traffic channels are always allocated first from the main carrier and the second last time slot
of the main carrier is allocated only if all other time slots are in use.

MCCH selection:

If the commercial option for the preferred MCCH functionality is active, the user can determine the MCCH
selection as follows:

The parameter allows the operator to define the preferred MCCH carrier and to define a prioritization of the
carrier selection for the MCCH use. When the preferred MCCH definition is made (or the preferred MCCH
becomes available after being unusable e.g. due to a jam or fault) the system switches to it automatically.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Legal values • 0 = primary class

• 1 = secondary class

• 2 = preferred class for MCCH selection

Note: value 2 can be used only if the commercial option for the preferred
MCCH functionality has been purchased.
Default value 0 = primary class
Related This parameter has effect only if the tranceiver parameter TTRX
parameters operation mode has value 0 = phase modulated carrier (TETRA).
Change effective after next TTRX re-start

10.4.3.7 TTRX operation mode

This parameter defines whether the TTRX operates either on the QAM carrier mode or phase-modulated
carrier mode.
Type changeable
Default value TETRA1 = TTRX used for TETRA1

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

178/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values TETRA1 = TTRX used for TETRA1
TEDS = TTRX used for TEDS
Change effective on TTRX restart

10.4.4 System broadcast parameters (PCJ command)

The parameters in the PCJ command are used when modifying the system broadcast parameters of a
given cell.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.4.1 SBON allowed subscriber classes

Defines which subscriber classes are allowed to use in the cell. With this parameter you can add supported
subscriber classes to the cell.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10
Legal values Ranges from 1 to 16. Characters & and && are allowed.
Change effective immediately

Additional information

TBS broadcasts the subscriber classes that it supports. If a radio terminal belongs to at least one of these
classes, it may register to the cell and use its services available.

If a radio terminal does not belong to any of the supported classes, it may register to the cell but is not allowed
to use other than emergency services. In practice, a radio terminal ranks such cells as non-preferred cells,
and registers to a supporting cell if such cell is available.

10.4.4.2 SBOFF disallowed subscriber classes

Defines which subscriber classes are not allowed to use in the cell. With this parameter you can remove
supported subscriber classes from the cell.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16
Legal values from 1 to 16. Characters & and && are allowed.
Change effective immediately

Additional information

TBS broadcasts the subscriber classes that it supports. If a radio terminal belongs to at least one of these
classes, it may register to the cell and use its services available.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 179/466
If a radio terminal does not belong to any of the supported classes, it may register to the cell but is not allowed
to use other than emergency services. In practice, a radio terminal ranks such cells as non-preferred cells,
and registers to a supporting cell if such cell is available.

10.4.4.3 REG registration

Defines whether registration is required in the cell.

Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value yes (registration required in this cell)
Legal values yes (registration required in this cell)
no (registration not required in this cell)
Range yes, no
Special values no (registration not required on this cell); this setting should not be used
in the Airbus DS TETRA system
Change effective immediately

CAUTION
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

10.4.4.4 DREG de-registration

Defines whether deregistration is required in the cell.

In the Airbus DS TETRA system, deregistration is always recommended.

Using deregistration, the radio terminal tells the system that the radio terminal is no longer in radio contact.
Deregistration takes place when the radio terminal power is switched off.

Information on deregistration and the current location of the radio subscriber is saved in the DXT database.
This information will be loaded to the dispatcher workstation.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value yes (deregistration required in this cell)
Legal values yes (deregistration required in this cell)
no (deregistration not required in this cell)
Range yes, no
Special values no (deregistration not required in this cell); this setting should not be
used in the Airbus DS TETRA system
Change effective immediately

CAUTION
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

180/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
10.4.4.5 PRIO priority cell

Defines whether a cell can be prioritised compared to other cells, that is, whether the cell is a priority cell or not.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value no (cell is not a priority cell)
Legal values no (cell is not a priority cell)
yes (cell is a priority cell)
Range yes, no
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Mobile Stations use this parameter when ranking cells for cell reselection.

10.4.4.6 MINM minimum mode service

Defines whether the main control channel can be used as a traffic channel, that is, whether the cell can use
minimum mode service or not.
Type changeable, defined by the organisation responsible for the radio
network configuration
Default value yes (cell never uses minimum mode)
Range yes (cell never uses minimum mode)
no (cell may use minimum mode)
Change effective immediately

CAUTION
The value no (cell may use minimum mode) should not be used in the Airbus DS TETRA network.

10.4.4.7 MIGR migration

Defines whether the cell supports change to another TETRA network, that is, whether migration is supported
in the cell or not.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value no (migration is not supported by this cell)
Legal values no (migration is not supported by this cell)
yes (migration is supported by this cell)
Range yes, no
Change effective immediately

Additional information

In order to migrate into the network, radio subscribers must be created with a right ITSI.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 181/466
10.4.4.8 VOICE TETRA voice service

Defines whether the voice services are supported by the cell or not.

The radio terminal can select the cell and the radio subscriber can use the radio terminal for data
communication but not for individual or group voice calls if this parameter is set to no.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value yes (supported in this cell)

Legal values yes (supported in this cell)

no (not supported in this cell)
Change effective immediately

CAUTION
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

10.4.4.9 CIRC circuit mode data service

Defines whether circuit mode data services are supported by the cell or not.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value no (not supported in this cell)
Range no (not supported in this cell)
yes (supported in this cell)
Change effective immediately

CAUTION
The value yes (supported in this cell) of this parameter should not be used in the Airbus DS TETRA network.

10.4.4.10 SNDCP IP packet data service

Defines whether the IP packet data service is supported by the cell or not.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default values yes (supported in this cell)
Legal values no (not supported in this cell) and yes (supported in this cell)
Range yes, no
Related Radio network parameter ADVL advanced link support
parameters
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

182/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note
Setting the value to yes (supported in this cell) requires that the value of parameter ADVL advanced link
support is set to yes.

10.4.4.11 ENCR air interface encryption service

Defines whether air interface encryption is available in the cell or not.

Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value no (not available on this cell)
Legal values no (not available on this cell)
yes (available in this cell)
Range yes, no
Change effective immediately

10.4.4.12 ADVL advanced link support

Defines whether advanced links are supported by this cell or not. If advanced link support is set to no
(not supported in this cell), possible support of IP packet data service will be changed to not supported
accordingly.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value no (not supported in this cell)
Legal values no (not supported in this cell)
yes (supported in this cell)
Range no, yes
Related Radio network parameter SNDCP IP packet data service
parameters
Change effective immediately

Note
Another radio network parameter Extended advanced link(s) and MAC-U-BLCK supported defines if extended
advanced links are supported. Refer to chapter 10.4.11.1.7 .

10.4.4.13 AUTH authentication required

Defines whether authentication is a required functionality in each terminal that registers into the cell.
Parameter value yes defines that all terminals must be capable to respond correctly to authentication demand
by the system. Value no defines that authentication is not a system requirement, it can be made mandatory
for any terminal by changing its subscriber parameters.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 183/466
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value no (authentication not required in this cell)
Legal values yes, no
Special value yes (authentication required in this cell): if authentication is taken into
use, the value of the system parameter Authentication and encryption
must be set to a value that enables authentication.
Change effective immediately

10.4.4.14 CLASS security class

Defines the security class requirements for the terminals in the cell.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 0 (security class 1 MS supported in this cell)
Legal values 0 (security class 1 MS supported in this cell)
1 (security classes 1 and 3 MS supported in this cell)
2 (only security class 3 MS supported in this cell)
Related Radio network parameter ENCR air interface encryption service
parameters
Change effective immediately

Note

If radio network parameter ENCR air interface encryption service is set to value no, the security class has
no meaning.

10.4.4.15 TXPWR maximum MS transmit power

Defines the maximum transmit power that the radio terminal is allowed to use in the cell. This parameter
allows to keep interferences low and to ensure service in cells that are smaller or bigger than the average cells.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit dBm
Default value 40 dBm
Legal values from 15 dBm to 45 dBm with increment of 5 dB
Range from 15 dBm to 45 dBm
Related Radio network parameter NTXPWR Maximum MS transmit power in
parameters monitored cell
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

184/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
10.4.4.16 RXLEV minimum RX access level

Defines the signal strength level of the received signal needed by the radio terminal in order to perform cell
selection or re-selection. This parameter specifies a threshold for C1 calculation.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 3 = - 110 dBm
Legal values see Table 27
Range Decimal numbers from 0 to 15 representing values from -125 dBm to -50
dBm, with the increment of 5 dB
Related Radio network parameter NRXLEV minimum RX access level in
parameters monitored cell
Change effective immediately

Table 27 : Minimum RX access level

Setting in dBm
0 -125
1 -120
2 -115
3 -110
4 -105
5 -100
6 -95
7 -90
8 -85
9 -80
10 -75
11 -70
12 -65
13 -60
14 -55
15 -50

Keywords: *cell reselection

10.4.4.17 ACC access parameter

Radio terminals use this parameter for the open-loop power-control procedure.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 185/466
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit dBm
Default value 4 = -45 dBM
Legal values see Table 28
Range Decimal numbers from 0 to 15 representing values from -53 dBm to
-23 dBm, with the increment 2dB
Change effective immediately

Table 28 : ACC access parameter

Attribute Specifies
0 -53
1 -51
2 -49
3 -47
4 -45
5 -43
6 -41
7 -39
8 -37
9 -35
10 -33
11 -31
12 -29
13 -27
14 -25
15 -23

10.4.4.18 DLTO radio downlink timeout

Defines the downlink quality, measured by a radio terminal. This parameter specifies how sensitive the
surveillance of the serving cell is to downlink failure. Evaluation is based on decoding downlink AACH
(Access Assignment Channel).

The radio terminals decode the frames that the TBS sends on the AACH. When the radio terminal begins to
monitor the downlink, the RDC (Radio Downlink Counter) is initiated equal to value set by the DLTO radio
downlink timeout parameter. When the decoding is unsuccessful, the RDC is decreased. Equally, when the
decoding is successful, the RDC is increased, but not above the value set by this parameter.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

186/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
The radio terminal parameter N.210 controls the AACH message erasure rate between successful and
unsuccessful decoding, that is MER (Message Error Rate). A continuing MER above the threshold will cause
the radio downlink time-out and the initiation of the cell reselection.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit time slots
Default value 11 (1584 time slots)
Legal values see Table 29
Related radio terminal parameter N.210
parameters
Change effective immediately

Table 29 : Radio downlink timeout

Setting in time slots

0 disables the radio-terminal downlink-counter (the
surveillance of the serving cell does not follow downlink
failure)
1 144
2 288
3 432
4 576
5 720
6 864
7 1008
8 1152
9 1296
10 1440
11 1584
12 1728
13 1872
14 2016
15

Keywords: *cell reselection

10.4.4.19 IMM immediate

Defines the number of TDMA frames to wait for an immediate random access on MCCH, SCCH and DDCH.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 187/466
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 15 (immediate access allowed)
Legal values see Table 30
Change effective immediately

Table 30 : IMM immediate

Setting in TDMA frames

0 always randomise
1 - 14 randomise after n TDMA frames, where n = 1-14
15 immediate access allowed

10.4.4.20 WT waiting time

Defines the waiting time for random access acknowledgement. This parameter is used for random access by
the radio terminal on MCCH, common SCCH, PM PDCH and DDCH.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit frames (=TBS downlink signalling opportunities for the control channel)
Default value 5
Legal values integers from 1 to 15
Change effective immediately

10.4.4.21 NU number of random access transmissions

Defines the maximum number of random access attempts on uplink.

Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 5
Legal values 0-15 with the increment of 1
Special values 0 means that no random access transmission is allowed
Change effective immediately

10.4.5 Synchronisation broadcast parameters (PCK command)

The parameters in the PCK command are used when modifying the synchronisation broadcast parameters of
a given cell or by default the parameters of all cells.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

188/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.5.1 DXT U-plane DTX

Specifies whether discontinuous U-plane transmission, that is voice or data, is supported on traffic channels.
Allowing the discontinuous transmission saves batteries of the radio terminals and decreases uplink
interferences.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value N
Legal values N (discontinuous U-plane transmission is not allowed)
Y (discontinuous U-plane transmission is allowed)
Change effective immediately

Note
Do not use other values than N without consulting Airbus DS.

10.4.5.2 F18EXT frame 18 extension

Specifies whether the radio terminal is allowed to receive downlink information on the all time slots of the
frame 18.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value N
Legal values N (no frame 18 extension)
Y (frame 18 extension allowed)
Change effective immediately

Additional information

If the extension is allowed, only radio terminals which are capable of receiving consecutive slots are able
to perform this function.
Note
Do not use other values than N without consulting Airbus DS.

10.4.5.3 COL colour code

Specifies the base-station–specific part of the scrambling code. Thus, it differentiates the scrambling codes
used by base stations that transmit with the same frequency.
Scrambling is a method where a digital signal is combined with a pseudorandom sequence for producing a
randomized digital signal which conveys the same information and facilitates its transmission.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 189/466
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 1
Legal values integers from 1 to 63 with the increment of 1
Change effective at TBC (TETRA base station controller) restart

10.4.6 Radio path signalling parameters (PCL command)

The parameters in the PCL command are used when modifying the base station signalling parameters of
a given cell or by default parameters of all cells.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.6.1 AIRC aircraft flag

Defines whether the cell is used for aircraft communication or not.

Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value N
Legal values Y (aircraft cell), N (not aircraft cell)
Related Radio network parameter AIRPER aircraft distance reporting period
parameters
Change effective immediately

Note

If this parameter is set to value N, then the value of the radio network parameter AIRPER aircraft distance
reporting period cannot be changed.

10.4.6.2 AIRPER aircraft distance reporting period

Defines the aircraft distance reporting period.

Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 60 s
Legal values 0 (no reporting)
from 15 s to 1905 s with the increment of 15 s
Related Radio network parameter AIRC aircraft flag
parameters
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

190/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note

If the parameter AIRC aircraft flag is set to value N, then the value of this parameter is 60 seconds and
it cannot be changed.

10.4.6.3 T2001 access define PDU interval on MCCH

Specifies the access-define PDU interval on the MCCH (Main Control Channel) and/or SCCH (Secondary
Control Channel). The access-define PDU defines the random access parameters for access code B. Access
code B can only be used to send emergency priority PDUs. If the frame length of access code A is 8 or more,
then random access opportunities are given also for access code B. If this parameter has value 0, then
random access to access code B is not allocated.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit multiframes
Default value 10
Legal values 0 and from 4 to 255
Special value 0 = access code B is not used and access define PDU is not sent
Related Radio network parameters N2005 minimum length of random access
parameters frames and N2009 maximum length of random access frame
Change effective immediately

10.4.6.4 T2002 downlink stealing time

Defines how often the Airbus DS TETRA network is allowed to steal from speech frames for priority 3 PDU
signalling downlink.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit frames
Default value 18
Legal values from 1 to 100 frames
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Small values cause that the quality of the circuit mode calls may degrade.

10.4.6.5 T2003 channel reserve refresh time

Defines how often traffic channel reservations at a base station are refreshed by the resource management
software in the DXT. Includes timeout for channel allocation.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 191/466
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 30 s
Legal values from 1 s to 1800 s with the increment of 1 s
Change effective at the next call setup/channel reservation

CAUTION
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

Keywords: *timeouts

10.4.6.6 T2004 time to send max frame in startup

For future use.

10.4.6.7 N2001 maximum number of unused TCH timeslots

Defines the maximum number of uplink timeslots without traffic (used for uplink supervision). This parameter
specifies how quickly a radio terminal loses a granted speech item when the TBS does not detect any uplink
traffic. Such situations are, for example, when the radio subscriber moves outside the coverage area of the
network, or the radio terminal has no power any more.

When half of the time slots in that range have failed, the radio subscriber may be lost.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit time slots
Default value 90
Legal values from 5 to 100 time slots
Change effective immediately

10.4.6.8 N2002 RSSI threshold for carrier jamming detection

Defines the minimum signal level that triggers the jamming alarm from the TETRA1 mode carrier.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit dB
Default value 10
Legal values From 10 to 255 (above the background noise floor).
Special value The default value is set when the cell is added.
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

192/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note
The parameter is not applicable to TBS2.

10.4.6.9 N2003 threshold number of consecutive jammed MMCH

For future use.

10.4.6.10 N2004 RSSI threshold for collision detection

For future use.

10.4.6.11 N2005 minimum length of random access frames

Defines the minimum length of random access frame. The value is used on the MCCH (Main Control
Channel) and/or SCCH (Secondary Control Channel) of the configured TBS.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit subslots
Default value 4
Legal values from 1 to 32 with the increment of 1. However only values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 32 are valid for the TBS. Other used values
are rounded up to the nearest valid value in the TBS.
Related parameter Radio network parameter N2009 max length of random access frames
Change effective immediately

Note
The value of the radio network parameter N2005 minimum length of random access frames must be smaller
than or equal to the value of the radio network parameter N2009 max length of random access frames.

10.4.6.12 N2006 maximum allowed path delay

Defines the maximum roundtrip time between base station (cell) and radio terminal. It is used to control the
maximum distance that the radio terminal is allowed to operate on the cell. When the measured distance
exceeds the maximum allowed value the base station orders the radio terminal to leave the cell.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit half-bit periods
Default value 24
Legal values from 0 to 200
Special value value 0 means that the TBS does not perform path delay measurement
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 193/466
Note

Bit period is equal to 4.167 km. Therefore, the Unit used by this parameter (half-bit period) is approximately
2 km. For example, value 24 ~ 50.0 km, and value 28 ~ 58.3 km.

10.4.6.13 N2007 Number of consecutive jammed slots

Defines the minimum duration of continuous jamming that triggers the alarm from the TETRA1 mode
carrier. The value range is from 0 to 255 timeslots. The default value 16 timeslots is set when the cell is
added. Note that the unit type of this parameter has changed. If the TBS has TETRA System Release 6.5
TBS CD3.0, Release 6.0 TBS CD3.5 or Release 6.0 TBS CD2.9 (or newer) installed, the parameter unit is
defined in timeslots and the jamming alarm is triggered by continuous jamming. If the TBS has an earlier
SW change delivery installed, the parameter’s unit type is defined in frames (4 x timeslot) and the jammed
timeslots do not have to be successive.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit timeslots
Default value 16
Legal values From 0 to 255
Special value Value zero (0) is used to disable jamming detection in the TBS.
The default value 16 is set when the cell is added.
Change effective immediately

Note

The parameter is not applicable to TBS2.

10.4.6.14 N2008 threshold number of consecutive jammed TCH

For future use, except for the special value '88' to disable automatic 800MHz TBS2 TTRX tuning functionality.

10.4.6.15 N2009 maximum length of random access frame

Specifies the maximum length of random access frame. The value is used on the MCCH (Main Control
Channel) and/or SCCH (Secondary Control Channel) of the configured TBS.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 32
Legal values from 1 to 32 with the increment of 1. However only values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 32 are valid for the TBS. Other used values
are rounded up to the nearest valid value in the TBS.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

194/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related parameter Radio network parameter N2005 minimum length of random access
frames
Change effective immediately

Note

The value of the radio network parameter N2009 maximum length of random access frame must be higher
than or equal to the value of the radio network parameter N2005 minimum length of random access frames.

10.4.6.16 N2010 IMM for individual call on assigned channel

Defines the number of TDMA frames to wait for an immediate random access during an individual call. The
parameter is used for random access by the radio terminal on TCH.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 15 (immediate access allowed)
Legal values 0 (always randomise)
1 – 14 (randomise after IMM TDMA frames)
15 (immediate access allowed)

10.4.6.17 N2011 IMM for group call on assigned channel

Defines the number of TDMA frames to wait for an immediate random access during a group call. The
parameter is used for random access by the radio terminal on TCH.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 5
Legal values 0 (always randomise)
1 – 14 (randomise after IMM TDMA frames)
15 (immediate access allowed)

10.4.6.18 N2012 WT for individual call on assigned channel

Defines the random access acknowledgement waiting time during an individual call. The parameter is
used for random access by the radio terminal on TCH. Waiting time is expressed by number of TDMA
frames containing downlink signalling.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit TDMA frames
Default value 4
Legal values from 1 to 15

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 195/466
10.4.6.19 N2013 WT for group call on assigned channel

Defines the random access acknowledgement waiting time during a group call. The parameter is used
for random access by the radio terminal on TCH. Waiting time is expressed in number of TDMA frames
containing downlink signalling.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit TDMA frames
Default value 4
Legal values from 1 to 15

10.4.6.20 N2014 framelength for individual call on assigned channel

Defines the random access frame length for an individual call expressed in number of subslots (length in
half slots) containing downlink signalling.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit subslots
Default value 2
Legal values from 1 to 32 with the increment of 1. However only values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 32 are valid for the TBS. Other used values
are rounded up to the nearest valid value in the TBS.

10.4.6.21 N2015 framelength for group call on assigned channel

Defines the random access frame length for a group call expressed in number of subslots (length in half slots)
containing downlink signalling.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit subslots
Default value 4
Legal values from 1 to 32 with the increment of 1. However only values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 32 are valid for the TBS. Other used values
are rounded up to the nearest valid value in the TBS.

Note
In the dedicated data channel (DDCH) the random access frame length is fixed to 12 subslots.

10.4.6.22 N2016 number of sent CCK-id-elements

Defines how many times CCK-id element is sent in obligatory SYSINFO before sending the hyperframe
number or that CCK-id element is not sent (encryption is not used).

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

196/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 6
Legal values from 0 to 255
Special values 0 (= CCK-id element is not sent)

Note

If the base station is not GPS-synchronised, the recommended value for this parameter is 1.

10.4.6.23 N2017 number of sent extended services-elements

Defines how many times the extended services element is sent in obligatory SYSINFO before sending
the Access Code A element or that extended services element is not sent (authentication or encryption is
not used).
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit -/ times
Default value 6
Legal values from 0 to 255
Special values 0 (extended services element is not sent)

Note

If the base station is not GPS–synchronised, the recommended value for this parameter is 1.

10.4.6.24 N2018 jammer detection level

Defines the minimum jammer signal level that triggers the jamming alarm from the TETRA1 mode carrier.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit -dBm
Default value 115 -dBm
Legal values from 0 to 130 -dBm
Related parameter Feature switch parameter TBS jamming detection improvement (416)
Radio network parameter JAMMOD jamming algorithm version
Special value The default value is set when the cell is added.
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 197/466
10.4.6.25 N2019 jamming noise floor max

Defines the maximum noise floor value. A jamming alarm is set if the noise floor estimate exceeds the
parameter value.

The update time of noise floor estimate is generally 1-2 hours. In extreme cases it may be up to 5 hours or
even more, depending on the traffic in the TTRX.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit -dBm
Default value 120 -dBm
Legal values from 0 to 130 -dBm (above the background noise floor)
Related parameter Feature switch parameter TBS jamming detection improvement (416)
Radio network parameter JAMMOD jamming algorithm version
Special value The default value is set when the cell is added.
Change effective immediately

10.4.6.26 N252HP maximum BL-DATA retransmission for high priority SDUs

Defines the maximum number of high priority SDUs (Service Data Unit) retransmissions for acknowledged
basic-link service. The maximum number of transmissions (including the first transmission) is the specified
value + 1. The high priority SDUs are system-internally defined.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 2
Legal values from 1 to 5 with the increment of 1
Range from 1 to 5
Change effective immediately

Note

Typically all cells in the network use the same setting.

CAUTION
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

10.4.6.27 N252LP maximum BL-DATA retransmission for low priority SDUs

Specifies the maximum number of low priority SDUs (Service Data Unit) retransmissions for acknowledged
basic link service. The maximum number of transmissions (including the first transmission) is the specified
value + 1. The high priority SDUs are system-internally defined.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

198/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 2
Legal values from 1 to 5 with the increment of 1
Range from 1 to 5
Change effective immediately

Note
Typically all cells in the network use the same setting.

CAUTION
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

10.4.6.28 N253 BL_UDATA repetitions

Specifies the number of SDU (Service Data Unit) repetitions for unacknowledged basic link service.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 5 with the increment of 1
Range from 1 to 5
Change effective immediately

CAUTION
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

10.4.6.29 T252 acknowledgement waiting timer

Specifies the acknowledgement waiting time for uplink PDUs (Protocol Data Unit) on the MCCH, common
SCCH and PM PDCH. The value is used for basic link (BL) and advanced link (AL).
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit signalling frames
Default value 9 TETRA signalling frames
Legal values from 1 to 50
Change effective immediately

Note
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 199/466
10.4.6.30 JAMMOD jamming algorithm version

Defines the jamming algorithm version. The parameter is applicable from TETRA System Release 7.0
SCD3 onwards.
If the parameter value is 1, the old jamming algorithm is applied: the values of N2002 RSSI threshold for
carrier jamming detection and N2007 threshold for consecutively jammed slots are used.
If the parameter value is 2, the new jamming algorithm is applied: the values of 2018 jammer detection
level and N2019 jamming noise floor max are used.
The default value 0 (= jamming algorithm disabled) is set when the cell is added.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = jamming algorithm disabled
1 = old jamming algorithm version in use
2 = new jamming algorithm version in use
Related Feature switch parameter TBS jamming detection improvement (416)
parameters Radio network parameters:
N2002 RSSI threshold for carrier jamming detection
N2007 number of consecutive jammed slots
N2018 jammer detection level
N2019 jamming noise floor max
Change effective immediately

10.4.7 Cell reselection parameters (PCM command)

The parameters in the PCM command are used when modifying the cell reselection parameters of a given
cell or all cells.
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.7.1 SRT slow reselect threshold above fast

Specifies one of the criteria which determines whether the cell is improvable thus triggering the slow
reselection process. Slow reselect threshold is the sum of fast reselect threshold and slow reselect threshold
above fast. The serving cell becomes improvable once the following occur:
• when the C1 (path loss parameter) of the serving cell is below the value of this parameter for a period
of 5 s
and
• C1 or C2 of a neighbour cell exceeds the C1 of the serving cell by the value defined by the radio
network parameter slow reselect hysteresis for a period of 5 s.

The radio terminal initiates the cell reselection when the serving cell is improvable and the radio subscriber is
not in a circuit-mode call.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

200/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit dB
Default value 30 dB
Legal values integers from 0 dB to 30 dB with increment of 2 dB
Range from 0 dB to 30 dB
Related Radio network parameter SRH slow reselect hysteresis
parameters
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Use higher values in urban environment than in rural.

Keywords: *cell reselection

10.4.7.2 FRT fast reselect threshold

Specifies one of the criteria, which determines whether the cell is relinquishable thus triggering the fast
reselection process. The serving cell becomes relinquishable once the following occur:

• when the C1 (path loss parameter) of the serving cell is below the value defined by this parameter
for a period of 5 s

and

• C1 or C2 of a neighbour cell exceeds the C1 of the serving cell by the value defined by the radio
network parameter fast reselect hysteresis for a period of 5 s.

The radio terminal initiates the cell reselection when the serving cell is relinquishable.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit dB
Default value 30 dB
Legal values integers from 0 dB to 30 dB with increment of 2 dB
Range from 0 dB to 30 dB
Related Radio network parameter FRH fast reselect hysteresis
parameters
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Use higher values in urban environment than in rural.

Keywords: *cell reselection

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 201/466
10.4.7.3 SRH slow reselect hysteresis

Specifies one of the factors that have effect when the serving cell becomes improvable. The serving cell
becomes improvable once the following occur:
• when the C1 (path loss parameter) of the serving cell is below the value defined by the radio network
parameter slow reselect threshold for a period of 5 s
and
• C1 or C2 of a neighbour cell exceeds the C1 of the serving cell by the value defined by this parameter
for a period of 5 s.

The radio terminal initiates the cell reselection when the serving cell is improvable and the radio subscriber is
not in a circuit-mode call.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit dB
Default value 6 dB
Legal values integers from 0 dB to 30 dB with increment of 2 dB
Range from 0 dB to 30 dB
Related Radio network parameter SRT slow reselect threshold above fast
parameters
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *cell reselection

10.4.7.4 FRH fast reselect hysteresis

Specifies one of the factors that have effect when the serving cell becomes relinquishable. The serving cell
becomes relinquishable once the following occur:
• when the C1 (path loss parameter) of the serving cell is below the value defined by the radio network
parameter fast reselect threshold for a period of 5 s
and
• C1 or C2 (path loss parameters) of a neighbour cell exceeds the C1 of the serving cell by the value
defined by this parameter for a period of 5 s.

The radio terminal initiates the cell reselection when the serving cell is relinquishable.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit dB
Default value 6 dB
Legal values integers from 0 dB to 30 dB with increment of 2 dB
Range from 0 dB to 30 dB
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

202/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Keywords: *cell reselection

10.4.7.5 NTXPWR maximum MS transmit power in monitored cell

Defines the maximum transmit power which the radio terminal is allowed to use in the cell. This parameter
specifies a value that is broadcast when this cell (the cell, parameters of which you are defining) is a
monitored neighbour cell. The broadcasting takes place in the D-NWRK-BROADCAST of the serving cell.
With the help of this, some neighbours can be preferred and others not.
This parameter is used when an MS is monitoring neighbour cells, for example, when a certain cell is defined
as "undesirable" for by-passing mobile subscribers and their registration to this cell is thus prohibited. Cells
located in tunnels or high places may sometimes need to be defined in this way. However, if a radio unit is
powered on in such a cell, it will register to the cell in which it is physically located (in contrast to by-passing
MSs which will not register to this cell).
The radio terminal uses this value when it calculates the C2 parameter of this cell. The radio terminal
builds a ranking list using the C2 parameters of all the monitored neighbour cells. Finally, the ranking list is
used when the radio terminal selects a new cell.
This value is not used if the neighbour cells are scanned instead of monitored.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit dBm

Default value 40 dBm

Legal values integers from 15 dBm to 45 dBm with increment of 5 dB
Range from 15 dBm to 45 dBm
Related Radio network parameter TXPWR maximum MS transmit power
parameters
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Typically, the setting of this parameter is the same as the setting of the radio network parameter TXPWR
maximum MS transmit power.
Keywords: *cell reselection

10.4.7.6 NRXLEV minimum RX access level in monitored cell

Defines the minimum signal strength level of the received signal needed by the radio terminal to perform
cell selection or reselection. This parameter specifies a value that is broadcast when this cell (the cell,
the parameters of which you are defining) is a monitored neighbour cell (mcell). The broadcasting takes
place in the D-NWRK-BROADCAST of the serving cell. With the help of this, some neighbours can be
preferred and others not.
This parameter value is used when an MS is monitoring neighbour cells, for example, when a certain cell is
defined as "undesirable" for by-passing mobile subscribers and their registration to this cell is thus prohibited.
Cells located in tunnels or high places may sometimes need to be defined in this way. However, if a radio

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 203/466
unit is powered on in such a cell, it will register to the cell in which it is physically located (in contrast to
by-passing MSs which will not register to this cell).
The radio terminal uses this value when it calculates the C2 parameter of this cell. The radio terminal
builds a ranking list using the C2 parameters of all the monitored neighbour cells. Finally, the ranking list is
used when the radio terminal selects a new cell.
This value is not used if the neighbour cells are scanned instead of monitored.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit dBm
Default value 3 = -110 dBm
Legal values 0–15
0 = -125 dBm
1 = -120 dBm
2 = -115 dBm
3 = -110 dBm
4 = -105 dBm
5 = -100 dBm
6 = -95 dBm
7 = -90 dBm
8 = -85 dBm
9 = -80 dBm
10 = -75 dBm
11 = -70 dBm
12 = -65 dBm
13 = -60 dBm
14 = -55 dBm
15 = -50 dBm
Range -125 dBm to -50 dBm
Related Radio network parameter RXLEV minimum RX access level
parameters
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Typically, the setting of this parameter is the same as the setting of the radio network parameter RXLEV
minimum RX access power.
Keywords: *cell reselection

10.4.7.7 FWDREG forward registration support

Defines whether the cell supports forward registration type of cell reselection or not. Forward registration type
of cell reselection can take place only if both the original cell and the target cell support it. This information is
broadcast to the terminals as a part of serving and neighbouring cell information.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value no

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

204/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values yes (forward registration is supported)
no (forward registration is not supported)
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters DXT support for type 1 handover (65)

10.4.7.8 EXCELL expedited cell reselection

Defines the contents of the neighbour cell information broadcast. If two neighbouring cells have this
parameter set as 'yes', then they will recommend expedited handover in the broadcast.

This parameter should be set to 'yes' for all base stations that are inside tunnels. Also the open air base
stations that are defined as neighbours to tunnel base stations should have this parameter set as 'yes'.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value no = Expedited cell reselection not recommended
Legal values yes = Expedited cell reselection recommended
no = Expedited cell reselection not recommended
Change effective immediately

10.4.8 Cell-related emergency number (PCE command)

The parameter in the PCE command (connect to number) is used for defining an emergency target for
emergency calls in a given cell.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.8.1 Connect to number

With this command the user can define an emergency target where the calls originated from the given cell are
connected when the calling party has dialled one of the emergency numbers

The emergency targets can be defined only to cells of the current DXT, that is, the DXT where the command
is given, not to cells of the other DXTs in the network.

Connect to number

Defines the emergency target to which the calls are connected when the emergency number is dialled in a
given cell. The maximum length of the parameter is 15 digits. Allowed digits include 0 to 9, *, #, A, B, C, and
D. If the number is a PSTN number, it must contain the PSTN prefix used in the TETRA system, a real PSTN
target, and the cell-specific information. The system cannot verify the correctness of the number. Therefore,
the user is responsible for the validity of the number.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value dummy value given during the creation of the cell

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 205/466
 Legal values digits from 0 to 9, *, #, A, B, C, D, maximum length of the number is
15 digits
Related System parameters Emergency number 01–10
parameters
Change effective immediately

Additional information

If the user does not give the connect to number, the definition is cleared as default. The system cannot verify
the correctness of the number. Therefore, the user is responsible for the validity of the number.

10.4.9 General cell-specific parameters (PCG command)

The PC command group contains general cell reselection parameters (PCG command) that are used when
modifying the cell-specific general parameters of a given cell.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.9.1 SFRAM speech frame format type

Defines the speech frame format type for specified cell(s) used for speech transmission between the DXT
and TBS. The shorter frame offers smaller transmission delays.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 2 (shortened speech frame type)
Legal values 0 (normal, not compressed speech frame type)
2 (shortened speech frame type)
Change effective immediately

Note

If you change the parameter SFRAM speech frame format, the base station will be re-configured, and this
will release the ongoing calls in that cell.

10.4.9.2 FBMOD TBS fallback mode allowed

Defines whether the fallback mode is allowed for the base station after the defined link down timeout
period. If the fallback mode is allowed, TBS enters fallback mode after the defined TBS-DXT link down
timeout period expires. If fallback mode is not allowed, TBS shuts down transmission after the TBS-DXT
link down timeout period.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value no (TBS fallback mode is not allowed)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

206/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values yes (TBS fallback mode is allowed)
no (TBS fallback mode is not allowed)
Change effective immediately

Note

Parameter MAX_TBS_FALLBACK_IN_DXT (commercial option) determines the maximum number of TBSs

that are allowed to be activated with TBS fallback functionality within one DXT.

Parameter TBS_ENHANCED_FALLBACK (commercial option) determines the TBS fallback mode: Fixed
TBS fallback mode (see 16.2.3.7 ) or Enhanced TBS fallback mode (see 16.2.3.8 ).

10.4.9.3 LDTIM link down timeout period

Minimum link break time between the DXT and TBS, before the TBS enters the fallback mode or shuts down.
Link recovery stabilisation period is 50% of link down timeout period, after which the TBS is re-configured and
will have the system wide services available again.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 30 s
Legal values from 10 s to 120 s
Change effective immediately

Additional information

When the period specified with this parameter has expired, it takes approximately 15 seconds before TBS
starts to operate in the fallback mode.

10.4.9.4 EXCAP exclusive capacity for TBS allowed

If exclusive capacity for TBS mode is allowed, the cell's subscriber class is compared to the MS's
subscriber-class parameter. Depending on the comparison result the MS's attempt to register to the cell
is either accepted or rejected.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value no (exclusive capacity for TBS not allowed)
Legal values no (exclusive capacity for TBS not allowed)
yes (exclusive capacity for TBS mode allowed)
Related Mismatching registration rejected
parameters
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 207/466
Note

To use this parameter, first define and apply System parameter Mismatching registration rejected. This
parameter can be used only if Mismatching registration rejected is already applied.

Note

This parameter is part of a commercial option. It is only possible to use this parameter when the commercial
option was purchased and the target is one cell.

10.4.9.5 JATIM minimum MCCH change period on jamming

Defines if the automatic MCCH change function in a jamming situation is enabled in the cell, and sets the
minimum time between consecutive jamming-based MCCH changes.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = MCCH change on jamming is disabled
From 10 s to 120 s, with the increment of 1 s
Change effective immediately

10.4.9.6 SOTIM DXT switchover timeout

This timer value defines for how long the base station tries to connect to the DXT it was attached to (prior
losing connection). After the timer expires, the base station tries to open connection to both configured
DXTs (primary and secondary) in turns.

When the signaling link to DXT breaks, the base station starts its fallback timer (defined by parameter LDTIM
link down timeout period) and the switch DXT timer (defined by this parameter). By default the switch DXT
timer expires first, allowing the base station to connect to the other DXT before the fallback timer expires.
Type changeable
Default value 15 s
Unit seconds
Legal values 0-480, 65535
Special values 0 = The switchover is immediate.
1-480 second(s) timeout for switchover
65535 = The switchover is disabled.
Change effective immediately
Related PC command group parameter LDTIM link down timeout period
parameters

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

208/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note

This parameter is part of a commercial option. It is only possible to use this parameter if the TBS Dual
Homing feature has been activated for the base station.

10.4.9.7 IPSEC IP security for DXT-TBS interface

Defines if IP transport security protection is used in the cell.

The parameter is part of a commercial option. It is only possible to use this parameter if the IP security
commercial option has been purchased. The commercial option also determines the maximum number of
cells (range 0 - 252) that can use the IPsec transmission.

If the IP security is allowed by the commercial option and if there is free capacity for the IP security parameter
activation, the IP security can be enabled in a cell. Each cell activation decreases the free capacity by one.

It is possible to configure and activate the IP security in the TBCi before the commercial state is received by
the TBCi. When the state (commercial option bought: Yes / No) is received, the TBCi decides whether to
keep the IP security enabled or disable it.
Type changeable
Default value No = IP security for DXT-TBS interface is disabled

Legal values Yes = IP security is enabled

No = IP security is disabled
Change effective immediately

10.4.10 Radio channel management parameters (PCH command group)

The parameters in the PCH command are used when defining the radio channel management parameters of
a given cell or by default the parameters of all cells.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.10.1 Max packet data channels in cell

Defines the maximum number of phase-modulated radio channels that can be used for packet data in
the specified cell.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 255 (no restrictions for the number of packet data channels used in a cell)
Legal values 0 (no packet data channel allocation allowed)
1-31 (maximum number of packet data channels used in a cell)
255 (no restrictions for the number of packet data channels used in a cell)
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 209/466
Note

If the number of PD channels in a cell is set to 0, there are no available phase-modulated PDCHs on which to
send data, and thus only the TEDS service is available (if QAM TTRXs have been configured to the cell).

10.4.10.2 Secondary control channels defined

This parameter specifies how many common secondary control channels (CSCCHs) are requested to be
configured in the cell.

The parameter value can be listed with the command ZPCI:LAID=xxx,CEID=Y:RCH; and it also shows
how many SCCHs are active.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 (no common secondary control channels)
1–3 (common secondary control channels)
Related Radio network parameter Secondary control channels currently active
parameters
Change effective immediately

Note

This parameter is part of a commercial option. It is only possible to use this parameter when the commercial
option was purchased and the target is one cell.

10.4.10.3 Secondary control channels currently active

This parameter indicates how many common secondary control channels (CSCCHs) are currently activated
in the cell.

The parameter value is returned by the system. It cannot be changed by the user.
Type unchangeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0–3
Related Radio network parameter Secondary control channels defined
parameters The DXT takes the channels into SCCH use as requested by parameter
Secondary control channels defined as soon as the corresponding slots
are unallocated, that is, not used for voice calls.
Change effective After the DXT has been able to take a new slot (or slots) into SCCH use.

10.4.10.4 Max dedicated data channels in cell

Defines the maximum number of dedicated data channels that can be allocated in the specified cell.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

210/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 255 (no restrictions)
Legal values 0 (no DDCHs allowed)
1-31 (number of DDCHs allowed)
255 (no restrictions)
Change effective next call setup

10.4.11 TEDS specific cell parameters (PCS command)

The parameters in the PCS command are used when modifiying TEDS specific cell parameters: system
broadcast parameters, radio path signalling (L2) parameters, and cell reselection parameters.
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PC Cell Configuration and Parameter
Handling, DN98628348.

10.4.11.1 TEDS system broadcast parameters

10.4.11.1.1 TVOICE voice service for TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.1.2 TCIRC circuit mode data for TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.1.3 TENCR air interface encryption for TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.1.4 TADVR advanced link roaming support in TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.1.5 TINTLEA long interleaver support in TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.1.6 TDPRI data priority support in TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.1.7 TEXADV extended advanced links and MAC-U-BLCK supported in TEDS

This parameter is used for broadcast to indicate if extended advanced links and MAC-U-BLCK are supported
on this cell on QAM PDCH channels.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 211/466
 Type changeable
Default value No
Legal values No = not supported on this cell
Yes = supported on this cell
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

The parameter is recommended to have value 0 in base stations which do not have any QAM carriers.

10.4.11.1.8 TTXPWR maximum transmitting power of MS in TEDS

Defines the maximum transmit power that the radio terminal is allowed to use on the QAM PDCH. This
parameter allows to keep interferences low and to ensure service in cells that are smaller or bigger than
the average cells.
Type changeable
Default value 40 dBm
Legal values 15 dBm
20 dBm
25 dBm
30 dBm
35 dBm
40 dBm
45 dBm
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Use value 30 dBm, if no other value has been received from the network planning.

10.4.11.1.9 TRXLEV minimum RX access level in TEDS

Defines the signal strength level of the received signal on the QAM PDCH, needed by the radio terminal in
order to perform cell selection or re-selection. This parameter specifies a threshold for C1 calculation.
Type changeable
Default value 3 = -110 dBm

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

212/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values 0 = -125 dBm
1 = -120 dBm
2 = -115 dBm
3 = -110 dBm
4 = -105 dBm
5 = -100 dBm
6 = -95 dBm
7 = -90 dBm
8 = -85 dBm
9 = -80 dBm
10 = -75 dBm
11 = -70 dBm
12 = -65 dBm
13 = -60 dBm
14 = -55 dBm
15 = -50 dBm
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Use value 2 = -115 dBm, if no other value has been received from the network planning.

10.4.11.1.10 TACC access parameter in TEDS

Radio terminals use this parameter for the open-loop power-control procedure. This parameter is used on
the QAM PDCHs.
Type changeable
Default value 4 = -45 dBm
Legal values 0 = -53 dBm
1 = -51 dBm
2 = -49 dBm
3 = -47 dBm
4 = -45 dBm
5 = -43 dBm
6 = -41 dBm
7 = -39 dBm
8 = -37 dBm
9 = -35 dBm
10 = -33 dBm
11 = -31 dBm
12 = -29 dBm
13 = -27 dBm
14 = -25 dBm
15 = -23 dBm
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 213/466
Note

The radio terminal's transmit power should not be set too low. Using too low values with TACC access
parameter in TEDS prevents the radio terminal from using the highest applicable modulation level and the
highest permitted uplink bit rate successfully. Using too low values is not recommended.

10.4.11.1.11 TDLTO radio downlink timeout for TEDS

Defines the downlink quality, measured by a radio terminal. This parameter is used to specify how long the
surveillance can tolerate the downlink failure. The functionality of this QAM-PDCH parameter is similar to the
corresponding parameter DLTO radio downlink timeout on phase-modulated channels. Refer to Chapter
10.4.4.18 .
Type changeable
Default value 11 = 1584 timeslots, approximately 22 seconds (each timeslot ~0,014s)
Legal values 0 = disable radio downlink counter
1 = 144 timeslots
2 = 288 timeslots
3 = 432 timeslots
4 = 576 timeslots
5 = 720 timeslots
6 = 864 timeslots
7 = 1008 timeslots
8 = 1152 timeslots
9 = 1296 timeslots
10 = 1440 timeslots
11 = 1584 timeslots
12 = 1728 timeslots
13 = 1872 timeslots
14 = 2016 timeslots
15 = 2160 timeslots
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

If too small values are used, then short breaks on the assigned channel will cause a time-consuming hunt for
a control channel. If too big values are used, then longer breaks appear on the assigned channels without
triggering the radio terminal to search for a better cell.

10.4.11.1.12 TIMM immediate in TEDS

Defines the number of TDMA frames to wait for an immediate random access on the QAM PDCH.
Type changeable
Default value 15 = immediate access allowed

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

214/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values 0 = always randomise
1–14 = randomise after IMM TDMA frames
15 = immediate access allowed
Change effective immediately

10.4.11.1.13 TNU number of random access transmissions on TEDS uplink

Defines the maximum number of random access attempts on uplink; used for random access by a radio
terminal on the QAM PDCHs.
Type changeable
Default value 5 = 5 transmissions
Legal values 0 = no random access transmission allowed
0–15 = number of random access transmissions
Change effective immediately

10.4.11.1.14 TWT waiting time for random access acknowledgement in TEDS

Defines the waiting time for random access acknowledgement. This parameter is used for random access by
the radio terminal on the QAM PDCH.
Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Unit frames (=TBS downlink signalling opportunities for the control channel)
Default value 5
Legal values integers from 1 to 15

Change effective immediately

10.4.11.1.15 TMINPRI minimum PDU priority for TEDS

Defines the number of minimum PDU priority.

Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0-7
Change effective immediately

CAUTION
The default value of this parameter is 0. Do not change the setting of this parameter.

10.4.11.1.16 TFREQ1DA sending frequency of ext services 1da element

Not in use.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 215/466
10.4.11.1.17 TFREQ2 sending frequency of ext services 2 element

Not in use.

10.4.11.1.18 TWIDTH carrier bandwidth on TEDS

Defines the carrier bandwidth that is used on the QAM PDCH in the TBS.
Type changeable
Default value 1 = 50 kHz
Legal values 0 = 25 kHz
1 = 50 kHz
Change effective immediately

10.4.11.2 TEDS radio path signalling parameters

10.4.11.2.1 TN2005 minimum length of random access frame in TEDS

Specifies the minimum length of random access frame to be used on the QAM PDCH.
Type changeable
Unit subslots
Default value 12
Legal values 2-32
Related The parameter value must be equal or lower than the value of the radio
parameters network parameter TN2009 maximum length of random access frame in
TEDS.
Change effective immediately

Note

Legal values are from 1 to 32, with the increment of 1. However, only values 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20,
24, and 32 are valid for the TBS. Other used values are rounded up to the nearest valid value in the TBS.

Note

When values 24 and 32 are used, the random access frame length is fixed (i.e. no lengthening is made).

Note

On a 50 kHz channel the frame includes double amount of random access opportunities than on a 25
kHz channel.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

216/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note

When there are several users on a QAM PDCH at the same time, random access frames on a QAM PDCH
are allocated in the optimal way and may be lengthened up to 24 or to the value of parameter TN2009
maximum length of random access frame in TEDS, whichever is smaller.

10.4.11.2.2 TN2006 maximum allowed path delay in TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.2.3 TN2009 maximum length of random access frame in TEDS

Specifies the maximum length of random access frame to be used on the QAM PDCH.
Type changeable
Unit subslots
Default value 32
Legal values 2-32
Related The parameter value must be equal or higher than the value of the radio
parameters network parameter TN2005 minimum length of random access frame in
TEDS.
Change effective immediately

Note

Legal values are from 2 to 32, with the increment of 1. However, only values 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20,
24, and 32 are valid for the TBS. Other used values are rounded up to the nearest valid value in the TBS.

Note

When there are several users on a QAM PDCH at the same time, random access frames on a QAM PDCH
are allocated in the optimal way and may be lengthened up to 24 or to the value of parameter TN2009
maximum length of random access frame in TEDS, whichever is smaller.

Note

On a 50 kHz channel the frame includes double amount of random access opportunities than on a 25
kHz channel.

10.4.11.2.4 TT252 acknowledgement waiting timer for TEDS

Defines the acknowledgement waiting time in TDMA frames for uplink PDUs (Protocol Data Units) on the
QAM PDCH. The value is used for basic link (BL) and advanced link (AL).

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 217/466
 Type changeable
Unit signalling frames
Default value 9
Legal values 1–50
Change effective immediately

10.4.11.3 TEDS cell reselection parameters

10.4.11.3.1 TSRT slow reselect threshold above fast in TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.3.2 TFRT fast reselect threshold in TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.3.3 TSRH slow reselect hysteresis in TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.3.4 TFRH fast reselect hysteresis in TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.3.5 TNTXPWR maximum transmitting power of MS in monitored TEDS cell

Not in use.

10.4.11.3.6 TNRXLEV minimum RX access level in monitored TEDS cell

Not in use.

10.4.11.3.7 TFWDREG forward registration support in TEDS

Not in use.

10.4.11.3.8 TEXCELL expedited cell reselection in TEDS

Not in use.

10.5 Neighbour cell parameters (PN command group)

These parameters specify which cells are neighbour cells of a cell. First, you will identify the serving cell
and then its neighbour cell(s).

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

218/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note

The neighbour cells having QAM PDCHs must be defined separately.

10.5.1 Neighbour cell parameters (PNA command)

The parameters in the PNA command are used for defining neighbour cells to the TETRA System.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PN Neighbour Cell Configuration Handling,
DN98628406.

10.5.1.1 LAID location area identifier

Defines the location area identifier of the serving cell. Once the serving cell is defined, the same parameter
is used to define the location area identifier of the neighbouring cell.

This parameter is an alternative to the parameter LANAME location area mnemonic. One of these two
parameters must be given.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit decimal number
Legal values any location area identifier created to the DXT
Related Radio network parameter LANAME location area mnemonic
parameters

10.5.1.2 LANAME location area mnemonic

Defines the location area mnemonic of the serving cell. Once the serving cell is defined, the same parameter
is used to define the location area mnemonic of the neighbouring cell.

This parameter is an alternative to the parameter LAID location area identifier. One of these two parameters
must be given.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit a text string
Legal values 1 - 15 characters specifying any location area mnemonic created to the
location area identified with LAID location area identifier.
Related Radio network parameter LAID location area identifier
parameters

10.5.1.3 CEID cell index

Defines the cell index of the serving cell, unique within a location area. Once the serving cell is defined, the
same parameter is used to define the cell index of the neighbouring cell.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 219/466
This parameter is an alternative to the parameter CENAME cell mnemonic. One of these two parameters
must be given.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit decimal number
Legal values 1 - 31 specifying any location area created to the DXT
Related Radio network parameter CENAME cell mnemonic
parameters

10.5.1.4 CENAME cell mnemonic

Defines the cell mnemonic of the serving cell, unique within the DXT. Once the serving cell is defined, the
same parameter is used to define the cell mnemonic of the neighbouring cell.

This parameter is an alternative to the parameter CEID cell index. One of these two parameters must be given.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit a text string
Legal values 1 - 15 characters specifying any cell created to the location area
identified with the previous parameter CEID cell index.
Related Radio network parameter CEID cell index
parameters

10.5.1.5 System identifier of neighbour cell

This parameter is optional.

Defines the DXT system identifier of the neighbour cell. The system identifier of the DXT in which you
perform the MML session is used as default, if the location area is defined by location area mnemonic
(LANAME) of neighbour cell.

If the user gives the parameter location area identifier (LAID) of the neighbour cell and the system identifier
of neighbour cell is not given, the location area range is used to define (primary and/or secondary) system
identifier(s) of the neighbour cell. In the case the neighbour cell is defined in both primary and secondary
DXT, then the system identifier of the neighbour cell needs to be defined in both of them.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit hexadecimal number
Default value the DXT identifier of the DXT in which you perform the MML session
Legal values DXT system identifier of the neighbour cell
Related Radio network parameters LANAME location area mnemonic, LAID
parameters location area identifier

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

220/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
10.5.1.6 Nature of neighbourhood relationship

This parameter specifies whether the neighbourhood is one-way relationship or two-way relationship.

The following example explains the one-way and two way relationships:

• You specify the serving cell A.

• You specify that cell B is a neighbour cell of cell A.

• As a result

– if you select two-way relationship, the cell A is a neighbour cell of the cell B.

– if you select one-way relationship, the cell A is not a neighbour cell of the cell B.

Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio

network configuration defines
Default value 2 (two-way relationship; the serving cell is defined as a neighbour also to
the given neighbour cell)
Legal values 1 (one-way relationship)
2 (two-way relationship)
Change effective immediately

10.5.2 Neighbour cell parameters for TEDS (PNT command)

The parameters in the PNT command are used for defining the neighbour cells having QAM PDCHs (for the
TEDS service) in the TETRA System.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PN Neighbour Cell Configuration Handling,
DN98628406.

Note

Be sure that TETRA neighbourhoods are defined before starting to use TEDS neighbourhood information.

10.5.2.1 LAID location area identifier

Defines the location area identifier of the serving cell.

This parameter is an alternative to the parameter LANAME location area mnemonic. One of these two
parameters must be given.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit decimal number
Legal values any location area identifier created to the DXT
Related Radio network parameter LANAME location area mnemonic
parameters

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 221/466
10.5.2.2 LANAME location area mnemonic

Defines the location area mnemonic of the serving cell.

This parameter is an alternative to the parameter LAID location area identifier. One of these two parameters
must be given.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit a text string
Legal values 1 - 15 characters specifying any location area mnemonic created to the
location area identified with LAID location area identifier.
Related Radio network parameter LAID location area identifier
parameters

10.5.2.3 CEID cell index

Defines the cell index of the serving cell, unique within a location area.
This parameter is an alternative to the parameter CENAME cell mnemonic. One of these two parameters
must be given.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit decimal number
Legal values 1 - 31 specifying any location area created to the DXT
Related Radio network parameter CENAME cell mnemonic
parameters

10.5.2.4 CENAME cell mnemonic

Defines the cell mnemonic of the serving cell, unique within the DXT.
This parameter is an alternative to the parameter CEID cell index. One of these two parameters must be given.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit a text string
Legal values 1 - 15 characters specifying any cell created to the location area
identified with the previous parameter CEID cell index.
Related Radio network parameter CEID cell index
parameters

10.5.2.5 TLAID location area identifier

Defines the location area identifier of the neighbour cell having QAM PDCHs.
This parameter is an alternative to the parameter TLANAME location area mnemonic. One of these two
parameters must be given.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

222/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit decimal number
Legal values any location area identifier created to the DXT
Related Radio network parameter TLANAME location area mnemonic
parameters

10.5.2.6 TLANAME location area mnemonic

Defines the location area mnemonic of the neighbour cell having QAM PDCHs.

This parameter is an alternative to the parameter TLAID location area identifier. One of these two parameters
must be given.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit a text string
Legal values 1 - 15 characters specifying any location area mnemonic created to the
location area identified with TLAID location area identifier.
Related Radio network parameter TLAID location area identifier
parameters

10.5.2.7 TCEID cell index

Defines the cell index of the neighbour cell having QAM PDCHs, unique within a location area.

This parameter is an alternative to the parameter TCENAME cell mnemonic. One of these two parameters
must be given.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit decimal number
Legal values 1 - 31 specifying any location area created to the DXT
Related Radio network parameter TCENAME cell mnemonic
parameters

Additional information

Needed for call restoration between defined cells.

10.5.2.8 TCENAME cell mnemonic

Defines the cell mnemonic of the cell having QAM PDCHs, unique within the DXT.

This parameter is an alternative to the parameter TCEID cell index. One of these two parameters must be
given.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 223/466
 Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit a text string
Legal values 1 - 15 characters specifying any cell created to the location area
identified with the previous parameter TCEID cell index.
Related Radio network parameter TCEID cell index
parameters

10.5.2.9 TDXTID system identifier

This parameter is optional.

Defines the DXT system identifier of the neighbour cell having QAM PDCHs. The system identifier of the DXT
in which you perform the MML session is used as default, if the location area is defined by location area
mnemonic (TLANAME) of neighbour cell.

If the user gives the parameter location area identifier (TLAID) of the neighbour cell and the system identifier
of neighbour cell is not given, the location area range is used to define (primary and/or secondary) system
identifier(s) of the neighbour cell. In the case the neighbour cell is defined in both primary and secondary
DXT, then the system identifier of the neighbour cell needs to be defined in both of them.
Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio
network configuration defines
Unit hexadecimal number
Default value the DXT identifier of the DXT in which you perform the MML session
Legal values DXT system identifier of the neighbour cell
Related Radio network parameters TLANAME location area mnemonic location
parameters area identifier (TLAID)

10.5.2.10 Nature of neighbourhood relationship

This parameter specifies whether the TEDS neighbourhood is one-way relationship or two-way relationship.

The following example explains the one-way and two way relationships:

• You specify the serving cell A.

• You specify that cell B is a neighbour cell of cell A.

• As a result

– if you select two-way relationship, the cell A is a neighbour cell of the cell B.

– if you select one-way relationship, the cell A is not a neighbour cell of the cell B.

Type unchangeable after creation, organisation responsible of the radio

network configuration defines
Default value 2 (two-way relationship; the serving cell is defined as a TEDS neighbour
also to the given neighbour cell)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

224/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values 1 (one-way relationship)
2 (two-way relationship)
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 225/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

226/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
11 TETRA IP transmission parameters
This chapter describes the DXT parameters that are used for configuring TETRA IP transmission between
DXTs and related network elements.
These parameters are defined to the DXTs. The parameters are grouped as follows:
• IP transmission parameters in the PM command group: Section 11.2
• IP connection configuration parameters (P2 command group): Section 11.3
• IP switching configuration parameters (P3 command group): Section 11.4
• SIP and IP transcoding configuration parameters (P4 command group): Section 11.5
• TETRA Voice Gateway IP configuration parameters (P5 command group): Section 11.6
• Inter-DXT signalling configuration parameters (NR, NS, OY, QR, Q8, QK, T2 command groups):
Section 11.7

See also Section 13.3 for information on TBS SW download parameters.

Note
TETRA IP transmission is supported from TETRA System Release 6.5 onwards.

Further information

For further details on the DXT parameters, please refer to the respective DXT Command Reference Manual.
For information on DXT/TB3/DWSx/RCS/SIP GW connections in TETRA IP transmission, see TETRA Site
IP Connectivity Guidelines (TRASYSAPP00192).
For information on setting the TETRA IP transmission parameters in the TETRA Base Stations, see the
documents Configuring TB3 for IP Connectivity (TRATBSAPP00030) and TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface
Description (TRATBSAPP00013).
For information on setting the TETRA IP transmission parameters in the DWSx, see the document
Commissioning the TETRA Dispatcher Workstation (DWS), DN0614001.
For information on setting the Direct IP parameters in the RCS 9500, see the documents RCS 9500 App
Manager Administrator Guide, RC1SYSAPP00003, and RCS IP Networking Guide, RC1SYSAPP00015.
For configuration instructions, see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190, and the integration
document of each DXT type.

11.1 Managing the TETRA IP transmission parameters

The following table shows what you need to manage the TETRA IP transmission parameters in the DXT
by MML sessions.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 227/466
Table 31 : Modifying TETRA IP transmission parameters in an MML session

Topic Information
Tools MML session through an MML terminal
User interface MMI (man machine interface)
Required rights rights to MML session and to the appropriate MML commands
When the values are when commissioning the DXT
given

11.2 IP transmission parameters in the PM command group

In the PM command group there are two types of DXT parameters that are used for configuring TETRA
IP transmission:
• Network and registration parameters
• Radio network parameters

11.2.1 Network and registration parameters

In the PM command group the following network and registration parameters are used for configuring TETRA
IP transmission:
• OSTE-NISI transform (89)
• Signalling QoS tagging DSCP (90)
• Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92)
• Voice frame QoS tagging IEEE_802.1p (93)
• Voice transport VLAN identifier (94)
• QoS control enabled (95)
• Dejitter buffer size (96)
• IP voice base UDP port value (97)
• DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (99)
• DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (100)
• DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (101)
• DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (102)
• DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (103)
• ToBB signaling QoS tagging DSCP (105)
• G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (108)
• G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (109)
• G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (110)
• G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (111)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

228/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 • G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (112)
• G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (113)
• G4WIF signaling QoS tagging DSCP (114)

These parameters are described in Sections 12.2.8.30 – 12.2.8.50 .

11.2.2 Radio network parameters

In the PM command group the following radio network parameters are used for configuring TETRA IP
transmission:
• TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (83)
• TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (84)
• Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
• TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (86)
• TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (87)
• TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (88)

These parameters are described in Sections 12.2.9.2 – 12.2.9.7 .

11.3 IP connection configuration parameters (P2 command

group)
The parameters in the P2 command group are used for IP connection configuration handling. This includes:
• TBS IP connection configuration
• DWSx / RCS 9500 IP connection configuration
• IP circuit configuration
• IP transport network QoS control configuration

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: P2 IP Connection Configuration Handling,
TRADXTAPP00073.

11.4 IP switching configuration parameters (P3 command

group)
The parameters in the P3 command group are used for IP switching configuration handling. This includes:
• IP switch, EsGate and gateway function configuration
• PCM pool configuration

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: P3 IP Switching Configuration Handling,
TRADXTAPP00074.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 229/466
11.5 SIP and IP transcoding configuration parameters (P4
command group)
The parameters in the P4 command group are used for SIP and IP transcoding configuration handling.
This includes:
• transcoding resource pool configuration
• transcoding function configuration
• SIP gateway configuration

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: P4 SIP and IP Transcoding Configuration
Handling, TRADXTAPP00085.
See also the following documents:
• DXT Command Reference Manual: PG Connection Group Data Handling, DN0171487, for information
about SIP gateway lines related to connection group.
• DXT Command Reference Manual: QR TCP/IP Stack Data Handling, DN9828275, for information
about creating a new VLAN interface to TGS units and configuring IP address to the VLAN interface for
SIP traffic.
• DXT Command Reference Manual: P3 IP Switching Configuration Handling, TRADXTAPP00074, for
configuring EsGate, Gateway Function, and the related configuration parameters.

11.6 TETRA Voice Gateway IP configuration parameters (P5

command group)
The parameters in the P5 command group are used for TETRA Voice Gateway IP configuration handling.
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: P5 TETRA Voice Gateway IP Configuration
Handling, TRADXTAPP00173.

11.7 Inter-DXT signalling configuration parameters (NR, NS, OY,

QR, Q8, QK, T2 command groups)
The parameters for inter-DXT signalling are set with the commands listed below.
• NR - Signalling Route Set Data Handling
– NRC – Create signalling route set
– NRA – Add signalling route to route set

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: NR - Signalling Route Set Data
Handling, DN986437.
• NS - Signalling Link Set Data Handling

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

230/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 – NSP – Create IP type of signalling link set
– NSD – Delete signalling link set

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: NS - Signalling Link Set Data Handling,
DN986449.
• OY - SCTP Configuration Handling
– OYC – Create SCTP association set
– OYA – Create associations to the association set
– OYP – Add SCTP transport addresses to the association
– OYI – Interrogate SCTP transport addresses of an association
– OYM – Modify association set parameter value
– OYE – Create new SCTP parameter set
– OYO – Interrogate SCTP parameter set values
– OYT – Change SCTP parameter set values
– OYS – (De)activate SCTP association
– OYQ – Interrogate average M3UA CPU load
– OYD – Remove association set

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: OY - SCTP Configuration Handling,
DN70505531.
• QR - TCP/IP Stack Data Handling
– QRA – Configure VLAN interface for unit
– QRN – Assign IP address to unit's Ethernet interface
– QRS – Interrogate network status (with SCTP statistics counters)

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: QR - TCP/IP Stack Data Handling,
DN9828275.
• Q8 - IP QoS Configuration Handling
– Q8N – Configure Port-Based Classification and Marking (for configuring DiffServ code point value
for an IP service)

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: Q8 - IP QoS Configuration Handling,
DN03408251.
• QK - IP Routing Data Handling
– QKC – Create static route

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: QK - IP Routing Data Handling,
DN99575828.
• T2 - Measurement Handling
For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: T2 - Measurement Handling,
DN0689231.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 231/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

232/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
12 DXT parameters modified with the PM
command group
This chapter describes the DXT parameters modified by MML session with the PM command group.

Default organisation parameters modified by MML session and handled with command group PM are
described in chapter 2 .

12.1 Managing the DXT parameters (PM command group)

The following table shows what you need to manage the DXT parameters modified by MML sessions with
the PM command group.

Table 32 : Modifying DXT parameters in an MML session with the PM command group

Topic Information
Tools MML session through an MML terminal
User interface MMI (man machine interface)
Required rights rights to MML session and to the appropriate MML commands
When the values are when commissioning the DXT
given

For further details, please refer to the respective Command Reference Manual.

12.2 DXT parameters used in PM command group

12.2.1 Parameter type

Identifies the type of parameters.
Type changeable
Legal values SYS = System parameter
EXC = Exchange parameter
DOP = Default Organisation parameter
OSP = Organisation specific parameter
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 233/466
12.2.2 Organisation identifier

Identifies the organisation which organisation specific parameter(s) will be interrogated. This parameter is
available and obligatory when organisation specific parameter(s) is(are) to be interrogated.
Type changeable
Legal values decimal number 0...32768

Change effective immediately

12.2.3 Display type

Identifies the display format. The parameter values are displayed according to the chosen format.
Type changeable
Default value DEC
Legal values DEC = decimal number display format
HEX = hexadecimal number display format
Change effective immediately

12.2.4 Parameter identifier

Identifies the parameter to be interrogated. One or more parameter IDs can be given.
Type changeable
Default value all
Legal values In case of system parameter:
decimal number 0 ... -EW (&,&&)
In case of exchange parameter:
decimal number 0 ... -EW (&,&&)
In case of organisation specific parameter:
decimal number 18, 19
Related PM command group parameter Parameter value
parameters
Change effective immediately

12.2.5 Parameter value

Identifies the given format of the parameter value. The user can choose either decimal number format or
hexadecimal number format.

If given Organisation Specific parameter is 18 (see parameter Sorting format), this parameter identifies
the given format of the parameter value.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

234/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Legal values DEC = DECIMAL NUMBER FORMAT
HEX = HEXADECIMAL NUMBER FORMAT
Related PM command group parameter Sorting format
parameters
Change effective immediately

12.2.6 Sorting format

Identifies the sorting format. The parameters can be sorted either by identifier, name or category. Default
value is CATEG. If only some parameters are interrogated (used for example grouping & or &&), they can
be sorted only by identifier. Organisation parameters can be interrogated only by identifier or name, where
NAME is the default sorting format.
Type changeable
Default value CATEG
Legal values NAME = parameters sorted by name
ID = parameters sorted by identifier
CATEG = parameters sorted by category
Related PM command group parameter Category
parameters
Change effective immediately

Additional information

If CATEG is selected, the category can also be identified. See PM command group parameter Category.

If only certain parameters are interrogated, they can be sorted only by identier, not by name or category.

Note

Organisation parameters (DOP and OSP) can be interrogated only by identifier or name, not by category.

12.2.7 Category
Identifies the category of parameters and is used together with the Sorting format parameter.
Type changeable
Default value ALL

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 235/466
 Legal values NW = NETWORK AND REGISTRATION PARAMETERS
RN = RADIO NETWORK PARAMETERS
NUM = NUMBERING PARAMETERS
AUTH = AUTHENTICATION AND ENCRYPTION PARAMETERS
CALL = CALL PARAMETERS
EMER = EMERGENCY CALL PARAMETERS
IP = IP PACKET DATA PARAMETERS
SDS = STATUS AND SDS PARAMETERS
LOAD = LOAD LIMITER PARAMETERS
FS = FEATURE SWITCH PARAMETERS
Related PM command group parameter Sorting format
parameters
Change immediately
effective

12.2.8 Network and registration parameters

12.2.8.1 Data recovery activation/deactivation (69)

Controls the activation and deactivation of data recovery between DXT databases.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values from 0 to 3; with the increment of 1
Special values 0x0 = All recovery off
0x1 = All recovery on
0x2 = Periodical recovery only on
0x3 = Failure logging only on
Related PM command group parameter Maxload for data recovery
parameters PM command group parameter Recovery of client applications
PM command group parameter Recovery of group data
PM command group parameter Recovery of MSISDN/FSSN numbers
PM command group parameter Recovery of organisation blocks
PM command group parameter Recovery of subnets
PM command group parameter Recovery of subscriber location
PM command group parameter Recovery period
PM command group parameter Recovery start hours
PM command group parameter Recovery start minutes

Recommendations

Value 1 (all recovery on) is recommended.

Additional information

Data recovery consist of two parts: periodical recovery and failure logging. Periodical recovery is executed
as often as defined with start time and period parameters. It handles several data items, which can be
activated/deactivated separately (see related parameters). Failure logging tries to repeat commands which
sending to other DXTs or CDD server has failed.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

236/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
12.2.8.2 Default route DXT (68)

Defines the default routing information from the local DXT to any other destination DXTs in the network when
the routing table cannot be accessed, or when the searched DXT is not defined on the routing table. The
parameter values are short DXT identification values.
Type changeable
Default value FF00
Legal values from 00 to FF00; with the increment of 1
Special values 00 - FF (value range for short DXT ids)
FF00 (the parameter is not in use)
9999 (the parameter is not in use)

12.2.8.3 Interexchange speech line testing interval (72)

For future use.

12.2.8.4 Not valid ASSI gap high limit (6)

Not in use.

12.2.8.5 Not valid ASSI gap low limit (0)

Not in use.

12.2.8.6 Recovery of client applications (32)

Specifies whether the recovery of client application SSI-HLR data (saved to every DXT in the network)
is enabled or disabled.
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Default value 1 (enabled)
Legal values 0 (disabled), 1 (enabled)
Related PM command group parameter Maxload for data recovery
parameters PM command group parameter Recovery of group data
PM command group parameter Recovery of subscriber location
PM command group parameter Recovery period
PM command group parameter Recovery start time
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Value 1 (enabled) is recommended. Value 0 (disabled) might decrease the system load. However, the
system fault tolerance may be affected.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 237/466
12.2.8.7 Recovery of group data (33)

Specifies whether the periodical recovery of Group ID - Group HLR information saved to every DXT in the
network is enabled or disabled. The master of this data is always the group HLR.
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Default value 1 (enabled)
Legal values 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled)
Related PM command group parameter Maxload for data recovery
parameters PM command group parameter Recovery of client applications
PM command group parameter Recovery of subscriber location
PM command group parameter Recovery period
PM command group parameter Recovery start time
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Value 1 (enabled) is recommended. Value 0 (disabled) might decrease the system load as the data is not
recovered. However, the system fault tolerance may be affected.

12.2.8.8 Recovery of MSISDN/FSSN numbers (64)

Specifies whether the periodical recovery of MSISDN/FSSN number data of radio subscribers and client
applications is enabled or disabled. The number data is stored to both ITSI HLR and number HLR. The
master DXT of this data is always the ITSI HLR.
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Default value 1 (enabled)
Legal values 1 (enabled), 0 (disabled)
Related PM command group parameter Maxload for data recovery
parameters PM command group parameterRecovery of client applications
PM command group parameterRecovery of subscriber location
PM command group parameterRecovery period
PM command group parameterRecovery of group data
PM command group parameterRecovery of subnets
PM command group parameterRecovery start hours
PM command group parameterRecovery start minutes

Recommendations

Value 1 (enabled) is recommended. However, checking and recovering this data item may load the system,
especially if there are plenty of subscribers with MSISDN/FSSN numbers in the system.

12.2.8.9 Recovery of organisation blocks (63)

Specifies whether the periodical recovery of organisation Block data which is saved to every DXT in the
network is enabled or disabled. The master DXT of this data is always the organisation block HLR.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

238/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Default value 1 (enabled)
Legal values 1 (enabled), 0 (disabled)
Related PM command group parameter Maxload for data recovery
parameters PM command group parameterRecovery of client applications
PM command group parameterRecovery of group data
PM command group parameterRecovery of subnets
PM command group parameterRecovery of subscriber location
PM command group parameterRecovery period
PM command group parameterRecovery start hours
PM command group parameterRecovery start minutes

Recommendations

Value 1 (enabled) is recommended. However, checking and recovering this data item can load the system.

12.2.8.10 Recovery of subnets (58)

Specifies whether the periodical recovery of subnets saved to every DXT in network is enabled.
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Default value 1 (enabled)
Legal values 0 (disabled), 1 (enabled)
Related PM command group parameter Maxload for data recovery
parameters PM command group parameterRecovery of client applications
PM command group parameterRecovery of group data
PM command group parameterRecovery of subscriber location
PM command group parameterRecovery period
PM command group parameterRecovery start time
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

Value 1 (enabled) is recommended. Value 0 (disabled) might decrease the system load as the data is not
recovered. However, the system fault tolerance may be affected.

12.2.8.11 Recovery of subscriber location (31)

Specifies whether the recovery of the subscribers dynamic registration data is is enabled or disabled. The
DXT where the subscriber is located at the time (VLR) initiates the recovery to the target, which is the
subscriber's home DXT (HLR).
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Default value 0 (disabled)
Legal values 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled)

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 239/466
 Related PM command group parameter Maxload for data recovery
parameters PM command group parameter Recovery of client applications
PM command group parameter Recovery of group data
PM command group parameter Recovery period
PM command group parameter Recovery start time
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

This data is changing often and it is recommended to have this data item included in periodical recovery.
Value 1 (enabled) is recommended. Value 0 (disabled) might decrease the system load as the data is not
recovered. However, the system fault tolerance may be affected.

12.2.8.12 Recovery period (17)

Specifies the time period used by periodical data recovery. A timer is set with the value of this parameter
and when it expires, periodical recovery is started. After periodical recovery, the timer is set again with the
value of the present parameter.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Unit hour
Default value 24
Legal values from 2 to 168 (7 days), with the increment of 1
Related PM command group parameter Maxload for data recovery, Recovery
parameters of client applications
PM command group parameter Recovery of group data
PM command group parameter Recovery of subscriber location
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Recommendation is 24 hours. A too long period may prevent the network from benefits of automatic data
recovery. A too short period may cause the recovery to start during busy hours.

Additional information

For further information and examples how to use this parameter, see PM command group parameter
12.2.8.13 .

12.2.8.13 Recovery start hours (18)

Specifies the hours for a time at which periodical data recovery should start. The minutes of starting time are
given with the PM commanf group parameter Recovery start minutes. After the starting time is defined, the
PM command group parameter Recovery period (default 1 day) is used for defining the requested period.
The recovery can be interrupted because of high load in CM. The load limit is defined with the PM command
group parameter Maxload for data recovery. If periodical recovery is interrupted due to high load, it will be
started normally again after the recovery period has passed.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

240/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Unit hour
Default value 3
Legal values from 0 to 23, with the increment of 1
Related PM command group parameter Recovery start minutes
parameters PM command group parameter Maxload for data recovery
PM command group parameter Recovery of client applications
PM command group parameter Recovery of group data
PM command group parameter Recovery of subscriber location
PM command group parameter Recovery period
Change effective changes in starting time are checked every five minutes. Changes in
starting time parameter values (hours and minutes) will be taken into use
right after the value is read

Recommendations

The starting time should preferably be at night time or another time when load in CM is relatively low.

Additional information

Some examples of starting time and period:

1) recovery start hours = 3, recovery start minutes = 30, recovery period = 24. Periodical recovery will
start every night at 3:30.

2) recovery start hours = 3, recovery start minutes = 0, recovery period = 5. The first recovery will take place
at 3 o'clock in the night. After this, the recovery period is used to define the time for recovery, that is, next
times the recovery will start are at 8, 13 (1 in the afternoon), 18 (6 in the evening), 23 (11 in the night),
4 (in the night), 9 (in the morning), etc.

3) recovery start hours = 3, recovery start minutes = 0, recovery period = 10. The first recovery will start at 3
o'clock in the night and next at 13 (1 in the afternoon). If the value of the parameter "recovery start time" is
changed in the afternoon at 2 o'clock from 3 (in the night) to 4 (in the night), the change will be taken into
account within 5 minutes and the next periodical recovery will start next night at 4 o'clock in the night. After
this recovery, the period is used again to define the times for next recoveries.

4) recovery start hours = 3, recovery start minutes = 0, recovery period = 24. The recovery starts every night
at 3 o'clock. If the recovery period is changed in the morning at 8 o'clock from 24 to 12, the next recovery will
still happen at 3 o'clock next night. After this, the new period will be used, and the recovery will start twice a
day, at 3 in the nights and at 15 in the afternoon.

12.2.8.14 Recovery start minutes (3)

Specifies the minutes for a time at which periodical data recovery should start. The hours of starting time are
given with the PM command group parameter Recovery start hours. After the starting time is defined, the PM
command group parameter Recovery period (default 1 day) is used for defining the requested period. The
recovery can be interrupted because of high load in CM. The load limit is defined with the PM command
group parameter Maxload for data recovery. If periodical recovery is interrupted due to high load, it will be
started normally again after the recovery period has passed.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 241/466
 Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Unit minutes
Default value 0
Legal values from 0 to 59, with the increment of 1
Related PM command group parameter Recovery start hours
parameters PM command group parameter Maxload for data recovery
PM command group parameter Recovery of client applications
PM command group parameter Recovery of group data
PM command group parameter Recovery of subscriber location
PM command group parameter Recovery period
Change effective changes in starting time are checked every five minutes. Changes in
starting time parameter values (hours and minutes) are taken into use
right after the value is read

Recommendations

The starting time should preferably be at night time or another time when load in CM is relatively low.

Additional information

For further information and examples how to use this parameter, see PM command group parameter
12.2.8.13 .

12.2.8.15 Spare HLR DXT ID (35)

Specifies the DXT ID of spare HLR DXT.

Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Default value 0x0
Legal values one of the existing DXT IDs in the system
Special values 0 (DXT/HLR is not redundant)
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

The parameter indicates DXT ID of spare HLR DXT. The parameter value is zero if DXT/HLR is not
redundant. Otherwise the Spare HLR DXT ID parameter of the active DXT/HLR and spare DXT/HLR contains
system ID of spare DXT/HLR.

12.2.8.16 TBS load monitoring data format version (75)

Defines the interface level between DXT and Viewcor. In Release 6 and Release 7, the interface level
needs to be changed to value 2.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 1 - 65535

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

242/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related PM command group parameters:
parameters TBS load monitoring tool ip address field1 (76)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field2 (77)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field3 (78)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field4 (79)
TBS load monitoring tool IP address type (80)
TBS load monitoring tool port number (81)
TBS monitoring data interval (82)
Change effective activated in one minute

12.2.8.17 TBS load monitoring tool ip address field1 (76)

Specifies the first part of the IP address (e.g. 193.xx.xx.xx) of the Viewcor interface receiving periodic TBS
load and status data from DXT.
Type changeable only when the interface is deactivated
Default value Not defined = 0
Legal values 0 - 65535 (dec)
Related PM command group parameters:
parameters TBS load monitoring data format version (75)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field2 (77)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field3 (78)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field4 (79)
TBS load monitoring tool IP address type (80)
TBS load monitoring tool port number (81)
TBS monitoring data interval (82)
Change effective activated in interface activation

12.2.8.18 TBS load monitoring tool ip address field2 (77)

Specifies the second part of the IP address (e.g. xx.200.xx.xx) of the Viewcor interface receiving periodic
TBS load and status data from DXT.
Type changeable only when the interface is deactivated
Default value Not defined = 0
Legal values 0 - 65535 (dec)
Related PM command group parameters:
parameters TBS load monitoring data format version (75)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field1 (76)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field3 (78)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field4 (79)
TBS load monitoring tool IP address type (80)
TBS load monitoring tool port number (81)
TBS monitoring data interval (82)
Change effective activated in interface activation

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 243/466
12.2.8.19 TBS load monitoring tool ip address field3 (78)

Specifies the third part of the IP address (e.g. xx.xx.64.xx) of the Viewcor interface receiving periodic TBS
load and status data from DXT.
Type changeable only when the interface is deactivated
Default value Not defined = 0
Legal values 0 - 65535 (dec)
Related PM command group parameters:
parameters TBS load monitoring data format version (75)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field1 (76)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field2 (77)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field4 (79)
TBS load monitoring tool IP address type (80)
TBS load monitoring tool port number (81)
TBS monitoring data interval (82)
Change effective activated in interface activation

12.2.8.20 TBS load monitoring tool ip address field4 (79)

Specifies the fourth part of the IP address (e.g. xx.xx.xx.10) of the Viewcor interface receiving periodic TBS
load and status data from DXT.
Type changeable only when the interface is deactivated
Default value Not defined = 0
Legal values 0 - 65535 (dec)
Related PM command group parameters:
parameters TBS load monitoring data format version (75)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field1 (76)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field2 (77)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field3 (78)
TBS load monitoring tool IP address type (80)
TBS load monitoring tool port number (81)
TBS monitoring data interval (82)
Change effective activated in interface activation

12.2.8.21 TBS load monitoring tool IP address type (80)

Specifies the IP address type of the Viewcor interface receiving periodic TBS load and status data from DXT.
Currently only IPv4 protocol is supported.
Type not changeable, only the default value is valid
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = ipv4

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

244/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related PM command group parameters:
parameters TBS load monitoring data format version (75)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field1 (76)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field2 (77)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field3 (78)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field4 (79)
TBS load monitoring tool port number (81)
TBS monitoring data interval (82)
Change effective not changeable, only the default value is valid

12.2.8.22 TBS load monitoring tool port number (81)

Specifies the port number of the Viewcor IP address (e.g. xx.xx.xx.xx:1812) in the Viewcor interface receiving
periodic TBS load and status data from DXT. By default Viewcor is configured to receive data to port 1812.
Type changeable only when the interface is deactivated
Default value Not defined (=0)
Legal values 0 - 65535 (dec)
Related PM command group parameters:
parameters TBS load monitoring data format version (75)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field1 (76)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field2 (77)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field3 (78)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field4 (79)
TBS load monitoring tool IP address type (80)
TBS monitoring data interval (82)
Change effective activated in interface activation

12.2.8.23 TBS monitoring data interval (82)

Defines the interval at which the TBS monitoring data on all base stations is sent once from DXT. The
monitoring data is sent from DXT base station by base station, so that one monitoring data set always
includes monitoring data of one base station. The defined interval is divided by the number of base stations
configured into DXT to get the interval between two monitoring data sets. Thus, the sending interval between
two monitoring data sets on one particular base station can be even longer than the defined interval. For
example, with an interval of 10 seconds and 100 configured base stations, the interval between monitoring
data sets (monitoring data from different base stations) is 100 milliseconds. The minimum interval between
two monitoring data sets is 80 milliseconds regardless of the defined interval. E.g. with the interval of 10
seconds and 128 configured base stations, the interval between monitoring data sets is 80 milliseconds.
Type changeable
Default value 10 = 10 seconds
Legal values From 1 to 1000 seconds with the increment of 1 second

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 245/466
 Related PM command group parameters:
parameters TBS load monitoring data format version (75)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field1 (76)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field2 (77)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field3 (78)
TBS load monitoring tool ip address field4 (79)
TBS load monitoring tool IP address type (80)
TBS load monitoring tool port number (81)
Change effective activated in one minute

12.2.8.24 VLR cleanup notice (26)

At the end of VLR cleanup, a notice about cleanup can be given to the operator. The notice includes
information on how many inactive subscribers were deleted and how much VLR database has space in use
after cleanup. With this parameter the operator can enable or disable the sending of this notice.
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Default value 1 (enabled)
Legal values 0 (disabled), 1 (enabled)
Related PM command group parameter VLR cleanup period
parameters PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start hours
PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start minutes
PM command group parameter VLR inactivity time
PM command group parameter VLR usage limit
Change effective The value of the parameter is read at the end of VLR cleanup, and it is
used immediately after that

Recommendations

Value 1 (enabled) recommended

12.2.8.25 VLR cleanup period (30)

Specifies the time period for periodical VLR cleanup. After the cleanup has started first time, the next starting
times are defined with this parameter. The value of this parameter is set in a way that it fits the needs of
network. A timer is set with the value of this parameter and when this timer expires, periodical cleanup
is started.
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Unit hour
Default value 24
Legal values from 1 to 168 (=7 days), with the increment of 1

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

246/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related PM command group parameter VLR cleanup notice
parameters PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start hours
PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start minutes
PM command group parameter VLR inactivity time
PM command group parameter VLR usage limit
Change changes in parameter are checked every 5 minutes. The changed value
effective will be taken into use in the next cleanup session.

Additional information

For further information and examples how to use this parameter, see PM command group parameter
12.2.8.26 .

12.2.8.26 VLR cleanup start hours (29)

Specifies the hour part of time when periodical VLR cleanup should start at the first time. The minutes of the
starting time are defined with the Pm command group parameter VLR cleanup start minutes. After the first
start, the PM command group parameter VLR cleanup period (default 1 day, depends on network size and
type) is used for defining the next cleanup start times. When the value of the PM command group parameter
VLR cleanup start hours changes, it and the value of the PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start
minutes are used to calculate the next VLR cleanup start time.
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Unit hour
Default value 2
Legal values from 0 to 23, with the increment of 1
Related PM command group parameter VLR cleanup notice
parameters PM command group parameter VLR cleanup period
PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start minutes
PM command group parameter VLR inactivity time
PM command group parameter VLR usage limit
Change effective Changes in the parameter value are checked every five minutes.
Changes in starting time parameter values (hours or minutes) will be
taken into use right away after the value is read.

Recommendations

VLR cleanup should be started at the time when load in CM is low, usually at night time. However, cleanup
must be enabled always when needed.

Additional information

Some examples of starting time and period:

1) vlr cleanup start hours = 3, vlr cleanup start minutes = 15, vlr cleanup period = 24. The periodical VLR
cleanup will start every night at 3:15.

2) vlr cleanup start hours = 3, vlr cleanup start minutes = 0, vlr cleanup period = 5. The first periodical VLR
cleanup will take place at 3 o'clock in the night. After this, the cleanup period is used for defining the time for

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 247/466
cleanup, that is, next times cleanup will start are at 8 (in the morning), 13 (1 in the afternoon), 18 (6 in the
evening), 23 (11 in the night), 4 (in the night), 9 (in the morning), etc.

3) vlr cleanup start hours = 3, vlr cleanup start minutes = 30, vlr cleanup period = 10. The first periodical VLR
cleanup will start at 3:30 in the night and next at 13:30 (1:30 in the afternoon). If the value of the parameter vlr
cleanup start hours is changed in the afternoon at 2 o'clock from 3 (in the night) to 4 (in the night), the change
will be taken into account within 5 minutes, and next periodical VLR cleanup will start next night at 4:30. After
this cleanup, the period is used again to define time for the next cleanups.

4) vlr cleanup start hours = 3, vlr cleanup start minutes = 30, vlr cleanup period = 10 first periodical VLR
cleanup will start at 3:30 and next at 13:30. If the value of the parameter vlr cleanup start minutes is changed
in the afternoon at 2 o'clock from 30 to 0, the change will be taken into account within 5 minutes, and next
periodical VLR cleanup will start next night at 3 o'clock. After this cleanup, the period is used again to
define time for the next cleanups.

5) vlr cleanup start hours = 3, vlr cleanup start minutes = 0, vlr cleanup period = 24. The periodical VLR
cleanup starts every night at 3 o'clock. If the cleanup period is changed in the morning at 8 o'clock from 24 to
12, next cleanup will still happen at 3 o'clock next night. After this, the new period will be used, and cleanup
will start twice a day, at 3 in the night and at 15 (3 in the afternoon).

12.2.8.27 VLR cleanup start minutes (4)

Specifies the minute part of time when periodical VLR cleanup should start at the first time. The minutes
of the starting time are defined with the PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start minutes. After
the first start, the PM command group parameter VLR cleanup period (default 1 day, depends on network
size and type) is used for defining the next cleanup start times. When the value of the PM command group
parameter VLR cleanup start hours changes, it and the value of the PM command group parameter VLR
cleanup start minutes are used to calculate the next VLR cleanup start time.
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Unit minute

Default value 0
Legal values from 0 to 59, with the increment of 1
Related PM command group parameter VLR cleanup notice
parameters PM command group parameter VLR cleanup period
PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start hours
PM command group parameter VLR inactivity time
PM command group parameter VLR usage limit
Change effective Changes in the parameter value are checked every five minutes.
Changes in starting time parameter values (hours or minutes) will be
taken into use right away after the value is read.

Recommendations

VLR cleanup should be started at the time when load in CM is low, usually at night time. However, cleanup
must be enabled always when needed.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

248/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Additional information

For further information and examples how to use this parameter, see PM command group parameter
12.2.8.26 .

12.2.8.28 VLR inactivity time (28)

Specifies the minimum time that a subscriber must be inactive before it can be deleted. Need for VLR
cleanup is checked periodically. Actual VLR cleanup will start if the amount of used space in VLR database
exceeds the limit defined with the parameter VLR usage limit. In the cleanup, all the inactive subscribers,
who are older than defined with the parameter VLR inactivity time will be deleted. When the deletion has
ended, a notice is sent to the operator if sending is enabled. This notice includes information on how many
inactive subscribers were deleted in cleanup and what is usage of VLR database space after cleanup. The
appropriate value of the parameter VLR inactivity time depends on the network size and type.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Unit minute
Default value 10 080 (= 1 week)
Legal values from 5 to 259 200 (= 180 days), with the increment of 1
Related PM command group parameter VLR cleanup notice
parameters PM command group parameter VLR cleanup period
PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start hours
PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start minutes
PM command group parameter VLR usage limit
Change effective the value of this parameter is read at the start of VLR cleanup, and it is
used immediately after that

Note
Value of the parameter is network dependent.

12.2.8.29 VLR usage limit (27)

The actual VLR cleaning can start when amount of used space in VLR database exceeds this limit. In VLR
cleanup all inactive subscribers that have been inactive for a longer time than defined with the PM command
group parameter VLR inactivity time will be deleted. When the VLR cleanup starts, the amount of used space
in the database is checked. If it exceeds the amount specified with the parameter VLR usage limit, the actual
cleaning will start. If not, only a notice about cleaning is given to the operator if sending is enabled (see PM
command group parameter 12.2.8.24 ). This notice includes information on how many inactive subscribers
were deleted, and how much space the VLR database has in use. The appropriate value of the parameter
VLR usage limit depends on the network type and size.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 70
Legal values from 0 to 95, with the increment of 1

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 249/466
 Related PM command group parameter VLR cleanup notice
parameters PM command group parameter VLR cleanup period
PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start hours
PM command group parameter VLR cleanup start minutes
PM command group parameter VLR inactivity time
Change effective the value of this parameter is read at the start of VLR cleanup, and it is
used immediately after that

Note

Value of the parameter is network dependent.

12.2.8.30 OSTE-NISI transform (89)

Defines whether OSTE to NISI conversion is in use or not in a DXT used for TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Change effective after each EsGate is restarted

Recommendations

OSTE-NISI conversion in the DXT should be kept off (0 = deactivated). It should be activated only for
troubleshooting purposes on Airbus DS's request.

Additional information

The TETRA voice frames are transported between the Airbus DS TETRA network elements using two frame
formats: Optional Speech Transport Frame (OSTE) frame and Nokia Inter System Interface (NISI) frame.

In some special network delay circumstances, a DXT that is connected to both IP and TDM transport
networks needs to transfer the OSTE encoded voice frames received from an IP connected TB3 to NISI
encoded voice frames before forwarding them to a TDM connected DXT/TB3.

12.2.8.31 Signalling QoS tagging DSCP (90)

Defines Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) tagging that the DXT shall set to every IP packet sent
to related network elements, containing an SCTP signalling message. The SCTP signalling IP traffic is
assigned a traffic class of its own. In IP transport network this signalling traffic class is allocated a DSCP
code value in L3 IP level.

The parameter is used for marking the outgoing IP packets from DXTs with appropriate traffic class markings.
The voice service class needs to be defined a prioritised real-time-traffic treatment within the IP transport
network. With Signalling QoS tagging DSCP it is possible to differentiate and prioritise traffic classes (DSCP
priority of SCTP signalling packets).

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

250/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Default value 10
Legal values From 0 to 63, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92)
Voice frame QoS tagging IEEE_802.1p (93)
Change effective once the signalling connection is re-established

Note
This parameter has to be in line with the transmission network. Changing this parameter affects all the related
network elements after the signalling connection has been re-established. Also all the related network
elements in the IP transport network need to be re-configured to support the new value.

See TETRA Site IP Connectivity Guidelines, TRASYSAPP00192. See also the description of
the corresponding TB3 parameter signalDscpTag in TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface Description,
TRATBSAPP00013.

12.2.8.32 Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92)

Defines Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) tagging that the DXT shall set to every sent IP packet
containing TETRA voice frame. The voice frame IP traffic is assigned a traffic class of its own. In IP transport
network this voice traffic class is allocated a DSCP code value in L3 IP level.

The parameter is used for marking the outgoing IP packets from DXTs with appropriate traffic class markings.
The voice service class needs to be defined a prioritised real-time-traffic treatment within the IP transport
network. With Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP it is possible to differentiate and prioritise traffic classes
(DSCP priority of RTP voice packets).
Type changeable
Default value 46 (EF)
Legal values From 0 to 63, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters Signalling QoS tagging DSCP (90)
Voice frame QoS tagging IEEE_802.1p (93)
Change effective Once the Gateway Function in EsGate is restarted this parameter
becomes effective to those network elements connected to this Gateway
Function.
Once the Transcoding Function in EsGate is restarted this parameter
becomes effective to those SIP GW network elements connected to
this Transcoding Function.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 251/466
Note

This parameter has to be in line with the transmission network. Changing this parameter affects all the related
network elements. Also all the related network elements (such as routers and switches) in the IP transport
network need to be re-configured to support the new value.

See also the description of the corresponding TB3 parameter voiceDscpTag in TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface
Description, TRATBSAPP00013.

12.2.8.33 Voice frame QoS tagging IEEE_802.1p (93)

Defines IEEE 802.1p Class of Service (CoS) tagging that the DXT shall set to every sent Ethernet frame
containing TETRA Voice frame. The voice frame IP traffic is assigned a traffic class of its own. In IP
transport network this voice traffic class is allocated a CoS priority value (IEEE 802.1p p-bits in VLAN tag) in
L2 Ethernet level.

The parameter is used for marking the outgoing IP packets from DXTs with appropriate traffic class markings.
The voice service class needs to be defined a prioritised real-time-traffic treatment within the IP transport
network. With Voice frame QoS IEEE 802.1p it is possible to differentiate and prioritise traffic classes
(Ethernet priority of RTP voice packets).
Type changeable
Default value 5 (voice)
Legal values From 0 to 7, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters Signalling QoS tagging DSCP (90)
Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92)
Change effective Once the Gateway Function in EsGate is restarted this parameter
becomes effective to those network elements connected to this Gateway
Function.
Once the Transcoding Function in EsGate is restarted this parameter
becomes effective to those SIP GW network elements connected to
this Transcoding Function.

Note

This parameter has to be in line with the transmission network. Changing this parameter affects voice traffic
of all related network elements. It also affects the L2 connected network elements in the DXT site, so they
need to be re-configured for this change to be effective.

See TETRA Site IP Connectivity Guidelines, TRASYSAPP00192. See also the description of
the corresponding TB3 parameter voice8021pTag in TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface Description,
TRATBSAPP00013.

12.2.8.34 Voice transport VLAN identifier (94)

Defines the VLAN identifier for voice transport in TETRA IP transmission.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

252/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 64
Legal values From 10 to 4094, with the increment of 1
Change effective after the EsGate is restarted

Note

This parameter has to be in line with the transmission network. Changing this parameter affects voice traffic
of all related network elements. It also affects the L2 connected network elements in the DXT site, so they
need to be re-configured for this change to be effective. Also the related Switching Units (SWUs) and
LAN interfaces need to be re-configured.

12.2.8.35 Dejitter buffer size (96)

Defines the dejitter buffer size for IP voice traffic in the DXTs and the related TB3s.

The dejitter buffer is a data buffer that is used to remove the delay variance introduced by the IP transport
network. The dejitter buffer size depends on the transport network quality used by the TETRA operator.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 20
Legal values From 0 to 60, with the increment of 1
Special values 0 = reserved for TDM transport operation
Change effective after the restart of DXT EsGates and TB3 TBCi

Recommendations

The size of the dejitter buffer should be configured to be greater than the overall cumulative jitter introduced in
the transport path of the voice IP transport network.

See also the description of the corresponding DWSx parameter Jitter buffer size in Feature Activation
Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.

12.2.8.36 IP voice base UDP port value (97)

Defines the value used to calculate the port numbers reserved for IP voice lines between DXT and related
network elements.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Unit port
Default value 1024

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 253/466
 Legal values From 1024 to 60000, with the increment of 2
Change effective after parameter change, all connections should first be blocked,
Gateway Function restarted, and the connections unblocked; and in the
case of Tactilon® Agnet clients the TETRA services for smart devices
feature activated

Note

This parameter is set at the commissioning phase and normally not changed after that. The value must be
the same in the related network elements. The change should be made only when the connections to related
network elements are blocked, and when the TETRA services for smart devices feature is deactivated.

See also the description of the corresponding TB3 parameter dxtVoiceBaseUdpPort in TB3 TBCi Linux User
Interface Description, TRATBSAPP00013, and the corresponding parameter Audio Base port in Feature
Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.

Additional information

The parameter controls which UDP ports are used to carry IP voice traffic and also QoS test streams between
DXT and related network elements:

• Base UDP port + 244 even-numbered UDP ports between DXTs (i.e. base UDP port + 0...488)

• Base UDP port + 35 even-numbered UDP ports between DXT and related network elements (i.e.
base UDP port + 0...70)

12.2.8.37 SIP signalling QoS tagging DSCP (98)

Note

This parameter is for future use. Currently the parameter has no effect.

Defines Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) tagging for SIP gateway that the DXT shall set to every
sent IP packet containing an SCTP signalling message. The SIP signalling IP traffic is assigned a traffic class
of its own. In IP transport network this signalling traffic class is allocated a DSCP code value in L3 IP level.

With this parameter it is possible to differentiate and prioritise traffic classes (DSCP priority of SCTP signalling
packets) to IP connected SIP gateways.
Type changeable
Default value 10
Legal values From 0 to 63, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92)
Voice frame QoS tagging IEEE_802.1p (93)
Change effective once the signalling connection is re-established

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

254/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note

This parameter has to be in line with the transmission network. Changing this parameter affects all the SIP
gateways connected over IP to the DXT, after the signalling connection has been re-established. Also the
related SIP GWs in the IP transport network need to be re-configured to support the new value.

For corresponding settings in the SIP gateway, see also the integration document of the exchange type
in question.

12.2.8.38 DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (99)

Defines the heartbeat interval on idle connections in the DXT and the related dispatching applications. This
parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and dispatching application in TETRA
IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 100
Legal values from 100 to 1000, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (100)
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (101)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (102)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (103)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Note

Do not change the default value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS. Also, the values must be
the same in the dispatching applications connected to the DXT. See the description of the corresponding
dispatching application parameter HB interval in Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.

12.2.8.39 DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (100)

Defines the initial value of RTO (retransmission timeout) that is used in RTO calculations in the DXT and the
related dispatching applications. This parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and
dispatching application in TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 200
Legal values from 10 to 1000, with the increment of 10

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 255/466
 Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (99)
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (101)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (102)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (103)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Note
Do not change the default value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS. Also, the values must be
the same in the dispatching applications connected to the DXT. See the description of the corresponding
dispatching application parameter RTO initial in Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.

12.2.8.40 DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (101)

Defines the maximum value of RTO (retransmission timeout) that is used in RTO calculations in the DXT and
the related dispatching application. This parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and
dispatching application in TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 250
Legal values from 10 to 1000, with the increment of 10
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (99)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (100)
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (102)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (103)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Note
Do not change the default value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS. Also, the values must be
the same in the dispatching applications connected to the DXT. See the description of the corresponding
dispatching application parameter RTO max in Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.

12.2.8.41 DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (102)

Defines the minimum value of RTO (retransmission timeout) that is used in RTO calculations in the DXT and
the related dispatching applications. This parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and
dispatching application in TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

256/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Default value 20
Legal values from 10 to 1000, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (99)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (100)
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (101)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (103)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Note

Do not change the default value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS. Also, the values must be
the same in the dispatching applications connected to the DXT. See the description of the corresponding
dispatching application parameter RTO min in Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.

12.2.8.42 DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (103)

Used as Selective Acknowledgement (SACK) timeout value in the DXT and the related dispatching
applications. This parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and dispatching application
in TETRA IP transmission.

When the receiver detects one or more gaps in the sequence of data chunks, each received SCTP packet
is acknowledged by sending a Selective Acknowledgement (SACK), which reports all gaps. The SACK is
contained in a specific control chunk. Whenever the sender receives four consecutive SACKs reporting the
same data chunk missing, this data chunk is immediately re-transmitted.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 20
Legal values from 0 to 500, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (99)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (100)
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (101)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (102)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Note

Do not change the default value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS. Also, the values must be
the same in the dispatching applications connected to the DXT. See the description of the corresponding
dispatching application parameter SACK timeout in Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 257/466
12.2.8.43 ToBB signaling QoS tagging DSCP (105)

Defines Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value that the DXT sets to every sent IP packet containing
a TETRA over broadband (ToBB) signalling message.

The TETRA over broadband (ToBB) signalling IP traffic can be assigned a traffic class of its own. In the IP
transport network, this signalling traffic class is allocated a differentiated services DSCP code value in L3
IP level. The value can be configured with this parameter. Thus, it is possible to differentiate and prioritise
traffic classes (the DSCP priority of signalling packets) to ToBB clients.
Type changeable
Default value 10
Legal values From 0 to 63, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters Signalling QoS tagging DSCP (90)
Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92)
SIP signalling QoS tagging DSCP (98)
ToBB Rel 1 activated in the DXT (107)
Change effective after parameter change, the TETRA services for smart devices feature
should be activated

Note

Before changing this parameter the TETRA services for smart devices feature must first be deactivated (if
active), and then activated again after the change. Parameter ToBB Rel 1 activated in the DXT (107) is
used for activation/deactivation.

12.2.8.44 G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (108)

Defines the SCTP port that the DXT listens to for incoming signaling connections from G4WIF GWs.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Unit none
Default value 5001
Legal values from 1024 to 60000, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (109)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (110)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (111)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (112)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (113)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Note

Do not use the same value as defined for Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85).

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

258/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
12.2.8.45 G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (109)

Used as Selective Acknowledgement (SACK) timeout value in the DXT and the related G4WIF GWs. This
parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and G4WIF GW in TETRA IP transmission.
When the receiver detects one or more gaps in the sequence of data chunks, each received SCTP packet
is acknowledged by sending a Selective Acknowledgement (SACK), which reports all gaps. The SACK is
contained in a specific control chunk. Whenever the sender receives four consecutive SACKs reporting the
same data chunk missing, this data chunk is immediately re-transmitted.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 20
Legal values from 0 to 500, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (108)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (110)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (111)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (112)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (113)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

12.2.8.46 G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (110)

Defines the heartbeat interval on idle connections in the DXT and the related G4WIF GWs. This parameter is
used for supervising the connection between DXT and G4WIF GW in TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 100
Legal values from 100 to 1000, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (108)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (109)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (111)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (112)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (113)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

12.2.8.47 G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (111)

Defines the initial value of RTO (retransmission timeout) that is used in RTO calculations in the DXT and
the related G4WIF GWs. This parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and G4WIF
GW in TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 259/466
 Default value 200
Legal values from 10 to 1000, with the increment of 10
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (108)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (109)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (110)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (112)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (113)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

12.2.8.48 G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (112)

Defines the maximum value of RTO (retransmission timeout) that is used in RTO calculations in the DXT
and the related G4WIF GWs. This parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and
G4WIF GW in TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 250
Legal values from 10 to 1000, with the increment of 10
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (108)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (109)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (110)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (111)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (113)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

12.2.8.49 G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (113)

Defines the minimum value of RTO (retransmission timeout) that is used in RTO calculations in the DXT
and the related G4WIF GWs. This parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and
G4WIF GW in TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 20
Legal values from 10 to 1000, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (108)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (109)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (110)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (111)
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (112)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

260/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
12.2.8.50 G4WIF signaling QoS tagging DSCP (114)

Defines Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value that the DXT shall set to every IP packet sent to
G4WIF GW containing an SCTP signalling message. The SCTP signalling IP traffic is assigned a traffic
class of its own. In the IP transport network, this signalling traffic class is allocated a differentiated services
DSCP code value in L3 IP level.

With this parameter it is possible to differentiate and prioritise traffic classes (DSCP priority of SCTP signalling
packets) to IP connected G4WIF GWs.
Type changeable
Unit none
Default value 10
Legal values From 0 to 63, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters Signalling QoS tagging DSCP (90)
Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92)
SIP signalling QoS tagging DSCP (98)
ToBB signalling QoS tagging DSCP (105)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

12.2.9 Radio network parameters

12.2.9.1 TBS configuration period (34)

Specifies the time interval for phased configuration of TBSs. This parameter is used when all TBSs are
configured, for example after switch or computer unit restart, to avoid heavy load caused by configuring all
TBSs at the same time. This parameter defines the time between configuration of two successive TBSs.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 100
Legal values from 50 to 10 000, with the increment of 10
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note

The parameter should be changed with care; too short a time interval leads to heavy registration load and too
long a time interval leads to a long configuration time (that is, radio network partly out of use for a while).

12.2.9.2 TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (83)

Defines the heartbeat interval on idle connections in the DXT and all the related TB3s. This parameter is
used for supervising the connection between DXT and TB3 in TETRA IP transmission.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 261/466
 Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 100
Legal values from 100 to 1000, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (84)
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (86)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (87)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (88)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Recommendations

When using a satellite link between the DXT and TB3, the recommended value is 1000.

Note

Do not change the default or recommended value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS. Also, the
values must be the same in the TB3s connected to the DXT. See the description of the corresponding TB3
parameter dxtSignalSctpHbInterval in TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface Description, TRATBSAPP00013.

12.2.9.3 TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (84)

Defines the initial value of RTO (retransmission timeout) that is used in RTO calculations in the DXT and all
the related TB3s. This parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and TB3 in TETRA
IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 200
Legal values from 10 to 1000, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (83)
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (86)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (87)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (88)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Recommendations

When using a satellite link between the DXT and TB3, the recommended value is 1000.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

262/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note
Do not change the default or recommended value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS. Also, the
values must be the same in the TB3s connected to the DXT. See the description of the corresponding TB3
parameter dxtSignalSctpRtoInitial in TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface Description, TRATBSAPP00013.

12.2.9.4 Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)

Defines the SCTP port that the DXT listens to for incoming signaling connections from TB3s and dispatching
applications. This parameter is used in TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Unit port
Default value 5000
Legal values from 1024 to 60000, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (83)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (84)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (86)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (87)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (88)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (99)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (100)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (101)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (102)
DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (103)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Note
Do not use the same value as defined for G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (108).
The values must be the same in the TB3s and dispatching applications connected to the DXT.
See the description of the corresponding TB3 parameter dxtSignalGwSctpListenPort in TB3 TBCi Linux User
Interface Description, TRATBSAPP00013, and the corresponding DWSx parameter in Commissioning the
TETRA Dispatcher Workstation (DWS), DN0614001.

12.2.9.5 TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (86)

Defines the maximum value of RTO (retransmission timeout) that is used in RTO calculations in the DXT
and all the related TB3s. This parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and TB3 in
TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 250

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 263/466
 Legal values from 10 to 1000, with the increment of 10
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (83)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (84)
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (87)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (88)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Recommendations

When using a satellite link between the DXT and TB3, the recommended value is 1000.

Note

Do not change the default or recommended value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS. Also, the
values must be the same in the TB3s connected to the DXT. See the description of the corresponding TB3
parameter dxtSignalSctpRtoMax in TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface Description, TRATBSAPP00013.

12.2.9.6 TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (87)

Defines the minimum value of RTO (retransmission timeout) that is used in RTO calculations in the DXT
and all the related TB3s. This parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and TB3 in
TETRA IP transmission.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 20
Legal values from 10 to 1000, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (83)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (84)
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (86)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (88)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Recommendations

When using a satellite link between the DXT and TB3, the recommended value is 500.

Note

Do not change the default or recommended value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS. Also, the
values must be the same in the TB3s connected to the DXT. See the description of the corresponding TB3
parameter dxtSignalSctpRtoMin in TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface Description, TRATBSAPP00013.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

264/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
12.2.9.7 TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK TIMEOUT (88)

Used as Selective Acknowledgement (SACK) timeout value in the DXT and all the related TB3s. This
parameter is used for supervising the connection between DXT and TB3 in TETRA IP transmission.

When the receiver detects one or more gaps in the sequence of data chunks, each received SCTP packet
is acknowledged by sending a Selective Acknowledgement (SACK), which reports all gaps. The SACK is
contained in a specific control chunk. Whenever the sender receives four consecutive SACKs reporting the
same data chunk missing, this data chunk is immediately re-transmitted.
Type changeable
Unit millisecond (ms)
Default value 20
Legal values from 0 to 500, with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters used in the PM command group:
parameters TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB INTERVAL (83)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO INITIAL (84)
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MAX (86)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MIN (87)
Change effective after signalling connection is re-established

Recommendations

When using a satellite link between the DXT and TB3, the recommended value is 200.

Note

Do not change the default or recommended value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS. Also, the
values must be the same in the TB3s connected to the DXT. See the description of the corresponding TB3
parameter dxtSignalSctpSackTimeout in TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface Description, TRATBSAPP00013.

12.2.9.8 ToBB server SIP UDP listen port (106)

Defines the UDP port that the DXT listens for incoming signalling connections from TETRA over broadband
(ToBB) clients.
Type changeable
Unit port
Default value 1024
Legal values from 1024 to 60000, with the increment of 1
Related Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT (85)
parameters ToBB Rel 1 activated in the DXT (107)
Change effective after parameter change, the TETRA services for smart devices feature
should be activated.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 265/466
Note
Before changing this parameter the TETRA services for smart devices feature must first be deactivated (if
active), and then activated again after the change. Parameter ToBB Rel 1 activated in the DXT (107) is
used for activation/deactivation.

12.2.10 Numbering parameters

12.2.10.1 V-ASSI value range – lower limit (67)

Defines the smallest possible V-ASSI number allocated in V-HLR. The range must be from ASSI values
system range and the ranges of different DXTs shall not overlap.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Unit none
Default value 0
Legal values 0, from 10 000 000 to 14 999 999; with the increment of 1
Special values 0 = range not defined
Related DXT parameter V-ASSI value range – upper limit (66)
parameters System parameters ASSI values system range - lower limit (175) and
ASSI values system range - upper limit (176).
Change effective in 3 minutes

Note
It is strictly recommended not to decrease the V-ASSI value range, as this may cause unwanted results. For
more information, see Feature Activation Manual.

Additional information

The value of this parameter must be smaller or same as the DXT parameter V-ASSI value range (VHLR) -
upper limit (66).
The value of this parameter must be bigger or same as the system parameter ASSI values system range -
lower limit (176).

12.2.10.2 V-ASSI value range – upper limit (66)

Defines the biggest possible V-ASSI value allocated in V-HLR. The range must be from ASSI values system
range and ranges of different DXTs (V-HLRs) shall not overlap.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Unit none
Default value 0
Legal values 0, from 10 000 000 to 14 999 999; with the increment of 1

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

266/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Special values 0 = range not defined
Related DXT parameter V-ASSI value range – lower limit (67)
parameters System parameters ASSI values system range - lower limit (175) and
ASSI values system range - upper limit (176).
Change effective in 3 minutes

Note

It is strictly recommended not to decrease the V-ASSI value range, as this may cause unwanted results. For
more information, see Feature Activation Manual.

Additional information

The value of this parameter must be bigger or same as the DXT parameter V-ASSI value range - lower
limit (67).

The value of this parameter must be smaller or same as the system parameter ASSI values system range -
upper limit (176).

12.2.10.3 ESN CUG analysis starting tree number (24)

Specifies a tree number for External Subscriber Number (ESN) analysis in the closed user group (CUG) call
case, when the FSSN dialled number belongs to PABX integrated to fleet. The parameter value must be
configured in conjunction with the creation of CUG analysis, where the tree number is specified.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 0
Legal values integers from 101 to 9 999; with the increment of 1
Range from 0 to 9 999
Special values value 0 reserved for the meaning “tree not defined”
Related PM command group parameter ESN external line analysis starting tree
parameters number
PM command group parameter FSSN domain ID analysis tree number
PM command group parameter MSISDN dialled individual (duplex) calls
routed via PSTN
PM command group parameter MSISDN number home analysis tree
number
PM command group parameter SSI analysis starting tree number
PM command group parameter TSI analysis starting tree number
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

Tree values from 1 to 100 are reserved for other purposes, values from 101 up to 9 999 are available for use.
The number analysis starting tree numbers should not overlap with other analysis tree numbers.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 267/466
12.2.10.4 ESN external line analysis starting tree (25)

Specifies a tree number for External Subscriber Number (ESN) analysis in the calls from external line. The
parameter value must be configured in conjunction with the creation of the ESN analysis for external calls,
where the tree number of the analysis is specified.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 0
Legal values integers from 101 to 9 999; with the increment of 1
Range from 0 to 9999
Special values Value 0 reserved for the meaning “tree not defined”
Related PM command group parameter ESN CUG analysis starting tree number
parameters PM command group parameter FSSN domain ID analysis tree number
PM command group parameter MSISDN dialled individual (duplex) calls
routed via PSTN
PM command group parameter MSISDN number home analysis tree
number
PM command group parameter SSI analysis starting tree number
PM command group parameter TSI analysis starting tree number
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

Tree values from 1 to 100 are reserved for other purposes, values from 101 up to 9 999 are available for use.
The number analysis starting tree numbers should not overlap with other analysis tree numbers.

12.2.10.5 FSSN domain ID analysis starting tree number (56)

Specifies the tree number for FSSN domain ID analysis tree.

Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 0
Legal values from 70 to 9 999; with the increment of 1
Range from 0 to 9 999
Special values Value 0 reserved for the meaning 'tree not defined'
Related PM command group parameter TSI analysis starting tree number
parameters PM command group parameter SSI analysis starting tree number
PM command group parameter ESN CUG analysis starting tree number
PM command group parameter ESN external line analysis starting tree
PM command group parameter MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via
PSTN
PM command group parameter MSISDN home analysis starting tree
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

Tree number values from 1 to 69 are reserved for other purposes. Values from 70 up to 9 999 are available
for use. The tree numbers for different analysis should not overlap. A tree number value not used for any

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

268/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
other analysis trees should be chosen for the FSSN domain ID analysis. The parameter value must be
configured in conjunction with the creation of the FSSN domain ID analysis.

12.2.10.6 MNI analysis starting tree number (73)

Specifies the tree number for MNI analysis starting tree.

Type changeable
Default value 0

Legal values from 0 to 9 999; with the increment of 1

Special values Value 0 reserved for the meaning 'tree not defined'
Related PM command group parameter TSI analysis starting tree number
parameters PM command group parameter SSI analysis starting tree number
PM command group parameter ESN CUG analysis starting tree number
PM command group parameter ESN external line analysis starting tree
PM command group parameter MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via
PSTN
PM command group parameter MSISDN home analysis starting tree
PM command group parameter FSSN domain analysis starting tree
number
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

The parameter value must be configured in conjunction with the creation of the MNI analysis, where the
tree number of the analysis is specified.

Recommendations

Tree values from 1 to 100 are reserved for other purposes, values from 101 up to 9 999 are available for use.
The number analysis starting tree numbers should not overlap with other analysis tree numbers.

For further information about number analysis, see document Numbering, DN00126527.

12.2.10.7 MSISDN home analysis starting tree number (57)

Specifies a tree number for MSISDN home analysis tree.

Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 0
Legal values from 70 to 9 999; with the increment of 1
Special values Value 0 reserved for the meaning 'tree not defined'

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 269/466
 Related PM command group parameter TSI analysis starting tree number
parameters PM command group parameter SSI analysis starting tree number
PM command group parameter ESN CUG analysis starting tree number
PM command group parameter ESN external line analysis starting tree
PM command group parameter MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via
PSTN
PM command group parameter FSSN domain ID analysis starting tree
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

Tree number values from 1 to 69 are reserved for other purposes. Values from 70 up to 9 999 are available for
use. The tree numbers for different analysis should not overlap. A tree number value not used for any other
analysis trees should be chosen for the ESN analysis used for the MSISDN analysis. The parameter value
must be configured in conjunction with the creation of the ESN analysis used for MSISDN number analysis.

12.2.10.8 PISN number digits 01–08 (59)

Not in use.

12.2.10.9 PISN number digits 09–16 (60)

Not in use.

12.2.10.10 PISN number digits 17–24 (61)

Not in use.

12.2.10.11 PISN number digits 25–32 (62)

Not in use.

12.2.10.12 SSI analysis starting tree number (23)

Specifies a tree number for SSI analysis starting tree. The parameter value must be configured in conjunction
with the creation of the SSI analysis, where the tree number of the analysis is specified.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 0
Legal values from 0 to 9 999, with the increment of 1
Special values tree value 0 reserved for value “tree not specified”

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

270/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related PM command group parameter ESN CUG analysis starting tree number
parameters PM command group parameter ESN external line analysis starting tree
number
PM command group parameter FSSN domain ID analysis tree number
PM command group parameter MSISDN dialled individual (duplex) calls
routed via PSTN
PM command group parameter MSISDN number home analysis tree
number
PM command group parameter TSI analysis starting tree number
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

Tree values from 1 to 100 are reserved for other purposes, values from 101 up to 9 999 are available to
use. The number analysis starting tree numbers should be individual and not overlap with other analysis
tree numbers.

12.2.10.13 TSI analysis starting tree number (22)

Specifies a tree number for TSI analysis starting tree. The parameter value must be configured in conjunction
with the creation of the SSI analysis, where the tree number of the analysis is specified.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 0
Legal values from 0 to 9 999, with the increment of 1
Special values tree value 0 reserved for value “tree not specified”
Related PM command group parameter ESN CUG analysis starting tree number
parameters PM command group parameter ESN external line analysis starting tree
number
PM command group parameter FSSN domain ID analysis tree number
PM command group parameter MSISDN dialled individual (duplex) calls
routed via PSTN
PM command group parameter MSISDN number home analysis tree
number
PM command group parameter SSI analysis starting tree number
Change effective from the next call setup

Recommendations

Tree values from 1 to 100 are reserved for other purposes, values from 101 up to 9 999 are available to
use. The number analysis starting tree numbers should be individual and not overlap with other analysis
tree numbers.

12.2.11 Authentication and encryption parameters

See Section 16.2.5 and its subsections.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 271/466
12.2.12 Call parameters

12.2.12.1 Call ID range max (7)

Specifies the upper limit of a call identifier numbering space used in the DXT.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 16 383
Legal values an integer from 0 to 16 383, with the increment of 1.
Related PM command group parameter Call ID range min
parameters
Special values 0 Both Call ID range max and Call ID range min can have this value if
there is no need for TETRA call IDs in the DXT. Otherwise not used.
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

CAUTION
The call ID range defined for a DXT affects the amount of simultaneous calls (in the air interface) that this
DXT is able to control.

CAUTION
10 call IDs are always reserved from the call ID range for emergency calls. Defining a call ID range smaller
than 10 call IDs will prevent making normal priority calls in the air interface.

CAUTION
The value of the parameter Call ID range max must be higher than the value of the parameter Call ID range
min, except in cases where both of the parameters have the value 0.

Note
Call ID range min and Call ID range max should have the value 0 in those DXTs where no TBSs are connected.

12.2.12.2 Call ID range min (8)

Specifies the lower limit of a call identifier numbering space used in the DXT.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 1
Legal values an integer from 0 to 16383, with the increment of 1.
Related PM command group parameter Call ID range max
parameters
Specific values 0
Both Call ID range max and Call ID range min can have this value if there
is no need for TETRA call IDs in the DXT. Otherwise not used.
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

272/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
CAUTION
The call ID range defined for a DXT affects the amount of simultaneous calls that this DXT is able to control.

CAUTION
10 call IDs are always reserved from the call ID range for emergency calls. Defining a call ID range smaller
than 10 call IDs will prevent making calls with normal priority on the air interface.

CAUTION
The value of the parameter Call ID range max must be higher than the value of the parameter Call ID range
min, except in cases where both of the parameters have the value 0.

Note

Call ID range min and Call ID range max should have the value 0 in those DXTs where no TBSs are connected.

12.2.12.3 DXT support for type 1 handover (65)

Determines whether announced type 1 handovers from/to cells belonging to this DXT area are allowed or not.
Type changeable
Default value F
Legal values F, T
Related Radio network parameter FWDREG forward registration support
parameters
Change effective at intervals of 10 minutes

Additional information

If DXT support is turned on first and cell support is turned on after that, this parameter becomes effective
immediately.

12.2.13 Emergency call parameters

12.2.13.1 TCS client emergency target length (10)

Specifies the number of digits used in the TCS client emergency target.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 0
Legal values an integer from 0 to 15
Range from 0 to 15

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 273/466
 Related PM command group parameter TCS client emergency target, digits 1 - 8
parameters PM command group parameter TCS client emergency target, digits 9
-16,
System parameter Emergency number 1–10

Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

Values may be given as decimal numbers, or as hexadecimal numbers.

12.2.13.2 TCS client emergency target, digits 1- 8 (11)

When a TCS client initiates a call to the system-specific emergency number, the call will be routed to the
DXT-specific TCS client emergency target. This parameter specifies the digits 1-8 of that emergency target.

Acceptable values for the stored digits are 0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D.

Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 4 294 967 295
Legal values an integer from 0 to 4 294 967 295 with the increment of 1.
Range from 0 to 4 294 967 295
Related PM command group parameter TCS client emergency target length
parameters PM command group parameter TCS client emergency target, digits
9-16,
System parameter Emergency number 1–10
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

Values may be given as decimal numbers, or as hexadecimal numbers.

12.2.13.3 TCS client emergency target, digits 9 - 16 (12)

When a TCS client initiates a call to the system-specific emergency number, the call will be routed to the
DXT-specific TCS client emergency target. This parameter specifies the digits 9–16 of that emergency target.

Acceptable values for the stored digits are 0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D.

Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 4 294 967 295
Legal values an integer from 0 to 4 294 967 295 with the increment of 1.
Range from 0 to 4 294 967 295

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

274/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related PM command group parameter TCS client emergency target length
parameters PM command group parameter TCS client emergency target, digits
1-8, emergency number,
System parameterEmergency number 1–10
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

Values may be given as decimal numbers, or as hexadecimal numbers.

12.2.14 IP packet data parameters

No parameters.

12.2.15 Status and SDS parameters

12.2.15.1 AVL TCS router ISSI 0–9

Table 33 : ISSIs of TCS clients used as AVL targets or re-routers

Parameter name ID
AVL TCS router 0 ISSI 37
AVL TCS router 1 ISSI 39
AVL TCS router 2 ISSI 41
AVL TCS router 3 ISSI 43
AVL TCS router 4 ISSI 45
AVL TCS router 5 ISSI 47
AVL TCS router 6 ISSI 49
AVL TCS router 7 ISSI 51
AVL TCS router 8 ISSI 53
AVL TCS router 9 ISSI 55

This parameter is used for entering the ISSIs of TCS clients used as AVL targets or re-routers.
Type changeable
Default value 0 (ISSI is not in use)
Legal values from 0 to 4294967295 (0xFF FF FF FF); with the increment of 1
Special values 0 (ISSI is not in use)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 275/466
Additional information

For the feature to work network-wide, ALL TCS clients used as AVL targets must be entered (with the
accompanying re-routing target, where applicable) in the routing table of every DXT. The default value for
these parameters is 0. This indicates that the ISSI is not in use.

12.2.15.2 AVL TCS target ISSI 0–9

Table 34 : ISSIs of TCS clients used as AVL targets

Parameter name ID
AVL TCS target 0 ISSI 36
AVL TCS target 1 ISSI 38
AVL TCS target 2 ISSI 40
AVL TCS target 3 ISSI 42
AVL TCS target 4 ISSI 44
AVL TCS target 5 ISSI 46
AVL TCS target 6 ISSI 48
AVL TCS target 7 ISSI 50
AVL TCS target 8 ISSI 52
AVL TCS target 9 ISSI 54

This parameter is used for entering the ISSIs of TCS clients used as AVL targets.
Type changeable
Default value 0 (ISSI is not in use)
Legal values from 0 to 4294967295 (0xFF FF FF FF); with the increment of 1
Special values 0 (ISSI is not in use)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

For the feature to work network-wide, ALL TCS clients used as AVL targets must be entered (with the
accompanying re-routing target, where applicable) in the routing table of every DXT. The default value for
these parameters is 0. This indicates that the ISSI is not in use.

12.2.16 Load limiter parameters

12.2.16.1 Average round-trip time alarm limit (74)

Defines how long the round-trip time between the DXT and the dispatcher may be during call connection
before the EMT delay alarm is triggered.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

276/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Default value 300ms
Legal values 50ms…10000ms, in 10ms increments
Change effective immediately

12.2.16.2 CM max load for registrations and calls (9)

This parameter is used to prevent the overloading of CM computer unit caused by registration request, call
setup requests, or status and SDS service requests. If the load of the CM computer unit is higher than the
value of this parameter, all these requests will be ignored.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 80
Legal values integers from 50 to 100, with the increment of 1
Range from 50 to 100
Related parameter PM command group parameter CM max load for WS commands
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

12.2.16.3 CM maxload for WS commands (19)

Specifies CM load value after which workstation commands, such as creating, modifying and deleting radio
subscribers or organisations, are delayed or rejected.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 70
Legal values from 50 to 100, with the increment of 1
Range from 50 to 100
Related parameter PM command group parameter CM max load for registrations and calls
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

When CM load is higher than the limit given with this parameter, the respective workstation command is
delayed. If the load is still too high after three seconds have passed, the command is rejected.

Recommendation

This limit should be about 10% lower than CM load limit for registrations and calls.

12.2.16.4 CPU maxload group services (16)

Specifies the highest allowed value for the load of the CPU of CCC or CMM to establish a new group call,
SDS or data message addressed to a group address.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 277/466
 Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 80
Legal values 50 -100 with increment of one
Range from 50 to 100
Related PM command group parameter CPU maxload individual services
parameters
Change effective the parameter is read and thus taken into use in periods defined by
the system parameter cc parameter refresh period

Additional information

This parameter does not concern emergency calls.

In group calls, CPU, CM, CMM and RCMU overload is checked in every group area DXT. When overloaded,
no group area will be established in that DXT.

12.2.16.5 CPU maxload individual services (15)

Specifies the highest allowed value for the load of the CPU of CCC or CMM to establish a new individual call,
SDS or status message addressed to an individual address. If the load is exceeded, new call setups will
be ignored.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 80
Legal values 50 -100 with increment of one
Range from 50 to 100
Related PM command group parameter CPU maxload group services
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

If the load is exceeded, no new call setups will be accepted.

This parameter does not concern emergency calls.

This parameter concerns both the calling party and the called party.

12.2.16.6 CPU overload alarm limit (71)

Specifies the value for the load of the CPU to set overload alarm. If the load is exceeded for a while, the
overload alarm is set. When the load decreases below the value, the alarm is cancelled. This applies to all
computer units. The alarm is planned to indicate the state when the load of the computer units is so high that
the load limiters might be activated, and some service requests, such as call setups, are not processed.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

278/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Unit %
Default value 70
Legal values from 10 to 100; with the increment of 1
Change effective updated to the system at intervals of 5 minutes

12.2.16.7 DWS support for compression (13)

Specifies if DWSs support data compression in messages from DXT to DWS

Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Default value 0 (compression not supported)
Legal values 0 (compression not supported)
1 (compression supported)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

12.2.16.8 Load limit at main control channel (70)

Specifies the load limit at the main control channel which is used to limit the load caused by low–priority
downlink signalling messages. These messages are sent through the message paging services, for example
status and SDS messages, thus leaving enough spare signalling capacity for other radio channel signalling
(for example, call control).
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Unit %
Default value 80
Legal values from 0 to 100; with the increment of 1
Change effective updated to the DXT at intervals of 5 minutes

12.2.16.9 Maxload for data recovery (20)

Specifies the maximum CM load. If the CM load is higher than the value of this parameter, ongoing data
recovery will be interrupted. Also, if EDU load is higher than the value of this parameter, ongoing data
recovery of MSISDN/FSSN numbers will be interrupted.
Type changeable with a warning flag, the technical operator defines
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 70
Legal values integers from 50 to 100, with the increment of 1
Related PM command group parameter CM max load for WS commands
parameters PM command group parameter CM max load for registrations and calls
Change effective Changes in parameter value are checked every five minutes.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 279/466
Recommendation

This limit should be about 10% lower than CM load limit for registrations and calls.

12.2.17 Feature switch parameters

12.2.17.1 QoS control enabled (95)

Defines whether the Quality of Service (QoS) control for voice traffic in TETRA IP transmission between DXTs
is activated or deactivated. This feature is a partially commercial option.

If this parameter is enabled (1), the IP transport network QoS control measurements are performed for
DXTs connected to this DXT through IP connection.

If this parameter is disabled (0), the IP transport network QoS measurements are stopped for all DXTs
connected to this DXT through IP connection.
Type changeable
Default value 1 = True, QoS control enabled
Legal values 0 = False, QoS control disabled
1 = True, QoS control enabled
Related P2 command group parameters for QoS alarms and counter-measures.
parameters See DXT Command Reference Manual: P2 IP Connection Configuration
Handling, TRADXTAPP00073.
Change effective immediately

Note

In the TB3 there is a similar parameter for enabling/disabling the IP transport QoS measurements. See
the description of the parameter qosControlEnabled in TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface Description,
TRATBSAPP00013.

Recommendations

It is recommended to have this parameter always activated in a multi-DXT IP transmission network.

12.2.17.2 DXT3p fan supervision enabled (104)

Defines if the fan unit of DXT3p is monitored by the EsGate. If enabled, the speed of the DXT3p fans
is monitored. The parameter is set to value 1 (enabled) for DXT3p during commissioning, and is left to
value 0 (disabled) for other DXT3 types.
Type changeable
Default value 0 (disabled)
Legal values 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled)
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

280/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
12.2.17.3 ToBB Rel 1 activated in the DXT (107)

Defines whether it is allowed to create broadband subscribers in the DXT or not. The parameter can also be
used to block registrations of broadband clients in the DXT.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = Creation of broadband subscribers is not allowed. Also registrations
of broadband clients are rejected. Deactivation of the feature (value 0)
also clears the broadband clients’ ongoing calls and SIP sessions.
1 = Creation of broadband subscribers is allowed. Also registrations
of broadband clients are allowed.
Change effective delayed

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 281/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

282/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
13 DXT parameters modified with the PI and PW
command groups
This chapter describes the DXT parameters modified by MML session with the PI and PW command groups.

13.1 Managing the DXT parameters (PI and PW command

groups)
The following table shows what you need to manage the DXT parameters modified by MML sessions with the
PI and PW command groups.

Table 35 : Modifying DXT parameters in an MML session with the PI and PW command groups

Topic Information
Tools MML session through an MML terminal
User interface MMI (man machine interface)
Required rights rights to MML session and to the appropriate MML commands
When the values are when commissioning the DXT
given

For further details, please refer to the respective DXT Command Reference Manual.

13.2 Parameters used in PI command group

The parameters in the PI command group are used for DXT network configuration handling.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PI DXT Network Configuration Handling,
DN99109338.

13.3 Parameters used in PW command group

The parameters in the PW command group are used for TETRA base station software package handling.

For more information, see DXT Command Reference Manual: PW TETRA Base Station Software Package
Handling, DN0164864.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 283/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

284/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
14 DXT parameters modified with the WO
command group
This chapter describes the DXT parameters modified by MML sessions with the WO command group.

Note

For the DXT parameters described in this chapter, use only the legal values. Other values may be accepted
by the system, but they are meaningless and must not be used.

14.1 Managing the DXT parameters (WO command group)

The following table shows what you need to manage the DXT parameters modified by MML sessions with the
WO command group.

Table 36 : Modifying DXT parameters in an MML session with the WO command group

Topic Information
Tools MML session through an MML terminal
User interface MMI (man machine interface)
Required rights rights to MML session and to the appropriate MML commands
When the values are when commissioning the DXT
given

The DXT parameters modified by WO command group belong to the classes 02, 10, 34, 38 and 45. For
further details, please refer to the respective DXT Command Reference Manual.

14.2 Parameter class 02 (WO command group)

14.2.1 Q3 DX alarm forwarding enabled (241)

Defines whether the Q3 interface is in use when the alarm events concerning a Nokia Open Server Platform
based network element are transmitted to the OMC.
Type changeable
Default value 1D
Legal values 0D
1D

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 285/466
 Related WO command group parameter Q3 Interface in use (814)
parameters
Change effective immediately

14.2.2 Q3 Interface in use (814)

Defines whether the events occurring in the network element are converted into Q3 notifications as they occur.
Type changeable
Default value 0=F(alse)
Legal values 0=F(alse)
1=T(rue)
Related WO command group parameter Q3 DX alarm forwarding enabled (241)
parameters
Change effective immediately

14.3 Parameters class 10 (WO command group)

14.3.1 Satellite abis (31)

Specifies to certain processes whether satellite circuits are used between the DXT and the TBS.
Type changeable
Default value 0H =false (satellite circuits are not used)
Legal values 0FFH = true (satellite circuits are used)
0H = false (satellite circuits are not used)
Related System parameter PD - response wait timer
parameters System parameter PD - inactivity timer

14.4 Parameters class 34 (WO command group)

14.4.1 Hook indiv call(3)

The parameter determines whether on/off hook signalling individual calls are in use or not.
Type changeable
Default value 1=true (On/off hook signalling individual calls is in use)
Legal values 1=true (On/off hook signalling individual calls is in use) and
0=false (On/off hook signalling individual calls is not in use)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

286/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
14.4.2 CLIR Override (25)

This parameter specifies whether the called party can see the calling party's number even though the calling
party's CLIR (see Section 3.2.4.7 ) is set to On in incoming calls. This is a feature of the called party. This
parameter concerns only individual calls.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = false (CLIR override not in use)
Legal values On
Off
Related Workstation user parameter Incoming Communication: Override Calling
parameters Line Identification Restriction (CLIR Override)
Radio subscriber parameter Override Calling Line Identification Restriction
(CLIR Override)

14.4.3 Energy economy (57)

Specifies whether energy economy is in use or not. For general feature activation instructions see Feature
Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = false (energy economy not in use)
Legal values 1=true (energy economy in use) and
0=false (energy economy not in use)
Related Exchange parameter Lowest TBS SW level
parameters

14.4.4 CDD in network (66)

Defines whether or not an external CDD server is attached to the Airbus DS TETRA network.
Type changeable when authorised by Airbus DS
Default value 1=true (external CDD server is attached to the Airbus DS TETRA network)
Legal values 1=true (external CDD server is attached to the Airbus DS TETRA network)
0=false (external CDD server is not attached to the Airbus DS TETRA
network)
Related PM command group parameter Networking mode (376)
parameters
Change effective after system restart

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 287/466
Note

The value of the parameter can only be changed when authorised by Airbus DS. Unauthorised changes in
the parameter value may prevent normal operation of the system.

If the related parameter Networking mode is set to value "Normal" then this parameter can have value 0 if
there is only one single DXT in the network configuration. In that case the feature Integrated data distribution
will be taken into use.

If the related parameter Networking mode is set to value "Autonomous" then this parameter must be set
to value 0.

14.4.5 ENHANCED_AUDIO_MON (103)

Defines whether enhanced monitoring capacity for TCS client on the E1 TETRA coded audio interface
is in use or not.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0 = false (enhanced monitoring capacity for TCS client on the E1 TETRA
coded audio interface is not in use)
Legal values 1 = true (enhanced monitoring capacity for TCS client on the E1 TETRA
coded audio interface is in use)
0 = false (enhanced monitoring capacity for TCS client on the E1 TETRA
coded audio interface is not in use)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

14.5 Parameter class 38 (WO command group)

This parameter class includes parameters defining the timeout values and disk usage restriction of the MML
Command Log and Service Terminal Log

14.5.1 WRITE_CACHE_TIMEOUT (00)

The parameter restricts the maximum time an MML command log record is kept in the internal write cache.
Its minimum value is ten (10) seconds and maximum value is six hundred (600) seconds.
Type changeable
Default value 60D
Legal values 10D-600D
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

288/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
14.5.2 STORAGE_LENGTH (01)

The parameter defines the maximum time for keeping MML command log files on disks. The minimum value
is three (3) days and the maximum value is thirty (30) days.
Type changeable
Default value 30D
Legal values 3D-30D
Change effective immediately

14.5.3 MAX_FILE_COUNT (02)

The parameter defines the maximum number of MML command log files on disks. Its minimum value is five
(5) and maximum value is thirty thousand (30 000).
Type changeable
Default value 30000D
Legal values 5D-30000D
Change effective immediately

14.5.4 ADMINISTRATION_HOUR (03)

In this parameter the operator can define the hour part of the time which the administration of MML command
log is due.
Type changeable
Default value 1D
Legal values 0D-23D
Change effective immediately

14.5.5 ADMINISTRATION_MINUTES (04)

In this parameter the operator can define the minutes part of the time at which the administration of MML
command log is due.
Type changeable
Default value 25D
Legal values 0D-59D
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 289/466
14.6 Parameters class 45 (WO command group)

14.6.1 NW DXTs SW level (5)

This parameter is used to indicate the software level of the DXTs in an Airbus DS TETRA network. The
parameter is needed in situations where there are DXTs in the system with several different software levels.
As long as there are lower-level DXTs in the system, the parameter in all DXTs must indicate the lower
software version, respectively. After all DXTs have been upgraded, the parameter value can be changed in all
DXTs to indicate the new software level. Also, the value of the parameter should be set when adding new
DXTs into the system.
The range of allowed values is thus 0 — FFFE. The value indicates the software level and it should be
given in hexadecimal format.
0xVVER
• VV is for the version, so the maximum version is 255 (0xFF)
• E is for the edition, so the maximum edition is 15 (0xF)
• R is for the repair, so the maximum repair is 15 (0xF), except in case where the software level is
255.15-14. (0xFFFE) in which case the maximum repair is only 14 (0xE).

release 2.0 = 0x0200

release 2.0-1 = 0x0201
release 2.0-2 = 0x0202
release 2.1 = 0x0210
release 3.0 = 0x0300
release 3.1= 0x0310
release 4.0 = 0x0400
release 4.1 = 0x0410
release 4.2 = 0x0411 (release 4 CD3.0 packet data correction)
release 4.3 = 0x0412 (release 4 CD3.0)
release 4.3–5 = 0x0435 (release 4 CD3.5 for packet data IMSI correction)
release 4.4 = 0x0440 (release 4 CD4.0)
release 4.5 = 0x0450 (release 4 MCCH DL load control in CoG)
release 5.0 = 0x0500
release 5.5 = 0x0550
release 5.5 CD1 = 0x0551
release 5.5 CD2 = 0x0552
release 5.5 CD3 = 0x0552
release 5.5 CD4 = 0x0552

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

290/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
release 6.0 = 0x0600

release 6.0 SCD2 = 0x0602

release 6.0 SCD3 = 0x0603

release 6.5 = 0x0602

release 6.5 SCD1 = 0x0603

release 7.0 = 0x0700

release 7.0 SCD3 = 0x0703

release 7.0 SCD4 = 0x0704

For the usage of this parameter during network upgrade, refer to the release-dependent system and DXT
upgrade manuals.
Type changeable
Default value value depends on the software delivered
Legal values from 0x0 to 0xFFFE
Range from 0x0 to 0xFFFE

Note

The value of this parameter must be set when adding new DXTs into a system. After system upgrades all
DXTs should be on the same software level.

14.6.2 Max TBS SW DL (8)

Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous TBS software downloadings.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 8
Legal values from 0 to 1 024

14.6.3 Pd SW version (11)

This parameter is used to select the IP Packet Data network mode in the Airbus DS TETRA network. The
value should be the same in every DXT of the network.

For general Basic or Enhanced Packet Data network mode instructions see the document Integrating
the TETRA System, DN05225513. For general TEDS instructions see Feature Activation Manual,
TRASYSAPP00190.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 291/466
 Type changeable

Default value 0 = Basic Packet Data network mode

Legal values • 0 = Basic Packet Data network mode

• 1 = Enhanced Packet Data network mode, including TEDS

14.6.4 Pd MSMS ACC (12)

This parameter is used by the Packet Data SW to decide whether the direct MS-MS traffic is permitted.
The parameter is needed in situations where IP packets from one radio terminal are destined for another
radio terminal.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
acc disabled c= direct MS-MS traffic restriction feature is disabled.
Direct MS-MS traffic is allowed.
acc enabled c= direct MS-MS traffic restriction feature is enabled. Direct
MS-MS traffic is not allowed.

14.6.5 Pd IP ITSI (13)

This parameter is used by the Packet Data SW to decide whether the IP ITSI Open Interface is activated or
not. If the parameter is activated, the PD SW will send the PDP context (de)activations to an external IP
server.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1 = activated

14.6.6 NW internal rec (14)

The parameter specifies whether the internal recovery feature is activated or deactivated.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 1 = activated
Legal values 1 = activated
0 = deactivated
Change effective in 5 minutes

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

292/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
14.6.7 NW GC in use (15)
With this parameter you can activate the features Network wide groups and Network wide status & SDS
messages.
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Default value 0 = deactivated (network-wide group communication is not in use)
Legal values 1 = activated (network-wide group communication is in use and group
homes are defined)
0 = deactivated (network-wide group communication is not in use)
Change effective changes in parameter value are checked every five minutes. In group
calls from the next call setup

Additional information

The parameter can be set to value 1 (activated) (network-wide communication is in use) after the group
home is defined for all the groups. This parameter also affects the network wide group membership
management. The value of this parameter should be set to 1 (activated) after group homes are defined,
even if the network-wide group communication feature is not used.

14.6.8 Session key 0–8 (18–26)

Controls the base value of a session key in the case a workstation user has made clear login or when
Tactilon® Management is in the network.
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Legal values 0H — FFFFH
Change effective immediately

Note
The whole range of the parameter is in use.

Examples of usage

Session key 00112233445566778899AABBCCDDEEFF1234H

Session key 0= 1100H
Session key 1=3322H
Session key 2=5544H
Session key 3=7766H
Session key 4=9988H
Session key 5=BBAAH

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 293/466
Session key 6=DDCCH
Session key 7=FFEEH
Session key 8=3412H

Additional information

Value of this parameter should be overwritten when not needed.

14.6.9 Clear WS login allowed (27)

This parameter controls the allowance of clear log-ins for workstation users from WSs that do not have
the encryption capability.
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value FF = activated (workstation users are capable of making clear logins
from clear WSs if they have their passwords stored in clear form)
Legal values FF = activated (workstation users are capable of making clear logins
from clear WSs if they have their passwords stored in clear form)
0 = deactivated (workstation users are only capable of making encrypted
logins and log in only if they have an encrypted password )
Change effective immediately

14.6.10 Extended ACCH in use (53)

Determines whether the extended associated control channel is used in the uplink or in the downlink. The
control channel is used to increase the signalling capacity in the respective direction during group calls and
individual semi-duplex calls. It utilises the direction that does not contain voice transmission for signalling.
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 3 (both uplink and downlink are in use)
Legal values 0 (extended ACCH is not in use)
1 (extended uplink ACCH is in use)
2 (extended downlink ACCH is in use)
3 (both uplink and downlink are in use)
Change effective changes in parameter value are checked in every 10 minutes

CAUTION
Do not change the default value (3) without consulting Airbus DS.

14.6.11 Lowest TBS SW level (95)

Specifies the SW level of the base stations.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

294/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable

Default value 0
Legal values 0x0000; 0x0300; 0x0400
Related Exchange parameter Energy Economy
parameters

Additional information

This parameter is used if the Energy Economy feature is enabled. To allow Energy Economy negotiation with
radio terminals, this parameter must be set to value rel 4.0–0 (0x0400).

14.6.12 Pd IP spoofing detect (125)

This parameter indicates how IP datagrams are handled when IP spoofing is detected. Additionally, it
describes how alarm (disturbance) is raised when IP spoofing is detected.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 0 = IP spoofing detection not in use: IP spoofing is still checked and
alarm (disturbance) raised but IP datagram is not dropped.
1 = IP spoofing detection in use: IP spoofing is checked. If spoofing is
detected, the alarm is raised and IP datagram dropped. Context of the
MS is released and the MS is commanded to re-register.)
2 = IP spoofing detection in use (trashcan mode): IP spoofing is checked.
If spoofing is detected, the alarm is raised and IP datagram dropped but
the context of MS is not released.

14.6.13 Individual call area in use (126)

With this parameter you can activate the possibility to restrict the area where the radio subscribers can make
and receive individual calls. Without restrictions all radio subscribers are allowed to make and receive
individual calls within the whole network.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Related Radio subscriber parameter Individual Call Area
parameters

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 295/466
14.6.14 Confirmed group call (127)

With this parameter you can activate the confirmed group call functionality. Confirmed group call allows
calling radio users to receive confirmation of group call resource coverage when they are connected to a
group call. Alert of restricted group call resource coverage is given when not all the required resources for
group call are obtained when calling radio user is connected to a group call with transmission permission.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1 = activated

14.6.15 Speech item priority and priority value range 1-20 in use (128)

With this parameter you can activate wider speech item and resourcing priority range, extending the normal
priority value range of a radio subscriber, WS-user and group from 1-10 to 1-20. Also radio subscriber's and
WS-user's speech item priority value range is extended from 1-10 to 1-20. After activation the WS-user's
speech item priority values are categorized equally with radio subscriber's speech item priority. Activation
also adds 10 to current WS-user's speech item priority to keep current radio subscriber's and WS-user's
speech item priority categorization logically the same also after feature activation.

After the wider speech item and resourcing priority range is taken into use (activated), it can be deactivated.
Deactivation returns the functionality back to the previous mode, but any already made changes concerning
speech item and resourcing priorities are not converted automatically.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type with a warning flag
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Related Group priority
parameters Subscriber priority
WS-user priority
Subscriber speech item priority
WS-user speech item priority
Change effective from next call set-up

14.6.16 Dispatcher-initiated Emergency Call Allowed (129)

By activating this parameter, the dispatchers are offered the possibility to make individual and group
emergency calls.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

296/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable
Default value 1 = activated
Legal values 1 = activated
0 = deactivated

14.6.17 Group Lifetime (130)

With this parameter you can activate the possibility to define lifetimes for groups.
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Related Group parameter Group Lifetime
parameters

14.6.18 Passing control in use (131)

With this parameter you can activate the possibility to temporarily move radio subscribers to the other
organisations.
Note
When the feature is deactivated, it is not allowed to change the “visitor OB” attribute or the “passing accepted”
attribute to any other values which deny or return the passing of the user.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1= activated
Related Radio subscriber parameter Visiting Org Block
parameters Radio subscriber parameter Passing Acceptance Status

14.6.19 Normal Registration CDR data generation mechanism (132)

Not in use. This parameter is not used anymore in System Release 7.0, but it is replaced by the system
parameter Registration CDR data generation mechanism (394).

14.6.20 Location-based group call in use (133)

With this parameter you can activate location-based group call service and link cover groups to group overlays.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 297/466
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Related Group overlay parameter Cover group
parameters

14.6.21 Group addressed status/SDS delivery attribute (136)

Defines delivery attributes group addressed status/SDS messages.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = group addressed status/SDS is delivered normally
Legal values 0 = group addressed status/SDS is delivered normally
1 = group addressed status/SDS is delivered without a second try
Related System parameters: Redundancy of normal sending profile (334),
parameters Redundancy of important sending profile (337), Redundancy of repeating
sending profile (340), Redundancy of dedicated sending profile (343),
Redundancy of paging sending profile (346)

14.6.22 TBS load monitoring in use (137)

Activates a feature in DXT which enables the Viewcor monitoring system to receive periodic TBS load and
status data from DXT.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = Base station load monitoring is deactivated in the current DXT.
1 = Base station load monitoring is activated in the current DXT.
Change effective in 5 minutes

14.6.23 Pre-emptive priority levels release 6.0 (138)

With this parameter you can activate the pre-emption priority levels functionality.
The related parametres need to be set before the feature is activated in resource and/or speech item
resource requests. See related parameters.
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1= activated

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

298/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related Organisation parameter Main org max resource pre-emption level
parameters Workstation user parameter Pre-emptive Resource Priority
Radio subscriber parameter Pre-emptive Resource Priority
Group parameter Pre-emptive Resource Priority
Change effective immediately

14.6.24 Pre-emptive priority levels release 5.5 (139)

Not in use.

14.6.25 Aliasing in use (140)

With this parameter you can activate the aliasing functionality.
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1= activated
Change effective immediately

14.6.26 Extended VPN for communication rights (141)

With this parameter you can activate Control over communication rights functionality.
Restricts a WS user's rights to create and modify other WS Users' and Radio Subscribers' communication
rights: such a WS user cannot grant more communication rights to other WS users or Radio Subscribers
than (s)he has herself/himself.
The visibility of PABX and PSTN connection groups to a WS user is restricted to those to which he/she has
communication rights.
WS user’s and radio subscriber’s rights to request and status messages are changed to also include an
organisation-block-based rights list (SDS message rights) in addition to the current rights definition which is
based on message type.
In the case of organisation rights, the value 'full rights' or 'view rights' further restricts the permissions to own
organisation only, and only if the WS user belongs to the highest organisation-block level of the organisation.
And in the case of organisation block rights, the value 'full rights' further restricts the permission to own
organisation block and the organisation blocks below it.
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1= activated

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 299/466
 Related CDD parameter WSU Global Rights
parameters Workstation user parameter SDS Messages
Radio subscriber parameter SDS Messages
Workstation user parameter Organisation blocks
Workstation user parameter Organisation parameters
Change effective immediately

14.6.27 Extended VPN for management rights (142)

With this parameter you can activate Enhanced control over management rights functionality.
Restricts a WS user's global rights to manage organisation parameters, organisation blocks, and client
applications: the WS user has rights only to own organisation block and organisation blocks beneath it.
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1= activated
Related CDD parameter WSU Global Rights
parameters
Change effective immediately

14.6.28 Extended VPN for G4WIF (143)

With this parameter you can activate Controlled visibility of G4WIF interfaces functionality.
Restricts the WS users' rights to see all G4WIFs of their TETRA system: visibility is restricted to own
organisations ( and possibly to a co-operation organisations') G4WIFs. If a WS user can see a G4WIF,
(s)he can take it into use (no rights required) and change group members if (s)he has Change Group
Membership rights to the group.
For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1= activated
Related CDD parameter G4WIF filter
parameters
Change effective immediately

14.6.29 MS Special Priority (144)

With this parameter you can activate the possibility for emergency call control by non-emergency radio user.
With this function radio subscriber's highest pre-emptive speech-item priority level 20 is taken in special use

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

300/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
in emergency group calls, giving the radio subscriber a right to disconnect emergency calls and pre-empt
emergency priority speech items.

Note

When this special priority is taken in use, it must be checked that level 20 has not already been allocated to
subscribers who will not be granted the right to control emergency calls.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1= activated
Related Subscriber parameters: Subscriber Priority: Speech Item Priority, Allow
parameters Pre-emptive Speech Items
DXT parameter modified with the WO command group (Parameters
Class 45): Speech item priority and priority value range 1 – 20 in use

14.6.30 TBS fallback indication SDS (145)

With this parameter you can activate the sending of the FALLBACK SDS by the TBS.

If this parameter is activated, the base station broadcasts FALLBACK SDS to all MSs when it enters
fallback mode. During the fallback mode the SDS is also sent individually to each MS within the registration
transaction.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1 = activated

14.6.31 ISI group call in use (147)

Defines whether the ISI talk group linking functionality is activated or not. This parameter does not prevent
defining the ISI links to the groups. It only prevents the group call/SDS/Status delivery to be expanded
over ISI.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = False (ISI group call feature is not in use)
1= True (ISI group call feature is in use)
Change effective after the next group call setup / next SDS and Status delivery

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 301/466
14.6.32 Dedicated data channels in use (148)

With this parameter you can activate the dedicated data channels functionality.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable
Default value 0 = deactivated
Legal values 0 = deactivated
1= activated
Related Group parameter Dedicated data group
parameters
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

302/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
15 Dispatcher Station Controller parameters
This chapter describes the Dispatcher Station Controller (DSC) parameters.

Note

There is no physical DSC in the product portfolio after Release 4.5, but virtual TDSC units are used for
interconnection.

15.1 Managing the Dispatcher Station Controller parameters

Note

There are no physical DSCs from TETRA System Release 4.5 onwards. Virtual TDSC units are used for
interconnection.

The following table shows what you need to manage the DSC and TDSC parameters.

Table 37 : Managing the DSC and TDSC parameters

Topic DSC, TDSC parameters

Tools service terminal session
User interface MMI
Required rights rights to MML sessions and to the appropriate MML commands
When the values are Typically by Airbus DS during the system integration. They can be
given changed during the system commissioning prior to taking the system
into use.

15.2 Parameters

15.2.1 TDSC connection parameters

Note

There are no physical DSCs from Release 4.5 on. Virtual TDSC units are used for interconnection.

Specifies the datalink in the DSC, TDSC end of the DSC-DWS link.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 303/466
 Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit bit/s
Default value number of interface 1; baud rate 38400 bit/s; databits 8; parity 0; stop
bits 1; FIFO 1; RXFIFOTL 8; Link Type 1
Legal values baud rate: 38400 bit/s as decimal; value must be the same as in the
DWS
Related Workstation specific parameter Link controls: baud rate
parameters
Change effective from restarting the TDSC

Recommendations

Use only the value 38400 bit/s.

The baud rate must be the same as in the DWS.

15.2.2 TDSC type

Note

There are no physical DSCs from Release 4.5 on. Virtual TDSC units are used for interconnection.

Specifies whether DWS is connected to TDSC directly with a serial cable or not.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Legal values 0, 1
Special values 1 if the DWS is connected to the TDSC, otherwise 0
Change effective from restarting the TDSC

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

304/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16 System parameters modified with the PM
command group
This chapter describes the system parameters.

16.1 Managing the system parameters

The following table shows what you need to manage the system parameters.

Table 38 : Managing the system parameters

Topic Information
Tools MML session through an MML terminal
User interface MMI
Required rights rights to MML sessions and to the appropriate MML commands
When the values are typically during the system integration by Airbus DS. They can be
given given during the system commissioning prior to taking the system
the system into use.

System parameters modified by MML session are handled with command group PM.

The MML parameters described here are given using CCITT MML session. For further details, please refer to
the respective DXT Command Reference Manual.

16.2 System parameters (PM command group)

16.2.1 Feature switch parameters (PM command group)

16.2.1.1 Load based SCCH (375)

With this parameter the operator can activate the Load based SCCH functionality. When activated, the SCCH
allocation for the registering radio subscriber can be based on the load. When the radio subscriber registers,
the load of common control channels are checked. The common control channel (an MCCH or one of the
SCCHs) having the lowest load in this cell is allocated to the MS.
Type operational
Default value 0 = Load based SCCH not activated
Legal values 0 = Load based SCCH not activated
1 = Load based SCCH activated

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 305/466
 Related This parameter has effect only if the Organisation block attribute Common
parameters Secondary Control Channels: SCCH Class has value 'Load based SCCH'.
Change effective immediately

16.2.1.2 AVL forwarding in fallback (378)

Defines whether the AVL forwarding in fallback feature is activated or deactivated in the TBS base station(s).
By default, the parameter value is set to 0, which means that the Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL) messages
work normally when the TBS is connected to a DXT, but the AVL messages are not forwarded by a TBS that
is in a fallback state or standalone mode.
If the parameter value is set to 1, the AVL message forwarding is enabled when the TBS is in a fallback state
or standalone mode. This guarantees that the location information, under the coverage of the base station, is
forwarded to the receiver, even if the TBS is not connected to a DXT.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = AVL forwarding in fallback not activated
1 = AVL forwarding in fallback activated
Change effective after the DXT has sent the value to TBS (in 10 minutes)

Note
The parameter can be used if the DXT and the TBSs have the supporting software installed (TETRA System
Release 6.5 SCD3 or later).

Additional information

Typically, this feature can be used with standalone TBSs, or if the TBS has lost the connection to the DXT.
The parameter can also be configured locally in the TBS using WinMMI. If the parameter is set in the DXT, it
overrides the existing value in the TBS.
The feature requires that the AVL server is connected to radio terminal via Peripheral Equipment Interface
(PEI). The AVL server needs to be located in the coverage area of the TBS.

16.2.1.3 Terminal disable enable in fallback (391)

Defines whether the feature Terminal disable/enable in fallback is activated or not.

By default, the parameter value is set to 0, which means that the terminal disable/enable messages work
only if the TBS is connected to a DXT.
If the parameter value is set to 1, the terminal disable/enable messages are sent also when the TBS is in a
fallback state or standalone mode. This guarantees that even if the TBS was not connected to a DXT, the
terminal can still be disabled or enabled by an authorised terminal under the coverage of the base station.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

306/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values 0 = Terminal disable/enable in fallback not activated
1 = Terminal disable/enable in fallback activated
Related PM command group parameters:
parameters Terminal disable enable pending time (379)
Terminal disable enable Sub-Protocol ID (380)
Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 01 – 10 (381–390)
Change effective after the DXT has sent the value to TBS (in 10 minutes)

Note

The parameter can be used if the DXT and the TBSs have the supporting software installed (TETRA System
Release 6.5 SCD3 or later).

Additional information

The parameter can also be configured locally in the TBS using WinMMI. If the parameter is set in the DXT,
then it overrides the existing value in the TBS.

16.2.1.4 Workstation User Networking (393)

Controls activation and deactivation of the Workstation User Networking feature. If this parameter is enabled,
the system allows the end-user organisation to create Workstation Users (radio dispatchers) so that the same
user data (attributes, rights, etc.) is spread to all the DXTs where there is a need to give the Workstation
User access rights.
Type operational
Default value 0 = Workstation User Networking is disabled
Legal values 0 = Workstation User Networking is disabled
1 = Workstation User Networking is enabled
Change effective immediately

16.2.1.5 Registration CDR data generation mechanism (394)

This parameter controls the storing of registration CDRs to the disk files.

For more information, see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.

Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0 = storing to disk file EVRFIL
Legal values 0 = storing to disk file EVRFIL
1 = storing to disk file GENE00
Change effective when cc refresh period expires. The parameter is valid for calls that
start after the parameter is read.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 307/466
16.2.1.6 Other CDR data generation mechanism (395)

This parameter controls the storing of CDRs (other than registration CDRs) to a disk file. The CDR types
affected by this parameter are TOC, TTC, InG, OutG, SDS-To, Forw and PD.
For more information, see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Default value 1
Legal values 1 = storing to disk file GENE00

16.2.1.7 CDR changes activation (396)

Controls activation and deactivation of the CDR content changes brought by the CDR enhancements feature.
When the parameter is enabled, the calling party can be presented with the MSISDN number in the group call
TOC CDR (when provided). This parameter also controls, whether a CDR is generated when a PDP context
is tried to be activated. For more information, refer to the Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type operational
Default value 0 = CDR changes functionality not activated
Legal values 0 = CDR changes functionality not activated
1 = CDR changes functionality activated
Change effective immediately

16.2.1.8 Dispatcher Initiated Talk Group Selection (397)

Controls activation and deactivation of the Dispatcher Initiated Talk Group Selection feature. If this parameter
is enabled, the dispatcher workstation user is able to select when adding a member to the group whether the
group is set as selected group in the radio terminal or whether the Default scanning priority of the group is
used.
Type operational
Default value 0 = Dispatcher Initiated Talk Group Selection disabled
Legal values 0 = Dispatcher Initiated Talk Group Selection disabled
1 = Dispatcher Initiated Talk Group Selection enabled
Change effective immediately

16.2.1.9 TEDS carrier timing (415)

Defines whether the standard TEDS timing or special TEDS timing is used on the air interface. This
parameter is applicable from TETRA System Release 7.0 SCD3 onwards.
In some cases with old TEDS terminals, this parameter must be set to value 1. In all other cases the default
value 0 should be used.
Type operational
Default value 0 = standard TEDS timing
Legal values 0 = standard TEDS timing
1 = special TEDS timing

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

308/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related Radio network parameter TTRX operation mode
parameters
Change effective at TBC (TETRA base station controller) restart

CAUTION
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

16.2.1.10 TBS jamming detection improvement (416)

Enables / disables the Rel7.0 SCD3 TBS jamming detection improvement. The feature can be enabled only
after the DXT and NMS network has been upgraded to TETRA System Release 7.0 SCD3 level (or newer).
Type operational
Default value 0 = TBS jamming detection improvement disabled
Legal values 0 = TBS jamming detection improvement disabled
1= TBS jamming detection improvement enabled

Enabling this parameter allows choosing between the old and new
jamming algorithm version (controlled by the JAMMOD jamming
algorithm version parameter).
Related Radio network parameter JAMMOD jamming algorithm version
parameters

Change effective immediately

16.2.1.11 Location Based Group Short Data (417)

Enables / disables the Location based group data message service feature.

The feature enables using one common address (the cover group address) in terminal devices, allowing
the terminals to be involved in group data message communication in a local group based on the terminal’s
cell location.

The feature can be activated only after all the DXTs in the network have been upgraded to the TETRA
System Release 7.0 SCD4 level (or higher).
Type operational
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = Location based group data message service disabled
1 = Location based group data message service enabled
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 309/466
16.2.2 Network and registration parameters (PM command group)

16.2.2.1 Country code (1)

Specifies the mobile country code (MCC) of the system. The MCC allows unique addressing of TETRA
networks. The MCC is part of the GTSI, ITSI, and location area identification.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 400
Legal values depends on the country; refer to the ITU-T recommendation X.121
Range integers from 0 to 1 023
Related CDD parameter Mobile country code
parameters
Change effective from restarting the DXT

Additional information

This parameter should be defined before the system delivery.

CAUTION
This parameter must be given before the radio network configuration and it cannot be changed after that.

Keywords: *numbering

16.2.2.2 Network code (6)

Specifies the mobile network code (MNC) of the system. The MNC allows unique addressing of TETRA
networks in a country. The MNC is part of the GTSI, ITSI, and location area identification.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 1
Legal values country-dependable, available from the authorities
Range from 0 to 16 383
Related Configuration and data distribution parameter Mobile network code
parameters
Change effective when restarting the DXT

CAUTION
This parameter must be given before the radio network configuration and it cannot be changed after that.

Keywords: *numbering

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

310/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.2.3 Refreshing period (12)

Specifies how often the system checks that the call still exists and reserved processes and resources are
still needed.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 10 min
Legal values from 1 min to 60 min, with the increment of 1 min
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note
This parameter must have the same value in all DXTs in the system.

Keywords: *timeouts

16.2.2.4 System code (26)

Specifies the TETRA standard that the network supports. The system sends the code over the air interface
to the radio terminals.
Type changeable with a warning flag, Airbus DS defines
Default value 1:ETS 300 392-2 ed. 1 & EN 300 392-7 ed. 2
Legal values 1:ETS 300 392-2 ed. 1 & EN 300 392-7 ed. 2
2:EN 300 392‑2 V2.3.2 to V2.6.1, and EN 300 392‑7 [8] V2.1.1 to V2.4.1
3: EN 300 392 2 V3.1.1 onwards and EN 300 392 7 V3.1.1 to V3.2.1
Range 0:ETS 300 392-2 ed. 1 & ETS 300 392-7 ed. 1
1:ETS 300 392-2 ed. 1 & EN 300 392-7 ed. 2
2:EN 300 392‑2 V2.3.2 to V2.6.1, and EN 300 392‑7 [8] V2.1.1 to V2.4.1
3: EN 300 392 2 V3.1.1 onwards and EN 300 392 7 V3.1.1 to V3.2.1
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

16.2.2.5 SwMI ident (29)

Specifies the network's address (SSI). This address is used, for example, when sending the scanning
on/off messages.
Type changeable with a warning flag, Airbus DS defines
Default value 16 777 213
Legal values from 1 from to16 777 214
Related Dispatcher workstation and radio terminal parameters
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Do not change the value of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 311/466
CAUTION
Do not change the setting after programming the radio terminals. The setting must be the same in the radio
terminals and in the system.

16.2.2.6 Allowed migrating 01–10 country code

Table 39 : Parameters: Allowed migrating 01–10 country code

Parameter name ID
Allowed migrating 01 country code 61
Allowed migrating 02 country code 63
Allowed migrating 03 country code 65
Allowed migrating 04 country code 67
Allowed migrating 05 country code 69
Allowed migrating 06 country code 71
Allowed migrating 07 country code 73
Allowed migrating 08 country code 75
Allowed migrating 09 country code 77
Allowed migrating 10 country code 79

Specifies the country code part of an MNI value of a foreign TETRA network.The MNI of the foreign TETRA
network must be specified by using this and the corresponding network code parameter in order to allow
radio subscribers of that foreign network to migrate to this network and to enable configuration of an ISI
connection towards that network.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 65 535
Legal values from 0 to 65 535, with the increment of 1
Related parameter System parameters:
Allowed migrating 01-10 network code
SSI partitioned 01–10 MNI (301 – 310)
Change effective activated in half an hour

Recommendations

Give country code part of the MNI to allow migration from the nominated network.

Additional information

When new allowed migrating country code is added, it is necessary to add allowed migrating network code of
the wanted MNI at the same time.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

312/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
CAUTION
If the country-code and network-code parameters are not correctly updated, it is not possible for a provisioned
visitor subscriber to migrate to the network.

16.2.2.7 Allowed migrating 01–10 network code

Table 40 : Parameters: Allowed migrating 01–10 network code

Parameter name ID
Allowed migrating 01 network code 62
Allowed migrating 02 network code 64
Allowed migrating 03 network code 66
Allowed migrating 04 network code 68
Allowed migrating 05 network code 70
Allowed migrating 06 network code 72
Allowed migrating 07 network code 74
Allowed migrating 08 network code 76
Allowed migrating 09 network code 78
Allowed migrating 10 network code 80

Specifies the network code part of an MNI value of a foreign TETRA network.The MNI of the foreign TETRA
network must be specified by using this and the corresponding country code parameter in order to allow
radio subscribers of that foreign network to migrate to this network and to enable configuration of an ISI
connection towards that network.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 65 535
Legal values from 0 to 65 535, with the increment of 1
Related parameter System parameters:
Allowed migrating 01-10 country code
SSI partitioned 01–10 MNI (301 – 310)
Change effective activated in half an hour

Recommendations

Give network code part of the MNI to allow migration from the nominated network.

Additional information

When new allowed migrating network code is added, it is necessary to add allowed migrating country code of
the wanted MNI at the same time.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 313/466
CAUTION
If the country-code and network-code parameters are not correctly updated:

• it is not possible for a provisioned visitor subscriber to migrate to the network.

16.2.2.8 Downloading pending milestone 1 (81)

Defines the time after which the first downloading period ends and the second starts.

Group data downloading means signalling of activations and deactivations of groups and dispatcher initiated
group and member operations; adding or removing a radio subscriber to/from a group (DGNA operations) and
group area change to the radio terminal (activations and deactivations of groups). Group data downloading is
divided into three periods of time, in each period the downloading is tried in different frequency, so that it
decreases after downloading pending milestones 1 and 2 and when downloading pending milestone 3 is
reached the DGNA operation downloading is stopped. Milestone 3 only affects DGNA downloadings.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit min
Default value 5
Legal values from 0 to 10, with the increment of 1
Related System parameter Downloading pending milestone 2,
parameters System parameter Downloading pending milestone 3
System parameter Downloading period 1
System parameter Downloading period 2
System parameter Downloading period 3
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note

Very frequent downloading is more effective, but also generates more load to the air interface.

Note

The pending milestones must always be set so that the pending milestone 1 is smaller than the pending
milestone 2 or possibly sometimes equal, but the latter milestone must not ever be smaller than the previous
one.

16.2.2.9 Downloading pending milestone 2 (82)

Defines the time after which the second downloading period ends and the third starts.

Group data downloading means signalling of activations and deactivations of groups and dispatcher initiated
group and member operations; adding or removing a radio subscriber to/from a group (DGNA operations) and
group area change to the radio terminal (activations and deactivations of groups). Group data downloading is
divided into three periods of time, in each period the downloading is tried in different frequency, so that it

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

314/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
decreases after downloading pending milestones 1 and 2 and when downloading pending milestone 3 is
reached the DGNA operation downloading is stopped. Milestone 3 only affects DGNA downloadings.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit min
Default value 60
Legal values from 5 to 120, with the increment of 1
Range from 5 to 120
Related System parameter Downloading pending milestone 1
parameters System parameter Downloading pending milestone 3
System parameter Downloading period 1
System parameter Downloading period 2
System parameter Downloading period 3
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note

Very frequent downloading is more effective, but also generates more load to the air interface.

Note

The pending milestones must always be set so that the pending milestone 1 is smaller than the pending
milestone 2 or possibly sometimes equal, but the latter milestone must not ever be smaller than the previous
one.

16.2.2.10 Downloading pending milestone 3 (83)

Defines the time after which the downloading ends.

Group data downloading means signalling of activations and deactivations of groups and dispatcher initiated
group and member operations; adding or removing a radio subscriber to/from a group (DGNA operations) and
group area change to the radio terminal (activations and deactivations of groups). Group data downloading is
divided into three periods of time, in each period the downloading is tried in different frequency, so that it
decreases after downloading pending milestones 1 and 2 and when downloading pending milestone 3 is
reached the DGNA operation downloading is stopped. Milestone 3 only affects DGNA downloadings.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit days
Default value 30
Legal values from 1 to 60, with the increment of 1
Range from 1 to 60

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 315/466
 Related System parameter Downloading pending milestone 1
parameters System parameter Downloading pending milestone 2
System parameter Downloading period 1
System parameter Downloading period 2
System parameter Downloading period 3
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note
Very frequent downloading is more effective, but also generates more load to the air interface.

16.2.2.11 Downloading period 1 (84)

Defines the frequency the group data downloading is tried from the start of the downloading until the
Downloading pending milestone 1 is reached.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit sec.
Default value 10
Legal values from 10 to 60, with the increment of 1
Related System parameter Downloading pending milestone 1
parameters System parameter Downloading pending milestone 2
System parameter Downloading pending milestone 3
System parameter Downloading period 2
System parameter Downloading period 3
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note
Very frequent downloading is more effective, but also generates more load to the air interface.

Note
If the radio terminal responds to group data downloading, the next pending operation (attachment, detachment
or DGNA) is sent immediately to the MS. The system does not wait for the period defined by this parameter.
This sending period is only used if the system does not receive an acknowledgement from the radio terminal.

16.2.2.12 Downloading period 2 (85)

Defines the frequency the group data downloading is tried between the Downloading pending milestones 1
and 2.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit min
Default value 1

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

316/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values from 1 to 30, with the increment of 1
Related System parameters Downloading pending milestone 1
parameters System parameter Downloading pending milestone 2
System parameter Downloading pending milestone 3
System parameter Downloading period 1
System parameter Downloading period 3
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note

Very frequent downloading is more effective, but also generates more load to the air interface.

Note

If the radio terminal responds to group data downloading, the next pending operation (attachment, detachment
or DGNA) is sent immediately to the MS. The system does not wait for the period defined by this parameter.
This sending period is only used if the system does not receive an acknowledgement from the radio terminal.

16.2.2.13 Downloading period 3 (86)

Defines the frequency the group data downloading is tried between Downloading pending milestones 2 and 3.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit hours
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 4, with the increment of 1
Related System parameters Downloading pending milestone 1
parameters System parameter Downloading pending milestone 2
System parameter Downloading pending milestone 3
System parameter Downloading period 1
System parameter Downloading period 2
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note

Very frequent downloading is more effective, but also generates more load to the air interface.

Note
If the radio terminal responds to group data downloading, the next pending operation (attachment, detachment
or DGNA) is sent immediately to the MS. The system does not wait for the period defined by this parameter.
This sending period is only used if the system does not receive an acknowledgement from the radio terminal.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 317/466
16.2.2.14 Group membership replication optimization (100)

This parameter is used for optimising the group memberships replications to the CDD server in ITSI-Attach.
The situation in ITSI-Attach is such that when a subscriber registers to a VLR, all MS managed memberships
are deleted from the VLR DB and recreated according to the MS needs.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values 0 (optimisation used), 1 (optimisation not used)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note
In normal use, optimisation should always be turned on. Turning off the optimisation might cause high load to
transmission between the DXT and CDD and into the CDD.

Additional information

When optimisation is turned on, DXT sends only changed group memberships to CDD, that is, only groups
that have been added to the scanning list, or that have been removed from the scanning list since the last
power off are sent to CDD. When optimisation is turned off, DXT sends all group memberships to CDD.

16.2.2.15 HLR of APNs and APN pools (114)

Specifies the Home DXT ID of all Access point names (APN) and APN pools.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values one of the existing DXT IDs in the system
Special values 0x0 (no replication to the CDD server)
Related System parameter HLR of connection groups
parameters
Change effective The maximum delay before the new value is taken into use is 3 minutes.

Additional information

APN data changes only in this DXT trigger a replication to the Configuration and Data Distribution Server
(CDD). The dummy value (0x0) means no replication to the CDD server.

16.2.2.16 HLR of connection groups (115)

Specifies the Home DXT ID of all connection groups.

Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values one of the existing DXT IDs in the system
Special values 0x0 (no replication to the CDD server)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

318/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related System parameter HLR of APNs and APN pools
parameters
Change effective The maximum delay before the new value is taken into use is 3 minutes.

Additional information

Connection group data changes only in this DXT trigger a replication to the Configuration and Data
Distribution Server. The dummy value (0x0) means no replication to the CDD server.

DWS requests connection groups from CDD when a workstation user defines call rights for a radio subscriber.

16.2.2.17 EE mode for background groups (173)

Defines whether energy economy mode is used for the background group signalling.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 or 1
0 = stay-alive (no energy economy used)
1 = EG1
Related Exchange parameter Energy Economy
parameters Organisation block attribute Energy Economy Group: Start Point Frame
Number
Change effective • call control: from the next call setup

• organisation block management: when creating a new organisation

block

Additional information

This parameter limits the highest energy saving mode when the energy economy group is defined within
the creation of a new organisation block. The user may still later change the value of the organisation block
attribute Energy Economy Group: Energy Saving Mode to any value.

16.2.2.18 HLR of SwMI definitions (174)

This parameter is for future use.

16.2.2.19 EIR system id (187)

Defines the DXT where the active Equipment Identity Register (EIR) database is located. EIR includes the
TETRA equipment identity (TEI) black and grey lists.
Type changeable, the technical operator defines
Default value 0
Legal values one of the existing DXT IDs in the system
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 319/466
Additional information

If the feature is activated, this parameter has to be defined. Its value must be the system ID of some existing
DXT in the network containing the EIR database. Once the value is defined, it should not be changed
unless the EIR database is moved to another DXT.

16.2.2.20 TEI query enable (193)

Specifies whether TEI query from terminal is enabled or disabled.

Type changeable
Default value 0 (TEI query disabled)
Legal values 0 (TEI query disabled)
1 (TEI query enabled)
Change effective in 5 minutes

Additional information

The Terminal enable/disable feature makes it possible to disable terminals using TETRA equipment identity
(TEI). If a terminal uses air interface encryption, its TEI is queried in every ITSI attach and migration
registration. If there are many terminals in use that do not support TEI query, this parameter can be used to
disable the TEI query part of the feature. In this case, the Airbus DS TETRA network uses the TEI value that
has been given through authentication key management.

16.2.2.21 Mismatching registration rejected (199)

Defines whether the Exclusive capacity for user groups feature is activated or not. The feature allows granting
exclusive capacity for defined base stations by absolutely rejecting the registration of terminals whose
subscriber class does not match the subscriber class of the cell, thus increasing capacity for the desired
user groups that use the base station.

If this parameter is set to value 0, the terminals’ subscriber classes are not checked. This setting overrules
the base station's EXCAP settings.

If the parameter value is 1, a terminal’s subscriber class may be checked depending on the base station’s
EXCAP setting. Based on the comparison result the terminal’s attempt to register to the cell is either
accepted or rejected.

For more information, see Feature Activation Manual.

Type changeable, organisation responsible of the radio network configuration
defines
Default value 0 = not activated
Legal values 0 = not activated
1 = activated
Related EXCAP exclusive capacity for TBS allowed
parameters
Change effective immediately

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

320/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note

Parameter EXCAP exclusive capacity for TBS allowed is dependent on this parameter.

Therefore, first define and apply parameter Mismatching registration rejected and, if you set the value as
1, then define and apply EXCAP exclusive capacity for TBS allowed.

16.2.2.22 Minimum allowed registration and recovery period (203)

This parameter is used to check that the organisation-specific parameters Tracking Recovery Period and
Registration Period are not too short to prevent the CPU from being overloaded. The larger of the two
parameters shall be used as the registration period. This parameter can also be used to deactivate the feature.
Type changeable
Default value 1=10min
Legal values 0…7
0=feature is not active
1=10min
2=30min
3=1h
4=2h
5=4h
6=8h
7=24h
Related Organisation parameter Registration period
parameters Organisation parameter Tracking Recovery Period
Organisation parameter Recovery for Tracked MSs only
Radio subscriber parameter Periodic Registration: Subscriber Registration
Checked by
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *periodic registration

16.2.2.23 DCK retrieval support (296) (Encrypted initial registration support)

The parameter controls whether terminals may apply air interface encryption to power-on (ITSI-Attach)
registration.
Type changeable
Default value 0 (not supported)
Legal values 0
1
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note

Only TB3 base stations support this parameter; it has no effect on TBS2 base stations.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 321/466
16.2.2.24 TEDS system code (365)

Not in use.

16.2.2.25 Visitor ASSI allocation (368)

Visitor ASSI (V-ASSI) allocation is needed for all migrating subscribers that do not have a unique SSI.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 1
Legal values 1 = V-ASSI allocation activated
Related system parameters Allowed migrating 1–10 country country code and
parameters Allowed migrating 1–10 network code
Change effective in 5 minutes

CAUTION
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

16.2.2.26 Group attachment in registration message (372)

Defines how group attachment received in registration request is handled in inter-DXT roaming.
Terminals may append the group attachment in to the registration request. With this parameter the system
decides how to respond to the group attachment included into the registration message.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = Respond immediately to the group attachment received in registration
in inter-DXT roaming
1 = Reserved for future use
Change effective immediately

Recommendations

Default value 0 should be used in all networks. Value 1 may be used in the future when permitted by
Airbus DS.
CAUTION
Do not change the setting of this parameter without consulting Airbus DS.

16.2.2.27 Automatic TCS client logout (374)

This parameter defines if the system may perform an automatic logout of TCS clients, when the CDD server
IP address has been changed (e.g. when the DXT is moved to another CDD).
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default values 2

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

322/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values 1 = TCS clients automatically logged out
2 = TCS clients not logged out
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

16.2.2.28 Networking mode (376)

Defines the networking mode.

With this parameter it is possible to activate the Autonomous Mode Data Management feature, which allows
configuring the subscriber, group, organisation and other management data locally in each DXT without
the CDD server.
By default, the networking mode is set to 0, which means normal mode of data management in the network
with CDD or in a single DXT network without CDD.
If the parameter value is set to 1, the autonomous mode of data management is switched on, after which the
data management is handled locally in each DXT. This kind of networking mode can be used in a system that
includes several DXTs but no CDD server.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = Normal mode
1 = Autonomous mode
Related DXT parameter modified with the WO command group (Parameters Class
parameters 34): CDD in network (66)
Change effective immediately

Note
• Only the change from normal mode to autonomous mode is supported, as changing the mode back to
normal might cause unwanted results. Therefore, do not change the default value 0 (normal mode)
to 1 (autonomous mode), unless you are sure that this is the desired networking mode from that
point onwards.
• The parameter can be used if the DXT and the TBSs have the supporting software installed (TETRA
System Release 6.0 CD3.8 or later, or Release 6.5 CD3.2 or later).

16.2.2.29 DXT-DXT satellite offset timer (377)

Defines time compensation for the satellite hop delay.

This parameter defines the additional delay that needs to be added to timers for individual and group call
control and short data messaging in order to compensate the satellite hop delay.
Typically, this parameter can be used in a network where trunked voice and data message services between
mobile cells and/or deployable TETRA network are based on IP protocols over satellite links.
Type changeable
Unit 10 ms

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 323/466
 Default values 0
Legal values from 0 to 500, with the increment of 1
Related PM command group parameter Networking mode (376)
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note
The parameter can be used if the system parameter Networking mode (376) has been set to value 1
(autonomous mode) and the interconnected DXTs have the supporting software installed (TETRA System
Release 6.5 SCD3 or later).

16.2.2.30 Automatic TCS client home change (392)

When this parameter is enabled, a TCS client can log in to the standby home DXT automatically, i.e. the client
can change from an active to standby home DXT without the network operator interaction. If this parameter is
disabled, only the manual failover between the active and standby configuration is possible.
Note
Before enabling this parameter, the feature DWS/TCS Client Dual Homing should be activated according
to the instructions in Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.

Type changeable with a warning flag

Default values 0
Legal values 0 = disabled
1 = enabled
Change effective when cc refresh period expires (after approximately 5 minutes)

16.2.3 Radio network parameters (PM command group)

16.2.3.1 Max resource queuing time (4)

Specifies the maximum time after which the call setup of an individual call is interrupted if there are not
enough resources for the calling or called party. The system parameter Max resource queuing time is also
used to queue resources for the calling party in a group call. If there are no resources available after this
time, the group call setup will be terminated. If the calling party resources are obtained within Max resource
queuing time, the other resources, if not obtained yet, are waited for using the group parameter Time limits:
Call setup time and the group call is started. However, if all the resources for the group call are obtained,
the group call is started immediately regardless of the timer values.
Max resource queuing time is also used in the case a single-slot PM PDCH is tried to be allocated. If there
are no channels available (i.e. all PM PDCHs are already in use), the MS may be placed in a queue for a
PDCH channel for the time of Max resource queuing time. If the timer expires, the packet data transfer
initiation is rejected.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

324/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 41 : Recommendations for using the parameters for group calls

System parameter Max Resource Group parameter Time limits: Call setup time
Queuing Time
– used in individual calls for calling and used for called subscribers (other than the call
called subscriber in all queuing initiating group members) in group calls
– used for calling subscriber (group call
initiating subscriber) in group call setup

Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator

Unit seconds
Default value 30
Legal values from 10 to 600 , with the increment of 1
Related Group parameter Time limits: Call setup time
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

The parameter is used when queuing for traffic channel or speech time slot for DWS.

Keywords: *timeouts

16.2.3.2 Priority level of PDU for AL call (5)

Specifies the priority level of downlink PDU (low/medium/high) for individual ambience listening call.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values low= 0, medium=1, high=2
Related System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages
parameters System parameter Priority level of PDU for group attachments/detachments
(98)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for DGNA (99)
System parameter Priority for packet data (101)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for registration (106)
System parameter Priority for status messages (116)
System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages (117)
System parameter Priority for SDS 1, 2 & 3 messages (118)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for group call (121)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for on/off hook call (129)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for direct call (130)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for PSTN/PABX call (131)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

In the messages coming from TETRA applications the priority data structure has three fields: the basic
priority, the reserved field, and the priority level. The basic priority defines the handling of PDUs in the TBS,

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 325/466
the reserved bit is only for TBS internal use, and the priority level determines the priorisation in the class of
the same basic priority. This parameter gives priority between Down Link PDUs within the same basic priority
so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. For example, the PDUs of both the individual
ambience listening call, the SDS 1, and the SDS 2 have mostly same basic priorities for their PDU sending.
In an overloading situation this does not give e.g. for the call setups any preferences, if desired, to SDS 1s
and SDS 2s. In general any service with same PDU basic priorities does not have any kind of preference to
others. The mutual preferences to other services are arranged with this new priority level. It informs the base
station how to arrange the received PDUs in the queue in an overload situation. The following table shows
the principle of the level arrangement between services. The values of the priorities are examples.

Table 42 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Individual ambience listening call medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

16.2.3.3 Priority level of PDU for group attachments/detachments (98)

Specifies the priority level of downlink PDU (low/medium/high) for group attachments/detachments within
the same basic priority level.

Note

On QAM PDCH a separate parameter is used:Priority lev of group att/det PDU on TEDS (327). See Section
16.2.3.37 .

Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values low= 0, medium=1, high=2
Related System parameter Priority level of PDU for DGNA (99)
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

In the messages coming from TETRA applications the priority data structure has three fields: the basic
priority, the reserved field, and the priority level. The basic priority defines the handling of PDUs in the TBS,
the reserved bit is only for TBS internal use, and the priority level determines the priorisation in the class of
the same basic priority. This parameter gives priority between Down Link PDUs within the same basic priority
so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. For example, the PDUs of both the group
attachment/detachment, the SDS 1, and the SDS 2 have mostly same basic priorities for their PDU sending.
In an overloading situation this does not give e.g. for the call setups any preferences, if desired, to SDS 1s
and SDS 2s. In general any service with same PDU basic priorities does not have any kind of preference to
others. The mutual preferences to other services are arranged with this new priority level. It informs the base

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

326/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
station how to arrange the received PDUs in the queue in an overload situation. The following table shows
the principle of the level arrangement between services. The values of the priorities are examples.

Table 43 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Group attachment / detachment medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

16.2.3.4 Priority level of PDU for DGNA (99)

Specifies the priority level of downlink PDU (low/medium/high) for Dynamic Group Number Assignment
(DGNA). The priority is specified among PDUs within the same basic priority.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values low= 0, medium=1, high=2
Related System parameter Priority level of PDU for group attachments/detachments
parameters (98)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

In the messages coming from TETRA applications the priority data structure has three fields: the basic
priority, the reserved field, and the priority level. The basic priority defines the handling of PDUs in the TBS,
the reserved bit is only for TBS internal use, and the priority level determines the priorisation in the class of
the same basic priority. This parameter gives priority between downlink PDUs within the same basic priority
so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. For example, the PDUs of both the DGNA,
the SDS 1, and the SDS 2 have mostly same basic priorities for their PDU sending. In an overloading
situation this does not give e.g. for the call setups any preferences, if desired, to SDS 1s and SDS 2s. In
general any service with same PDU basic priorities does not have any kind of preference to others. The
mutual preferences to other services are arranged with this new priority level. It informs the base station how
to arrange the received PDUs in the queue in an overload situation. The following table shows the principle of
the level arrangement between services. The values of the priorities are examples.

Table 44 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

DGNA medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 327/466
16.2.3.5 Priority for packet data (101)

Specifies the priority between packet data (PDUs) and other PDUs within the same basic priority.

Note
On QAM PDCH a separate parameter is used:TEDS - Packet data PDU priority (316). See Section 16.2.3.26 .

Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values low = 0, medium = 1, high = 2
Related System parameter Priority level of PDU for AL call (5)
parameters System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages
System parameter Priority level of PDU for group attachments/detachments
(98)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for DGNA (99)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for registration (106)
System parameter Priority for status messages (116)
System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages (117)
System parameter Priority for SDS 1, 2 & 3 messages (118)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for group call (121)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for on/off hook call (129)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for direct call (130)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for PSTN/PABX call (131)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

In the messages coming from TETRA applications the priority data structure has three fields: the basic
priority, the reserved field, and the priority level. The basic priority defines the handling of PDUs in the TBS,
the reserved bit is only for TBS internal use, and the priority level determines the priorisation in the class of
the same basic priority. This parameter gives priority between downlink PDUs within the same basic priority
so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. For example, the packet data, the SDS 1, and
the SDS 2 have mostly same basic priorities for their PDU sending. In an overloading situation this does not
give e.g. for the call setups any preferences, if desired, to SDS 1s and SDS 2s. In general any service with
same PDU basic priorities does not have any kind of preference to others. The mutual preferences to other
services are arranged with this new priority level. It informs the base station how to arrange the received
PDUs in the queue in an overload situation. The following table shows the principle of the level arrangement
between services. The values of the priorities are examples.

Table 45 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Packet data medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

328/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note

The level priorities of services are adjustable and the operator can modify them.

16.2.3.6 Priority level of PDU for registration (106)

Specifies the priority level of the downlink PDU (low/medium/high) for registration within the same basic
priority.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 2
Legal values low= 0, medium=1, high=2
Related System parameters Priority level of PDU for group
parameters attachments/detachments (98) and Priority level of PDU for
DGNA (99)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

In the messages coming from TETRA applications the priority data structure has three fields: the basic
priority, the reserved field, and the priority level. The basic priority defines the handling of PDUs in the TBS,
the reserved bit is only for TBS internal use, and the priority level determines the priorisation in the class
of the same basic priority. This parameter gives priority between downlink PDUs within the same basic
priority so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. For example, the PDUs of both the
registration, the SDS 1, and the SDS 2 have mostly same basic priorities for their PDU sending. In an
overloading situation this does not give e.g. for the call setups any preferences, if desired, to SDS 1s and
SDS 2s. In general any service with same PDU basic priorities does not have any kind of preference to
others. The mutual preferences to other services are arranged with this new priority level. It informs the base
station how to arrange the received PDUs in the queue in an overload situation. The following table shows
the principle of the level arrangement between services. The values of the priorities are examples.

Table 46 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Registration medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

16.2.3.7 Fixed TBS fallback mode parameters (108 – 113)

The optional Fixed TBS fallback mode offers one to three fixed group calls that the TBS initiates. These group
calls can be configured with the following parameters:

• parameters 108-110 for defining the GSSIs (see the below subsections)

• parameters 111-113 for defining the maximum speech item time (refer to Chapters 16.2.6.9 - 16.2.6.11 )

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 329/466
For the following Fixed TBS fallback parameters see, respectively:

• for FBMOD TBS fallback mode allowed: 10.4.9.2 ;

• for LDTIM Link down timeout period: 10.4.9.3 .

16.2.3.7.1 TBS fallback GSSI 01 (108)

Specifies the SSI for TETRA Base Station fallback group 1. A TBS fallback group is a predefined fixed
group that a MS may enter in case the connection between the TBS and the DXT has been broken for
a parameterised time.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0
Legal values 0 … 9 999 999
Special values 0 Fallback GSSI 01 is not in use
Related System parameter TBS speech item duration in fallback group 01
parameters
Change effective in 10 minutes

Note

To ensure that in a TBS fallback situation communication between members of an organisation can continue
it is advised that there is only one organisation-specific fallback background group in any terminal.

16.2.3.7.2 TBS fallback GSSI 02 (109)

Specifies the SSI for TETRA Base Station fallback group 2. A TBS fallback group is a pre-defined fixed
group that a MS may enter in case the connection between the TBS and the DXT has been broken for
a parameterised time.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0
Legal values 0 … 9 999 999
Special values 0 Fallback GSSI 02 is not in use
Related System parameter TBS speech item duration in fallback group 02
parameters
Change effective in 10 minutes

Note

To ensure that in a TBS fallback situation communication between members of an organisation can continue
it is advised that there is only one organisation-specific fallback background group in any terminal.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

330/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.3.7.3 TBS fallback GSSI 03 (110)

Specifies the SSI for TETRA Base Station fallback group 3. A TBS fallback group is a pre-defined fixed
group that a MS may enter in case the connection between the TBS and the DXT has been broken for
a parameterised time.
For the use of this group as the default emergency group in Enhanced TBS fallback mode see Section
16.2.3.8.1 .
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0
Legal values 0 … 9 999 999
Special values 0 Fallback GSSI 03 is not in use
Related System parameter TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03
parameters
Change effective in 10 minutes

Note
To ensure that in a TBS fallback situation communication between members of an organisation can continue
it is advised that there is only one organisation-specific fallback background group in any terminal.

16.2.3.8 Enhanced TBS fallback mode parameters (108 – 113)

In addition to the fixed group calls to the predefined groups, the Enhanced TBS fallback mode supports
trunked mode group calls, that is, calls to other groups than the predefined fixed groups, emergency group
calls, individual calls and SDS and status transfer.
For the following TBS fallback parameters see, respectively:
• for parameter FBMOD TBS fallback mode allowed: see Section 10.4.9.2 ;
• for parameter LDTIM Link down timeout period: see Section 10.4.9.3 .

There are no new parameters for Enhanced TBS fallback mode. Instead, Fixed TBS fallback mode
parameters are also used to configure the enhanced fallback operation as described in Subsection 16.2.3.8.1 .

16.2.3.8.1 Use of Fixed TBS fallback parameters in Enhanced TBS fallback mode

The predefined fixed groups can also be used in the Enhanced TBS fallback mode by defining the TBS
fallback mode parameters TBS fallback GSSI 01 (108), TBS fallback GSSI 02 (109), and TBS fallback
GSSI 03 (110) accordingly.
The following parameters also have an additional meaning in the Enhanced TBS fallback mode:
• The parameter TBS speech item duration in fallback group 01 is also used for controlling the speech
item duration in individual calls and in group calls in other groups than the predefined fixed groups.
• The parameter TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03 is also used for controlling the speech
item duration and inactivity time in emergency calls. The used parameter value also defines whether
the TBS fallback GSSI 03 (110) is used as the default emergency group.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 331/466
 • If TBS fallback GSSI 03 (110) is not defined, there is no default emergency group and only emergency
group calls to the non-fixed groups are supported.

Default emergency group

TBS fallback GSSI 03 (110) may be used as the default emergency group if the TBS is equipped with
software and hardware of Release 4.0. The TBS fallback GSSI 03 (110) is configured as default emergency
group by setting the least significant digit of the TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03 parameter
to value 0, 1 , 2, 3 or 4.

Trunked group and individual call duration

The maximum call duration is 120 minutes.

The TBS speech item duration in fallback group 01 parameter defines the maximum speech item duration for
other calls than emergency calls and calls to predefined fixed groups. The maximum inactivity time is fixed at
3s. If traffic channels are available, it is always possible to make a new call.

Emergency group call duration

Maximum call duration is 1440 minutes (1 day).

The TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03 parameter defines the maximum speech item duration
and the maximum inactivity time for emergency calls.

For example:

- If you have the following conditions: max speech item for GSSI3 (and emergency) = 60s, GSSI3 is a normal
group, emergency call inactivity = 30s:
The result is: TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03 = 66
- If you have the following conditions: max speech item for GSSI3 (and emergency) = 600s, GSSI3 is the
default emergency group, emergency call inactivity = 300s:
The result is: TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03 = 604

16.2.3.8.2 Enhanced TBS fallback mode parameters to be used in the future

Lower limit of GSSI range 01–10 (137, 139, 141.. 155)

Upper limit of GSSI range 01–10 (138, 140, 142.. 156)
Allowed individual GSSI address 01-10 (157-166)
Emergency group GSSI (167)
Maximum call duration time (168)
Maximum call duration time for emergency calls (169)
Maximum inactivity time (170)
Maximum speech item duration for trunked calls (171)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

332/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.3.9 Priority level of PDU for group call (121)

Specifies the priority level of downlink PDU (low/medium/high) for the signalling of group call setup.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 2
Legal values low= 0, medium=1, high=2
Related System parameter Priority level of PDU for group attachments/detachments
parameters (98)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for DGNA (99)
System parameter Priority for packet data (101)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for registration (106)
System parameter Priority for status messages (116)
System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages (117)
System parameter Priority for SDS 1, 2 & 3 messages (118)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

In the messages coming from TETRA applications the priority data structure has three fields: the basic
priority, the reserved field, and the priority level. The basic priority defines the handling of PDUs in the TBS,
the reserved bit is only for TBS internal use, and the priority level determines the priorisation in the class of
the same basic priority. This parameter gives priority between downlink PDUs within the same basic priority
so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. For example, the PDUs of both the group call
setup, the SDS 1, and the SDS 2 have mostly same basic priorities for their PDU sending. In an overloading
situation this does not give e.g. for the call setups any preferences, if desired, to SDS 1s and SDS 2s. In
general any service with same PDU basic priorities does not have any kind of preference to others. The
mutual preferences to other services are arranged with this new priority level. It informs the base station how
to arrange the received PDUs in the queue in an overload situation. The following table shows the principle of
the level arrangement between services. The values of the priorities are examples.

Table 47 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Group call setup medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

16.2.3.10 Priority level of PDU for on/off hook call (129)

Specifies the priority level of downlink PDU (low/medium/high) for individual on/off hook call.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values low= 0, medium=1, high=2

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 333/466
 Related System parameter Priority level of PDU for AL call (5)
parameters System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages
System parameter Priority level of PDU for group attachments/detachments
(98)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for DGNA (99)
System parameter Priority for packet data (101)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for registration (106)
System parameter Priority for status messages (116)
System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages (117)
System parameter Priority for SDS 1, 2 & 3 messages (118)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for group call (121)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for direct call (130)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for PSTN/PABX call (131)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

In the messages coming from TETRA applications the priority data structure has three fields: the basic
priority, the reserved field, and the priority level. The basic priority defines the handling of PDUs in the TBS,
the reserved bit is only for TBS internal use, and the priority level determines the prioritisation in the class of
the same basic priority. This parameter gives priority between downlink PDUs within the same basic priority
so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. For example, the PDUs of both the individual
off-hook call setup, the SDS 1, and the SDS 2 have mostly same basic priorities for their PDU sending. In
an overloading situation this does not give e.g. for the call setups any preferences, if desired, to SDS 1s,
and SDS 2s. In general any service with same PDU basic priorities does not have any kind of preference to
others. The mutual preferences to other services are arranged with this new priority level. It informs the base
station how to arrange the received PDUs in the queue in an overload situation. The following table shows
the principle of the level arrangement between services. The values of the priorities are examples.

Table 48 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Individual off-hook call medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

16.2.3.11 Priority level of PDU for direct call (130)

Specifies the priority level of downlink PDU (low/medium/high) for individual direct call.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values low= 0, medium=1, high=2

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

334/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related System parameter Priority level of PDU for AL call (5)
parameters System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages
System parameter Priority level of PDU for group attachments/detachments
(98)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for DGNA (99)
System parameter Priority for packet data (101)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for registration (106)
System parameter Priority for status messages (116)
System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages (117)
System parameter Priority for SDS 1, 2 & 3 messages (118)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for group call (121)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for on/off hook call (129)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for PSTN/PABX call (131)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

In the messages coming from TETRA applications the priority data structure has three fields: the basic
priority, the reserved field, and the priority level. The basic priority defines the handling of PDUs in the TBS,
the reserved bit is only for TBS internal use, and the priority level determines the prioritisation in the class
of the same basic priority. This parameter gives priority between downlink PDUs within the same basic
priority so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. For example, the PDUs of both the
individual direct call, the SDS 1, and the SDS 2 have mostly same basic priorities for their PDU sending. In
an overloading situation this does not give e.g. for the call setups any preferences, if desired, to SDS 1s,
and SDS 2s. In general any service with same PDU basic priorities does not have any kind of preference to
others. The mutual preferences to other services are arranged with this new priority level. It informs the base
station how to arrange the received PDUs in the queue in an overload situation. The following table shows
the principle of the level arrangement between services. The values of the priorities are examples.

Table 49 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Individual direct call medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

16.2.3.12 Priority level of PDU for PSTN/PABX call (131)

Specifies the priority level of downlink PDU (low/medium/high) for individual PSTN/PABX call.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values low= 0, medium=1, high=2

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 335/466
 Related System parameter Priority level of PDU for AL call (5)
parameters System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages
System parameter Priority level of PDU for group attachments/detachments
(98)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for DGNA (99)
System parameter Priority for packet data (101)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for registration (106)
System parameter Priority for status messages (116)
System parameter Priority for SDS 4 messages (117)
System parameter Priority for SDS 1, 2 & 3 messages (118)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for group call (121)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for on/off hook call (129)
System parameter Priority level of PDU for direct call (130)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

In the messages coming from TETRA applications the priority data structure has three fields: the basic
priority, the reserved field, and the priority level. The basic priority defines the handling of PDUs in the TBS,
the reserved bit is only for TBS internal use, and the priority level determines the prioritisation in the class of
the same basic priority. This parameter gives priority between downlink PDUs within the same basic priority
so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. For example, the PDUs of both the individual
PSTN/PABX call, the SDS 1, and the SDS 2 have mostly same basic priorities for their PDU sending. In
an overloading situation this does not give e.g. for the call setups any preferences, if desired, to SDS 1s,
and SDS 2s. In general any service with same PDU basic priorities does not have any kind of preference to
others. The mutual preferences to other services are arranged with this new priority level. It informs the base
station how to arrange the received PDUs in the queue in an overload situation. The following table shows
the principle of the level arrangement between services. The values of the priorities are examples.

Table 50 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Individual PSTN/PABX call medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

16.2.3.13 SDS-TL addressing method (133)

Defines the allowed addressing method of the terminals. If indicated by this parameter, the terminals may
address SDS-TL messages to a service centre.
Type changeable
Default value Never (0)
Legal values 0 (never use Service Centre addressing)
1 (terminal's choice to use Service Centre addressing)
2 (preferred use of Service Centre addressing)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

336/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related Radio subscriber parameter Rights to use storage
parameters
Change effective updated to the system at intervals of 10 minutes

Note
If the Short Message Service Center (SMSC) is not supported in the network, then value 1 has no effect
and value 0 is always broadcast to the terminals.

Note
Parameter conversion will set the radio subscriber parameter Rights to use storage value as TRUE for each
subscriber who has an MS-ISDN address defined.

16.2.3.14 Cell load sending period (183)

Specifies the minimum sending interval between two consecutive cell load distributions from DXT to TBS.
After the cell load is distributed, the next cell load distribution must wait the time defined with this parameter.
Type changeable
Unit seconds
Default value 30
Legal values from 5 to 240; with increment of 5
Change effective updated to the system at intervals of 10 minutes

WARNING
A shorter waiting time between two consecutive cell load distributions will load the system more.

16.2.3.15 Hysteresis of cell load (184)

Specifies the hysteresis of cell load used in load-directed roaming.

Type changeable
Unit %
Default value 10
Legal values from 0 to 100; with the increment of 1
Related System parameter Higher limit of cell load
parameters System parameter Lower limit of cell load
Change effective updated to the system at intervals defined with the cc refresh
period parameter

WARNING
A lower value will load the system more.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 337/466
Additional information

The load categorisation of a cell remains unchanged until the radio channel occupation percentage has
exceeded a limit by the amount of this hysteresis of cell load value. The limits are defined by the system
parameters Lower limit of cell load andHigher limit of cell load. The hysteresis stabilizes the cell load
categorisation. The value of the hysteresis may not exceed any of the following values: 100% minus higher
limit, higher limit minus lower limit, lower limit minus 0%. The parameter value is updated to the system at
intervals of 10 minutes.

16.2.3.16 Lower limit of cell load (185)

Specifies the lower limit of cell load used in the load-directed roaming.
Type changeable
Unit %
Default value 45
Legal values from 0 to 100; with the increment of 1
Related System parameter Higher limit of cell load
parameters System parameter Hysteresis of cell load
Change effective updated to the system at intervals defined with the cc refresh period
parameter

Additional information

The load of a cell is categorized as unknown, low, medium, or high. The lower limit of cell load denotes the
radio channel occupation limit between low and medium cell load categorisation in percentage. The Lower
limit of cell load system parameter must be set together with system parameter Higher limit of cell load to
accomplish good performance of the load-directed roaming feature. The value of the lower limit should not be
smaller than the value of the hysteresis, and it should not be greater than the value of the higher limit minus
the hysteresis. (Higher limit may have special value zero).

16.2.3.17 Higher limit of cell load (186)

Specifies the higher limit of cell load used in load-directed roaming.

Type changeable
Unit %
Default value 75
Legal values from 0 to 100; with the increment of 1
Special values 0 (load directed roaming is turned off)
Related System parameter Hysteresis of cell load
parameters System parameter Lower limit of cell load
Change effective updated to the system at intervals defined with the cc refresh period
parameter

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

338/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Additional information

The load of a cell is categorized as unknown, low, medium, or high. The higher limit of cell load denotes the
radio channel occupation limit between medium and high cell load categorisation in percentage. The system
parameter Higher limit of cell load must be set together with the system parameter Lower limit of cell load in
order to accomplish good performance of the load-directed roaming feature. The value of the higher limit may
not be smaller than the value of the lower limit plus the hysteresis, and it should not be greater than the value
of 100% minus the hysteresis, (or the value of the higher limit must be zero). If the value of the higher limit is
zero, then the feature of load-directed roaming is turned off and the cell loads are categorized as unknown.

16.2.3.18 Send network time (197)

Disables/enables the sending of TETRA network time to the mobile stations.

Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 or 1
Special values 0 = disables the sending of TETRA network time to the mobile stations
1 = enables the sending of TETRA network time to the mobile stations
Change effective delayed

16.2.3.19 Guaranteed channels activation (202)

For future use.

16.2.3.20 Performance management enhancement (300)

Defines whether the Performance Management Enhancement feature is activated (value 1 or 2) or

deactivated (value 0) in the DXT. If this parameter is activated, then the new statistical counters are displayed
in the DXT. If the parameter is deactivated, the old (Rel 5.5) statistic counters are used.

The parameter is used in Group Call, Individual Call, Data Messaging, Packet Data, DXT-TBS Link Load and
Speech Line Routing.

The parameter is read and thus taken into use in periods defined by the system parameter cc parameter
refresh period.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = deactivated; only the previous release level statistics interface is
available (release levels prior to Release 6)
1 = activated; only Release 6 level statistics interface is available
2 = activated; both Release 6 and Release 7 level statistics interfaces
are available
Change effective in the next measurement report

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 339/466
16.2.3.21 Control channel width in TEDS (311)

Not in use.

16.2.3.22 Max TEDS TTRXs in TBS (312)

This parameter defines the maximum number of TEDS TTRX units that can be configured to a TBS.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 2
Legal values 0–3
Note that value 3 is applicable only for 25 kHz TEDS TTRXs.
Change effective within next TTRX configuration

16.2.3.23 Use of TEDS options (313)

This parameter specifies, which TEDS options are used (the only option at this moment is the LLC
optimisation).
Type changeable
Default value 0 = LLC optimisation is not used
Legal values 0 = LLC optimisation is not used
1 = LLC optimisation is used
Change effective updated to the system at intervals of 10 minutes

Additional information

This parameter should not be changed when the TEDS packet data transfer is on-going.

16.2.3.24 TEDS - Allowed tl-sdu retransmission (314)

This parameter defines the number of TL-SDU (service data unit) retransmissions allowed on QAM PDCH
before LLC (logical link control) gives up.
Type changeable
Default value 2
Legal values 0–7
Change effective from next advanced link setup

16.2.3.25 TEDS - Allowed segment retransmission (315)

This parameter defines the number of allowed segment re-transmissions on QAM PDCH, that is, how
many times an incorrectly received IP datagram segment is re-transmitted over radio path. Increasing this
parameter value will reduce packet loss in poor radio coverage conditions.
Type changeable
Default value 4

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

340/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values 1 – 15
Change effective from next advanced link setup

16.2.3.26 TEDS - Packet data PDU priority (316)

This parameter defines the priority between packet data PDUs and other PDUs within the same basic
priority on QAM PDCH.

The parameter gives priority between down link PDUs within the same basic priority so that the base station
can re-arrange their sending in queues. For example, the PDUs of both the packet data and SDS-4 may
have the same basic priorities for their PDU sending. In an overloading situation this does not give any
preferences, if desired, to the packet data, for example.

The values of the priorities are examples only.

Table 51 : Example of priority levels on QAM PDCH

Service Priority level

Packet data medium
SDS-4 low

Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = low
1 = medium
2 = high
Change effective from the next advanced link setup

16.2.3.27 TEDS - TL-SDU win size in original AL (317)

This parameter defines the TL-SDU window size in the original advanced link on QAM PDCH.

The parameter defines the number of IP datagrams (i.e. TL-SDUs) that can be transmitted on air interface
before requesting for an AL acknowledgement.
Type changeable
Default value 3
Legal values 1–3
Change effective from the next advanced link setup

16.2.3.28 TEDS - TL-SDU win size in extended AL (318)

This parameter defines the TL-SDU window size in the extended advanced link on QAM PDCH.

The parameter defines the maximum number of IP datagrams (i.e. TL-SDUs) that can be transmitted on air
interface before requesting for an AL acknowledgement.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 341/466
 Type changeable
Default value 8
Legal values 1 – 15
Change effective from the next advanced link setup

16.2.3.29 TEDS DL signalling cadence (319)

This parameter defines downlink signalling cadence, that is, how many additional time slots are allowed for
PDU encoding/decoding for the radio terminal on the QAM PDCH.
Type changeable
Unit timeslot
Default value 0
Legal values 0–2
Related System parameter TEDS minimum granting delay (322)
parameters
Change effective periodically, every 10 seconds

Recommendations

The TEDS DL signalling cadence is recommended to be shorter than or equal to the value set in the system
parameter TEDS minimum granting delay (322).

16.2.3.30 TEDS L2 feedback duration (T.230) (320)

This parameter defines the L2 feedback duration (T.230) for the TEDS service in steps of 2 multiframes, that
is, how long the layer 2 feedback is wished to be received.
Type changeable
Unit 2 multiframes
Default value 3 = 6 multiframes
Legal values 0 – 63
Special values 0 = no unsolicited feedback messages permitted
1 = 2 multiframes
2 = 4 multiframes
…
63 = 126 multiframes
Change effective periodically, every 10 seconds

Note

If the value of the parameter TEDS L2 feedback interval (T.231) (321) is 7 (= L2 feedback not used), this
parameter has no effect.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

342/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.3.31 TEDS L2 feedback interval (T.231) (321)

This parameter defines the L2 feedback interval (T.231) for the TEDS service, that is, the minimum interval
between L2 feedback information messages.
Type changeable
Unit TDMA frame
Default value 7 = L2 feedback not used
Legal values 0–7
Special values 0 = 6 frames
1 = 9 frames
2 = 12 frames
3 = 18 frames
4 = 27 frames
5 = 36 frames
6 = 54 frames
7 = L2 feedback not used
Change effective periodically, every 10 seconds

Recommendations

Use value 7. If you intend to use any other value, consult Airbus DS.

16.2.3.32 TEDS minimum granting delay (322)

This parameter defines the minimum delay for the reserved access allocation in timeslots.
Type changeable
Unit timeslot
Default value 0
Legal values 0–4
Related System parameter TEDS DL signalling cadence (319)
parameters
Change effective periodically, every 10 seconds

Recommendations

TEDS minimum granting delay should be bigger than or equal to the TEDS DL signalling cadence (319).

16.2.3.33 TEDS start-high-go-low starting level (323)

This parameter defines the starting level on the 'start-high-go-low' link adaptation procedure.
Type changeable
Default value 3
Legal values 0–4

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 343/466
 Special values 0 = 4-QAM r=1/2
1 = 16-QAM r=1/2
2 = reserved (not supported)
3 = 64-QAM r=1/2
4 = 64-QAM r=2/3
Change effective periodically, every 10 seconds

16.2.3.34 TEDS max waiting time for slot grant (324)

This parameter defines the maximum allowed time for sending the slot grant based on a radio terminal's
request on the QAM PDCH, counted as number of slots.
Type changeable
Unit timeslot
Default value 18
Legal values 5 – 100
Change effective periodically, every 10 seconds

16.2.3.35 Priority for registration on TEDS (325)

Not in use.

16.2.3.36 Priority level of PDU for DGNA on TEDS (326)

Not in use.

16.2.3.37 Priority lev of group att/det PDU on TEDS (327)

Specifies the priority level (low/medium/high) of group attachment / detachment PDUs on the QAM PDCH.
The parameter defines the priority between the group attachment / detachment PDUs and other PDUs
within the same basic priority on the QAM PDCH.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values value range 0 – 2
0 = low
1 = medium
2 = high
Change effective immediately

Additional information

This parameter gives priority between downlink PDUs within the same basic priority so that the base station
can rearrange their sending in queues. For example, the PDUs of both the group attachment/detachment and
the SDS 4 may have the same basic priorities for their PDU sending. In an overloading situation this does not
give e.g. for the group attachment/detachment any preferences, if desired. The following table shows the
principle of the level arrangement between services. The values of the priorities are examples.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

344/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 52 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Group attachment / medium
detachment
SDS 4 low

16.2.3.38 TEDS waiting time for random access ack (328)

Not in use, replaced by parameter TWT waiting time for random access acknowledgement in TEDS (see
10.4.11.1.14 ).

16.2.3.39 TEDS min amount of RA slots in multiframe (329)

This parameter defines the minimum number of slots in each multiframe on the QAM PDCH, which are used
for random access purposes to guarantee the access to the system also on the high load situations.
Type changeable
Unit time slot
Default value 5
Legal values 2 – 34
Change effective periodically, every 10 seconds

16.2.3.40 TEDS max number of reserved slots for MS (330)

This parameter defines the maximum number of reserved slots for one radio terminal on the QAM PDCH, that
is, how many reserved slots in uplink are in maximum allocated in one slot grant. The purpose is to guarantee
that one user is not able to receive all the capacity in the case that other users are requesting the resources
as well. In high load situations smaller amount of slots are allocated than what is indicated by this parameter.
Type changeable
Unit time slot
Default value 8 (= 10 slots)

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 345/466
 Legal values Value range: 1 – 16

1=1 slot
2=2 slots
3=3 slots
4=4 slots
5=5 slots
6=6 slots
7=8 slots
8=10 slots
9=13 slots
10=17 slots
11=24 slots
12=34 slots
13=51 slots
14=68 slots
15=68 slots
16=68 slots
Change effective periodically, every 10 seconds

Note
Airbus DS recommends that the small values 1 - 4 (1 - 4 slots) are not used because of the efficient use of
the channel resources.

16.2.3.41 Maximum transferring MSs in TEDS TTRX (331)

This parameter defines how many transmitting radio terminals are served on the uplink at the same time on
the QAM PDCH (i.e. among how many radio terminals the uplink slots are allocated). The purpose of this
parameter is to guarantee that the defined number of radio terminals will have uplink resources in a high load
situation and that their application timers will not likely expire during the high load period.
Type changeable
Default value 8
Legal values 6 – 15
Change effective periodically, every 10 seconds

16.2.3.42 Max served users in QAM PDCH (371)

This parameter defines the maximum number of users on one QAM PDCH.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 20
Legal values from 1 to 50 with the increment of 1
Related Radio subscriber parameter: TEDS: Ready Timer
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

346/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Recommendations

The value of this parameter is related to the behaviour of the data applications. If the data applications
use packet data capacity only moderately (light users), then a bigger number of concurrent users can be
allowed. If the data applications use packet data capacity heavily (heavy users), then a smaller number
of concurrent users should be allowed.

16.2.3.43 Terminal disable enable pending time (379)

Defines how many hours the TBS waits for the MS to register, before removing the terminal disabling/enabling
request.
Type changeable
Unit hours
Default value 8
Legal values from 0 to 720, with the increment of 1
Special values 0 = the terminal disabling/enabling request is immediately removed if the
MS is not registered
Related PM command group parameters:
parameters Terminal disable enable Sub-Protocol ID (380)
Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 01 – 10 (381–390)
Terminal disable enable in fallback (391)
Change effective after the DXT has sent the value to TBS (in 10 minutes)

Note
The parameter can be used if the system parameter Terminal disable enable in fallback (391) has been set
to value 1 (autonomous mode) and the interconnected network elements have the supporting software
installed (TETRA System Release 6.5 SCD3 or later).

Additional information

The parameter can also be configured locally in the TBS using WinMMI. If the parameter is set in the DXT,
then it overrides the existing value in the TBS.

16.2.3.44 Terminal disable enable Sub-Protocol ID (380)

Defines the SDS sub-protocol identifier for terminal disable/enable data messages.
Type changeable
Default value 64
Legal values from 0 to 254, with the increment of 1
Related PM command group parameters:
parameters Terminal disable enable pending time (379)
Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 01 – 10 (381–390)
Terminal disable enable in fallback (391)
Change effective after the DXT has sent the value to TBS (in 10 minutes)

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 347/466
Note

The parameter can be used if the system parameter Terminal disable enable in fallback (391) has been set
to value 1 (autonomous mode) and the interconnected network elements have the supporting software
installed (TETRA System Release 6.5 SCD3 or later).

Additional information

The parameter can also be configured locally in the TBS using WinMMI. If the parameter is set in the DXT,
then it overrides the existing value in the TBS.

16.2.3.45 Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 01 – 10 (381–390)

These 10 system parameters can be used to define up to 10 possible subscriber addresses authorized to set
terminal disable/enable for a TBS that is in a fallback state or standalone mode:

• Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 01 (381)

• Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 02 (382)

• Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 03 (383)

• Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 04 (384)

• Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 05 (385)

• Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 06 (386)

• Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 07 (387)

• Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 08 (388)

• Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 09 (389)

• Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 10 (390)

Type changeable
Default value 0 = not defined
Legal values from 0 to 9999999, with the increment of 1
Related PM command group parameters:
parameters Terminal disable enable pending time (379)
Terminal disable enable Sub-Protocol ID (380)
Terminal disable enable in fallback (391)
Change effective after the DXT has sent the value to TBS (in 10 minutes)

Note

These parameters can be used if the system parameter Terminal disable enable in fallback (391) has been
set to value 1 (Terminal disable/enable in fallback activated) and the interconnected network elements have
the supporting software installed (TETRA System Release 6.5 SCD3 or later).

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

348/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Additional information

The parameter can also be configured locally in the TBS using WinMMI. If the parameter is set in the DXT,
then it overrides the existing value in the TBS.

16.2.4 Numbering parameters (PM command group)

16.2.4.1 Tactilon ISSI (9)

This ISSI is used for identifying Tactilon® Management in some management operations.
Type changeable
Default value 16 000 000

Legal values from 16 000 000 to 16 000 100 with increment of 1

Change effective Immediately

16.2.4.2 FSSN prefix digit (34)

Specifies an FSSN number in charging data records

Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 3
Special values 255 (no prefix)
Legal values from 0 to 11 with the increment of 1
Change effective when cc refresh period expires. The parameter is valid for calls that
start after the parameter is read.

For additional information you can see documents Charging Services, DN00126554 and/or Charging
Services DXT — Billing Centre Interface Description, DN00126566.

16.2.4.3 MS-ISDN prefix digit (35)

Specifies MS-ISDN number in charging data records. The MS-ISDN prefix digit is the first digit in MS-ISDN
subscriber numbers.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 01
Legal values from 0 to 11, with the increment of 1
Special values 255 (no prefix)
Related System parameter NITSI prefix digit
parameters System parameter FSSN prefix digit
System parameter PABX prefix digit
System parameter PSTN prefix digit
Change effective when cc refresh period expires. The parameter is valid for calls that
start after the parameter is read.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 349/466
Additional information

The MS-ISDN prefix is the first digit in MS-ISDN subscriber numbers in call detail records (CDRs). It is added
in front of a MS-ISDN subscriber numbers in call detail records that are generated for charging purposes. The
prefix has one digit. The digits 0...9, *, # are represented with bytes 00...11. (10 means * and 11 means #)

16.2.4.4 NITSI prefix digit (36)

Specifies the first digit in NITSI subscriber numbers in call detail records (CDR). The prefix has one digit. This
prefix affects only the subscriber numbers in call detail records that are generated for charging purposes.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 2
Legal values digits from 0-11 with the increment of 1,
10 means * and 11 means #
value 255
Special values value 255 means no prefix
Related System parameter PSTN prefix digit
parameters System parameter PABX prefix digit
System parameter FSSN prefix digit
System parameter MS-ISDN prefix digit
Change effective when cc refresh period expires (for calls that start 0 - cc refresh period)

16.2.4.5 PABX prefix digit (37)

The PABX prefix specifies that an external number is a PABX subscriber number. The prefix has one digit.
This prefix has an effect only to the subscriber numbers in charging data. It is added in front of a PABX
subscriber numbers in call detail records that are generated for charging purposes.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 9
Legal values digits from 0-11 with the increment of 1, 10 means *, and 11 means #
value 255.
Special values value 255 means no prefix
Related System parameter PSTN prefix digit
parameters System parameter FSSN prefix digit
System parameter MS-ISDN prefix digit
Change effective when cc refresh period expires
for calls for which the parameter value is 0 — cc refresh period

16.2.4.6 PSTN prefix digit (38)

Specifies that an external number is a PSTN subscriber number. The prefix has one digit. This prefix has an
effect only to the subscriber numbers in charging data. It is added in front of a PSTN subscriber numbers in
call detail records that are generated for charging purposes.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

350/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values digits from 0 — 11 with the increment of 1, 10 means * and 11 means #
value 255.
Special values value 255 means no prefix
Related System parameter PABX prefix digit
parameters System parameter FSSN prefix digit
System parameter MS-ISDN prefix digit
Change effective when cc refresh period expires
for calls for which the parameter value is 0 — cc refresh period

16.2.4.7 FSSN base SSI (39)

Specifies the base SSI for Fleet Specific Short Numbers.

Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 15 000 000

Legal values from 1 to 16 777 214 with the increment of 1

Related System parameter FSSN prefix digit
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

When the DXT network is opened and SSI areas for different kinds of use are selected, it is not possible to
re-select them any more. This is because, for example, changing FSSN base SSI area means that all radio
terminals with FSSN SSI must be re-configured using the new FSSN SSI information. It is recommended that
default values are used because of overlap risk with a different SSI area. FSSN base SSI numbers reserve a
1 000 000-number area. The default range for these numbers is 15 000 000 - 15 999 999.

16.2.4.8 Num gateway SSI range higher limit (40)

Specifies the higher limit for the gateway SSI range.

Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 16 777 199
Legal values integers from 1000000 to 16 777 215
Related System parameter Num TCS SSI range lower limit
parameters System parameter Num external line range lower limit
System parameter Num gateway ssi range lower limit
System parameter Num system address lower limit
System parameter FSSN base SSI
System parameter Connection group parameter Gateway SSI
Change effective after the next call setup

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 351/466
Note

This address has to be in range specified for system addresses and it has to be higher than the lower limit
specified for the gateway range

Additional information

When a DXT network is opened and SSI areas for different kinds of use are selected, it is not possible to
reselect them any more. This is because, for example, a change in FSSN base SSI area means that all radio
terminals with FSSN SSI must be reconfigured using new FSSN SSI information.

Gateway TSI numbers reserve a 10 000-number area. The default range for these numbers is 16 767
000 - 16 776 999. This area is selected using the system parameters Num gateway SSI range lower limit
and Num gateway SSI range higher limit. These parameters define the minimum and maximum values
of that numbering area. Default values are recommended because then there is no overlap risk with a
different SSI area

Keywords: *numbering

16.2.4.9 Num gateway SSI range lower limit (41)

Specifies the lower limit for the gateway SSI range.

Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 16 767 000
Legal values integers from 1 000 000 to 16 777 215
Related System parameter Num TCS SSI range lower limit
parameters System parameter Num external line range lower limit
System parameter Num gateway ssi range higher limit
System parameter Num system address lower limit
System parameter FSSN base SSI
System parameter Connection group parameter Gateway SSI
Change effective after the next call setup

Note

This address has to be in range specified for system addresses and it has to be lower than the higher limit
specified for the gateway range.

Additional information

When a DXT network is opened and SSI areas for different kinds of use are selected, it is not possible to
reselect them any more. This is because, for example, a change in FSSN base SSI area means that all radio
terminals with FSSN SSI must be reconfigured using new FSSN SSI information.

Gateway TSI numbers reserve a 10 000-number area. The default range for these numbers is 16 767 000
- 16 776 999. This area is selected using the system parameters Num gateway SSI range lower limit and
Num gateway SSI range higher limit. These parameters define the minimum and maximum values of that

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

352/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
numbering area. Default values are recommended because then there is no overlap risk with a different SSI
area.

Keywords: *numbering

16.2.4.10 Num TCS SSI range lower limit (43)

Specifies the lower limit for the SSI range reserved for TCS.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 16 720 000
Legal values integers from 1 000 000 to 16 720 999
Related System parameter Num external line lower limit
parameters System parameter Num gateway ssi range higher limit
System parameter Num gateway ssi range lower limit
System parameter Num system address lower limit
System parameter FSSN base SSI
Change effective after the next call setup

Note

This address has to be in range allocated for system addresses.

Keywords: *numbering

Additional information

When a DXT network is opened and SSI areas for different kinds of use are selected, it is not possible to
reselect them any more. This is because, for example, a change in FSSN base SSI area means that all radio
terminals with FSSN SSI must be reconfigured using new FSSN SSI information.

TCS SSI reserves a 1 000-number area. The default range for these numbers is 16 720 000 - 16 720 999.
This area is selected using the system parameter Num TCS SSI range lower limit. The parameter defines
the lower limit of that numbering area. Default values are recommended because then there is no overlap
risk with a different SSI area.

16.2.4.11 Num external line range lower limit (44)

Specifies the lower limit for the SSI range reserved for external line addresses.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 16 200 000
Legal values integers from 1 000 000 to 16 712 000

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 353/466
 Related System parameter Num TCS SSI range lower limit
parameters System parameter Num gateway ssi range higher limit
System parameter Num gateway ssi range lower limit
System parameter Num system address lower limit
System parameter FSSN base SSI
Change effective after the next call setup

Note

This address has to be in range allocated for system addresses.

Keywords: *numbering

Additional information

When a DXT network is opened and SSI areas for different kinds of use are selected, it is not possible to
reselect them any more. This is because, for example, a change in FSSN base SSI area means that all radio
terminals with FSSN SSI must be reconfigured using new FSSN SSI information.

External line SSI numbers reserve a 512 000-number area (2 000 numbers for each DXT, maximum number of
DXTs is 256). The default range for these numbers is 16 200 000 - 16 711 999. This area is selected using the
system parameter Num external line range lower limit. The parameter defines the lower limit of that numbering
area. Default values are recommended because then there is no overlap risk with a different SSI area.

16.2.4.12 Num system address lower limit (45)

Specifies the lower limit for the SSI range reserved for system addresses.

The SSI addresses starting from 10 000 000 up to 16 777 215 are reserved for system usage and cannot be
used as radio subscriber, client application or group addresses.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 10 000 000
Legal values integers from 10 000 000 to 16 000 000
Related System parameter Num TCS SSI range lower limit
parameters System parameter Num external line range lower limit
System parameter Num gateway ssi range higher limit
System parameter Num gateway ssi range lower limit
System parameter FSSN base SSI
Change effective after the next call setup

Note

This address has to be lower than the lower limit specified for the gateway range.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

354/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Additional information

After SSI areas for different kinds of use have been agreed and configured, it is not possible to reselect them
any more. This is because, for example, a change in FSSN base SSI area means that all radio terminals
with FSSN SSI must be reconfigured using new FSSN SSI information.

Default values are recommended because then there is no overlap risk with a different SSI area.

Keywords: *numbering

16.2.4.13 Selected group ident (120)

Specifies the identifier for subscriber selected group.

Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 16 777 215
Legal values from 0 to 16 777 215 with the increment of 1
Related Organisation parameter Emergency target
parameters Radio subscriber parameter Emergency Target: TETRA Network
Change effective The parameter is read and thus taken into use in periods defined by the
system parameter cc parameter refresh period.

Recommendations

Selected group ident is a reserved number in the Airbus DS TETRA network numbering space, but it can also
be assigned from the subscriber number space.

Additional information

The selected group ident is used in emergency priority calls. When an emergency priority call is addressed to
a selected group ident, that emergency ident is fetched from the database. If it is equal to the logical address
given by the system parameter, the call is directed to that group. If the user has no selected group, the call
is redirected to a subscriber-specific emergency address, if this parameter is defined and valid, otherwise
to the organisation specific emergency target. It cannot be programmed into radio terminal because it is
not understood by the Airbus DS TETRA system. If the selected group ident is not defined properly in the
system, or the value could not be read from the database, the call will be redirected to the subscriber- or
organisation-specific emergency target. The called party is same as the selected group ident in case of
emergency calls initiated from RU (by pressing the emergency call button). This number cannot be dialled by
a subscriber but it can be assigned as a subscriber specific emergency target. Normal priority calls to the
selected group ident will be rejected. All users are allowed to initiate emergency calls using the selected
group ident if the organisation or subscriber specific target is defined so.

16.2.4.14 Number of voice mail system 01 (126)

The number of a voice mail system (part 1), needed to prevent call forwarding loops
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values from 0 to 0xFF FF FF FF (4294967295); with the increment of 1

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 355/466
 Related System parameter Number of voice mail system 02
parameters System parameter CFNR timer for MS subscribers
System parameter CFNRy timer for WS subscribers
System parameter Max number of call forwardings
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter is relevant to incoming external calls from an R2 signalling (FNIM) interface. It can be used
also with the ISDN interface, but there the diversion counter is used for loop prevention purposes. This
parameter stores maximum the first 8 digits of the Voice Mail System (VMS) number, in BCD–encoded
format. The first non-used digit shall be F. So the digits before the first F will be considered. The parameter
Number of voice mail system 02 stores the digits from digits number 9 and above, if the voice mail number is
longer than 8 digits. The unused digits shall be filled with F. If the VMS number is max. 8 digits long, it will fit
in the first parameter, so the value of the second parameter will be 0xFFFFFFFF.

Example:

Table 53 : LSD of mspid: values and their usage

VMS number Number of voice mail system Number of voice mail

01, parameter value system 02 parameter value
01234 0x01234FFF 0xFFFFFFFF
23423423456 0x23423423 0x456FFFFF

16.2.4.15 Number of voice mail system 02 (127)

The number of a voice mail system (part 2), needed to prevent call forwarding loops.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values from 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF (4294967295); with the increment of 1
Related System parameter CFNRy timer for MS subscribers
parameters System parameter SCNRy timer for WS subscribers
System parameter Max number of call forwardings
System parameter Number of voice mail system 02
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter is relevant to incoming external calls from an R2 signalling (FNIM) interface. It can be used
also with the ISDN interface, but there the diversion counter is used for loop prevention purposes. This
parameter stores the last digits of the Voice Mail System (VMS) number, in BCD–encoded format, starting
with the 9th digit, if the VMS number is at least 9 digits long. If the VMS number is max. 8 digits long, it will fit
in the first parameter, so the value of the second parameter will be 0xFFFFFFFF. The first non-used digit shall
be F. So the digits before the first F will be considered. The parameter Number of voice mail system 01 stores
the first maximum 8 digits from the VMS number.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

356/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 54 : LSD of mspid: values and their usage

VMS number Number of voice mail system Number of voice mail

01, parameter value system 02 parameter value
01234 0x01234FFF 0xFFFFFFFF
23423423456 0x23423423 0x456FFFFF

16.2.4.16 ASSI values system range – lower limit (175)

This parameter defines the smallest possible V-ASSI number in the system. The upper limit is given by the
parameter ASSI values system range - upper limit (176).
The system range is divided to separate ranges for each V-HLR. This is done with DXT parameters V-ASSI
value range – upper limit (66) and V-ASSI value range – lower limit (67). It is important that ranges of
different V-HLRs do not overlap.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Unit none
Default value 10 000 000
Legal values from 10 000 000 to 14 999 999; with the increment of 1
Related DXT parameters V-ASSI value range – upper limit (66) and V-ASSI
parameters value range – lower limit (67)
System parameters ASSI values system range - upper limit (176), FSSN
base SSI (39) and Num system address lower limit (45)
Change effective after time defined in the system parameter cc parameter refresh period
has elapsed (default 5 minutes).

Recommendations

The value of this parameter must be bigger or same as Num system address lower limit (45).
The value of this parameter must be smaller than ASSI values system range - upper limit (176).
The ASSI value range (10 000 000 - 14 999 999) is a recommendation from ETR 300-5.

16.2.4.17 ASSI values system range – upper limit (176)

This parameter defines the biggest possible V-ASSI number in the system. The lower limit is given by the
parameter ASSI values system range - lower limit (175).
The system range is divided to separate ranges for each V-HLR. This is done with DXT parameters V-ASSI
value range – upper limit (66) and V-ASSI value range – lower limit (67). It is important that ranges of
different V-HLRs do not overlap.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Unit none
Default value 14 999 999
Legal values from 10 000 000 to 14 999 999; with the increment of 1

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 357/466
 Related DXT parameters V-ASSI value range – upper limit (66) and V-ASSI
parameters value range – lower limit (67)
System parameters ASSI values system range - lower limit (175), FSSN
base SSI (39) and Num system address lower limit (45)
Change effective after time defined in the system parameter cc parameter refresh period
has elapsed (default 5 minutes).

Recommendations

The value of this parameter must be bigger than ASSI values system range - lower limit (175).
The value of this parameter must be smaller than FSSN base SSI (39).
The ASSI value range (10 000 000 - 14 999 999) is a recommendation from ETR 300-5.

16.2.4.18 MSISDN International prefix (177)

This parameter defines the prefix used in the system when the MSISDN number is in international format.
The MSISDN International prefix is a 0-4 digit long number. Each hexadecimal digit in the parameter value
means one digit in the prefix; the hexadecimal value F means an "empty" digit. No digits means no prefix
number. The allowed values for each digit are between 0 and 9.
Type changeable
Default value 00 (0xFF)
Legal values 1-4 digits (0-9)
Special values Examples:
0x0 (=0x0000) means "0000"
0xFFFF means empty number
0x1FFF means "1"
0x23FF means "23"
0x234F means "234"
0xFF(=0x00FF) means "00"
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period
has elapsed (default 5 minutes)

16.2.4.19 MSISDN Country Code (178)

This parameter is for future use.

16.2.4.20 MSISDN National prefix (179)

This parameter defines the prefix used in the system when the MSISDN number is in national format.
The MSISDN National prefix is a 0-4 digit long number. Each hexadecimal digit in the parameter value means
one digit in the prefix; the hexadecimal value F means an "empty" digit. No digits means no prefix number.
The allowed values for each digit are between 0 and 9.
Type changeable
Default value 0 (0x0FFF)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

358/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values 1-4 digits (0-9)
Special values Examples:
0x0 (=0x0000) means "0000"
0xFFFF means empty number
0x1FFF means "1"
0x23FF means "23"
0x234F means "234"
0x0FFF means "0"
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period
has elapsed (default 5 minutes)

16.2.4.21 SSI partitioned 01–10 MNI (301 – 310)

These parameters define the interconnected TETRA networks that share the same SSI numbering area.
The values (01-10) refer to the corresponding system parameters Allowed migrating 1–10 country code and
Allowed migrating 1–10 network code
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 – 10
Related system parameters Allowed migrating 1–10 country country code and
parameters Allowed migrating 1–10 network code
Change effective immediately

16.2.5 Authentication and encryption parameters (PM command group)

16.2.5.1 DXT with transit key database (8)

Specifies which DXT in the system is the one with the transit key database in SXDATA, needed in
authentication key management. That DXT is also known as DXTk.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 4294967295 (0xFFFFFFFF)
Legal values one of the existing DXT IDs in the system
Change effective changes in parameter value are checked every five minutes.

Additional information

This parameter must be defined and its value must be a system ID of some existing DXT in the network even
if authentication feature is not used in the network.

Note

System ID is a hexadecimal number. The parameter value can be given in a decimal or hexadecimal format.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 359/466
Note

Once defined, this parameter should not be changed if the transit key database is not empty.

16.2.5.2 Authentication and encryption (30)

Specifies whether authentication and encryption are off or on.

Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values 0 (authentication off, encryption off)
1 (authentication on, encryption off)
2 (authentication on, encryption on)
Related System parameter cc parameter refresh period
parameters System parameter Authentication situations
System parameter Allowed encryption method
Radio subscriber parameter Authentication required
Radio subscriber parameter Encryption method
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note

If authentication is turned off by this parameter, there is no proof for the authenticity of the subscribers
registering to the system. If authentication is turned on by this parameter and there are no SECMO plug-in
units available in the DXT, every authenticating registration of subscribers will fail (as a result, no subscriber
can access the system when turning power on).

Additional information

It is not possible to turn encryption on without authentication.

Those subscribers whose Authentication required parameter is true are authenticated when the following
are also true:

• either only authentication, or both authentication and encryption are turned on by this parameter, and

• the respective registration is in situations defined by the Authentication situations system parameter.

When encryption is turned on with this parameter, the subscribers whose Encryption method is TEAx will
start using encryption after the next registration.

16.2.5.3 Authentication situations (31)

Specifies in which situations to authenticate subscribers during registrations.

Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

360/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values 0 (minimum number of authentications)
1 (intermediate number of authentications
2 (maximum number of authentications)
Related System parameter cc parameter refresh period
parameters System parameter Authentication and encryption
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter can be used to adjust in what kind of registration situations the subscriber is authenticated.
Value 2 provides maximum security. A lower value can be chosen to reduce network load. For details see
document Authentication in the TETRA System, TRASYSAPP00003.

16.2.5.4 Default authentication data use count (87)

Gives the default number which determines how many times the authentication data is used for a certain
subscriber when a new subscriber is created.

This system parameter is used if radio-subscriber parameterAuthentication triplet usage times is not defined
during the creation of the subscriber account.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 100
Legal values From 1 to 1 000, with the increment of 1
Special values 1000 (always use the same authentication data)
Related Radio subscriber parameter Authentication triplet usage times
parameters Radio subscriber parameter Authentication triplet period of validity
System parameter Default authentication data validity period
System parameter Default authentication data validity period type
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Value 1 indicates that the authentication data is changed after every authentication, which creates maximum
system load. It is not recommended to use lower values than the default value 100, to delimit the system
load. If there is a special need to minimize the load, the specific value 1 000 can be used: this means that the
same authentication data will be used all the time. Regardless of the value of this parameter, NO successive
authentication will be identical. A different, locally generated random challenge is used in every authentication.

Additional information

Authentication data is the triplet (RS, KS, KS') which is different for every user.

16.2.5.5 CCK change demand broadcasts (102)

Specifies how many times Common Cipher Key (CCK) change demand is broadcast to air interface in
CCK change

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 361/466
 Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 2
Legal values from 1 to 10 with the increment of 1
Range from 1 to 10
Related System parameter CCK change start delay
parameters System parameter CCK change warning broadcast time
System parameter CCK change warning idle time
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

The CCK change sequence contains two parts: idle time and broadcast time. CCK change time is announced
to radio terminals during broadcast by broadcasting the CCK Change demand PDU through the air interface.
This parameter defines how many times the PDU is broadcast. The broadcast is repeated at intervals of
five minutes. If the broadcasts require more time than "broadcast time" period is set to, the amount of
broadcasts will be reduced automatically.

16.2.5.6 CCK change warning idle time (103)

Specifies the time period between the Common Cipher Key (CCK) change time delivery to TBS and first
CCK change demand broadcast to air interface.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 30 min
Legal values integers from 1 to 60 min; with the increment of 1 min
Related System parameter CCK change start delay
parameters System parameter CCK change demand broadcasts
System parameter CCK change warning broadcast time
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

The Common Cipher Key (CCK) change sequence contains two parts; idle time and broadcast time. This
parameter defines the time period between CCK change time delivery to TBS and first CCK Change demand
broadcast to air interface, the first part of the sequence. The time should be long enough to ensure that as
many radio terminals as possible can do the location update.

16.2.5.7 CCK change warning broadcast time (104)

Specifies the time period from first Common Cipher Key (CCK) change demand broadcast to actual CCK
change.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 30 min
Legal values integers from 1 to 60 min; with the increment of 1 min

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

362/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related System parameter CCK change start delay
parameters System parameter CCK change demand broadcasts
System parameter CCK change warning idle time
Change effective from the next call setup

Additional information

The Common Cipher Key (CCK) change sequence contains two parts; idle time and broadcast time. This
parameter defines the length of broadcast time, that is, time between the start of CCK change demand
broadcast and actual CCK change. CCK change demand broadcasts are done during this period.

16.2.5.8 CCK change start delay (105)

Specifies the time delay between the start of two Common Cipher Key (CCK) change sequences if change of
CCKs in all base stations of the DXT is requested.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 3 min
Legal values from 1 to 30 minutes with the increment of 1 min
Related System parameter CCK change demand broadcasts
parameters System parameter CCK change warning broadcast time
System parameter CCK change warning idle time
Change effective the parameter is read every time CCK change is requested for all
location areas in DXT

Additional information

If a change of the CCKs in all base stations of the DXT is requested, a separate change sequence is
started for each base station. Simultaneous starting of all sequences causes heavy loading of the DXT. It
is possible to reduce that load with this parameter. The parameter defines the time delay between the
previous and the new change sequence. If there are only a few base stations, the parameter value can be
higher. If there are many base stations, a higher value increases the total CCK–change time and too low
value increases the load on the DXT.

16.2.5.9 Allowed encryption method (119)

Specifies the allowed encryption methods in the network. The parameter contains the encryption methods
(TETRA algorithms) that are used in this system in individual and group calls.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 1 (only clear allowed)
Legal values from 1 to 13

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 363/466
 Special values 1 (only clear allowed)
2 (TEA1)
3 (clear + TEA1)
4 (TEA2)
5 (clear + TEA2)
6 (TEA1 + TEA2)
7 (clear + TEA1+TEA2)
8 (TEA3)
9 (clear + TEA3)
10 (TEA1 + TEA3)
11 (clear + TEA1 + TEA3)
12 (TEA2 + TEA3)
13 (clear + TEA2 + TEA3)
Related parameter System parameter Authentication and encryption
Change effective from the next call setup

16.2.5.10 DCK retrieval between DXTs (135)

Enables the DCK retrieval functionality in the DXT-DXT roaming. Set the parameter to value 1 only after the
whole network has been upgraded to TETRA System Release 7.0 SCD3, Release 6.5 SCD1 or Release
6.0 SCD3 (or newer).
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = key retrieval functionality disabled
1 = key retrieval functionality enabled
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

16.2.5.11 Default authentication data validity period (195)

Defines the period for default authentication–data validity.

This parameter is used together with system parameter 16.2.5.12 .

This system parameter is used if radio-subscriber parameter 4.2.7.4 is not defined during the creation of
the subscriber account.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 32, with the increment of 1
Related Radio-subscriber parameter Authentication triplet period of validity
parameters Radio-subscriber parameter Authentication triplet usage times
System parameter Default authentication data use count
System parameter Default authentication data validity period type
Change effective next authentication

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

364/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Recommendations

A short validity period creates maximum system load. It is not recommended to use lower values than the
default value 1 day (195 and 196 parameters) to delimit the system load. Regardless of the value of this
parameter, NO successive authentication will be identical. A different, locally generated random challenge is
used in every authentication.

Additional information

Authentication data is the triplet (RS, KS, KS') which is different for every user.

16.2.5.12 Default authentication data validity period type (196)

Defines the type of the default authentication data validity period.

This parameter is used together with system parameter Default authentication data validity period.

This system parameter is used if radio-subscriber parameterAuthentication triplet: Period of Validity is not
defined during the creation of the subscriber account.
Type changeable
Default value 2 = days
Legal values The values of the parameter interpreted to validity time type:
0 = once
1 = hours
2 = days
3 = weeks
4 = no limit
Related Radio subscriber parameter Authentication triplet: Period of Validity
parameters Radio subscriber parameter Authentication triplet usage times
System parameter Default authentication data use count
System parameter Default authentication data validity period
Change effective next authentication

Recommendations

A short validity period creates maximum system load. It is not recommended to use lower values than the
default value 1 day (195 and 196 parameters) to delimit the system load. Regardless of the value of this
parameter, NO successive authentication will be identical. A different, locally generated random challenge is
used in every authentication.

Additional information

Authentication data is the triplet (RS, KS, KS’) which is different for every user.

16.2.5.13 SCK AIE in TBS fallback modes (270 – 276)

Encryption can be used in fixed and enhanced fallback group calls. Air interface encryption (AIE) in fallback
is an optional feature.

Use of end-to-end encryption (E2EE) is possible in TBS2- and TB3 base stations.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 365/466
Static cipher key (SCK) is used in the air interface encryption (AIE) to produce security Class 2. SCK AIE
can be used only in TB3 base stations.

SCK AIE in TBS fallback enables air-interface–encrypted and/or end-to-end-encrypted group calls in two
kinds of situations:

• In the fallback situation, that is when the TBS has temporarily lost connection to the DXT.

• In a stand-alone base station, commissioned without ever having a connection to a DXT, for example in
a geographically remote area.

Each of the three fallback groups can be configured to operate in clear mode, or using air-interface encryption
or end-to-end encryption, or both.

SCK AIE parameters control the encryption in trunked fallback.

Note

Parameter SCK_SUPPORTED (commercial option) determines if SCK encryption is allowed to be used with
the TBS fallback functionality.

16.2.5.13.1 Fallback SCK number (270)

This parameter sets the SCK number (SCKN). Together with SCK-VN they identify the encryption key that is
used in fallback mode. If terminals are required to use air interface encryption, they have the same key. See
Authentication Key Distribution (AKD), Operational Guide for instructions on setting and changing the SCK.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 1..32 valid SCK numbers
Special values 0 = no key defined.
Related Fallback SCK version number
parameters Fallback security class
Fallback encryption method
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter has no meaning if the Fallback security class has value 0 (=Class 1).

16.2.5.13.2 Fallback SCK version number (271)

This parameter sets the SCK version number, SCK-VN.

Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 0 .. 65535

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

366/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related Fallback SCK number
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter has no meaning if the Fallback security class has value 0 (=Class 1).

16.2.5.13.3 Fallback encryption method (272)

This parameter defines the air interface encryption method in Enhanced TBS fallback mode.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 0 = clear
1 = TEA1
2 = TEA2
3 = TEA3
Related parameter Fallback security class
Fallback SCK number
Fallback SCK version number
TBS fallback GSSI 01 encryption
TBS fallback GSSI 02 encryption
TBS fallback GSSI 03 encryption
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

Value of this parameter is dependent on the Fallback security class parameter:

• if the Fallback security class has value 0 (=Class 1), then use value 0 = clear for this parameter.

• if the Fallback security class has value 1 (=Class 2) or value 2 (=Class 1 & Class 2), then use values 1,
2 or 3 (TEA1/TEA2/TEA3) for this parameter.

16.2.5.13.4 Fallback security class (273)

This parameter defines which security classes can be used during TBS fallback.
Type changeable, set by the operator
Default value 0 = Class 1
Legal values 0 = Class 1
1 = Class 2
2 = Class 1 & Class 2

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 367/466
 Related Fallback SCK number
parameters Fallback SCK version number
Fallback encryption method
TBS fallback GSSI 01 encryption
TBS fallback GSSI 02 encryption
TBS fallback GSSI 03 encryption
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional Information

Value 1 (=Class 2) and value 2 (=Class 1 & Class 2) are effective only if the commercial option SCK
ENCRYPTION is enabled.

Note
TBS2 does not support SCK AIE, it ignores security class settings and operates in security class 1, if this
is supported (for example, if the parameter is Class 1 or Class 1 & 2). Otherwise the TBS does not start
in fallback mode at all.

Note

The DXT checks the values of Fallback encryption method and Fallback SCK number (and the commercial
option) and prevents the use of Class 2 in TBS Fallback if there is a conflict

• Fallback encryption method has value 0 (= clear) or

• Fallback SCK number has value 0 (= no key defined)

16.2.5.13.5 TBS fallback GSSI 01 encryption (274)

This parameter sets the encryption type for TBS fallback GSSI 01. This parameter has no meaning if the TBS
fallback GSSI 01 parameter has value 0 (= Fallback GSSI 01 is not in use).
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = no encryption
1 = SCK encryption
2 = E2EE encryption
3 = both
Related TBS fallback GSSI 01
parameters Fallback security class
Fallback SCK number
Fallback SCK version number
Fallback encryption method
TBS fallback GSSI 02 encryption
TBS fallback GSSI 03 encryption
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

368/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Additional information

Value of this parameter is dependent on the Fallback security class parameter:

• if the Fallback security class has value 0 (=Class 1) then use either value 0 (= no encryption) or
value 2 (= E2EE encryption) for this parameter

• if the Fallback security class has value 1 (=Class 2), then use either value 1 (= SCK encryption)
or value 3 (= both) for this parameter

If there is a conflict, the system modifies the TBS fallback GSSI 01 encryption information sent to the TBS
to be in line with the other parameters.

16.2.5.13.6 TBS fallback GSSI 02 encryption (275)

This parameter sets the encryption type for TBS fallback GSSI 02. This parameter has no meaning if the TBS
fallback GSSI 02 parameter has value 0 (= Fallback GSSI 02 is not in use).
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = no encryption
1 = SCK encryption
2 = E2EE encryption
3 = both
Related TBS fallback GSSI 02
parameters Fallback security class
Fallback SCK number
Fallback SCK version number
Fallback encryption method
TBS fallback GSSI 01 encryption
TBS fallback GSSI 03 encryption
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

Value of this parameter is dependent on the Fallback security class parameter:

• if the Fallback security class has value 0 (=Class 1) then use either value 0 (= no encryption) or
value 2 (= E2EE encryption) for this parameter

• if the Fallback security class has value 1 (=Class 2), then use either value 1 (= SCK encryption)
or value 3 (= both) for this parameter

If there is a conflict, the system modifies the TBS fallback GSSI 02 encryption information sent to the TBS
to be in line with the other parameters.

16.2.5.13.7 TBS fallback GSSI 03 encryption (276)

This parameter sets the encryption type for TBS fallback GSSI 03. This parameter has no meaning if this
group is used as default emergency target, see parameter TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03
(113) or if the TBS fallback GSSI 03 parameter has value 0 (= Fallback GSSI 03 is not in use).

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 369/466
 Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = no encryption
1 = SCK encryption
2 = E2EE encryption
3 = both
Related TBS fallback GSSI 03
parameters Fallback security class
Fallback SCK number
Fallback SCK version number
Fallback encryption method
TBS fallback GSSI 01 encryption
TBS fallback GSSI 02 encryption
TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

Value of this parameter is dependent on the Fallback security class parameter:

• if the Fallback security class has value 0 (=Class 1) then use either value 0 (= no encryption) or
value 2 (= E2EE encryption) for this parameter
• if the Fallback security class has value 1 (=Class 2), then use either value 1 (= SCK encryption)
or value 3 (= both) for this parameter

If there is a conflict, the system modifies the TBS fallback GSSI 03 encryption information sent to the TBS
to be in line with the other parameters.

16.2.6 Call parameters (PM command group)

16.2.6.1 cc parameter refresh period (0)

Specifies how often the system checks certain system and DXT parameters whether they have been changed.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 5 min
Legal values integers from 1 to 1 440 min; with the increment of 1 min
Change effective maximum after the old value defined with this parameter

16.2.6.2 Individual call speech item max. time (3)

Specifies the maximum time for one speech item in an individual call in a semiduplex case.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit seconds
Default value 60
Legal values from 1 to 3 600 s; with the increment of 1 s

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

370/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related System parameter Refresh time for speech items
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Keywords:*timeouts

Additional information

This parameter does affect the duration of speech items in emergency calls.

16.2.6.3 Radio-units allowed to queue B-subscriber (10)

Specifies whether the radio subscribers are allowed to queue when calling other radio users. This parameter
concerns only individual calls.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0 (not allowed to queue)
Legal values 0 (not allowed to queue), 1 (allowed to queue)
Change effective after the next call setup

Additional information

Dispatchers who are making a call are always allowed to queue. PSTN and PABX subscribers who call
TETRA subscribers are not allowed to queue at all.

16.2.6.4 Refresh time for speech items (11)

Specifies how often the system resets the speech item timer in the radio terminals. This parameter allows to
exceed the time programmed to the radio terminals, typically the time defined in the TETRA standard, that is
300 seconds. Consequently, the maximum time for speech items can be defined:
• in individual calls with the system parameterIndividual call speech item maximum time.
• in group calls with group parameter Time limits: Speech item duration.

Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator

Unit seconds
Default value 270
Legal values from 1 to 300; with the increment of 1
Related Radio terminal parameter T311
parameters System parameter Individual call speech item maximum time
Group parameter Time limits: Speech item duration
Change effective from the next call setup after the period defined with the cc refresh
period parameter

Note
Setting should be a little shorter, for example 5 s, than the setting of the Airbus DS radio terminal parameter
T311. Do not use short times (for example, from 1 s to 30 s) since they cause unnecessary signalling load.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 371/466
Keywords: *timeouts

16.2.6.5 Keep requested simplex/duplex mode (32)

Specifies what happens when the calling–party device requests a certain duplex call mode but the
called–party device (a radio terminal or dispatcher) requests a different mode.
Type changeable
Default value 0 (calling party cannot keep the originally requested calling mode)
Legal values 0 (calling party cannot keep the originally requested calling mode) 1 (calling party
can keep the originally requested calling mode)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameters is effective with calls between TETRA radio subscribers and TETRA radio subscribers and
dispatchers. It is not effective between TETRA users and PSTN or PABX subscribers. The parameter is
not used in case of emergency calls. In emergency calls, the calling party can keep the requested mode.
Additionally, this parameter is effective only if the system supports duplex calls.

When one subscriber of an individual call uses duplex and the other semi-duplex mode, and they are not able
to use the same mode, the parameter has to be set to value Yes. This ensures that the call is connected
and both subscribers are able to keep their current mode in the call.

If the subscribers are able to switch their mode to use the same mode, it is possible to set the parameter to
value No. In this case the calling party should have radio subscriber attributes Allow duplex calls and Allow
semiduplex calls enabled. The call is connected and both subscribers can use the same mode in the call.

Table 55 describes how the call mode is determined in different cases.

Table 55 : Different selections for semiduplex/duplex mode in individual-call setup phase

Request of Rights of Parameter Called Rights Result

calling party calling party value: Keep party's of called
requested request to party
simplex/ change the
duplex mode mode
Semiduplex Semiduplex No Duplex * Calling party and
Duplex called party both
in Duplex
Semiduplex Semiduplex Yes Duplex * Calling party:
Duplex Semiduplex
Called party:
Duplex
Duplex Semiduplex No Semiduplex * Calling party and
Duplex called party both
in Semiduplex

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

372/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 55: Different selections for semiduplex/duplex mode in individual-call setup phase (cont'd.)

Request of Rights of Parameter Called Rights Result

calling party calling party value: Keep party's of called
requested request to party
simplex/ change the
duplex mode mode
Duplex Semiduplex Yes Semiduplex * Calling party:
Duplex Duplex
Called party:
Semiduplex
Semiduplex Semiduplex No Duplex * Rejected in alert
Semiduplex Semiduplex Yes Duplex * Calling party:
Semiduplex
Called party:
Duplex
Duplex Duplex No Semiduplex * Rejected in alert
Duplex Duplex Yes Semiduplex * Calling party:
Duplex
Called party:
Semiduplex
Semiduplex Semiduplex * Semiduplex * Calling party and
called party both
in Semiduplex
Duplex Duplex * Duplex * Calling party and
called party both
in Duplex
Semiduplex Duplex * * * Rejected in setup
Duplex Semiduplex * * * Rejected in setup

* = Any value, no influence on result.

If the duplex option is not enabled in the network, only semiduplex mode is possible, even when duplex is
requested.

Even if the duplex call option is disabled, connection to PABX/PSTN is functioning in duplex mode.

16.2.6.6 R2 signaling parameter (33)

Specifies the register and line signalling of TETRA FNIM external line interface. The parameter also has
effect on the country-specific tones of the ISDN PRA interface.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 358 (Finland)

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 373/466
 Legal values 358 (Finland)
10358 (Finland)
47 (Norway)
44 (United Kingdom)
33 (France)
32 (Belgium)
86 (China)
Change effective after the changing of this parameter the DXT database is updated in 30
seconds. New parameter set is created using MML commands (possible
existing parameters must be deleted first). After this the line is switched
back to on-line.

Note

The parameter should be checked and modified if necessary every time when a new parameter set is
created for an external line in TLIA.

Keywords: *PSTN, *PABX

16.2.6.7 Send Gateway SSI when CLIR is active (88)

Control parameter for incoming PSTN calls that specifies whether to send the gateway SSI to the called party
in case the calling party has CLIR service activated
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 0=False (F)
Legal values 0=False (F) and 1=True (T)
Special values Value F means that the gateway SSI will not be sent to the called party if
CLIR is activated for the calling party subscriber. Value T means that the
gateway SSI will be sent to the called party in case CLIR is activated for
the calling party subscriber.
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter only affects incoming PSTN/PABX calls. If the calling party subscriber has CLIR activated, the
Airbus DS TETRA system does not send any number to the called party by default.

Recommendations

Use value T in case mobile terminal needs the gateway SSI to activate DTMF tone sending for PSTN/PABX
calls.

16.2.6.8 MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via PSTN (107)

Specifies whether all MSISDN dialled (duplex) individual calls are to be routed via PSTN or not.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

374/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 0
Legal values Boolean type values 1 (=true) and 0 (=false)
Related PM command group parameter TSI analysis starting tree number
parameters PM command group parameter SSI analysis starting tree number
PM command group parameter ESN CUG analysis starting tree number
PM command group parameter ESN external line analysis starting tree
Change effective when cc refresh period expires. The parameter is valid for calls that
start after the parameter is read.

Additional information

If the parameter has the value True, all MSISDN dialled (duplex) calls are routed through a PSTN GW to
PSTN. If the parameter has value False, MSISDN dialled (duplex) individual calls to the Airbus DS TETRA
network subscriber are routed via MSISDN home, whereas MSISDN dialled (duplex) individual calls to
external subscriber are routed through a PSTN gateway to PSTN.

16.2.6.9 TBS speech item duration in fallback group 01 (111)

Specifies the maximal speech item duration in TETRA Base Station fallback group 1. In the Enhanced TBS
fallback mode the parameter is also used for controlling the speech item duration in individual calls and in
group calls in other groups than the predefined fixed groups, see Section 16.2.3.8.1 .
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Unit seconds
Default value 60
Legal values from 1 to 3600; with the increment of 1
Related System parameter TBS fallback GSSI 01
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter defines the longest time that a member is allowed to ceaselessly speak in TBS fallback
group 1.

Note

This parameter should be changed with care. Too short a time will unnecessarily cut the speech off and too
long a time will prevent other members of the group from speaking.

16.2.6.10 TBS speech item duration in fallback group 02 (112)

Specifies the maximal speech item duration in TETRA Base Station fallback group 2.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 375/466
 Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Unit seconds
Default value 60
Legal values from 1 to 3600; with the increment of 1
Related System parameter TBS fallback GSSI 02
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter defines the longest time that a member is allowed to ceaselessly speak in TBS fallback
group 2.
Note
This parameter should be changed with care. Too short a time will unnecessarily cut the speech off and too
long a time will prevent other members of the group from speaking.

16.2.6.11 TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03 (113)

Defines the maximum speech item duration in TETRA Base Station fallback group 3. In the Enhanced TBS
fallback mode the parameter is also used for controlling the maximum speech item duration and the maximum
inactivity time for emergency calls, and it also defines whether the fallback group 3, TBS fallback GSSI 03
(110), is used as the default emergency group (see Section 16.2.3.8.1 ).
In the Fixed TBS fallback mode the value as such defines the maximum speech item duration for TBS
fallback GSSI 03 (110).
In the Enhanced TBS fallback mode, the last digit of the value given to this parameter defines:
- the maximum inactivity time for emergency calls
- whether the TBS fallback GSSI 03 (110) is the default emergency group.
See the following table.

Table 56 : Last digit in the Enhanced TBS fallback mode

Last digit Max. inactivity TBS fallback GSSI 03

0 6s Default emergency group
1 30 s Default emergency group
2 60 s Default emergency group
3 120 s Default emergency group
4 300 s Default emergency group
5 6s Fixed group
6 30 s Fixed group

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

376/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 56: Last digit in the Enhanced TBS fallback mode (cont'd.)

Last digit Max. inactivity TBS fallback GSSI 03

7 60 s Fixed group
8 120 s Fixed group
9 300 s Fixed group

The value of the last digit is ignored for the max. speech item duration calculation, i.e. the 0…9 s variation is
not counted, but the value is rounded downwards to full 10 seconds. For values below 10 the max. speech
item duration of 5 seconds is applied.
If the last digit of this parameter defines that the parameter TBS fallback GSSI 03 (110) is used as the default
emergency group (digits 0-4), then parameter 110 must be defined. Otherwise calls to the emergency
address fail as the target is not defined.
If the value of the last digit is from 5 to 9, then there is no default emergency group. In this case TBS fallback
GSSI 03 (if defined) is used as a fixed group and only emergency group calls to the non-fixed groups are
supported.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Unit seconds
Default value 60 (In Enhanced TBS fallback mode this means: TBS fallback GSSI 03
is the default emergency group, max speech item for emergency calls =
60s, and emergency call max inactivity = 6s).
Legal values from 1 to 3600; with the increment of 1
Related System parameter TBS fallback GSSI 03
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter defines the longest time that a member is allowed to ceaselessly speak in TBS fallback
group 3.
In Enhanced TBS fallback mode for example:
- If you have the following conditions: TBS fallback GSSI 03 is a normal fixed group (or not defined), max
speech item for emergency calls (and TBS fallback GSSI 03) = 60s, emergency call max inactivity = 30s:
The result is: TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03 = 66
- If you have the following conditions: TBS fallback GSSI 03 is the default emergency group, max speech
item for emergency calls = 600s, emergency call max inactivity = 300s:
The result is: TBS speech item duration in fallback group 03 = 604
Note
This parameter should be changed with care. Too short a period will unnecessarily cut off the speech and too
long a period will prevent other members of the group from speaking.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 377/466
16.2.6.12 CFNRy timer for MS subscribers (123)

When the Call Forwarding on No Reply service is in use for a mobile subscriber, the call shall be forwarded if
the subscriber does not reply to the call setup request within the time given by this parameter.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Unit seconds
Default value 30
Legal values from 5 to 60; with the increment of 1
Range integers from 5 to 60
Related System parameter Number of voice mail system 01 & 02
parameters System parameter CFNRy timer for WS subscribers
System parameter Max number of call forwardings
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

16.2.6.13 CFNRy timer for WS subscribers (124)

When the Call Forwarding on No Reply service is in use for a workstation user, the call shall be forwarded if
the subscriber does not reply to the call setup request within the time given by this parameter.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Unit seconds
Default value 30
Legal values from 5 to 60; with the increment of 1
Range integers from 5 to 60
Related System parameter Number of voice mail system 01 & 02
parameters System parameter CFNRy timer for MS subscribers
System parameter Max number of call forwardings
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

16.2.6.14 Max number of call forwardings (125)

If the diversion counter received in setup from ISDN interface exceeds this value, the call shall not be
forwarded.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 1
Legal values from 0 to 5; with the increment of 1
(0=call forwarding disabled)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

378/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related System parameter CFNRy timer for MS subscribers
parameters System parameter CFNRy timer for workstation subscribers
System parameter Number of voice mail system 01 & 02
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter is relevant to incoming external calls from an ISDN signalling interface. In ISDN signalling
the setup signal contains a "diversion counter" field, which indicates how many times the call had been
forwarded before this signal was sent. The diversion counter can be used to prevent infinite loops of call
forwardings. When a setup request is received by the Airbus DS TETRA network, call control shall compare
the value of the diversion counter with the maximum given by this parameter, and if the diversion counter
exceeds the maximum, the call will not be forwarded.

16.2.6.15 Incoming PSTN/PABX calls forwarded (128)

Defines whether or not incoming PSTN/PABX calls can be forwarded back to PSTN/PABX.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0 (=false)
Legal values 1 (=true) and 0 (=false)
Related System parameter CFNRy timer for MS subscribers
parameters System parameter CFNRy timer for workstation subscribers
System parameter Max number of call forwardings
System parameter Number of voice mail system 01 & 02
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

16.2.6.16 Setup timeout in ISI calls (134)

Defines the maximum individual-call setup times in ISI individual calls.

Type changeable
Default value 7
Legal values 1 = 1 sec
2 = 2 sec
3 = 5 sec
4 = 10 sec
5 = 20 sec
6 = 30 sec
7 = 60 sec

Note

In case the other TETRA network is proposing different timeout values in ISI signalling, the higher value
is effective.

The values are specified in ETS 300 392 – 2 TETRA Air Interface 2. Edition.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 379/466
16.2.6.17 Individual call timeout in ISI calls (136)

Defines the maximum individual-call duration over the ISI.

Type changeable
Unit decimal numbers 0 – 14. See Legal values.
Default value 14
Legal values The numbers mean the following:
0 = infinite time
1 = 30 sec
2 = 45 sec
3 = 60 sec
4 = 2 min
5 = 3 min
6 = 4 min
7 = 5 min
8 = 6 min
9 = 8 min
10 = 10 min
11 = 12 min
12 = 15 min
13 = 20 min
14 = 30 min
Related System parameter Max allowed call forwarding
parameters

Note

In case the other TETRA network is proposing different timeout values in ISI signalling, the higher value
is effective.

This feature also uses system parameter Max allowed call forwarding.

The values are specified in ETS 300 392 – 2 TETRA Air Interface 2. Edition.

16.2.6.18 Max resource queuing time – type 1 handover (172)

Specifies the maximum time after which the call setup of an individual call is interrupted if there are not
enough resources for the calling or called party. The system parameterMax resource queuing time is also
used to queue resources for thecalling party in a group call. After this time, if there are no resources available,
the group call setup will be rejected. If the calling party resources are obtained within Max resource queuing
time, the other resources, if not obtained yet, are waited for using the group parameter Time limits: Call
setup time and the group call is started. However, if all the resources for the group call are obtained, the
group call is started immediately despite timer values.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

380/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 57 : Recommendations for using the parameters for group calls

System parameter Max Resource Group parameter Time limits: Call setup time
Queuing Time
– used in individual calls for calling and used for called subscribers (other than the call
called subscriber in all queuing initiating group members) in group calls
– used for calling subscriber (group call
initiating subscriber) in group call setup

Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator

Unit seconds
Default value 8
Legal values from 0 to 10, with the increment of 1
Related Group parameter Time limits: Call setup time
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

The parameter is used when queuing for traffic channel or speech time slot for DWS.

Keywords: *timeouts

16.2.6.19 Local routing for normal dispatcher call (180)

This parameter is for future use.

16.2.6.20 Tromboning prevention mechanism (182)

This parameter is for future use.

16.2.6.21 Duplex individual calls to dispatchers (293)

This parameter provides the duplex individual call to 3rd-party TCS Clients that are using DXT ET audio
interface. When a call setup is made or a call is received by a TCS Client, the System checks whether
that TCS Client is using the DXT ET audio interface and allows or, respectively, rejects duplex calls to
those dispatchers.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 0 = Disabled
Legal values 1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period has
elapsed (default 5 minutes)

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 381/466
16.2.6.22 Notification from busy called party (299)

Not in use.

16.2.6.23 Call waiting and call forwarding indication (364)

This parameter defines whether the call waiting and call forwarding indications are sent to the radio
subscribers. Call waiting indication is sent to the calling party if the called party is busy and call forwarding
indication is sent to both calling and forwarded-to parties.
Type changeable
Default value ON
Legal values ON, OFF
Related Organisation parameter Individual call service interaction
parameters
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period has
elapsed (default 5 minutes)

16.2.6.24 ISI group call inactivity timer (366)

Defines the maximum inactivity time in ISI group call in a participating TETRA network. If there is no speech
item activity from the controlling TETRA network for the time period defined by this parameter, then the ISI
group call is terminated by the participating TETRA network.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Unit minute
Default value 5
Legal values from 1 to 120; with the increment of 1
Change effective after the next group call setup

16.2.6.25 ISI late entry interval (367)

Defines the interval for sending late entry messages to a TETRA network which is not currently participating
an ongoing group call.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Unit second
Default value 5
Legal values from 0 to 15; with the increment of 1
Special values 0 = late entries are not sent
Change effective after the next group call setup

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

382/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.6.26 Max MS count in group call ToC (373)

Defines the maximum number of group call participants in group call ToC (TETRA originated call) CDR.
The parameter defines in steps of 100 subscribers how many group call participants can be shown in the
group call ToC CDR.
Type changeable
Default value 1
Legal values 1-100
The value is a multiplier for 100. E.g. value 50 means max. 50*100
= 5000 subscribers.
Change effective after the next group call setup

16.2.7 Emergency call parameters (PM command group)

16.2.7.1 Emergency ident (2)

Specifies the TETRA Subscriber Identifier that all the radio subscribers of the system can use to make an
emergency call. When a radio terminal sends a call setup to an emergency ident, the system uses the target
defined by the workstation users. The target is given with a subscriber- and/or organisation-specific attributes.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 16 777 214
Legal values from 10 000 000 to 16 777 214, with the increment of 1
Related Radio terminal parameter Emergency address
parameters Radio subscriber parameter Emergency Target
Organisation parameter Emergency Target
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

Change the value only if 16 777 214 is in conflict with some other use. Then use an SSI number from the
system range, that is SSIs above 10 000 000. Plan this number prior to configuring the radio terminals.

Note

Value of this parameter must be the same as of corresponding parameter in TETRA terminals.

Keywords: *emergency call

16.2.7.2 Who can release an emergency call (27)

Specifies whether the workstation users, or radio subscribers (last radio subscribers in emergency), or both
can release an emergency group call or an individual emergency call.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 383/466
 Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0 (both)
Legal values 0 (both), 1 (only the workstation user), and 2 (only last radio subscribers
in emergency)
Related radio terminal parameters
parameters
Change effective in individual emergency calls: when cc refresh period expires. In group
emergency calls: new call instances

CAUTION
Do not change the setting after programming the radio terminals. The setting in the radio terminals must
correspond to the setting in the system.

Individual emergency call

The radio subscriber can always terminate the call regardless of the value of this parameter. The parameter
affects only the right of the DWS to disconnect the call.

If the value of this parameter is set to 2, the dispatcher can release the call only by pressing CTRL or SHIFT +
HOOK/OFF button on the Airbus DS TETRA Dispatcher Workstation application Individual Call dialogue. If
the value is set to 0 or 1, the dispatcher can release the call by clicking the HOOK/OFF button.

Group emergency call

If the value is set to 0, the radio subscriber who has initiated the emergency call can always release it.
The call is not released, however, if there are other emergency subscribers on the same group call. The
dispatcher can release the emergency call using the menu command Remove Emergency State.

If the value is set to 1 the radio subscriber who has initiated the emergency call cannot release it. The
dispatcher can release the emergency call using the menu command Remove Emergency State.

If the value is set to 2, the radio subscriber who has initiated the emergency call can always release it. The
dispatcher can request the emergency call to be released by using the menu command Remove Emergency
State.

Additional information:

Emergency group call can also be disconnected by separately authorized radio subscriber, independently of
Who can release an emergency call parameter by using the special value 20 of the speech item priority, see
Sections 4.2.5.2 and 14.6.29 .

16.2.7.3 Emergency number 01–10 (42, 46, 89 – 96)

Table 58 : Parameters: Emergency number 01–10

Parameter name ID
Emergency number 01 42
Emergency number 02 46

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

384/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Table 58: Parameters: Emergency number 01–10 (cont'd.)

Parameter name ID
Emergency number 03 89
Emergency number 04 90
Emergency number 05 91
Emergency number 06 92
Emergency number 07 93
Emergency number 08 94
Emergency number 09 95
Emergency number 10 96

Specifies a network-specific emergency number. Calls to the emergency numbers are routed to the
cell-specific emergency centres (for example, the nearest police unit in the PSTN). The called number is
replaced with the DWS-specific connect to number if the calling party is a DWS, and it is handled according to
the parameter emergency number handling mode if the calling party is a radio subscriber.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 4 294 967 295
Legal values from 0 to 4 294 967 295 with the increment of 1
Special values The parameter is stored in BCD format and its value must be converted
into decimal numbers. See example below.
Related System parameter Emergency number 01–10
parameters System parameter Emergency number handling mode
PM command group parameter TCS client emergency target length
PM command group parameter TCS client emergency target, digits 1–8
PM command group parameter TCS client emergency target, digits 9–16
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note
The parameter is an 8 digit subscriber number, representing an emergency number, stored in BCD format.
The first unused digit is F, e.g. number 112 would be presented as 112FFFFF. Hexadecimal numbers must be
converted into decimal numbers.

Example

Write down the number: 112.

Fill the number up to 8 digits with “F” 112FFFFF.
Use this number as a hexadecimal number.
Convert the digits to decimal number 288 358 399.
Insert this value into the “emergency number 1” field.
Keywords: *emergency call

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 385/466
16.2.7.4 Emergency number handling mode (97)

Specifies whether the cell-specific number will be used as it is, or if the call-specific number will be appended
to the dialled emergency number.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 0
Legal values 0 and 1
Special values The value 0 means that in cell of origin emergency calls the cell specific
number will be the called external number. The value 1 means that in
cell of origin emergency calls the called external number will be obtained
by appending the cell specific number to the originally dialled emergency
number.
Related System parameter Emergency number 1– 10
parameters Radio network parameter Connect to number
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note

This parameter concerns only radio subscribers.

16.2.7.5 Local routing for emg priority dispatcher call (181)

Parameter Local routing for emergency priority dispatcher call (181) is for future use.

16.2.7.6 Emg calls allowed during temporary disable (194)

Specifies whether temporarily disabled subscribers are allowed to make/receive emergency calls (both
individual and group calls).

Disabling also impacts on-going calls.

Type changeable
Default value 1=True
Legal values 0=False
1=True

Additional information

Temporarily disabled subscribers cannot make or receive normal voice calls or start group calls. They cannot
either send or receive packet data, or status/short messages. This parameter specifies whether emergency
calls (individual and group calls) are allowed during temporary disable. If emergency calls are not allowed,
then also the on-going calls are interrupted when temporary disable takes place.

However, emergency calls are not possible when terminal is disabled over the air.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

386/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.7.7 Max alert time in emergency calls (268)

Specifies how long one emergency target is alerted before the emergency call is routed to the next
emergency target.
Type changeable
Unit seconds
Default value 20
Legal values from 5 to 60; with the increment of 1
Range integers from 5 to 60
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Additional information

This parameter is valid only for individual emergency calls and individual emergency calls to group
dispatchers.

16.2.7.8 Emergency group call area (295)

If an emergency group-call setup is made outside the group area, two possible operations can be done:

• The area can be expanded to cover the calling-party site and then the group call is made (value F).

• The area is not expanded, so the next emergency target is fetched (the closest emergency center or
control room) and the emergency call is targeted there (value T).

Type changeable with a warning flag

Default value F = expanded
Legal values F = expanded (0 = area is enlarged)
T = not expanded (1 = the defined group area is used)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

16.2.7.9 Clear emergency call in always E2EE group (298)

Controls clear emergency call for groups where the Encryption Mode parameter is set to Always End to
End Encrypted.

• If the parameter value is Off, the clear emergency call is rejected due to the Encryption Mode parameter
value Always End to End Encrypted.

• If the parameter value is On, the Encryption Mode parameter value Always End to End Encrypted is
ignored and hence clear emergency call is accepted.

Type changeable
Default value 0 = Off
Legal values 1 = On
0 = Off

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 387/466
 Related Group parameter Encryption Mode
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

16.2.7.10 Emergency call pre-emption in fallback (369)

Defines whether emergency call pre-emption in fallback is allowed or not.

With this parameter emergency calls can be controlled by radio users also during fallback.

• If this parameter is set (1), another radio user may pre-empt a speech item of the emergency call
initiator and s/he may also disconnect the emergency call completely.

• If this parameter is not set (0), the speech item of the emergency call initiator cannot be pre-empted
(s/he might be transmitting up to 24h) and the emergency call continues until the call owner disconnects
it or until the there is an inactivity in the call for 5 minutes. (24h and 5 minutes are the maximum values
for the parameters controlling emergency call durations).

Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = Emergency call pre-emption in fallback not allowed
1 = Emergency call pre-emption in fallback allowed
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

16.2.8 IP packet data parameters (PM command group)

16.2.8.1 Pd - maximum length of tl-sdu (7)

Defines the length of a tl-sdu (service data unit) at maximum on the advanced link.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 6= 2048 octets
Legal values from 0 to 7
0= 32 octets
1= 64 octets
2= 128 octets
3= 256 octets
4= 512 octets
5= 1024 octets
6= 2048 octets
7= 4096 octets
Note: The packet data TIP allows only value 6 to be used for
interoperability reasons.
Related System parameter Pd - maximum transmission units
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

388/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.8.2 Pd - partial record interval (28)

Specifies the regular intervals at which Call Detail Records (CDRs) are generated for Packet Data transfer.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Unit minutes
Default value 30
Legal values from 0 (no CDR generation) to 2880 (two days), with the increment of 1
Change effective from the next packet data transfer

Note

The system allows entering values up to 65535, but values higher than 2880 are meaningless so they
must not be used.

Recommendations

A small interval will result to larger number of Call Detail Record generated.

16.2.8.3 Network delay (47)

Specifies the maximum time a DXT is allowed to wait while acquiring an IP address, or performing other IP
address related operations, from another DXT in the Airbus DS TETRA network.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit 10 ms
Default value 500
Legal values from 50 to 3 000 with the increment of 1
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period has
elapsed (default 5 minutes). The parameter is valid for packet data
transfer that starts after the parameter is read.

16.2.8.4 Routing period (48)

Specifies the lifetime of the routing entry. A routing entry is created when the DXT is asked to locate an
IP address that it has no record of, it determines the current location of the IP address and stores it in
the routing table. The DXT keeps the routing entry in the routing table for the length of time determined
by the routing period.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit minutes
Default value 40
Legal values from 3 to 254, with the increment of 1
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period has elapsed
(default 5 minutes)

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 389/466
16.2.8.5 Aip time interval (49)

Specifies the interval at which IP addresses stored in the DXT are checked to see if their lease period
has expired.
Type Changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit 10 ms
Default value 360 000
Legal values from 180 000 to 720 000, with the increment of 1
Range from 180 000 to 720 000
Related System parameter Lease period
parameters
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period
has elapsed (default 5 minutes)

16.2.8.6 Lease period (50)

Specifies the length of time an IP address is leased for. When the lease period has expired for a particular
address, the DXT will check that the IP address is still in use. If it is in use, the lease will be renewed.
Otherwise the address will be returned to the address pool. The lease period is set in time units where one
time unit is equal to the Aip time interval. An IP address is leased for a period equal to: Aip time interval x
lease period. For example, if the Aip time interval is set one hour and lease period is set 24, IP address will
be leased for 24 hours.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Unit multiples of Aip time interval
Default value 12
Legal values from 5 to 254; with the increment of 1
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period
has elapsed (default 5 minutes)

16.2.8.7 Source routing (51)

The source routing parameter specifies whether the IP source routing algorithm is used inside the Airbus
DS TETRA system. If the source routing is on, IP datagrams from a radio terminal are routed to external IP
network (intranet or Internet) through the DXT where its source IP address was allocated from. If the source
routing is off, the IP datagrams are sent to the default gateway of the current radio terminal location DXT.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0 = F (source routing is off)
Legal values 0 = F (source routing is off), 1 = T (source routing is on)
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period has elapsed
(default 5 minutes)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

390/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Recommendations

To minimise IP traffic between DXTs, source routing should be set off. Use source routing only if required by
the IP backbone network where the DXTs are connected to.

16.2.8.8 Pd - maximum transmission units (52)

Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU), that is, the maximum size of an IP datagram, that can be
sent through the Airbus DS TETRA system without IP fragmentation to uplink.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 2
Legal values from 1 to 5
1= 296 octets
2= 576 octets
3=1006 octets
4= 1500 octets
5= 2002 octets
Note: The packet data TIP allows only value 4 (=1500) to be used for
interoperability reasons.
Change effective immediately
Related System parameter Pd - maximum length of tl-sdu
parameters
Change effective immediately

16.2.8.9 Pd - response_wait timer (53)

Specifies how long a radio terminal waits for a response to its data transmission request.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 5
Legal values from 0 to 14
Special values 0 = 400 ms
1 = 600 ms
2 = 800 ms
3 = 1 sec.
4 = 2 sec.
5 = 3 sec.
6 = 4 sec.
7 = 5 sec.
8 =10 sec.
9 = 15 sec.
10 = 20 sec.
11 = 30 sec.
12 = 40 sec.
13 =50 sec.
14 = 60 sec.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 391/466
 Change effective immediately

Additional information

This parameter defines the timeout for the radio terminal to wait for a response from the DXT to IP packet
data transfer request. If the DXT does not have free radio channels within this time on phase-modulated
packet data or if the QAM packet data channel is overloaded (too many users), the data transmission request
will be rejected.

16.2.8.10 Pd - standby timer (54)

Specifies how long a radio terminal and the Airbus DS TETRA network remain in standby state.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 11
Legal values from 1 to 15, with the increment of 1
1 = 10 sec.
2 = 30 sec.
3 = 1 min
4 = 5 min
5 = 10 min
6 = 30 min
7 = 1 hour
8 = 2 hours
9 = 3 hours
10 = 6 hours
11 = 12 hours
12 =24 hours
13 = 48 hours
14 = 72 hours
15 = forever (Standby timer is not started)
Recommended 4 = 5 min
values 5 = 10 min
6 = 30 min
10 = 6 hours
11 = 12 hours (default)
12 = 24 hours
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Standby timer is restarted every time a packet data transfer on packet data channel takes place. When the
standby timer expires, the packet data context and IP address are released.

The recommended values are agreed in TIP. Other values may not be supported by terminal manufacturers.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

392/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.8.11 Pd - ready timer (55)

Defines the maximum time how long the radio terminal stays on the phase-modulated PDCH after the active
packet data transfer. The ready timer controls the time between two IP packets' sending or receiving, and if
the maximum waiting time is exceeded, the channel is released.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Unit decimal numbers which represent certain time units, see Legal values
in this table
Default value 8 = 10 seconds
Legal values decimal numbers from 1 to 14, with the increment of 1
1 = 200 ms
2 = 500 ms
3 = 700 ms
4 = 1 sec.
5 = 2 sec.
6 = 3 sec.
7 = 5 sec.
8 = 10 sec.
9 = 20 sec.
10 = 30 sec.
11 = 60 sec.
12 = 120 sec.
13 = 180 sec.
14 = 300 sec.
Recommended 1 = minimum
values 14 = maximum
8 = default
Related System parameter Pd - inactivity timer (122)
parameters
Change effective immediately

Additional information

The Pd - ready timer controls how long the radio terminal stays on PDCH without active packet data transfer.
The Pd - ready timer is started when there is no datagram to be sent and after the datagram sending.
The timer is cancelled when the next datagram sending is started. If the transmission delay between two
datagrams exceeds the Pd - ready timer value, the packet data instance is ended and the radio terminal is
moved to the MCCH or common SCCH. See also Pd - inactivity timer.

Note

The value of the Pd - inactivity timer is sent to the terminals in the PDP context activation.

Note

On the TEDS side, the subscriber specific TEDS: Ready Timer parameter is used. See Section 4.2.6.12 .

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 393/466
16.2.8.12 Pd - data transfer throughput (56)

Defines the requested mean value for data transfer throughput on the phase-modulated PDCH.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 7
Legal values from 0 to 7, with the increment of 1
Special values 0= network dependent minimum
1= 1/32 of maximum
2= 1/16 of maximum
3= 1/8 of maximum
4= 1/4 of maximum
5= 1/2 of maximum
6= reserved
7= maximum
Change effective immediately

Additional information

DXT and radio terminal negotiate the used value in the packet data context setup. Value 7 (only currently used
value) means that the whole capacity of the allocated packet data channel is reserved for one radio terminal.

16.2.8.13 Pd - number of timeslots (57)

Defines the number of timeslots used in packet data transfer on the phase-modulated PDCH.
Default value 0 = 1 timeslot
Legal values 0 = 1 timeslot
Change effective immediately

Additional information

On QAM PDCH 4 timeslots are always used.

16.2.8.14 Pd - number of segment retransmissions (58)

Defines how many times an incorrectly received IP datagram segment is retransmitted over the radio path on
the phase-modulated PDCH.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 2
Legal values from 0 to 15, with the increment of 1
Change effective immediately

Note
Increasing this parameter value will reduce packet loss in poor radio coverage conditions.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

394/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note
On QAM PDCH a separate parameter is used:TEDS - Allowed segment retransmission (315). See Section
16.2.3.25 .

Additional information

TL-SDU is split into 256 bits long advance link segments and transferred over the air. This parameter defines
how many times each segment will be tried to transfer over the air.
DXT and radio terminal negotiate the used value in the packet data context setup. The lower value of DXT
and radio terminal proposals is used in the PD context.
In addition to segment transmission, the whole TL-SDU is retransmitted if the check sum calculated over the
tl-sdu differs from the check sum carried by the tl-sdu.

16.2.8.15 Pd - allowed number of tl-sdu retransmission (59)

Defines the number of tl-sdu (service data unit) retransmission allowed before LLC gives up.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 1
Legal values from 0 to 7, with the increment of 1
Recommended 0= minimum
values 7= maximum
1= default
Change effective immediately

Note
On QAM PDCH a separate parameter is used:TEDS - Allowed tl-sdu retransmission (314). See Section
16.2.3.24 .

16.2.8.16 Pd - tl-sdu window size (60)

Defines the number of tl-sdus that can be transmitted between TBS and radio terminal before an
acknowledgement is requested.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 1
Legal values from 1 to 3, with the increment of 1
Change effective from the next call setup

Note
Only the value 1 is supported.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 395/466
Note

On QAM PDCH separate parameters are used:TEDS - TL-SDU win size in original AL (317) and TEDS -
TL-SDU win size in extended AL (318). See Sections 16.2.3.27 and 16.2.3.28 .

16.2.8.17 Pd - inactivity timer (122)

On phase-modulated PDCH, the Airbus DS TETRA system uses Pd - inactivity timer to control how long the
radio terminal stays on the packet data channel (PDCH) without active packet data transfer. The inactivity
timer controls the time between two segments within the IP packet transferring and if the maximum waiting
time is exceeded, also then the channel is released.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical
operator
Default value 6 = 3 sec.
Legal values from 1 to 20, with the increment of 1
1 = 0.5 sec.
2 = 1 sec.
3 = 1.5 sec.
4 = 2 sec.
5 = 2.5 sec.
6 = 3 sec.
7 = 3.5 sec.
8 = 4 sec.
9 = 4.5 sec.
10 = 5 sec.
11 = 5.5 sec.
12 = 6 sec.
13 = 6.5 sec.
14 = 7 sec.
15 = 7.5 sec.
16 = 8 sec.
17 = 8.5 sec.
18 = 9 sec.
19 = 9.5 sec.
20 = 10 sec.
Related System parameter Pd - ready timer (55)
parameters
Change effective immediately

Additional information

The Pd - inactivity timer is used to control inactivity while the datagram transmission is ongoing in the air
interface. The Pd - inactivity timer is started at the beginning of a datagram transmission and cancelled after
the datagram has been sent. At each sent/received segment of an IP datagram the timer is again restarted. If
the transmission delay between two segments exceeds the Pd - inactivity timer value, the packet data
instance is ended and the radio terminal is moved to the MCCH or common SCCH. See also Pd - ready timer.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

396/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Note
The value of the Pd - inactivity timer is sent to the terminals in the PDP context activation.

Note
On the TEDS side, the subscriber specific TEDS: Ready Timer parameter is used (instead of the Pd -
inactivity timer and Pd - ready timer). See Section 4.2.6.12 .

16.2.8.18 Pd - maximum limit for suspended data (188)

Determines how many times the Airbus DS TETRA network retries to continue the suspended packet data
transmission.
Type changeable
Default value 3
Legal values from 0 to 12; with the increment of 1
Change effective at intervals defined with the cc refresh period

Additional information

When packet data transmission is in the suspended state, the Airbus DS TETRA network starts to poll the
subscriber on MCCH (Main Control Channel) and/or SCCH (Secondary Control Channel) for getting new
packet data transmission. The Airbus DS TETRA network retries to continue packet data transmission until
the maximum limit for suspended data is exceeded (0-12 times).

16.2.8.19 PD - Access mode (370)

Determines the packet data access mode, i.e. whether or not the TEDS service is activated. Value 0 means
that the TEDS service is de-activated, 1 means that the service is activated. For activating the TEDS service,
follow the instructions in the document Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = TETRA 1
1 = TEDS CA (Conventional Access mode)
Change effective updated to the system at intervals of 10 minutes

16.2.9 Status and SDS parameters (PM command group)

16.2.9.1 Status messages callback request (13)

Specifies a status value (a 16-bits integer) that is used to transmit a callback request.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 65 279

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 397/466
 Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range
Related parameters DWS and radio terminal parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Note
Change the value only if 65 279 is in conflict with some other use. Plan status messages prior to programming
them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.

Additional information

A radio subscriber or a dispatcher can send a callback request telling that the recipient should call back. The
message contains the identity of the sender. When a callback request is sent to a group and one dispatcher
answers it, the system informs the other dispatchers about this.
CAUTION
Do not change the setting after programming the radio terminals.

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.2 Status messages entry request (14)

Parameter for future use.

Specifies a status value that is used to transmit an entry request.

16.2.9.3 Status messages general ack status l1 (15)

Full name of the parameter: “Status messages general acknowledged status l1”.
Specifies lower value for the range 1 of status messages of which the system will send general
acknowledgement to the sender. The Airbus DS TETRA system includes two ranges of status messages
to which the general status acknowledgement will be sent. An example where bold italics font indicates
setting given with this parameter:
• Range 1 is from 36 864 to 40 959.
• Range 2 is from 57 344 to 61 439.

Type changeable with a warning flag

Default value 36864
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range
Related parameters System parameter Status messages general status acknowledgement
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status l2
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status u1
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status u2
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

398/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Recommendations

Plan the ranges prior to programming them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.
Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.4 Status messages general ack status l2 (16)

Full name of the parameter: “Status messages general acknowledged status l2”.
Specifies lower value for the range 2 of status messages of which the system will send general
acknowledgement to the sender. The Airbus DS TETRA system includes two ranges of status messages
to which the general status acknowledgement will be sent. An example where bold italics font indicates
setting given with this parameter:
• Range 1 is from 36 864 to 40 959.
• Range 2 is from 57 344 to 61 439.

Type changeable with a warning flag

Default value 57 344
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range
Related parameters System parameter Status messages general status acknowledgement
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status l1
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status u1
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status u2
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Plan the ranges prior to programming them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.
Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.5 Status messages general ack status u1 (17)

Full name of the parameter: “Status messages general acknowledged status u1”.
Specifies upper value for the range 1 of status messages of which the system will send general
acknowledgement to the sender. The Airbus DS TETRA system includes two ranges of status messages
to which the general status acknowledgement will be sent.An example where bold italics font indicates
setting given with this parameter:
• Range 1 is from 36 864 to 40 959.
• Range 2 is from 57 344 to 61 439.

Type changeable with a warning flag

Default value 40 959
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 399/466
 Related parameters System parameterStatus messages general status acknowledgement
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status u2
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status l1
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status l2
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Plan the ranges prior to programming them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.6 Status messages general ack status u2 (18)

Full name of the parameter: “Status messages general acknowledged status u2”.

Specifies upper value for the range 2 of status messages of which the system will send general
acknowledgement to the sender. The Airbus DS TETRA system includes two ranges of status messages
to which the general status acknowledgement will be sent. An example where bold italics font indicates
setting given with this parameter:

• Range 1 is from 36 864 to 40 959.

• Range 2 is from 57 344 to 61 439.

Type changeable with a warning flag

Default value 61 439
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range
Related parameters System parameter Status messages general status acknowledgement
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status l1
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status l2
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status u1
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Plan the ranges prior to programming them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.7 Status messages general status acknowledgement (19)

Specifies a status value that is used as an acknowledgement. The sender gets this acknowledgement when
their status message has been successfully delivered.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 65 024
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

400/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related parameters System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status l1
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status l2
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status u1
System parameter Status messages general acknowledged status u2
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Plan the ranges prior to programming them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.
CAUTION
Do not change the setting after programming the radio terminals.

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.8 Status messages scanning off (20)

Specifies a status value that is used to transmit scanning off information from the radio terminals to the
system.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 65 272
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range
Related parameters DWS and radio terminal parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Plan the status messages prior to programming them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.
CAUTION
Do not change the setting after programming the radio terminals.

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.9 Status messages scanning on (21)

Specifies a status value that is used to transmit scanning on information from the radio terminals to the
system.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 65 273
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range
Related parameters DWS and radio terminal parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 401/466
Recommendations

Plan the status messages prior to programming them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.

CAUTION
Do not change the setting after programming the radio terminals.

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.10 Status messages status indicator l (22)

Specifies lower integer for the range of status indicators. The meanings of the messages are programmed to
the radio terminals and the DWS.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 64 000
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range
Related parameters DWS and radio terminal parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Plan the ranges prior to programming them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.11 Status messages status indicator u (24)

Specifies upper integer for the range of status indicators. The meanings of the messages are programmed to
the radio terminals and the DWS.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 64 255
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range
Related parameters DWS and radio terminal parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Plan the ranges prior to programming them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.12 Status SDS messages status indicator type (23)

For future use.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

402/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.9.13 Status messages urgent request (25)

Specifies a status value that is used to transmit an urgent request.

Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 65 276
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status message or any
other status message range
Related parameters DWS and radio terminal parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

Recommendations

Plan the status messages prior to programming them to the system, radio terminals and DWS.
CAUTION
Do not change the setting after programming the radio terminals.

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.14 Priority for status messages (116)

Specifies the priority among PDUs within the same basic priority.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values low = 0
medium = 1
high = 2
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period has elapsed
(default 5 minutes)

Note

The system also allows entering values 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 but values higher than 2 are meaningless so they
must not be used.

Additional information

This parameter determines the downlink priority for status messages set by the user. It works with the
basic priority in the PDU, and allows status and SDS messages to be allocated downlink preferences over
each other so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. The mutual preferences to
other services are arranged with this new Priority level. It also informs the base station how to arrange the
received PDU's in the queue in an overload situation. The Priority level is common for each PDU within a
service. The following table shows the principle of the level arrangement between services. The values
of the priorities are examples.

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 403/466
Table 59 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Packet data medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

16.2.9.15 Priority for SDS 4 messages (117)

Specifies the priority between PDUs within the same basic priority.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values low = 0
medium = 1
high = 2
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period has elapsed
(default 5 minutes)

Note

The system also allows entering values 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 but values higher than 2 are meaningless so they
must not be used.

Note

If SDS4 sending profiles are in use (see Section 16.2.9.30 ) this parameter has no effect.

Additional information

This parameter determines the downlink priority for SDS 4 (and SDS-TL) messages set by the user. It
works with the basic priority in the PDU, and allows downlink preferences to be allocated to status and SDS
messages with regards to each other so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. The
mutual preferences to other services are arranged with this new Priority level. It also informs the base station
how to arrange the received PDU's in the queue in an overload situation. The Priority level is common for
each PDU within a service. The following table shows the principle of the level arrangement among services.
The values of the priorities are examples.

Table 60 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Packet data medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

404/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.9.16 Priority for SDS 1, 2 & 3 messages (118)

Specifies the priority among PDUs within the same basic priority.
Type changeable with a warning flag, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value 0
Legal values low = 0
medium = 1
high = 2
Change effective after time defined in system parameter cc parameter refresh period has elapsed
(default 5 minutes)

Note

The system also allows entering values 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 but values higher than 2 are meaningless so they
must not be used.

Additional information

This parameter determines the downlink priority for SDS 1, 2, 3 messages set by the user. It works with
the basic priority in the PDU, and allows status and SDS messages to be allocated downlink preferences
over each other so that the base station can rearrange their sending in queues. The mutual preferences
to other services are arranged with this new Priority level. It also informs the base station how to arrange
the received PDU's in the queue in an overload situation. The Priority level is common for each PDU within
a service. The following table shows the principle of the level arrangement between services. The values
of the priorities are examples.

Table 61 : Example of priority levels

Service Priority level

Packet data medium
Status message high
SDS 4 low

16.2.9.17 SDS on PDCH (132)

Specifies whether SDS messages can be sent on the phase-modulated packet data channel (PDCH).
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value F (Unable to send SDS on the PDCH)
Legal values F (Unable to send SDS on the PDCH)
T (Enable to send SDS on the PDCH)
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 405/466
Additional information

As some radio terminals may not support SDS messages on the packet data channel (PDCH), this system
parameter specifies whether SDS messages can or cannot be sent on the PDCH.

16.2.9.18 Charging option for Storage service (189)

This parameter is for future use.

16.2.9.19 Default validity time for SDS messages (190)

Not in use.

16.2.9.20 Default validity time for status messages (191)

No in use.

16.2.9.21 Default validity time for SDS-TL messages (192)

Not in use.

16.2.9.22 Charging options for SMSGW (200)

Defines the charging options for the SMS Gateway (SMSGW).

Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0-3
0 - Create charging record for messages to and from SMSGW
1 - Suppress charging record for messages to SMSGW
2 - Suppress charging record for messages from SMSGW
3 - Suppress charging record for messages to and from SMSGW
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *SMSGW, *charging

16.2.9.23 Storage for SDS-TL messages allowed (201)

Defines whether the storage of SDS-TL messages in an external server is allowed.

Type changeable
Default value No
Legal values No/Yes
Change effective immediately

Keywords: *SDS-TL, *SMSGW, *SMS centre support

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

406/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.9.24 SMSGW ISSI 01–32 (204 – 235)

These parameters define the main SMSGWs.

The parameters' IDs are, respectively, from 204 to 235.

Type changeable
Legal values List of 32 SMSGW (TCS client) ISSI addresses.
Special value 0 = “not defined”.
Related parameters System parameter Spare SMSGW ISSI 01–32
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Terminal specific (off-line) configuration is required to set the actual service centre’s MS-ISDN address if
the terminal is to use service centre addressing.

Keywords: *SMSGW

16.2.9.25 Spare SMSGW ISSI 01–32 (236 – 267)

These parameters define the spare SMSGWs.

The parameters' IDs are, respectively, from 236 to 267.

Type changeable
Legal values List of 32 SMSGW (TCS client) ISSI addresses. Special value 0 = “not defined”.
Related parameters System parameter SMSGW ISSI 01–32
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Terminal specific (off-line) configuration is required to set the actual service centre’s MS-ISDN address if
the terminal is to use service centre addressing.

Keywords: *SMSGW

16.2.9.26 Status messages Tx inhibit on (291)

Specifies a status value that is used to transmit TxI (transmit inhibit) ON information from the radio terminals
to the system.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 65 264
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status
message or any other status message range
Related DWS and radio terminal parameters
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 407/466
CAUTION
Do not change the setting because the value is defined in TETRA interoperability documentation..

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.27 Status messages TxI off (292)

Specifies a status value that is used to transmit TxI (transmit inhibit) OFF information from the radio terminals
to the system.
Type changeable with a warning flag
Default value 65 265
Legal values integers from 32 768 to 65 534; not used for any specified status
message or any other status message range
Related DWS and radio terminal parameters
parameters
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

CAUTION
Do not change the setting because the value is defined in TETRA interoperability documentation..

Keywords: *data messages

16.2.9.28 Direct sending before storage (294)

This parameter defines whether an SDS message targeted at a Short Message Service Center (SMSC) is
sent directly to a local subscriber or always via the SMSC.
Direct sending is only tried if the Airbus DS TETRA network knows the final recipient (who must be an own
subscriber). Direct sending may reduce system load, but because the network is not designed to handle all
aspects of SDS-TL protocol, messages may be lost in extraordinary situations (for example, if the message
buffer of the receiving terminal is full).
Type changeable , typically defined by the technical operator (change confirmation
not needed)
Default value 1 = optional first try directly to MS
Legal values 0 = no direct sending
1 = optional first try directly to MS
Change effective when cc refresh period expires

16.2.9.29 Alert mechanism for SMSC (297)

With this parameter the basic alert mechanism for SMSC can be switched off when TNA (Tactical Numbering
Application) and MSISDN numbering is used.
This parameter defines whether the basic alert mechanism for SMSC is used or not for MS. When MSISDN
numbering and TNA is used, this parameter is switched off for different response to alert service request.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

408/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
When basic alert mechanism for SMSC is used, MWF (Message Waiting Flag) is set normally for MS.

When MSISDN numbering and TNA are used, alert operation is acknowledged with poll the user response
and MWF is not set. This functionality relates only to MS identified by MSISDN number in service requests.
In this case SMSC needs to poll the subscriber itself by occasionally trying to send the SDS message
to the subscriber.
Type changeable
Default value 1 = Alerting
Legal values 0 = Polling mechanism is used when MSISDN addressing is used
1 = Alerting mechanism is used by the system
Related parameters System parameter SMSGW ISSI 01–32
Change effective when parameter refresh period expires

16.2.9.30 Use SDS4 Sending profiles (332)

This parameter defines if the SDS4 Sending Profiles feature is activated or deactivated.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 = SDS4 sending profiles are deactivated
1 = SDS4 sending profiles are activated
Change effective immediately

Note

Sending profiles are valid only to SDSs on the downlink direction, that is, from the TETRA system to radio
terminal.

16.2.9.31 Priority of sending profiles (333, 336, 339, 342, 345)

These parameters define the priority of SDS4 sending profiles:

• Priority of normal sending profile (333)

• Priority of important sending profile (336)

• Priority of repeating sending profile (339)

• Priority of dedicated sending profile (342)

• Priority of paging sending profile (345)

Type changeable
Default value see Table 62 below.
Legal values 0 – 13

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 409/466
 Special values The value is formed of basic and level priorities as following:
0 = lowest basic priority (0), high level priority (2)
1 = low basic priority (1), low level priority (0)
2 = low basic priority (1), medium level priority (1)
3 = low basic priority (1), high level priority (2)
4 = normal basic priority (2), low level priority (0)
5 = normal basic priority (2), medium level priority (1)
6 = normal basic priority (2), high level priority (2)
7 = high basic priority (3), low level priority (0)
8 = high basic priority (3), medium level priority (1)
9 = high basic priority (3), high level priority (2)
10 = control basic priority (4), low level priority (0)
11 = control basic priority (4), medium level priority (1)
12 = control basic priority (4), high level priority (2)
13 = emergency basic priority (5), low level priority (0)
Change effective immediately

Table 62 : Priority of sending profiles: default values

Parameter Default value

Priority of normal sending profile (333) 2
Priority of important sending profile (336) 3
Priority of repeating sending profile (339) 1
Priority of dedicated sending profile (342) 2
Priority of paging sending profile (345) 3

Recommendations

The default values of these parameters are related to the name of the parameter. If the parameter value is
changed, the name might not reflect the value any more, so change the value only if necessary (with caution).

Note

Sending profiles are valid only to SDSs on the downlink direction, that is, from the TETRA system to radio
terminal.

16.2.9.32 Redundancy of sending profiles (334, 337, 340, 343, 346)

These parameters define the redundancy of SDS4 sending profiles:

• Redundancy of normal sending profile (334)

• Redundancy of important sending profile (337)

• Redundancy of repeating sending profile (340)

• Redundancy of dedicated sending profile (343)

• Redundancy of paging sending profile (346)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

410/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
In case of individually addressed SDSs, the redundancy defines the TBS repeat count (high -> 2, normal
-> 1, low -> 0, minimal -> 0).
With group addressed SDSs, the TBS repeat count is never more than 1, but the redundancy has following
meaning:
• high: if delivery fails, it is tried again the maximum of 2 times (with TBS repeat count = 1). If Group
addressed status/SDS delivery attribute (136) is cleared (default value), the message is sent again
regardless if the reply (success or failed) from the first try is received or not.
• normal (default method): if delivery fails with first try, it is tried once again with TBS repeat count = 1.
• low: only one channel is tried with TBS repeat count = 1.
• minimal: only one channel is tried with TBS repeat count = 0.

Type changeable
Default value see Table 63 below.
Legal values 0–3
Special values 3 = high
2 = normal
1 = low
0 = minimal
Related parameters DXT parameter (WO command group): Group addressed status/SDS delivery
attribute (136)
Change effective immediately

Table 63 : Redundancy of sending profiles: default values

Parameter Default value

Redundancy of normal sending profile (334) 2
Redundancy of important sending profile (337) 2
Redundancy of repeating sending profile (340) 1
Redundancy of dedicated sending profile (343) 2
Redundancy of paging sending profile (346) 2

Recommendations

The default values of these parameters are related to the name of the parameter. If the parameter value is
changed, the name might not reflect the value any more, so change the value only if necessary (with caution).
Note
Sending profiles are valid only to SDSs on the downlink direction, that is, from the TETRA system to radio
terminal.

16.2.9.33 Channels for sending profiles (335, 338, 341, 344, 347)

These parameters define the channels for SDS4 sending profiles:

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 411/466
 • Channels for normal sending profile (335)

• Channels for important sending profile (338)

• Channels for repeating sending profile (341)

• Channels for dedicated sending profile (344)

• Channels for paging sending profile (347)

Type changeable
Default value see Table 64 below.
Legal values 0 – 1023
Special values The value is formed from bits as follows (IC-TCH is LSB of the parameter value):
bit channel abbreviation and full definition.
0 (1) = i-IC-TCH, individual addressed SDS to individual call traffic channel
1 (2) = i-PDCH, individual addressed SDS to PM PDCH
2 (4) = i-GC-TCH, individual addressed SDS to group call traffic channel
3 (8) = i-DDCH, individual addressed SDS to dedicated data channel
4 (16) = i-CCCH, individual addressed SDS to common control channel
5 (32) = i-TEDS, individual addressed SDS to QAM PDCH
6 (64) = g-TCH, group addressed SDS to group call traffic channel
7 (128) = g-DDCH, group addressed SDS to dedicated data channel
8 (256) = g-CCCH, group addressed SDS to common control channel
9 (512) = not in use
Example: If you want to have individual and group addressed messages sent on
CCCH, DDCH and QAM PDCH channels, you have to set the parameter to: 8
+ 16 + 32 + 128 + 256 = 440
Change effective immediately

Table 64 : Channels for sending profiles: default values

Parameter Default value

Channels for normal sending profile (335) 1023 (all channels)
Channels for important sending profile (338) 1023 (all channels)
Channels for repeating sending profile (341) 952 (CCCH, DDCH and QAM PDCH)
Channels for dedicated sending profile (344) 952 (CCCH, DDCH and QAM PDCH)
Channels for paging sending profile (347) 1023 (all channels)

Recommendations

The default values of these parameters are related to the name of the parameter. If the parameter value is
changed, the name might not reflect the value any more, so change the value only if necessary (with caution).

Note

Sending profiles are valid only to SDSs on the downlink direction, that is, from the TETRA system to radio
terminal.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

412/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
16.2.9.34 Use important profile for Protocol ID 01–04 (348 – 351)

These parameters define one of the four possible protocol IDs which are sent with the important SDS4
sending profile.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0–255
Change effective immediately

16.2.9.35 Use repeating profile for Protocol ID 01–04 (352 – 355)

These parameters define one of the four possible protocol IDs which are sent with the repeating SDS4
sending profile.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0–255
Change effective immediately

16.2.9.36 Use dedicated profile for Protocol ID 01–04 (356 – 359)

These parameters define one of the four possible protocol IDs which are sent with the dedicated SDS4
sending profile.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0–255
Change effective immediately

16.2.9.37 Use paging profile for Protocol ID 01–04 (360 – 363)

These parameters define one of the four possible protocol IDs which are sent with the paging SDS4 sending
profile.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0–255
Change effective immediately

16.2.10 Load-limiter parameters (PM command group)

For DXT-specific load-limiter parameters modified by MML sessions with the PM command group, see
Section 12.2.16 .

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 413/466
16.2.10.1 MCCH uplink load control for LIP (277 – 290)

By providing support for LIP (location information protocol) features, the Airbus DS TETRA system ensures
more fluent functioning of the control channel in the air interface between a base station and a radio terminal.
This is done by managing the uplink load of the main control channel (MCCH) and the secondary control
channel (SCCH), if in use, when positioning services based on the LIP standard are used.
Load control is based on the measurement of the real load of the MCCH/SCCH uplink channel and the
actual amount of location reports. Each base station is managed separately but the used parameters are
defined on the network level which means that they are common to all exchanges and base stations of your
TETRA system.
Both the DXTs and the terminals should support LIP. The terminals should also have been configured to listen
to and follow LIP load-control requests. These requests are sent to the terminals as group-addressed
SDSs on the downlink MCCH/SCCH. As a result, the terminals adjust their location reporting frequency
according to the received instructions.
The operator can control the use of this feature by setting it ON or OFF and by defining the used load
control parameters, see the following table.

16.2.10.1.1 Group address 1 .. Group address 5 (277 – 281)

This parameter defines group addresses from 1 to 5.

The parameters names are as follows: LIP temporary reporting group –1 (277), LIP temporary reporting
group –2 (278), LIP temporary reporting group –3 (279), LIP temporary reporting group –4 (280), LIP
temporary reporting group –5 (281).
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values GSSI
Related parameters
Change effective within 10 minutes after the change is made (this time equals the refreshing period
used by the application for system parameters)

16.2.10.1.2 Extended location reporting interval: Group1 .. Group5 (282 – 286)

This parameter defines the extended location reporting interval in groups 1 .. 5.

The parameters names are as follows: LIP temporary reporting interval –1 (282), LIP temporary reporting
interval –2 (283), LIP temporary reporting interval –3 (284), LIP temporary reporting interval –4 (285), LIP
temporary reporting interval –5 (286).
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 — 134, see 1)

Related parameters
Change effective within 10 minutes after the change is made (this time equals the refreshing period
used by the application for system parameters)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

414/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
1) The temporary reporting parameters can have the following values:
• Value 0: the group is not in use and no messages are sent to the group.
• Values 1 — 128: indicate absolute time intervals, see the following coding table.

Table 65 : Information element: Minimum reporting interval – absolute

Absolute time interval Value

10 s 1
20 s 2
... etc. (at 10 s intervals) ... etc.
5 min. 30
5,5 min. 31
... etc. (at 30 s intervals) ... etc.
20 min. 60
21 min. 61
... etc. (at 1 min. intervals) ... etc.
88 min. 128

• Values 129 – 134: indicate relative values (compared to normal interval), see the coding table below.
The relative change is applied both to the reporting time interval and to the maximum reporting
distance, see the following coding table.

Table 66 : Information element: Temporary minimum reporting interval – relative (also used
for maximum reporting distance)

Change in minimum reporting time interval and maximum Value

reporting distance
1,4 times the normal time and distance 129
Two times the normal time and distance 130
Three times the normal time and distance 131
Four times the normal time and distance 132
Six times the normal time and distance 133
Eight times the normal time and distance 134

16.2.10.1.3 LIP uplink load return to normal (287)

This parameter defines when terminals should resume using the normal location reporting interval after
having used restricted reporting. When the load caused on MCCH/SCCH by location reports gets under the
given percentage, the DXT asks terminals to start using normal interval for sending of location reports. The
threshold and return parameters must be reasonable. At least the following rules must be taken into account:
• MCCH/SCCH uplink load threshold %> MCCH/SCCH Return to normal %
• LIP load threshold %> LIP uplink load return to normal %

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 415/466
 • MCCH/SCCH uplink load threshold %> LIP load threshold %.

The recommended values for the threshold are in the range of 40-60%. The return values should be
around 80% of the dropped load. Dropped load means the anticipated load level after the reduction
have come into force.

Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 — 80
Related parameters
Change effective within 10 minutes after the change is made (this time equals the refreshing period
used by the application for system parameters)

16.2.10.1.4 LIP uplink load threshold (288)

This parameter defines the uplink load threshold as percentage of the LIP location reports on the
MCCH/SCCH. If the load caused on MCCH/SCCH by location reports exceeds the given percentage, the
DXT asks the terminals to start restricting the sending of location reports.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 — 98
Special values Value 0 means that the threshold is not used.
Related parameters
Change effective within 10 minutes after the change is made (this time equals the refreshing period
used by the application for system parameters)

16.2.10.1.5 MCCH uplink load return to normal (289)

This parameter defines when terminals should resume using the normal location reporting interval after
having used restricted reporting. When the MCCH/SCCH load gets under the given percentage, the DXT
asks terminals to start using normal interval for sending of location reports. The threshold and return
parameters must be reasonable. At least the following rules must be taken into account:

• MCCH/SCCH uplink load threshold %> MCCH/SCCH Return to normal %

• LIP load threshold %> LIP Return to normal %

• MCCH/SCCH uplink load threshold %> LIP load threshold %.

The recommended values for the threshold are in the range of 40-60%. The return values should be
around 80% of the dropped load. Dropped load means the anticipated load level after the reduction
have come into force.

Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 — 80

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

416/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related parameters
Change effective within 10 minutes after the change is made (this time equals the refreshing period
used by the application for system parameters)

16.2.10.1.6 MCCH uplink load threshold (290)

This parameter defines the uplink load threshold as the MCCH/SCCH load percentage. If the MCCH/SCCH
load exceeds the given percentage, the DXT asks the terminals to start restricting the sending of location
reports.
Type changeable
Default value 0
Legal values 0 — 99
Special values Value 0 means that the threshold is not used.
Related parameters
Change effective within 10 minutes after the change is made (this time equals the refreshing period
used by the application for system parameters)

16.2.10.2 MCCH downlink load control (198, 269)

The MCCH/SCCH downlink load control restricts the amount of messages that are allowed to be sent to the
common control channel at the same time. It provides a general queuing mechanism which can be used
for any kind of signalling that could typically cause high downlink-signalling load in the MCCH/SCCH. That
is important since the high load in MCCH/SCCH caused by, for example, combined group setups or long
SDS messages causes delays not only to that respective function itself. The high load in the MCCH/SCCH
delays and disturbs all basic functions for all the subscribers on that cell. Therefore, at first the sending of
all combined group calls and status/SDS message is using the guard which implements the MCCH/SCCH
downlink load control.

Every time when there is a need to send combined group setup messages or a status/SDS message to the
control channel, the permission must be first asked from the MCCH/SCCH downlink load control guard. The
guard keeps bookkeeping about all the requests and gives permission only after it ensures there is some
space on the air interface. Before that the requests are put on queue on priority basis.

In practice the MCCH/SCCH downlink load control may delay the data messages and combined group
connection in some or all of the cells. In this way the MCCH/SCCH downlink load control regulates the load in
the air interface (main control channel) caused by the status/SDS messages and combined group setups
which are the typical services that load the air interface.

16.2.10.2.1 MCCH downlink load throughput (198)

Defines how much capacity the combined group call setups and data messages can use of the total capacity
of the MCCH/SCCH.
Type changeable
Unit %

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 417/466
 Default value 80
Legal values 60–100 in increments of 1
0 = MCCH/SCCH downlink load control is not active, all requests are
granted immediately
Related MCCH downlink alarm limit (269)
parameters
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Values between 1-59 are converted to 60.

Additional information: early announcement of MCCH/SCCH downlink load throughput buffer overflow

An alarm MCCH DOWNLINK OVERLOAD AT LA is set when the load in MCCH/SCCH is too big. The
operator can configure how early or late the alarm is given with the system parameter 16.2.10.2.2 , but the
default value is set to the value when it is estimated that the MCCH/SCCH downlink is so full that it not just
causes delay but the overall functionality is compromised (30%). That alarm is changed to alarm MCCH
DOWNLINK SIGNALLING BUFFER OVERFLOW to notify about the overflow.

16.2.10.2.2 MCCH downlink alarm limit (269)

Defines (as a percentage of the MCCH/SCCH downlink buffer size) when an alarm is set due to the increased
MCCH/SCCH load which compromises the overall functionality. The load is caused by a huge amount of
combined group-call setups and/or data messages.

Cancellation of the alarm is done with a little bit (3% ) under the triggering limit, so that steady load around
that level does not cause continuous setting and cancelling. The default value for the cancellation of the
alarm is 30% - 3% = 27 %
Type changeable
Unit %
Default value 30
Legal values 0-100 in increments of 1
Related MCCH downlink load control throughput (198)
parameters
Change effective immediately

16.2.10.3 DDCH downlink load throughput (398)

Specifies the DDCH downlink throughput value (as percentage of the capacity) for load control purposes.
The parameter restricts the amount of messages that are allowed to be sent to the dedicated data channel
at the same time.
Type changeable
Unit %
Default value 85

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

418/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Legal values 25–100 in increments of 1
Special values 100 = 1 TSL / 60 ms
When the value of parameter MCCH downlink load throughput (198) is
0, the DDCH downlink load control is also not active, and all requests
are granted immediately.
Related MCCH downlink load throughput (198)
parameters
Change effective immediately

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 419/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

420/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
17 Configuration and Data Distribution
Parameters
This chapter describes the Configuration and Data Distribution (CDD) parameters.

17.1 Managing the Configuration and Data Distribution

parameters
The following table shows what you need to manage the Configuration and Data Distribution (CDD)
parameters.

Table 67 : Managing the CDD parameters

Topic CDD parameters

Tools – Command Line Interface (CLI) of the CDD server
– file editor
User interface CDD sessions and CLI sessions
Required rights logged in as cdduser
When the values are during network configuration and when adding new DXTs to the
given network

The following table shows what you need to manage the LME parameters for the optional feature Logging
of Management events.

Table 68 : Managing the LME parameters

Topic LME parameters for optional feature Logging of Management

events
Tools the LMI of the CDD server for managing theLME feature
User interface LMI sessions in the CDD server
Required rights logged in as obnnnnn, where nnnnn represents the main organisation
numeric value
When the values are user login defined: rights to establish a session in the LMI of the CDD
given starting/stopping management event logging

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 421/466
17.2 Parameters

17.2.1 HLR of APNs and APN pools

Specifies the HLR of all APNs and APN pools. The HLR is used for synchronising APN-related data in the
CDD database when the consistency check is executed.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Legal values one of the existing DXT IDs in the system
Change effective immediately

17.2.2 HLR of connection groups

Specifies the HLR of all connection groups. The HLR is used for synchronising connection group data in the
CDD database when the consistency check is executed.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Legal values one of the existing DXT IDs in the system
Change effective immediately

17.2.3 Home DXT of MSISDNs

Specifies the home DXT of MSISDNs.
The home DXT is used by CDD for fetching information directly from MSISDN home DXT (e.g. subscriber
SSI of MSISDN for handling of requests coming from TCS clients).
It is recommended to configure the MSISDN home DXT in order to reduce the message forwarding between
DXTs. This configuration is CDD-server specific, that is, it needs to be done separately in all CDDs of
the network.
Note
The operator can define different DXTs as the home DXT for each MSISDN number range to DXT number
analysis, but for each CDD it is possible to only define one MSISDN home DXT.

Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator

Default value 0xffffffff = not specified
Legal values one of the existing DXT IDs in the system
Change effective immediately

17.2.4 Network identifier

The Network identifier consists of the Mobile country code (MCC) and the Mobile network code MNC).
Network indentifier is defined once when starting a new network. Latter changes may be fatal.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

422/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
17.2.4.1 Mobile country code

Specifies the Mobile country code (MCC) of the network where CDD is connected.
Type Network-specific
Legal values depends on the country; refer to the ITU-T recommendation X.121
Related parameters System parameter Country code
Change effective from restart

17.2.4.2 Mobile network code

Specifies the Mobile network code (MNC) of the network where CDD is connected.
Type Network-specific
Legal values country-dependable, available from the authorities
Related parameters System parameter Network code
Change effective from restart

17.2.5 Management blocking

Specifies whether different TCS management areas (Organisation Block, Radio Subscriber, Radio Subscriber
Tracking, WS user, Group, Client Application, Group Overlay, and Authentication Key Management) are
blocked or not.
Type Server-specific
Default value 0 = no blocking (all management areas)
Legal values 0 = no blocking (all managements areas, or each management area separately
defined)
1 = management blocking on (all management areas, or each management
area separately defined)
Change effective immediately

17.2.6 Automatic COG recovery counter

This parameter is related to the automatic recovery of combining of groups and cover groups. Together with
the configuration and data distribution parameter Automatic COG recovery timer it is used when the system
detects a combining-of-groups–related or cover-groups–related data mismatch. This parameter defines how
many times the system tries to recover mismatched data. The configuration and data distribution parameter
Automatic COG recovery timer defines the time interval between the recovery attempts. If the last attempt
also fails, the mismatch still exists in the system and an alarm is set. Hence the operator must perform the
recovery of combining of groups or cover groups manually. This can be done with a CLI command.
Type Server-specific
Default value 5
Range from 0 to 10

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 423/466
 Related parameters CDD parameter Automatic COG recovery timer
Change effective immediately

17.2.7 Automatic COG recovery timer

This parameter is related to the automatic recovery of combining of groups and cover groups. Together with
the configuration and data distribution parameter Automatic COG recovery counter it is used when the
system detects a combining-of-groups–related or cover-groups–related data mismatch. The configuration
and data distribution parameter Automatic COG recovery counter defines how many times the system tries to
recover mismatched data, whereas the Automatic COG recovery timer parameter defines the time interval
between those recovery attempts. If the last attempt also fails, the mismatch still exists in the system and
an alarm is set. Hence the operator must perform the recovery of combining of groups or cover groups
manually. This can be done with a CLI command.
Type Server-specific
Unit seconds
Default value 20
Range from 5 to 60
Related parameters CDD parameter Automatic COG recovery counter
Change effective immediately

17.2.8 G4WIF filter

This parameter defines two filter strings for the WS user’s main organisation; a G4WIF becomes visible to a
WS user if the three first characters of the G4WIF mnemonic exactly match either one of these filter strings or
if the special value "***" is used in one of the strings. This parameter is given with a CLI.

Affects the system only if the WO command group parameter Extended VPN for G4WIF (143) is turned on.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Unit two 3-character strings both of which may include a-z, A-Z, 0-9,"***"
Default value Empty string
Range To see a G4WIF, either of the given filter strings must exactly match the 3 first
characters of the mnemonic of the G4WIF.
Related parameters Parameters class 45 WO command group parameter Extended VPN for G4WIF
(143)
Change effective immediately

17.2.9 WSU global rights

Activates global rights for a WS user in a defined area. This parameter is given with a CLI.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

424/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Affects the system only if the parameters class 45 WO command group parameters Extended VPN for
communication rights (141) and/or Extended VPN for management rights (142) are turned on.

For general feature activation instructions see Feature Activation Manual, TRASYSAPP00190.
Type changeable, typically defined by the technical operator
Default value Disabled
Legal Values Disabled
PABX = PABX call management
Management = organisation parameter, organisation block, and/or client
application management
Both
Related parameters — For PABX call management: parameters class 45 WO command group
parameter Extended VPN for communication rights (141)
— For organisation parameter, organisation block, and client application
management: parameters class 45 WO command group parameter Extended
VPN for management rights (142)
Change effective immediately

Additional information

This parameter enables no VPN restrictions to be applied to certain privileged WS users when the
corresponding parameter (Extended VPN for communication rights and/or Extended VPN for management
rights) is turned on.

17.3 CDD load parameters

The parameters in this chapter are related to very heavy load situations in the CDD server. If the maximum
values are reached, the load will be eased by cutting the handling of certain of the messages coming in to the
CDD server. This however, is a last course solution and should be avoided if possible. The default values
work best in most situation and so changing the values of these parameters is not recommended.

17.3.1 Maximum allowed message queue load

HIGH_WATERMARK specifies the maximum relative load in the monitored message queue of the CDD
server. When the limit is exceeded, WS commands, such as creating, modifying, and deleting radio
subscribers or organisations are not possible; all incoming requests from WS are ignored until the message
queue load drops to/under specified threshold value.
Type Server-specific
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 80
Legal values integers from 50 to 100; with increment of one
Related parameters CDD parameter Threshold for message queue load limiting end
Change effective from restart

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 425/466
17.3.2 Threshold for message queue load limiting end

LOW_WATERMARK specifies the threshold value for relative load in the monitored message queue for load
limiting ending. When the load drops lower or equal to it, the load limiting is stopped and WS commands
are handled normally.
Type Server-specific
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 70
Legal values from 10 to the value defined for the parameter Maximum allowed message queue
load; with the increment of 1
Related parameters CDD load parameter Maximum allowed message queue load
Change effective from restart

17.3.3 Maximum allowed message queue load for “periodic recovery”

PERIODIC_HIGH_WATERMARK specifies the maximum relative load in the monitored message queue of
the CDD server before partial load limiting. When the limit is exceeded, the “periodic recovery” feature related
radio subscribers’ group membership and tracking data recovery is not possible; “periodic recovery” related
message from DXT is ignored until the message queue load drops to/under specified threshold value.
Type Server specific
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 60
Legal values integers from 50 to value one less than defined for parameter Threshold for
message queue load limiting end; with increment of one
Related parameters CDD parameter Threshold for message queue load limiting end
CDD parameter Threshold for message queue partial load limiting end (“periodic
recovery”)
Change effective from restart

17.3.4 Threshold for message queue partial load limiting end (“periodic
recovery”)
PERIODIC_LOW_WATERMARK specifies the threshold value for relative load in the monitored message
queue for partial load limiting ending. When the load drops lower or equal to it, the partial load limiting is
stopped and “Periodic recovery” feature’s message is handled normally.
Type Server specific
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 50
Legal values integers from 10 to the value defined for the parameter Maximum allowed
message queue load for “periodic recovery”; with increment of one

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

426/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related parameters CDD parameter Maximum allowed message queue load for “periodic recovery”
Change effective from restart

17.3.5 Threshold for management event cache alarm

LME_HIGH_WATERMARK1 specifies the threshold value for maximum relative level of used management
event cache in the CDD server before alarm is set. Exceeding this limit will cause the minor alarm
MANAGEMENT EVENT CACHE IS BECOMING FULL in the CDD server.
Type Server specific
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 50
Legal values integers from 50 to value defined for the parameter Threshold for management
event cache load limiting end; with increment of one
Related parameters CDD parameter Threshold for management event cache alarm cancelling
CDD parameter Maximum allowed management event cache usage level
CDD parameter Threshold for management event cache load limiting end
Change effective from restart

17.3.6 Threshold for management event cache alarm cancelling

LME_LOW_WATERMARK1 specifies the threshold value for the minimum relative level of the used
management event cache in the CDD server before alarm cancelling. The usage must reach (be lower than
or equal to) the value of this order in order for the MANAGEMENT EVENT CACHE IS BECOMING FULL
minor alarm to be cancelled in the CDD server. (In the case of a large decrease in usage, the major alarm is
cancelled and also the load limiting ended, if the message queu load is low enough.)
Type Server specific
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 45
Legal values from 10 to the value defined for the parameters Threshold for management event
cache alarm, with increments of 1
Related parameters CDD parameter Threshold for management event cache alarm
CDD parameter Maximum allowed management event cache usage level
CDD parameter Threshold for management event cache load limiting end
Change effective from restart

17.3.7 Maximum allowed management event cache usage level

LME_HIGH_WATERMARK2 specifies the maximum relative level of used management event cache in the
CDD server. When the limit is exceeded, WS commands, such as creating, modifying, and deleting radio
subscribers or organisations are not possible; all incoming requests from WS are ignored until the message
queue load drops to/under specified threshold value. The major alarm MANAGEMENT EVENT CACHE IS

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 427/466
BECOMING FULL is set in CDD server. (When minor alarm is already set - just its severity is changed to
major.)
Type Server specific
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 85
Legal values integers from value defined for the parameter Threshold for management event
cache alarm to 100; with increment of one
Related parameters CDD parameter Threshold for management event cache alarm
CDD parameter Threshold for management event cache alarm cancelling
CDD parameter Threshold for management event cache load limiting end
Change effective from restart

17.3.8 Threshold for management event cache load limiting end

LME_LOW_WATERMARK2 specifies the threshold value for minimum relative level of used management
event cache in the CDD server before load limiting ending. The load must reach (be lower than or equal to)
the value of this parameter in order to deactivate the load limiter. The severity of the alarm MANAGEMENT
EVENT CACHE IS BECOMING FULL is changed to minor in CDD server.
Type Server specific
Unit percentage (%)
Default value 80
Legal values from value defined for the parameter Threshold for management event cache
alarm to the value defined for the parameter Maximum allowed management
event cache usage level; with the increment of 1
Related parameters CDD parameter Threshold for management event cache alarm
CDD parameter Threshold for management event cache alarm cancelling
CDD parameter Maximum allowed management event cache usage level
Change effective from restart

17.4 Parameters for logging of management events

17.4.1 SetLogging
Specifies whether TCS management commands are logged or not.
Type Server specific
Default value 0=logging off (all management areas)
Legal values values 0 =logging off
1 = logging on (all management areas, or each management area separately
defined with SetFilter command)

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

428/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Related parameters CDD parameter SetFilter
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Logging is set in the LMI user interface and it is used in the optional feature Logging of Management events

Keywords: *logging of management events

17.4.2 SetFilter

Specifies whether different TCS management command areas (Subscriber, Organisation Block, Group,
Group Membership, Group Selection. Subscription, Authentication, Tracking and Get Operations) are logged
or not. Filtering of each command area is done one by one.
Type Server specific
Default value 0=logging off (all management areas)
Legal values values 0 =logging off
1 = logging on (all management areas, or each management area separately
defined with SetFilter command)
Related parameters CDD parameter SetLogging
Change effective immediately

Additional information

Command area parameters are set in LMI user interface. Setfilter is used in optional feature called: Logging
of Management events

Keywords: *logging of management events

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 429/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

430/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
18 Other parameters
This chapter describes how to manage the parameters of the TETRA products and services that fall outside
of scope of this document:
• TETRA Base Station
• Audit Trail Server (ATS)
• Authentication Key Distribution (AKD)
• TETRA Connectivity Server (TCS)
• TETRA Enhanced Packet Data Gateway (EPD-GW)
• TETRA Crypto Gateway 4900 (TCG)
• TETRA Voice Gateway (TVG)
• Tactilon® Management
• Dispatcher Workstation (DWS)
• Radio Console System (RCS 9500)

Typically the parameters of these products are set in the commissioning phase or during system configuration.
The required tools, interfaces, and rights vary depending on the product environment. The required settings
are described in each product's documentation. For detailed information, see the following documents.

TETRA Base Station

Configuring TB3 for IP Connectivity

TB3 TBCi Linux User Interface Description

Audit Trail Server

Audit Trail Server, Commissioning Manual

Audit Trail Server, User Guide

Authentication Key Distribution

Installing the AKDC

Commissioning the AKDC
Authentication Key Distribution (AKD), Operational Guide

TETRA Connectivity Server

Installing the TCS

Commissioning the TCS

TETRA Enhanced Packed Data Gateway

Enhanced Packet Data Gateway Commissioning Guide

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 431/466
Enhanced Packet Data Gateway User’s Guide

TETRA Crypto Gateway 4900

Installing and Commissioning the TETRA Crypto Gateway 4900

TETRA Crypto Gateway 4900, User and Maintenance Guide

KVMS Gateway Configuration Guide

TETRA Voice Gateway

Installing and Commissioning the TETRA Voice Gateway

TETRA Voice Gateway, User’s Guide

Tactilon® Management

Tactilon® Management Installation, Commissioning and Maintenance Guide

Tactilon® Management Administrator’s Guide

Tactilon® Management User’s Guide

Dispatcher Workstation (DWS)

Commissioning the TETRA Dispatcher Workstation (DWS)

Installing the TETRA Dispatcher Workstation (DWS)

DWS Communication User’s Guide

DWS Management User’s Guide

Radio Console System (RCS 9500)

See separate RCS 9500 documentation in CINFODIN.

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

432/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
Glossary
The meanings of the terms and acronyms used in this document are explained below.

For further information on TETRA definitions, terms and concepts and the meaning of all acronyms and
abbreviations used in TETRA System customer documentation, please see document TETRA System,
Glossary (DN00126469).

Term / acronym Meaning

AACH Access Assignment Channel
APN Access Point Name
C1 path loss parameter calculated when the radio terminal is synchronised to
the cell
C2 path loss parameter calculated when the radio terminal is not synchronised to
the cell
CCK common cipher key
CDD Configuration and Data Distribution server
CLI Command Line Interface
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation
CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction
CLIR Override Calling Line Identification Restriction Override
CONP Connection–Oriented Network Protocol
CoU Class of Usage
CUG closed user group
DCK derived cipher key
DDCH Dedicated Data Channel
DGNA Dynamic Group Number Assignment
DSC Dispatcher Station Controller
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
DWS Dispatcher Workstation
DXT Digital Exchange for TETRA. A generic term used for exchanges in the Airbus
DS TETRA System.
DXT3p DXT3 portable exchange
EG Energy Economy Group
EIR Equipment Identity Register
ESN External Subscriber Number
FNIM Fixed Network Interface Module
FNIM ET FNIM Exchange Tarmination

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 433/466
Term / acronym Meaning
FSSN Fleet–Specific Short Number
G4WIF Generic 4-Wire Interface
GPS Global Positioning System
GSSI Group Short Subscriber Identity
GTSI Group TETRA Subscriber Identity
GUI Graphical User Interface
HLR home location register
ISO International Standards Organisation
ISSI Individual Short Subscriber Identity
ITSI Individual TETRA Subscriber Identity
LA location area
LE late entry
LLC Logical Link Control
MCC Mobile Country Code
MCCH Main Control Channel
mcell monitored neighbour cell
MER Message Error Rate
MLE Mobile Link Entity
MMI Man—Machine Interface
MML Man—Machine Language
MNC Mobile Network Code
MSISDN Mobile Subscriber International ISDN Number
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
Packet Data Channel dedicated to the packet data traffic
Channel
PDCH Packet Data Channel
PDP Packet Data Protocol
PDU Protocol Data Unit
POC Pseudo-Open Channel
PS Priority Scanning
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Notations 4-QAM, 16-QAM and 64-QAM refer to different modulation levels.
RCS 9500 Radio Console System
RDC Radio Downlink Counter
RSSI Received RF Signal Strength

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

434/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Term / acronym Meaning
RX Receiver
SCLNP Specific Connectionless Network Protocol
SDS Short Data Service
SDS-TL SDS Transport Layer
SDU Service Data Unit
SSI Short Subscriber Identity
SwMI Switching and Management Interface
TBC TETRA Base Station Controller
TBS TETRA Base Station
TCH traffic channel
TCS TETRA Connectivity Server
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
TDSC TETRA Dispatcher Station Controller
TEDS TETRA Enhanced Data Service
TEDS TTRX A TETRA transceiver unit generating a carrier which uses QAM modulation
TLIA TETRA Line Interface adapter type A
TLIC TETRA Line Interface adapter type C
ToBB TETRA over broadband
Refers to the TETRA network services accessibility over a broadband IP
network provided by the feature TETRA services for smart devices.
TRU Transmission Unit
TTRX TETRA Transceiver Unit
U-plane User-plane
VLR Visitor location register
WS TETRA Workstation

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 435/466
 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

436/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
INDEX

A Charging options for SMSGW (200) .......... 406

Broadcast Call
Air interface encryption parameters broadcast and background groups ............ 122
Air Interface Encryption Method................. 109 Broadcast Calls
Allowed encryption method........................ 363 broadcast and background groups .............. 90
ANCR air interface encryption service........ 183 Broadcast group
Authentication and encryption.................... 360 in broadcast call ................................... 90, 122
CCK change demand broadcasts .............. 361
CCK change start delay ............................. 363
CCK change warning broadcast time ........ 362 C
CCK change warning idle time................... 362 Call parameters
CLASS security class................................. 184 Allow Duplex Calls ....................................... 99
DXT with transit key database ................... 359 Allow Pre-emptive Services ................... 77, 98
Encryption type .......................................... 140 Allow Pre-emptive Speech Items ................. 98
N2016 number of sent Allow Resource Pre-emption by Normal
CCK-id-elements...................................... 196 Priority Resource........................................ 99
N2017 number of sent extended Allow Semi-Duplex Calls............................ 100
services-elements .................................... 197 Call Forwarding on All Calls................. 95, 150
Authentication parameters Call Forwarding on Busy.............................. 95
AUTH authentication required.................... 183 Call Forwarding on No Answer ............ 95, 150
Authentication and encryption.................... 360 Call Forwarding on Not
Authentication Key Defined........................ 108 Reachable .......................................... 95, 151
Authentication required .............................. 108 CAll ID range max...................................... 272
Authentication situations ............................ 360 Call ID range min ....................................... 272
Authentication Triplet: Period of Call waiting and call forwarding indication
Validity...................................................... 109 (364)......................................................... 382
Authentication Triplet: Usage Times.......... 108 Calling Line Identification Presentation ........ 94
CLear WS login allowed (27) ..................... 294 Calling party prefix ..................................... 158
Default authentication data use count........ 361 cc parameter refresh period (0) ................. 370
Default authentication data validity CFNRy timer for WS subscribers
period ....................................................... 364 (124)......................................................... 378
Default authentication data validity period CLIR for FSSN ........................................... 100
type .......................................................... 365 CLIR for ITSI .............................................. 100
Session key 0–8 (18–26) ........................... 293 CLIR for MSISDN....................................... 101
CNFRy timer for MS subscribers
B (123)......................................................... 378
Direct call inactivity time............................... 45
Background group Duplex individual calls to dispatchers
in broadcast call ................................... 90, 122 (293)......................................................... 381
Billing parameters DXT support for type 1 handover............... 273
Charging option for Storage service .......... 406

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 437/466
 Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External Override Calling Line Identification
Number) ............................................. 96, 151 Restriction .................................................. 94
Forwarded to number (TETRA PABX Calls................................................... 91
Number) ............................................. 96, 151 Pre-emptive Resource Priority ..................... 98
Gateway SSI ........................................ 96, 151 Priority level of PDU for AL call.................. 325
Incoming Communication: CLIP .................. 77 Priority level of PDU for direct call ............. 334
Incoming Communication: CLIR Priority level of PDU for on/off hook
Override ..................................................... 78 call............................................................ 333
Incoming PSTN/PABX calls forwarded Priority level of PDU for PSTN/PABX
(128)......................................................... 379 call............................................................ 335
Individual Call Maximum Duration for PSTN Calls .................................................. 92
Calling Party............................................. 101 R2 signaling parameter (33) ...................... 373
Individual call setup time for called MS........ 45 Radio-units allowed to queue
Individual call setup time for called TCS B-subscriber (10)...................................... 371
client........................................................... 46 Refresh time for speech items (11) ............ 371
Individual call speech item max. time Send Gateway SSI when CLIR is active
(3)............................................................. 370 (88)........................................................... 374
Individual call timeout in ISI calls (136)........ 380 Setup timeout in ISI calls (134) .................. 379
Individual Calls............................................. 90 SFRAM speech frame format type............. 206
Individual calls allowed .............................. 145 Speech Item Priority..................................... 97
ISI group call inactivity timer (366)............. 382 Start tree for incoming CPI analysis........... 159
ISI group call setup response time .............. 47 TBS speech item duration in fallback
ISI late entry interval (367)......................... 382 group 01 (111) .......................................... 375
ISI originating setup response time ............. 48 TBS speech item duration in fallback
ISI version .................................................. 159 group 02 (112).......................................... 375
Keep requested simplex/duplex mode TBS speech item duration in fallback
(32)........................................................... 372 group 03 (113).......................................... 376
Max handover time for individual calls ......... 47 Voice Communication enabled .................. 149
Max MS count in group call ToC (373)........ 383 Workstation user parameters: Speech
Max number of call forwardings (125)........ 378 Item Priority ................................................ 76
Max resource queuing time........................ 324 cell reselection
Max resource queuing time – type 1 parameters................................................. 200
handover (172)......................................... 380 Confirmed group call (127) ............................ 296
Maximum duration for normal individual
call.............................................................. 47
MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via
D
PSTN (107) .............................................. 374 Data communication parameters..................... 60
Normal Priority ............................................. 97 AVL TCS router ISSI 0–9 ........................... 275
Notification from busy called party AVL TCS target 0–9 ................................... 276
(299)......................................................... 382 Charging options for SMSGW (200) .......... 406
Outgoing Communication: CLIR for DDCH downlink load throughput
FSSN.......................................................... 79 (398)......................................................... 418
Outgoing Communication: CLIR for Dedicated Data Group ............................... 124
ITSI............................................................. 78 Default validity time for SDS
Outgoing Communication: CLIR for messages................................................. 406
MSISDN ..................................................... 79

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

438/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Default validity time for SDS-TL Clear emergency call in always E2EE
messages (192) ....................................... 406 group (298)............................................... 387
Default validity time for status Emergency call pre-emption in fallback
messages................................................. 406 (369)......................................................... 388
Direct sending before storage (294) .......... 408 Emergency group call area (295)............... 387
Extended ACCH in use (53)....................... 294 Emergency communication parameters
General acknowledged status I1................ 398 Connect to number .................................... 205
General acknowledged status I2................ 399 Emergency Call Type................................. 124
General acknowledged status u1............... 399 Emergency ident ........................................ 383
General acknowledged status u2............... 400 Emergency number 01–10......................... 384
General status acknowledgement.............. 400 Emergency number handling mode ........... 386
MCCH downlink alarm limit........................ 418 Emergency Target........................................ 48
MCCH downlink load control Emergency Target: Emergency Target of
throughput ................................................ 417 Organisation Block ................................... 103
Message Delivery to Combination of Emergency Target: External Network ........ 102
Groups ..................................................... 126 Emergency Target: TETRA Network ......... 101
Priority for SDS 1, 2, and 3 messages........ 405 Emg calls allowed during temporary
Priority for SDS 4 messages...................... 404 disable...................................................... 386
Priority for status messages....................... 403 Local routing for emergency priority
SDS on PDCH ........................................... 405 dispatcher call .......................................... 386
SDS-TL addressing method....................... 336 Max called party alert time in emergency
SMSGW ISSI 01–32 .................................. 407 calls .......................................................... 387
Spare SMSGW ISSI 01–32........................ 407 Maximum duration for emergency call ......... 46
Status indicator I ........................................ 402 Selected group ident .................................. 355
Status indicator type .................................. 402 TCS client emergency target length........... 273
Status indicator u ....................................... 402 TCS client emergency target, digits
Status Messages (Callback and 1–8 ........................................................... 274
Emergency Status)................................... 125 TCS client emergency target, digits
Status messages callback request 9–16 ......................................................... 274
(13)........................................................... 397 Who can release an emergency call.......... 383
Status messages entry request (14) .......... 398 End-to-end encryption parameters
Status messages scanning off ................... 401 Enable Participation in End-to-End
Status messages scanning on ................... 401 Encrypted Calls .................................. 80, 110
Status messages urgent request ............... 403 Encryption mode ........................................ 140
Storage for SDS-TL messages allowed Individual Call Maximum Duration for
(201)......................................................... 406 Calling Party............................................... 81
Time for Delivery Reports .......................... 125 ET audio interface parameters
Dedicated data channels in use (148) ........... 302 Audio adjustment ....................................... 162
Direct sending before storage (294) .............. 408 Card number .............................................. 161
Dispatcher-initiated Emergency Call Cartridge number ....................................... 160
Allowed (129)............................................... 296 Decoded speech volume ........................... 163
Dual Watch Absence Period............................ 56 Encoded speech volume............................ 163
Number of monitoring lines ........................ 162
E PCM number and Time slot ....................... 161
Sub timeslot ............................................... 162
Emergency call parameters Tone volume............................................... 162

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 439/466
 Transcoding mode ..................................... 161 Other CDR data generation mechanism
Unit type..................................................... 160 (395)......................................................... 308
Extended VPN for communication rights........ 299 QoS control enabled (95)........................... 280
Extended VPN for G4WIF ............................. 300 Registration CDR data generation
Extended VPN for management rights .......... 300 mechanism (394) ..................................... 307
External interface parameters TBS jamming detection improvement
Called party prefix ...................................... 156 (416)......................................................... 309
FNIM card .................................................. 155 TEDS carrier timing (415) .......................... 308
FNIM unit ................................................... 154 Terminal disable enable in fallback
Gateway ISSI ............................................. 159 (391)......................................................... 306
Line type .................................................... 154 ToBB Rel 1 activated in the DXT................ 281
MS-ISDN prefix digit .................................. 349 Workstation User Networking (393) ........... 307
NITSI prefix digit ........................................ 350 Fixed TBS fallback mode parameters ........... 329
Num external line range lower limit............ 353 TBS fallback GSSI 01 ................................ 330
Num gateway SSI range higher limit.......... 351 TBS fallback GSSI 02 ................................ 330
Num gateway SSI range lower limit ........... 352 TBS fallback GSSI 03 ................................ 331
Number of voice mail system 01................ 355 Fleet Specific Short Number (FSSN)............... 86
Number of voice mail system 02................ 356
PABX prefix digit ........................................ 350
PCM number.............................................. 155
G
PSTN prefix digit ........................................ 350 General cell-specific parameters (PCG
SIP GW identifier ....................................... 157 command)
Traffic channel reservation......................... 156 EXCAP exclusive capacity for TBS
Utilised Service .......................................... 156 allowed ..................................................... 207
IPSEC IP security for DXT-TBS
interface ................................................... 209
F JATIM minimum MCCH change period
Fallback mode parameters on jamming............................................... 208
FBMOD TBS fallback mode allowed.......... 206 SOTIM DXT switchover timeout................. 208
LDTIM link down timeout period ................ 207 Group addressed status/SDS delivery
Fallback parameters attribute (136) .............................................. 298
TBS speech item duration in fallback Group communication parameters
group 01 (111) .......................................... 375 Automatic COG recovery counter .............. 423
TBS speech item duration in fallback Automatic COG recovery timer .................. 424
group 02 (112).......................................... 375 Call ID range max ...................................... 272
TBS speech item duration in fallback CAll ID range min....................................... 272
group 03 (113).......................................... 376 DXT support for type 1 handover............... 273
Feature switch parameters Energy Economy mode for background
AVL forwarding in fallback (378) ................ 306 groups ...................................................... 319
CDR changes activation (396) ................... 308 G4WIF FILTER .......................................... 424
Dispatcher Initiated Talk Group Selection Maximum Group EG .................................... 50
(397)......................................................... 308 NW GC in use (15)..................................... 293
DXT3p fan supervision enabled (104)........ 280 Priority level of PDU for group call ............. 333
Load based SCCH (375)............................ 305 Group Lifetime (130)...................................... 297
Location Based Group Short Data Group parameters
(417)......................................................... 309 Absence time for visiting members .............. 44

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

440/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Activate Late Entry..................................... 131 Priority level of PDU for DGNA .................. 327
Activate Priority Scanning .......................... 133 Priority level of PDU for group
Allow Pre-emptive Services ....................... 120 attachments/detachments ........................ 326
Allow Resource Pre-Emption by Normal Priority Scanning: Fast Period:
Priority Resource...................................... 121 Priority ...................................................... 134
Area Definition ........................................... 119 Priority Scanning: Fast Period; Slow
Area Type................................................... 118 Period....................................................... 135
Call Control Resource................................ 137 Priority Scanning: Scope ........................... 134
Call Duration .............................................. 129 Priority Scanning: Setup Priority................ 134
Call Setup Time ......................................... 128 Radio Path ................................................. 136
Dedicated Data Group ............................... 124 Secondary Control Channel use ................ 138
Default Scanning Priority ........................... 132 Speech Item Duration ................................ 130
Dispatcher Call........................................... 123 Status Messages (Callback and
Download Group to Radios........................ 126 Emergency Status)................................... 125
Downloading pending milestone 1 ............. 314 Talking Party Identifier................................ 123
Downloading pending milestone 2 ............. 314 Time for Delivery Reports .......................... 125
Downloading pending milestone 3 ............. 315 Guaranteed channel parameters
Downloading period 1 ................................ 316 Guaranteed channels activation (202)........ 339
Downloading period 2 ................................ 316
Downloading period 3 ................................ 317 I
Encryption Mode ........................................ 140
Individual TETRA Subscriber Identity (ITSI)
Encryption Type ......................................... 140
(MCC; MNC; ISSI ) ........................................ 85
Energy Economy........................................ 137
Inter-system interface (ISI) parameters
Fast Period; Slow Period ........................... 131
Individual call timeout in ISI calls (136)........ 380
Group Lifetime ........................................... 141
Local routing for emergency priority
Group Mode ............................................... 122
dispatcher call .......................................... 386
Group Priority............................................. 120
Setup timeout in ISI calls (134) .................. 379
Group TETRA Subscriber Identity ............. 116
IP transmission parameters........................... 227
GTSI of the group controlling the link......... 128
ISI group call in use (147).............................. 301
GTSI of the groups taking part in the
ITSI .................................................................. 85
link............................................................ 128
Home Exchange ........................................ 116
Latency Time ............................................. 130 L
Lifetime in Use ........................................... 140 List of parameters
Local ISI group linking mode...................... 127 Absence time for visiting members .............. 44
Message Delivery to Combination of ACC access parameter.............................. 185
Groups ..................................................... 126 Access Point: Default .................................. 60
Minimum Priority ........................................ 118 Access Point: Pools..................................... 60
Mnemonic .................................................. 117 Activate Data Service................................. 103
Notification to Last Dispatcher ................... 127 Activate Late Entry..................................... 131
Organisation Block..................................... 115 Activate Priority Scanning .......................... 133
Pre-Emption Speech Item Levels in ADMINISTRATION_HOUR........................ 289
Use........................................................... 122 ADMINISTRATION_MINUTES .................. 289
Pre-Emptive Resource Priority................... 121 ADVL advanced link support...................... 183
Previous User's Speech Item Aip time interval ......................................... 390
Prioritised ................................................. 121 Air Interface Encryption Method................. 109

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 441/466
 AIRC aircraft flag........................................ 190 Authentication Key Defined........................ 108
AIRPER aircraft distance reporting Authentication Required............................. 108
period ....................................................... 190 Authentication situations ............................ 360
Alert mechanism for SMSC (297) .............. 408 Authentication Triplet: Period of
Alias Assignment ......................................... 67 Validity...................................................... 109
Alias Identity: PIN For Alias Identity ............ 89 Authentication Triplet: Usage Times.......... 108
Alias Identity: Profile Id ................................ 89 Automatic COG recovery counter .............. 423
Aliasing in use (140) .................................. 299 Automatic COG recovery timer .................. 424
Allow Call Transfer....................................... 80 Automatic TCS client home change
Allow Duplex Calls ....................................... 99 (392)......................................................... 324
Allow Forced Release of Individual Call........ 80 Automatic TCS client logout (374) ............. 322
Allow lower AI security with ISI .................... 53 Average round–trip time alarm limit
Allow Pre-emptive Services ........... 77, 98, 120 (74)........................................................... 276
Allow Pre-emptive Speech Items ................. 98 AVL forwarding in fallback (378) ................ 306
Allow pre-emptive speech items over AVL TCS router ISSI 0–9 ........................... 275
ISI............................................................... 53 AVL TCS target ISSI 0–9 ........................... 276
Allow Radio Subscriber Change Access Base frequency .......................................... 170
Point Name (APN).................................... 105 Base station number .......................... 174–175
Allow Resource Pre-emption by Normal Broadcast Calls............................................ 90
Priority Resource........................................ 99 Call Control Resource................................ 137
Allow Resource Pre-Emption by Normal Call Duration .............................................. 129
Priority Resource...................................... 121 Call Forwarding on All Calls................. 95, 150
Allow Semi-Duplex Calls............................ 100 Call Forwarding on Busy.............................. 95
Allowed encryption method........................ 363 Call Forwarding on No Answer ............ 95, 150
Allowed migrating 01–10 country Call Forwarding on Not
code ......................................................... 312 Reachable .......................................... 95, 151
Allowed migrating 01–10 network Call ID range max ...................................... 272
code ......................................................... 313 Call ID range min ....................................... 272
Allowed user groups .................................... 38 Call Setup Time ......................................... 128
Ambience Listening...................................... 67 Call waiting and call forwarding indication
Amount of extracted digits ......................... 158 (364)......................................................... 382
APN Pools.................................................... 71 Called party prefix ...................................... 156
Area Definition ........................................... 119 Calling Line Identification Presentation ........ 94
Area Type................................................... 118 Calling party prefix ..................................... 158
ASSI values system range – lower limit Card number .............................................. 161
(175)......................................................... 357 Carrier frequency ....................................... 173
ASSI values system range – upper limit Carrier number........................................... 176
(176)......................................................... 357 Carrier numbers ......................................... 172
Assigned Identities: Primary Assigned Carrier pair numbers or frequencies .......... 172
Identity........................................................ 88 Cartridge number ....................................... 160
Assigned Identities: Secondary Assigned Category .................................................... 235
Identity........................................................ 88 cc parameter refresh period (0) ................. 370
Assigned Identities: Terminal Identity .......... 89 CCK change demand broadcasts .............. 361
Audio adjustment ....................................... 162 CCK change start delay ............................. 363
AUTH authentication required.................... 183 CCK change warning broadcast time ........ 362
Authentication and encryption.................... 360 CCK change warning idle time................... 362

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

442/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 CDD in network (66) .................................. 287 Count of digits removed from called
CDR changes activation (396) ................... 308 number ..................................................... 165
CEID cell index .................................. 219, 222 Count of digits removed from the
Cell index ................................................... 174 beginning of CLI ....................................... 165
Cell load sending period (183) ................... 337 Country code.............................................. 310
Cell mnemonic ........................................... 174 Cover group ............................................... 145
CENAME cell mnemonic.................... 220, 222 CPU maxload group services .................... 277
CFNRy timer for Ms subscribers (123)........ 378 CPU maxload individual services............... 278
CFNRy timer for WS subscribers CPU Overload alarm limit .......................... 278
(124)......................................................... 378 Data recovery activation/deactivation ........ 236
Channels for dedicated sending profile DCK retrieval support (296) (Encrypted
(344)......................................................... 411 initial registration support) ........................ 321
Channels for important sending profile DDCH downlink load throughput
(338)......................................................... 411 (398)......................................................... 418
Channels for normal sending profile Decoded speech volume ................... 163, 165
(335)......................................................... 411 Dedicated data channels in use (148)........ 302
Channels for paging sending profile Dedicated Data Group ............................... 124
(347)......................................................... 411 Default Access Point Name ....................... 105
Channels for repeating sending profile Default authentication data use count........ 361
(341)......................................................... 411 Default authentication data validity
Charging option for Storage service .......... 406 period ....................................................... 364
Charging options for SMSGW (200) .......... 406 Default authentication data validity period
CIRC circuit mode data service ................. 182 type .......................................................... 365
CLASS security class................................. 184 Default route DXT ...................................... 237
Clear emergency call in always E2EE Default Scanning Priority ........................... 132
group (298)............................................... 387 Default validity time for SDS
Clear WS login allowed (27) ...................... 294 messages................................................. 406
CLI included in AL calls................................ 53 Default validity time for SDS-TL
Client Applications ....................................... 72 messages (192) ....................................... 406
CLIR for FSSN ........................................... 100 Default validity time for status
CLIR for ITSI .............................................. 100 messages................................................. 406
CLIR for MSISDN....................................... 101 Dejitter buffer size (96)............................... 253
CLIR override (25) ..................................... 287 Destination DXT ID .................................... 283
CM maxload for registrations and Digit string added to called number ........... 165
calls .......................................................... 277 Direct call inactivity time............................... 45
CM maxload for WS commands ................ 277 Direct sending before storage (294) .......... 408
Coding type................................................ 165 Dispatcher Call........................................... 123
COL colour code ....................................... 189 Dispatcher Initiated Talk Group Selection
Combiner type............................................ 174 (397)......................................................... 308
Common Secondary Control Channels: Dispatcher-initiated Emergency Call
SCCH Class ............................................... 59 Allowed (129) ........................................... 296
Confirmed group call (127) ........................ 296 Display type ............................................... 234
Connect to number .................................... 205 Distribution flag .......................................... 283
Connection group identifier ........................ 154 Distribution forwarding flag ........................ 283
Connection type ......................................... 158 DLTO radio downlink timeout..................... 186
Control channel width in TEDS (311)......... 340 Download Group to Radios........................ 126

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 443/466
 Downloading pending milestone 1 ............. 314 Enable Participation in End-to-End
Downloading pending milestone 2 ............. 314 Encrypted Calls .................................. 80, 110
Downloading pending milestone 3 ............. 315 Encoded speech volume.................... 163, 165
Downloading period 1 ................................ 316 ENCR air interface encryption service........ 183
Downloading period 2 ................................ 316 Encryption Mode ........................................ 140
Downloading period 3 ................................ 317 Encryption Type ......................................... 140
DREG de-registration................................. 180 End frequency............................................ 170
Dual Watch Absence Period ........................ 58 End value of the range............................... 283
Duplex individual calls to dispatchers Energy Economy........................................ 137
(293)......................................................... 381 Energy economy (57)................................. 287
Duplex space ............................................. 168 Energy Economy Group: Energy Saving
Duplex space index.................................... 168 Mode .......................................................... 57
DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB Energy Economy Group: Start Point
INTERVAL (99) ........................................ 255 Frame Number ........................................... 58
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO Energy Economy mode for background
INITIAL (100)............................................ 255 groups ...................................................... 319
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO ENHANCED_AUDIO_MON (103).............. 288
MAX (101) ................................................ 256 Entry Rights ............................................... 139
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO ESN CUG analysis starting tree
MIN (102) ................................................. 256 number ..................................................... 267
DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK ESN external line analysis starting
TIMEOUT (103)........................................ 257 tree ........................................................... 268
DWS support for compression ................... 279 EXCAP exclusive capacity for TBS
DXT ID ....................................................... 283 allowed ..................................................... 207
DXT name.................................................. 283 EXCELL expedited cell reselection............ 205
DXT support for type 1 handover............... 273 Extended ACCH in use (53)....................... 294
DXT U-plane DXT ...................................... 189 Extended VPN for communication
DXT with transit key database ................... 359 rights ........................................................ 299
DXT-DXT satellite offset timer (377) .......... 323 Extended VPN for G4WIF.......................... 300
DXT3p fan supervision enabled (104)........ 280 Extended VPN for management rights........ 300
Echo cancellation mode............................. 165 External line index...................................... 155
EIR system id............................................. 319 F18EXT frame 18 extension ...................... 189
Emergency call pre-emption in fallback Fast Period; Slow Period ........................... 131
(369)......................................................... 388 FBMOD TBS fallback mode allowed.......... 206
Emergency Call Type................................. 124 Fixed TBS fallback mode parameters........ 329
Emergency group call area (295)............... 387 Fleet Specific Short Number (FSSN) ........... 86
Emergency ident ........................................ 383 Fleet Specific Short number domain.......... 148
Emergency number 01–10......................... 384 Fleet Specific Short Number Domain
Emergency number handling mode ........... 386 Numbering.................................................. 81
Emergency Target........................................ 48 Fleet Specific Short number Identifier........ 148
Emergency Target: Emergency Target of FNIM card .................................................. 155
Organisation Block ................................... 103 FNIM unit ................................................... 154
Emergency Target: External Network ........ 102 Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
Emergency Target: TETRA Network ......... 101 Number) ............................................. 96, 151
Emg calls allowed during temporary Forwarded to number (TETRA
disable...................................................... 386 Number) ............................................. 96, 151

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

444/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Frequency band index ....................... 169, 175 Groups ......................................................... 72
FRH fast reselect hysteresis ...................... 202 GTSI of the group controlling the link......... 128
FRT fast reselect threshold........................ 201 GTSI of the groups taking part in the
FSSN base SSI.......................................... 351 link............................................................ 128
FSSN domain ID analysis starting tree Guaranteed channels activation (202)........ 339
number ..................................................... 268 Higher limit of cell load............................... 338
FSSN prefix digit ........................................ 349 HLR of APNs and APN pools............. 318, 422
FWDREG forward registration HLR of connection groups ................. 318, 422
support ..................................................... 204 HLR of SwMI definitions............................. 319
G4WIF FILTER .......................................... 424 Home DXT of MSISDNs ............................ 422
G4WIF signaling QoS tagging DSCP Home Exchange .......................... 56, 116, 148
(114) ......................................................... 261 Hook indiv call (3) ...................................... 286
G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for Hysteresis of cell load ................................ 337
DXT (108)................................................. 258 Identifier ....................................................... 55
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB IMM immediate .......................................... 187
INTERVAL (110)....................................... 259 Incoming Communication: CLIP .................. 77
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO Incoming Communication: CLIR
INITIAL (111) ............................................ 259 Override ..................................................... 78
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO Incoming ISI signaling connection closing
MAX (112) ................................................ 260 time .......................................................... 165
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO Incoming PSTN/PABX calls forwarded
MIN (113) ................................................. 260 (12(........................................................... 379
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK Individual Call Area .................................... 113
TIMEOUT (109)........................................ 259 Individual call area in use (126) ................. 295
Gateway ISSI ............................................. 159 Individual Call Maximum Duration for
Gateway SSI ........................................ 96, 151 Calling Party....................................... 81, 101
General acknowledged status I1................ 398 Individual Call Service Interaction................ 51
General acknowledged status I2................ 399 Individual call setup time for called MS........ 45
General acknowledged status u1............... 399 Individual call setup time for called TCS
General acknowledged status u2............... 400 client........................................................... 46
General status acknowledgement.............. 400 Individual call speech item max. time
Group addressed status/SDS delivery (3)............................................................. 370
attribute (136)........................................... 298 Individual call timeout in ISI calls (136)........ 380
Group attachment in registration Individual Calls............................................. 90
message (372) ......................................... 322 Individual calls allowed .............................. 145
Group Call Service Interaction ..................... 51 Individual Short Subscriber Identity
Group Combining......................................... 73 (ISSI) ........................................................ 148
Group Communications ............................... 67 IndividualCalls.............................................. 67
Group Lifetime ........................................... 141 Interexchange speech line testing
Group Lifetime (130) .................................. 297 interval...................................................... 237
Group membership replication Interface unit .............................................. 150
optimization .............................................. 318 International Mobile Subscriber Identifier
Group Mode ............................................... 122 (IMSI) ....................................................... 104
Group Overlay Identity ............................... 144 IP Address ................................................. 104
Group Priority............................................. 120 IP Address Ranges ...................................... 60
Group TETRA Subscriber Identity ............. 116 IP transmission parameters ....................... 227

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 445/466
 IP voice base UDP port value (97)............. 253 Logical TSL number................................... 283
IPSEC IP security for DXT-TBS Lower limit of cell load................................ 338
interface ................................................... 209 Lowest TBS SW level (95) ......................... 294
ISDN release code for TETRA subscriber Main org max resource pre-emption level
does not answer....................................... 165 (111) ........................................................... 39
ISDN release code for TETRA subscriber Main organizations right for pre-emption
is out of coverage..................................... 165 (110) ........................................................... 39
ISDN release code for TETRA Management blocking................................ 423
subscriber's terminal is switched off......... 165 Max called party alert time in emergency
ISI Communications............................... 68, 91 calls .......................................................... 387
ISI group call in use (147) .......................... 301 Max dedicated data channels in cell .......... 210
ISI group call inactivity timer (366)............. 382 Max handover time for individual calls ......... 47
ISI group call setup response time .............. 47 Max MS count in group call ToC (373)........ 383
ISI late entry interval (367)......................... 382 Max number of call forwardings (125)........ 378
ISI originating setup response time ............. 48 Max packet data channels in cell ............... 209
ISI speech item priority ................................ 53 Max resource queuing time........................ 324
ISI version .................................................. 159 Max resource queuing time – type 1
ITSI .............................................................. 85 handover (172)......................................... 380
JAMMOD jamming algorithm version ........ 200 Max served users in QAM PDCH
JATIM minimum MCCH change period (371)......................................................... 346
on jamming............................................... 208 Max TBS SW DL (8) .................................. 291
Keep requested simplex/duplex mode Max TEDS TTRXs in TBS (312) ................ 340
(32)........................................................... 372 MAX_FILE_COUNT................................... 289
LAID location area identifier............... 219, 221 Maximum allowed management ................ 427
LANAME location area mnemonic Maximum allowed message....................... 426
......................................................... 219, 222 Maximum allowed message queue
Latency Time ............................................. 130 load .......................................................... 425
LDTIM link down timeout period ................ 207 Maximum digits in called number............... 165
Lease Period.............................................. 390 Maximum DTMF tone length...................... 165
Lifetime in Use ........................................... 140 Maximum duration for emergency call ......... 46
Line type .................................................... 154 Maximum duration for normal individual
LME alarm cancelling................................. 427 call.............................................................. 47
Load based SCCH (375)............................ 305 Maximum Group EG .................................... 50
Load limit at main control channel ............. 279 Maximum transferring MSs in TEDS
Local ISI group linking mode...................... 127 TTRX (331) .............................................. 346
Local routing for emergency priority Maxload for data recovery ......................... 279
dispatcher call .......................................... 386 MCCH downlink alarm limit........................ 418
Local routing for normal dispatcher call MCCH downlink load control
(180)......................................................... 381 throughput ................................................ 417
Location area identifier............................... 167 Message Delivery to Combination of
Location area identifier and Groups ..................................................... 126
mnemonic................................................. 174 MIGR migration.......................................... 181
Location area mnemonic............................ 167 Migration Allowed....................................... 113
Location based group call in use (133)........ 297 Minimum allowed registration and
Location Based Group Short Data recovery period (203) ............................... 321
(417)......................................................... 309 Minimum DTMF tone length....................... 165

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

446/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Minimum Priority ........................................ 118 N2013 WT for group call on assigned
MINM minimum mode service ................... 181 channel..................................................... 196
Mismatching registration rejected N2014 framelength for individual call on
(199)......................................................... 320 assigned channel ..................................... 196
Mnemonic .............. 55, 87, 117, 145, 149, 158 N2015 framelength for group call on
MNI analysis starting tree number ............. 269 assigned channel ..................................... 196
Mobile country code................................... 423 N2016 number of sent
Mobile network code .................................. 423 CCK-id-elements...................................... 196
Mobile Subscriber ISDN Numbering ............ 81 N2017 number of sent extended
Mobile Subscriber ISDN Numbering services-elements .................................... 197
(MSISDN)................................................... 87 N2018 jammer detection level ................... 197
Mobile subscriber ISDN numbers .............. 149 N2019 jamming noise floor max ................ 198
MS Special Priority .................................... 300 N252HP maximum BL-DATA
MS-ISDN prefix digit .................................. 349 retransmission for high priority SDUs........ 198
MSISDN Country Code (178) .................... 358 N252LP maximum BL-DATA
MSISDN home analysis starting tree retransmission for low priority SDUs ........ 198
number ..................................................... 269 N253 default BL_UDATA repetitions.......... 199
MSISDN individual (duplex) calls via Nature of neighbourhood
PSTN (107) .............................................. 374 relationship....................................... 221, 224
MSISDN International prefix (177) ............. 358 Network code ............................................. 310
MSISDN National prefix (179).................... 358 Network delay ............................................ 389
MSISDN used as CPI/TPI in Individual Network identifier ....................................... 422
Calls and SDS/Status Message ................. 52 Networking mode (376).............................. 323
N2001 maximum number of unused TCH NITSI prefix digit ........................................ 350
timeslots ................................................... 192 Noise attenuation level............................... 165
N2002 RSSI threshold for carrier Normal Priority ............................................. 97
jamming detection .................................... 192 Normal Registration CDR data generation
N2003 threshold number of consecutive mechanism (132) ..................................... 297
jammed time slots .................................... 193 Not valid ASSI gap high limit...................... 237
N2004 RSSI threshold for collision Not valid ASSI gap low limit ....................... 237
detection................................................... 193 Notification from busy called party
N2005 minimum length of random access (299)......................................................... 382
frames ...................................................... 193 Notification to Last Dispatcher ................... 127
N2006 maximum allowed path delay ......... 193 NRXLEV minimum RX access level in
N2007 Number of consecutive jammed monitored cell........................................... 203
slots.......................................................... 194 NTXPWR maximum MS transmit power
N2008 threshold number ........................... 194 in monitored cell ....................................... 203
N2009 maximum length of random NU number of random access
access frame............................................ 194 transmissions ........................................... 188
N2010 IMM for individual call on assigned Num external line range lower limit............ 353
channel..................................................... 195 Num gateway SSI range higher limit.......... 351
N2011 IMM for group call on assigned Num gateway SSI range lower limit ........... 352
channel..................................................... 195 Num system address lower limit ................ 354
N2012 WT for individual call on assigned Num TCS SSI range lower limit (43).......... 353
channel..................................................... 195 Number of monitoring lines ........................ 162
Number of voice mail system 01................ 355

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 447/466
 Number of voice mail system 02................ 356 Pd - maximum limit for suspended
NW DXTs SW level (5)............................... 290 data .......................................................... 397
NW GC in use (15)..................................... 293 Pd - maximum transmission units .............. 391
NW internal rec (14)................................... 292 Pd - nmber of timeslots .............................. 394
Obtain an IP Address Automatically .......... 103 Pd - number of segment
Offset ......................................................... 170 retransmissions ........................................ 394
Organisation block ............................. 143, 147 Pd - partial record interval (28) .................. 389
Organisation Block......................... 65, 84, 115 Pd - ready timer ......................................... 393
Organisation Blocks ..................................... 73 Pd - standby timer...................................... 392
Organisation identifier ................................ 234 Pd - tl-sdu window size .............................. 395
Organisation Parameters ............................. 74 Pd IP ITSI (13) ........................................... 292
Organisation Visibility................................... 62 Pd IP spoofing detect (125) ....................... 295
OSTE-NISI transform (89) ......................... 250 Pd MSMS ACC (12)................................... 292
Other CDR data generation mechanism Pd SW version (11) .................................... 291
(395)......................................................... 308 Performance management enhancement
Outgoing Communication: CLIR for (300)......................................................... 339
FSSN.......................................................... 79 Periodic Registration: Subscriber
Outgoing Communication: CLIR for Registration Checked by .......................... 110
ITSI............................................................. 78 PISN number digits 01–08 ......................... 270
Outgoing Communication: CLIR for PISN number digits 09–16 ......................... 270
MSISDN ..................................................... 79 PISN number digits 17–24 ......................... 270
Outgoing ISI signaling connection closing PISN number digits 25–32 ......................... 270
time .......................................................... 165 Pre-Emption Speech Item Levels in
Override Calling Line Identification Use........................................................... 122
Restriction .................................................. 94 Pre-emptive priority levels release 6.0
PABX Calls............................................. 69, 91 (138)......................................................... 298
PABX numbering integrated to fleet........... 149 Pre-emptive Resource Priority .................... 98
PABX Numbering Integrated to Fleet........... 86 Pre-Emptive Resource Priority............. 77, 121
PABX prefix digit ........................................ 350 Pre-emptive Services: Pre-emptive
Parameter identifier.................................... 234 Rights Allowed ........................................... 56
Parameter type .......................................... 233 Previous User's Speech Item
Parameter value......................................... 234 Prioritised ................................................. 121
Passing Acceptance Status ......................... 85 Primary distance ........................................ 283
Passing control in use (131) ...................... 297 Primary route ............................................. 283
Password ..................................................... 66 PRIO priority cell ........................................ 181
PCM number...................................... 155, 165 Priorities: Normal Priority............................. 76
PCM number and Time slot ....................... 161 Priority category broadcast call (118)........... 41
PCM TSL number ...................................... 283 Priority category dedicated data channels
PCM type ................................................... 165 (119) ........................................................... 41
Pd – response_wait timer .......................... 391 Priority category direct call (117).................. 41
PD - Access mode (370)............................ 397 Priority category eme individual call
Pd - allowed number of tl-sdu (116) ........................................................... 41
retransmission.......................................... 395 Priority category external network call
Pd - data transfer throughput .................... 394 (115) .......................................................... 40
Pd - inactivity timer..................................... 396 Priority category group call (114) ................. 40
Pd - maximum length of tl-sdu ................... 388 Priority category packet data (112) .............. 40

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

448/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Priority category telephone style call Radio User Assignment Services:
(113) ........................................................... 40 Radio User Assignment Required in
Priority for packet data ............................... 328 Registration ................................................ 88
Priority for registration on TEDS (325)........ 344 Radio User Assignment Services:
Priority for SDS 1, 2, and 3 messages........ 405 Radio User Assignment Signalling
Priority for SDS 4 messages...................... 404 Supported................................................... 88
Priority for status messages....................... 403 Radio-units allowed to queue
Priority lev of group att/det PDU on TEDS B-subscriber (10)...................................... 371
(327)......................................................... 344 Ranking value ............................................ 178
Priority level of PDU for AL call.................. 325 Recovery for Tracked MSs only ................... 49
Priority level of PDU for DGNA .................. 327 Recovery of client applications .................. 237
Priority level of PDU for DGNA on TEDS Recovery of group data.............................. 238
(326)......................................................... 344 Recovery of MSISDN/FSSN numbers........ 238
Priority level of PDU for direct call ............. 334 Recovery of organisation blocks ................ 238
Priority level of PDU for group Recovery of subnets .................................. 239
attachments/detachments ........................ 326 Recovery of subscriber location................. 239
Priority level of PDU for group call ............. 333 Recovery Period ........................................ 240
Priority level of PDU for on/off hook Recovery start hours.................................. 240
call............................................................ 333 Recovery start minutes .............................. 241
Priority level of PDU for PSTN/PABX Redundancy of dedicated sending profile
call............................................................ 335 (343)......................................................... 410
Priority level of PDU for registration........... 329 Redundancy of important sending profile
Priority of dedicated sending profile (337)......................................................... 410
(342)......................................................... 409 Redundancy of normal sending profile
Priority of important sending profile (334)......................................................... 410
(336)......................................................... 409 Redundancy of paging sending profile
Priority of normal sending profile (333)........ 409 (346)......................................................... 410
Priority of paging sending profile (345)........ 409 Redundancy of repeating sending profile
Priority of repeating sending profile (340)......................................................... 410
(339)......................................................... 409 Refresh time for speech items (11) ............ 371
Priority Scanning: Fast Period: Refreshing period....................................... 311
Priority ...................................................... 134 REG registration ........................................ 180
Priority Scanning: Fast Period; Slow Registration CDR data generation
Period....................................................... 135 mechanism (394) ..................................... 307
Priority Scanning: Scope ........................... 134 Registration Period ...................................... 49
Priority Scanning: Setup Priority................ 134 Related data............................................... 157
PSTN Calls ............................................ 69, 92 Requests and Status Messages ............ 70, 92
PSTN prefix digit ........................................ 350 Resource Usage: User Group
Q3 DX alarm forwarding enabled Identifier ..................................................... 57
(241)......................................................... 285 Reverse operation...................................... 171
Q3 Interface in use (814) ........................... 286 Routing period............................................ 389
QoS control enabled (95)........................... 280 RXLEV minimum RX access level ............. 185
R2 signaling parameter (33) ...................... 373 Satellite abis (31) ....................................... 286
Radio Path ................................................. 136 SBOFF disallowed subscriber
Radio Subscribers........................................ 74 classes ..................................................... 179
SBON allowed subscriber classes ............. 179

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 449/466
 SCCH class bit mask (121).......................... 39 Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT
Screening indicator of CLI.......................... 165 (85)........................................................... 263
SDS Messages ...................................... 70, 93 Signalling QoS tagging DSCP (90) ............ 250
SDS on PDHC ........................................... 405 SIP GW identifier ....................................... 157
SDS-TL addressing method....................... 336 SIP signalling QoS tagging DSCP
Secondary Control Channel use ................ 138 (98)........................................................... 254
Secondary control channels currently SMSGW ISSI 01–32 .................................. 407
active........................................................ 210 SNDCP IP packet data service .................. 182
Secondary control channels defined.......... 210 Sorting format ............................................ 235
Secondary distance ................................... 283 SOTIM DXT switchover timeout................. 208
Secondary route......................................... 283 Source routing............................................ 390
Selectable Message Sending Profiles ......... 71 Spare HLR DXT ID .................................... 242
Selected group ident .................................. 355 Spare SMSGW ISSI 01–32........................ 407
Send Gateway SSI when CLIR is active Specify an IP Address................................ 104
(88)........................................................... 374 Speech Item Duration ................................ 130
Send network time ..................................... 339 Speech Item Priority............................... 76, 97
Service priority packet data (106) ................ 43 Speech item priority and priority value
Service priority parameters .......................... 42 range 1-20 in use (128)............................ 296
Service priority parameters: Broadcast SRH slow reselect hysteresis .................... 202
call.............................................................. 42 SRT slow reselect threshold above
Service priority parameters: dedicated fast ........................................................... 200
data channels............................................. 44 SSI analysis starting tree number .............. 270
Service priority parameters: Direct call........ 43 SSI partitioned 01 – 10 MNI (301 –
Service priority parameters: Emergency 310) .......................................................... 359
individual call.............................................. 43 Start tree for incoming CPI analysis........... 159
Service priority parameters: External Start value of the range.............................. 283
network call ................................................ 43 Status indicator I ........................................ 402
Service priority parameters: Group call........ 42 Status indicator type .................................. 402
Service priority parameters: Pre-emptive Status indicator u ....................................... 402
emergency individual call ........................... 42 Status Messages (Callback and
Service priority parameters: Emergency Status)................................... 125
Telephony-style call.................................... 43 Status messages callback request
Session key 0–8 (18–26) ........................... 293 (13)........................................................... 397
SetFilter...................................................... 429 Status messages entry request (14) .......... 398
SetLogging................................................. 428 Status messages scanning off ................... 401
Setup timeout in ISI calls (134) .................. 379 Status messages scanning on ................... 401
SFRAM speech frame format type............. 206 Status messages urgent request ............... 403
Short Data Services: Acknowledgement Storage for SDS-TL messages allowed
for Messages............................................ 106 (201)......................................................... 406
Short Data Services: Allow Using STORAGE_LENGTH................................. 289
Storage............................................... 80, 105 Sub timeslot ............................................... 162
Short Data Services: Right to Use Subscriber Class Definition........................ 112
Gateway with External Networks ............... 79 Subscriber Class Definition: Default
Short Data Services: Right to Use Value .......................................................... 61
Gateway with External Systems............... 106 Subscriber Class Definition: Locked............ 61
Short Subscriber Identity Numbering ........... 82 SwMI ident ................................................. 311

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

450/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 System code (26)....................................... 311 TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK
System identifier of neighbour cell ............. 220 TIMEOUT (88).......................................... 265
T2001 access define PDU interval on TBS speech item duration in fallback
MCCH ...................................................... 191 group 01 (111) .......................................... 375
T2002 downlink stealing time..................... 191 TBS speech item duration in fallback
T2003 channel reserve refresh time .......... 191 group 02 (112).......................................... 375
T2004 time to send max frame in TBS speech item duration in fallback
startup ...................................................... 192 group 03 (113).......................................... 376
T252 acknowledgement waiting timer........ 199 TCEID cell index ........................................ 223
TACC access parameter in TEDS ............. 213 TCENAME cell mnemonic ......................... 223
Tactilon ISSI ............................................... 349 TCIRC circuit mode data for TEDS............ 211
TADVR advanced link roaming support in TCS client emergency target length........... 273
TEDS........................................................ 211 TCS client emergency target, digits
Talking Party Identifier................................ 123 1–8 ........................................................... 274
TBS configuration period ........................... 261 TCS client emergency target, digits
TBS fallback GSSI 01 ................................ 330 9–16 ......................................................... 274
TBS fallback GSSI 02 ................................ 330 TDLTO radio downlink timeout for
TBS fallback GSSI 03 ................................ 331 TEDS........................................................ 214
TBS fallback indication SDS (145)............. 301 TDPRI data priority support in TEDS ......... 211
TBS jamming detection improvement TDSC connection parameters.................... 303
(416)......................................................... 309 TDSC type ................................................. 304
TBS load monitoring data format version TDXTID system identifier ........................... 224
(75)........................................................... 242 TEDS - Allowed segment retransmission
TBS load monitoring in use (137) .............. 298 (315)......................................................... 340
TBS load monitoring tool ip address TEDS - Allowed tl-sdu retransmission
field1 (76) ................................................. 243 (314)......................................................... 340
TBS load monitoring tool ip address TEDS - Packet data PDU priority
field2 (77) ................................................. 243 (316)......................................................... 341
TBS load monitoring tool ip address TEDS - TL-SDU win size in extended AL
field3 (78) ................................................. 244 (318)......................................................... 341
TBS load monitoring tool ip address TEDS - TL-SDU win size in original AL
field4 (79) ................................................. 244 (317)......................................................... 341
TBS load monitoring tool IP address type TEDS carrier timing (415) .......................... 308
(80)........................................................... 244 TEDS DL signalling cadence (319)............ 342
TBS load monitoring tool port number TEDS L2 feedback duration (T.230)
(81)........................................................... 245 (320)......................................................... 342
TBS monitoring data interval (82) .............. 245 TEDS L2 feedback interval (T.231)
TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB (321)......................................................... 343
INTERVAL (83) ........................................ 261 TEDS max number of reserved slots for
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO MS (330) .................................................. 345
INITIAL (84).............................................. 262 TEDS max waiting time for slot grant
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO (324)......................................................... 344
MAX (86) .................................................. 263 TEDS min amount of RA slots in
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO multiframe (329) ....................................... 345
MIN (87) ................................................... 264 TEDS minimum granting delay (322)......... 343

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 451/466
 TEDS start-high-go-low starting level Threshold for message queue load
(323)......................................................... 343 limiting end .............................................. 426
TEDS system code (365)........................... 322 Time for Delivery Reports .......................... 125
TEDS waiting time for random access Time gap between DTMF tones................. 165
ack (328) .................................................. 345 TIMM immediate in TEDS.......................... 214
TEDS: Allowed TEDS Functionality ........... 106 TINTLEA long interleaver support in
TEDS: Ready Timer................................... 107 TEDS........................................................ 211
TEI query enable........................................ 320 TLAID location area identifier..................... 222
TENCR air interface encryption for TLANAME location area mnemonic........... 223
TEDS........................................................ 211 TMINPRI minimum PDU priority for
Terminal disable enable in fallback TEDS........................................................ 215
(391)......................................................... 306 TN2005 minimum length of random
Terminal disable enable pending time access frame in TEDS ............................. 216
(379)......................................................... 347 TN2006 maximum allowed path delay in
Terminal disable enable Sub-Protocol ID TEDS........................................................ 217
(380)......................................................... 347 TN2009 maximum length of random
Terminal disabler authorized ISSI 01 – 10 access frame in TEDS ............................. 217
(381–390)................................................. 348 TNRXLEV minimum RX access level in
Terminal Enable/Disable: ITSI TEDS monitored cell ................................ 218
Permanently Disabled ...............................111 TNTXPWR maximum transmitting power
Terminal Enable/Disable: Over the Air of MS in monitored TEDS cell .................. 218
Status ....................................................... 112 TNU number of random access
Terminal Enable/Disable: Reason for transmissions on TEDS uplink ................. 215
Disabling the Terminal...............................111 ToBB Rel 1 activated in the DXT................ 281
Terminal Enable/Disable: Terminal ToBB server SIP UDP listen port (106)........ 265
Supports Enable/Disable Over the ToBB signaling QoS tagging DSCP
Air..............................................................111 (105)......................................................... 258
Terminal Enable/Disable: TETRA Tone volume....................................... 162, 165
Equipment Identity (TEI) Status ............... 112 Tracking Recovery Period............................ 49
TETRA IP transmission parameters .......... 227 Traffic channel reservation......................... 156
TEXADV extended advanced links and Transcoding mode ............................. 161, 165
MAC-U-BLCK supported in TEDS ........... 211 Tromboning prevention mechanism
TEXCELL expedited cell reselection in (182)......................................................... 381
TEDS........................................................ 218 TRXLEV minimum RX access level in
TFREQ1DA sending frequency of ext TEDS........................................................ 212
services 1da element ............................... 215 TSI analysis starting tree number .............. 271
TFREQ2 sending frequency of ext TSRH slow reselect hysteresis in
services 2 element ................................... 216 TEDS........................................................ 218
TFRH fast reselect hysteresis in TSRT slow reselect threshold above fast
TEDS........................................................ 218 in TEDS.................................................... 218
TFRT fast reselect threshold in TEDS........ 218 TT252 acknowledgement waiting timer
TFWDREG forward registration support for TEDS .................................................. 217
in TEDS.................................................... 218 TTRX index ................................................ 175
Threshold for management................ 427–428 TTRX operation mode................................ 178
Threshold for message .............................. 426 TTXPWR maximum transmitting power
of MS in TEDS ......................................... 212

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

452/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 TVOICE voice service for TEDS ................ 211
TWIDTH carrier bandwidth on TEDS......... 216
M
Two-way cell relationship ........................... 221 Management event logging parameters
TWT waiting time for random access SetFilter...................................................... 429
acknowledgement in TEDS...................... 215 SetLogging................................................. 428
TX power.................................................... 176 MML command log parameters
TXPWR maximum MS transmit power........ 184 ADMINISTRATION_HOUR........................ 289
Type of number of CLI ............................... 165 ADMINISTRATION_MINUTES .................. 289
Unit type..................................................... 160 MAX_FILE_COUNT................................... 289
Use dedicated profile for Protocol ID STORAGE_LENGTH................................. 289
01–04 (356–359)...................................... 413 WRITE_CACHE_TIMEOUT....................... 288
Use important profile for Protocol ID Mobility parameters
01–04 (348 – 351).................................... 413 Allowed migrating 01–10 country
Use of Fixed TBS fallback parameters in code ......................................................... 312
Enhanced TBS fallback mode.................. 331 Allowed migrating 01–10 network
Use of TEDS options (313) ........................ 340 code ......................................................... 313
Use paging profile for Protocol ID 01–04 CEID cell index .................................. 219, 222
(360–363)................................................. 413 CENAME cell mnemonic............................ 220
Use repeating profile for Protocol ID Country code.............................................. 310
01–04 (352 – 355).................................... 413 EXCELL expedited cell reselection............ 205
Use SDS4 Sending profiles (332) .............. 409 FRH fast reselect hysteresis ...................... 202
User name ................................................... 66 FRT fast reselect threshold........................ 201
Utility Service ............................................. 156 FWDREG forward registration
V-ASSI value range – lower limit................ 266 support ..................................................... 204
V-ASSI value range – upper limit ............... 266 HLR of APNs and APN pools..................... 318
Visiting Org Block......................................... 84 HLR of connection groups ......................... 318
Visitor ASSI allocation (368) ...................... 322 HLR of SwMI definitions............................. 319
VLR cleanup notice.................................... 246 Mobile country code................................... 423
VLR cleanup period ................................... 246 Mobile network code .................................. 423
VLR cleanup start hours ............................ 247 Nature of neighbourhood relationship........ 221
VLR cleanup start minutes......................... 248 Network identifier ....................................... 422
VLR inactivity time ..................................... 249 Priority level of PDU for registration........... 329
VLR usage limit.......................................... 249 SRH slow reselect hysteresis .................... 202
Voice Communication enabled .................. 149 SRT slow reselect threshold above
Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92)......... 251 fast ........................................................... 200
Voice frame QoS tagging IEEE_802.1p System identifier of neighbour cell ............. 220
(93)........................................................... 252 Two-way cell relationship ........................... 221
VOICE TETRA voice service ..................... 182 MS Special Priority ........................................ 300
Voice transport VLAN identifier (94)........... 252
Who can release an emergency call.......... 383 N
Workstation User Networking (393) ........... 307
N2006 maximum allowed path delay............. 193
Workstation Users........................................ 75
N2011 IMM for group call on assigned
WRITE_CACHE_TIMEOUT....................... 288
channel ........................................................ 195
WT waiting time ......................................... 188
Network and registration parameters
Location based group call in use (133).......... 297
Automatic TCS client home change
(392)......................................................... 324

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 453/466
 Automatic TCS client logout (374) ............. 322 CM maxload for registrations and
DCK retrieval support (296) (Encrypted calls .......................................................... 277
initial registration support) ........................ 321 CM maxload for WS commands ................ 277
Dejitter buffer size (96)............................... 253 CPU maxload group services .................... 277
DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB CPU maxload individual services............... 278
INTERVAL (99) ........................................ 255 CPU Overload alarm limit .......................... 278
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO Data recovery activation/deactivation ........ 236
INITIAL (100)............................................ 255 Default route DXT ...................................... 237
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO Destination DXT ID .................................... 283
MAX (101) ................................................ 256 Distribution flag .......................................... 283
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO Distribution forwarding flag ........................ 283
MIN (102) ................................................. 256 DWS support for compression ................... 279
DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK DXT ID ....................................................... 283
TIMEOUT (103)........................................ 257 DXT name.................................................. 283
G4WIF signaling QoS tagging DSCP End value of the range............................... 283
(114) ......................................................... 261 ENHANCED_AUDIO_MON (103).............. 288
G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for HLR of ANs and APN pools ....................... 318
DXT (108)................................................. 258 HLR of connection groups ................. 318, 422
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB HLR of SwMI definitions............................. 319
INTERVAL (110)....................................... 259 HLS of APNs and APN pools..................... 422
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO Home DXT of MSISDNs ............................ 422
INITIAL (111) ............................................ 259 Interexchange speech line testing
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO interval...................................................... 237
MAX (112) ................................................ 260 LME alarm cancelling................................. 427
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO Load limit at main control channel ............. 279
MIN (113) ................................................. 260 Logical TSL number................................... 283
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK Lowest TBS SW level (95) ......................... 294
TIMEOUT (109)........................................ 259 Management blocking................................ 423
IP voice base UDP port value (97)............. 253 Maximum allowed management ................ 427
Mismatching registration rejected Maximum allowed message....................... 426
(199)......................................................... 320 Maximum allowed message queue
OSTE-NISI transform (89) ......................... 250 load .......................................................... 425
Signalling QoS tagging DSCP (90) ............ 250 Maxload for data recovery ......................... 279
SIP signalling QoS tagging DSCP Network code ............................................. 310
(98)........................................................... 254 Not valid ASSI gap high limit...................... 237
ToBB signaling QoS tagging DSCP Not valid ASSI gap low limit ....................... 237
(105)......................................................... 258 NW DXTs SW level (5)............................... 290
Visitor ASSI allocation (368) ...................... 322 PCM TSL number ...................................... 283
Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92)......... 251 Primary distance ........................................ 283
Voice frame QoS tagging IEEE_802.1p Primary route ............................................. 283
(93)........................................................... 252 Recovery of client applications .................. 237
Voice transport VLAN identifier (94)........... 252 Recovery of group data.............................. 238
Network management parameters Recovery of MISISDN/FSSN
Average round–trip time alarm limit numbers ................................................... 238
(74)........................................................... 276 Recovery of organisation blocks ................ 238
CDD in network.......................................... 287 Recovery of subnets .................................. 239

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

454/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Recovery of subscriber location................. 239 Fleet Specific Short Number (FSSN) ........... 86
Recovery period......................................... 240 Fleet Specific Short Number Domain
Recovery start hours.................................. 240 Numbering.................................................. 81
Recovery start minutes .............................. 241 FSSN base SSI.......................................... 351
Secondary distance ................................... 283 FSSN domain ID analysis starting tree
Secondary route......................................... 283 number ..................................................... 268
SetFilter...................................................... 429 FSSN prefix digit ........................................ 349
SetLogging................................................. 428 Gateway ISSI ............................................. 159
Spare HLR DXT ID .................................... 242 International Mobile Subscriber Identifier
Start value of the range.............................. 283 (IMSI) ....................................................... 104
TBS load monitoring data format version ISI version .................................................. 159
(75)........................................................... 242 ITSI .............................................................. 85
TBS load monitoring tool ip address Mnemonic .................................................. 158
field1 (76) ................................................. 243 MNI analysis starting tree number ............. 269
TBS load monitoring tool ip address Mobile Subscriber ISDN Numbering ............ 81
field2 (77) ................................................. 243 Mobile Subscriber ISDN Numbering
TBS load monitoring tool ip address (MSISDN)................................................... 87
field3 (78) ................................................. 244 MS-ISDN prefix digit .................................. 349
TBS load monitoring tool ip address MSISDN home analysis starting tree
field4 (79) ................................................. 244 number ..................................................... 269
TBS load monitoring tool IP address type NITSI prefix digit ........................................ 350
(80)........................................................... 244 Num external line range lower limit............ 353
TBS load monitoring tool port number Num gateway SSI range higher limit.......... 351
(81)........................................................... 245 Num gateway SSI range lower limit ........... 352
TBS monitoring data interval (82) .............. 245 Num system address lower limit ................ 354
Threshold for management................ 427–428 Num TCS SSI range lower limit (43).......... 353
Threshold for message .............................. 426 Number of voice mail system 01................ 355
Threshold for message queue load Number of voice mail system 02................ 356
limiting end .............................................. 426 PABX Numbering Integrated to Fleet........... 86
VLR cleanup notice.................................... 246 PABX prefix digit ........................................ 350
VLR cleanup period ................................... 246 PISN number digits 09–16 ......................... 270
VLR cleanup start hours ............................ 247 PISN number digits 17–24 ......................... 270
VLR cleanup start minutes......................... 248 PISN number digits 25–32 ......................... 270
VLR inactivity time ..................................... 249 PSIN number digits 01–08 ......................... 270
VLR usage limit.......................................... 249 PSTN prefix digit ........................................ 350
Numbering parameters Short Subscriber Identity Numbering ........... 82
Amount of extracetd digits ......................... 158 SSI analysis starting tree number .............. 270
Calling party prefix ..................................... 158 SSI partitioned 01 – 10 MNI (301 –
Connection group identifier ........................ 154 310) .......................................................... 359
Connection type ......................................... 158 Start tree for incoming CPI analysis........... 159
ESN CUG analysis starting tree Tactilon ISSI ............................................... 349
number ..................................................... 267 TSI analysis starting tree number .............. 271
ESN external line analysis starting V-ASSI value range – lower limit................ 266
tree ........................................................... 268 V-ASSI value range – upper limit ............... 266

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 455/466
O Priority category broadcast call (118)........... 41
Priority category dedicated data channels
Organisation parameters (119) ........................................................... 41
Absence time for visiting members .............. 44 Priority category direct call (117).................. 41
Access Point: Default .................................. 60 Priority category eme individual call
Access Point:Pools ...................................... 60 (116) ........................................................... 41
Allow lower AI security with ISI .................... 53 Priority category external network call
Allow pre-emptive speech items over (115) ........................................................... 40
ISI............................................................... 53 Priority category group call (114) ................. 40
Allowed user groups (109) ........................... 38 Priority category packet data (112) .............. 40
CLI included in AL calls................................ 53 Priority category telephone style call
Common Secondary Control Channels: (113) ........................................................... 40
SCCH Class ............................................... 59 Recovery for Tracked MSs only ................... 49
Direct call inactivity time............................... 45 Registration Period ...................................... 49
Dual Watch Absence Period .................. 56, 58 Resource Usage: User Group
Emergency Target........................................ 48 Identifier ..................................................... 57
Energy Economy Group: Energy Saving SCCH class bit mask (121).......................... 39
Mode .......................................................... 57 Service priority broadcast call (102)............. 42
Energy Economy Group: Start Point Service priority dedicated data channels
Frame Number ........................................... 58 (120)........................................................... 44
Group Call Service Interaction ..................... 51 Service priority direct call (104).................... 43
Home Exchange .......................................... 56 Service priority emergency individual call
Identifier ....................................................... 55 (107)........................................................... 43
Ind call setup time for called MS .................. 45 Service priority external network call
Ind call setup time for called TCS client........ 46 (105)........................................................... 43
Individual Call Service Interaction................ 51 Service priority group call (101) ................... 42
IP Address Ranges ...................................... 60 Service priority packet data (106) ................ 43
ISI group call setup response time .............. 47 Service priority telephone style call
ISI originating setup response time ............. 48 (103)........................................................... 43
ISI speech item priority ................................ 53 Subscriber Class Definition: Default
Main org max resource pre-emption level Value .......................................................... 61
(111) ........................................................... 39 Subscriber Class Definition: Locked............ 61
Main organizations right for pre-emption Tracking Recovery Period............................ 49
(110) ........................................................... 39
Max duration for emergency call.................. 46
Max duration for normal individual call......... 47
P
Max handover time for individual calls ......... 47 Packet data parameters
Maximum Group EG .................................... 50 Access Point: Default .................................. 60
Mnemonic .................................................... 55 Access Point: Pools..................................... 60
MSISDN used as CPI/TPI in Individual Activate Data service ................................. 103
Calls and SDS/Status Message ................. 52 ADVL advanced link support...................... 183
Organisation Visibility................................... 62 Aip time interval ......................................... 390
Pre-emptive emergency individual call Allow Pre-emptive Services ................. 98, 120
(108)........................................................... 42 Allow Radio Subscriber Change Access
Pre-emptive Services: Pre-emptive Point Name (APN).................................... 105
Rights Allowed ........................................... 56 Default Access Point Name (APN) ............ 105

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

456/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 HLR of APNs and APN pools............. 318, 422 Specify an IP Address................................ 104
International Mobile Subscriber Identifier TX power.................................................... 176
(IMSI) ....................................................... 104 Parameter management parameters
IP Address ................................................. 104 Category .................................................... 235
IP Address Ranges ...................................... 60 Display type ............................................... 234
Lease Period.............................................. 390 Organisation identifier ................................ 234
Max packet data channels in cell ............... 209 Parameter identifier.................................... 234
Network delay ............................................ 389 Parameter type .......................................... 233
Normal Priority ............................................. 97 Parameter value......................................... 234
Obtain an IP Address Automatically .......... 103 Sorting format ............................................ 235
Pd – response_wait timer .......................... 391 Parameters Class 45
PD - Access mode (370)............................ 397 Aliasing in use (140) .................................. 299
Pd - allowed number of tl-sdu Clear WS login allowed (27) ...................... 294
retransmission.......................................... 395 Confirmed group call (127) ........................ 296
Pd - data transfer throughput .................... 394 Dedicated data channels in use (148)........ 302
Pd - inactivity timer..................................... 396 Dispatcher-initiated Emergency Call
Pd - maximum length of tl-sdu ................... 388 Allowed (129) ........................................... 296
Pd - maximum limit for suspended Extended ACCH in use (53)....................... 294
data .......................................................... 397 Group addressed status/SDS delivery
Pd - maximum transmission units .............. 391 attribute (136)........................................... 298
Pd - number of segment Group Lifetime (130) .................................. 297
retransmissions ........................................ 394 Individual call area in use (126) ................. 295
Pd - number of timeslots ............................ 394 ISI group call in use (147) .......................... 301
Pd - partial record interval (28) .................. 389 Lowest TBS SW level (95) ......................... 294
Pd - ready timer ......................................... 393 Max TBS SW DL (8) .................................. 291
Pd - standby timer...................................... 392 MS Special Priority .................................... 300
Pd - tl-sdu window size .............................. 395 Normal Registration CDR data generation
Pd MSMS ACC (12)................................... 292 mechanism (132) ..................................... 297
Pd PI ITSI (13) ........................................... 292 NW DXTs SW level (5)............................... 290
Pd PI spoofing detect (125) ....................... 295 NW GC in use (15)..................................... 293
Pd SW version (11) .................................... 291 NW internal rec (14)................................... 292
Pre-emptive Resource Priority ..................... 98 Passing control in use (131) ...................... 297
Pre-Emptive Resource Priority................... 121 Pd IP ITSI (13) ........................................... 292
Priority for packet data ............................... 328 Pd MSMS ACC (12)................................... 292
Ranking value ............................................ 178 Pd PI spoofing detect (125) ....................... 295
Routing period............................................ 389 Pd SW version (11) .................................... 291
SDS on PDCH ........................................... 405 Pre-emptive priority levels release 6.0
Service priority packet data (106) ................ 43 (138)......................................................... 298
Short Data Services: Acknowledgement Session key 0–8 (18–26) ........................... 293
for Messages............................................ 106 Speech item priority and priority value
Short Data Services: Allow Using range 1-20 in use (128)............................ 296
Storage..................................................... 105 TBS fallback indication SDS (145)............. 301
Short Data Services: Right to Use TBS load monitoring in use (137) .............. 298
Gateway with External Systems............... 106 Parameters modified with the PM command
SNDCP IP packet data service .................. 182 group
Source routing............................................ 390

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 457/466
 Main org max resource pre-emption level Allow Pre-emptive Services ........... 77, 98, 120
(111) ........................................................... 39 Allow Pre-emptive Speech Items ................. 98
Main organizations right for pre-emption Allow Resource Pre-emption by Normal
(110) ........................................................... 39 Priority Resource........................................ 99
Priority category broadcast call (118)........... 41 Allow Resource Pre-Emption by Normal
Priority category dedicated data channels Priority Resource...................................... 121
(119) ........................................................... 41 Default Scanning Priority ........................... 132
Priority category direct call (117).................. 41 Group Priority............................................. 120
Priority category eme individual call Normal Priority ............................................. 97
(116) ........................................................... 41 Pre-Emption Speech Item Levels in
Priority category external network call Use........................................................... 122
(115) .......................................................... 40 Pre-emptive Resource Priority ..................... 98
Priority category group call (114) ................. 40 Pre-Emptive Resource Priority............. 77, 121
Priority category packet data (112) .............. 40 Previous User's Speech Item
Priority category telephone style call Prioritised ................................................. 121
(113) ........................................................... 40 Priorities: Normal Priority............................. 76
SCCH class bit mask (121).......................... 39 Priority for packet data ............................... 328
Service priority parameters .......................... 42 Priority for SDS 1, 2, and 3 messages........ 405
Service priority parameters: Broadcast Priority for SDS 4 messages...................... 404
call.............................................................. 42 Priority for status messages....................... 403
Service priority parameters: dedicated Priority level of PDU for AL call.................. 325
data channels............................................. 44 Priority level of PDU for DGNA .................. 327
Service priority parameters: Direct call........ 43 Priority level of PDU for direct call ............. 334
Service priority parameters: Emergency Priority level of PDU for group
individual call.............................................. 43 attachments/detachments ........................ 326
Service priority parameters: External Priority level of PDU for group call ............. 333
network call ................................................ 43 Priority level of PDU for on/off hook
Service priority parameters: Packet call............................................................ 333
data ............................................................ 43 Priority level of PDU for PSTN/PABX
Service priority parameters: Pre-emptive call............................................................ 335
emergency individual call ........................... 42 Priority level of PDU for registration........... 329
Service priority parameters: Selectable Message Sending Profiles ......... 71
Telephony-style call.................................... 43 Speech Item Priority..................................... 97
Passing Acceptance Status............................. 85 Workstation user parameters: Speech
Passing control in use (131) .......................... 297 Item Priority ................................................ 76
Periodic registration parameters
Minimum allowed registration and Q
recovery period (203) ............................... 321
Q3 interface parameters
Registration Period ...................................... 49
Q3 DX alarm forwarding enabled
PI command group ........................................ 283
(241)......................................................... 285
Pre-emption parameters
Q3 Interface in use (814) ........................... 286
Pre-emptive Services: Pre-emptive
Rights Allowed ........................................... 56
Pre-emptive priority levels release 6.0 R
(138) ............................................................ 298 Radio network parameters
Priority parameters ACC access parameter.............................. 185

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

458/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 ADVL advanced link support...................... 183 LDTIM link down timeout period ................ 207
AIRC aircraft flag........................................ 190 Location area identifier............................... 167
AIRPER aircraft distance reporting Location area identifier and
period ....................................................... 190 mnemonic................................................. 174
AUTH authentication required.................... 183 Location area mnemonic............................ 167
Base frequency .......................................... 170 Max dedicated data channels in cell .......... 210
Base station number .......................... 174–175 Max packet data channels in cell ............... 209
Carrier frequency ....................................... 173 MIGR migration.......................................... 181
Carrier number........................................... 176 MNIM minimum mode service ................... 181
Carrier numbers ......................................... 172 N2001 maximum number of unused TCH
Carrier pair numbers or frequencies .......... 172 timeslots ................................................... 192
CEID cell index .................................. 219, 222 N2002 RSSI threshold for carrier
Cell index ................................................... 174 jamming detection .................................... 192
Cell mnemonic ........................................... 174 N2003 threshold number of consecutive
CENAME cell mnemonic.................... 220, 222 jammed time slots .................................... 193
CIRC circuit mode data service ................. 182 N2004 RSSI threshold for collision
CLASS security class................................. 184 detection................................................... 193
COL colour code ....................................... 189 N2005 minimum length of random access
Combiner type............................................ 174 frames ...................................................... 193
Connect to number .................................... 205 N2007 Number of consecutive jammed
DLTO radio downlink timeout..................... 186 slots.......................................................... 194
DREG de-registration................................. 180 N2008 threshold number ........................... 194
Duplex space ............................................. 168 N2009 maximum length of random
Duplex space index.................................... 168 access frame............................................ 194
DXT U-plane DXT ...................................... 189 N2010 IMM for individual call on assigned
ENCR air interface encryption service........ 183 channel..................................................... 195
End frequency............................................ 170 N2010 WT for individual call on assigned
EXCAP exclusive capacity for TBS channel..................................................... 195
allowed ..................................................... 207 N2013 WT for group call on assigned
EXCELL expedited cell reselection............ 205 channel..................................................... 196
F18EXT frame 18 extension ...................... 189 N2014 framelength for individual call on
FBMOD TBS fallback mode allowed.......... 206 assigned channel ..................................... 196
Frequency band index ....................... 169, 175 N2015 framelenght for group call on
FRH fast reselect hysteresis ...................... 202 assigned channel ..................................... 196
FRT fast reselect threshold........................ 201 N2016 number of sent
FWDREG forward registration CCK-id-elements...................................... 196
support ..................................................... 204 N2017 number of sent extended
IMM immediate .......................................... 187 services-elements .................................... 197
IPSEC IP security for DXT-TBS N2018 jammer detection level ................... 197
interface ................................................... 209 N2019 jamming noise floor max ................ 198
JAMMOD jamming algorithm version ........ 200 N252HP maximum BL-DATA
JATIM minimum MCCH change period retransmission for high priority SDUs........ 198
on jamming............................................... 208 N252LP maximum BL-DATA
LAID location area identifier............... 219, 221 retransmission for low priority SDUs ........ 198
LANAME location area mnemonic N253 default BL_UDATA repetitions.......... 199
......................................................... 219, 222

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 459/466
 Nature of neighbourhood TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO
relationship....................................... 221, 224 MAX (86) .................................................. 263
NRXLEV minimum RX access level in TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO
monitored cell........................................... 203 MIN (87) ................................................... 264
NTXPWR maximum MS transmit power TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK
in monitored cell ....................................... 203 TIMEOUT (88).......................................... 265
NU number of random access TCEID cell index ........................................ 223
transmissions ........................................... 188 TCENAME cell mnemonic ......................... 223
Performance management enhancement TCIRC circuit mode data for TEDS............ 211
(300)......................................................... 339 TDLTO radio downlink timeout for
PRIO priority cell ........................................ 181 TEDS........................................................ 214
Ranking value ............................................ 178 TDPRI data priority support in TEDS ......... 211
REG registration ........................................ 180 TDXTID system identifier ........................... 224
Reverse operation...................................... 171 TENCR air interface encryption for
RXLEV minimum RX access level ............. 185 TEDS........................................................ 211
Satellite abis (31) ....................................... 286 TEXADV extended advanced links and
SBOFF disallowed subscriber MAC-U-BLCK supported in TEDS ........... 211
classes ..................................................... 179 TEXCELL expedited cell reselection in
SBON allowed subscriber classes ............. 179 TEDSS ..................................................... 218
Secondary control channels currently TFREQ1DA sending frequency of ext
active........................................................ 210 services 1da element ............................... 215
Secondary control channels defined.......... 210 TFREQ2 sending frequency of ext
SFRAM speech frame format type............. 206 services 2 element ................................... 216
Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT TFRH fast reselect hysteresis in
(85)........................................................... 263 TEDS........................................................ 218
SNDCP IP packet data service .................. 182 TFRT fast reselect threshold in TEDS........ 218
SOTIM DXT switchover timeout................. 208 TFWDREG forward registration support
SRH slow reselect hysteresis .................... 202 in TEDS.................................................... 218
SRT slow reselect threshold above TIMM immediate in TEDS.......................... 214
fast ........................................................... 200 TINTLEA long interleaver support in
System identifier of neighbour cell ............. 220 TEDS........................................................ 211
T2001 access define PDU interval on TLAID location area identifier..................... 222
MCCH ...................................................... 191 TLANAME location area mnemonic........... 223
T2002 downlink stealing time..................... 191 TMINPRI minimum PDU priority for
T2003 channel reserve refresh time .......... 191 TEDS........................................................ 215
T2004 time to send max frame in TN2005 minimum length of random
startup ...................................................... 192 access frame in TEDS ............................. 216
T252 acknowledged waiting timer.............. 199 TN2006 maximum allowed path delay in
TACC access parameter in TEDS ............. 213 TEDS........................................................ 217
TADVR advanced link roaming support in TN2009 maximum length of random
TEDS........................................................ 211 access frame in TEDS ............................. 217
TBS configuration period ........................... 261 TNRXLEV minimum RX access level in
TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB monitored TEDS cell ................................ 218
INTERVAL (83) ........................................ 261 TNTXPWR maximum transmitting power
TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO of MS in monitored TEDS cell .................. 218
INITIAL (84).............................................. 262

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

460/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 TNU number of random access Authentication Triplet: Period of
transmissions on TEDS uplink ................. 215 Validity...................................................... 109
ToBB server SIP UDP listen port (106)........ 265 Authentication Triplet: Usage Times.......... 108
TRXLEV minimum RX access level in Broadcast Calls............................................ 90
TEDS........................................................ 212 Call Forwarding on All Calls......................... 95
TSRH slow reselect hysteresis in Call Forwarding on Busy.............................. 95
TEDS........................................................ 218 Call Forwarding on No Answer .................... 95
TSRT slow reselect threshold above fast Call Forwarding on Not Reachable .............. 95
in TEDS.................................................... 218 Calling Line Identification Presentation
TT252 acknowledgement waiting timer (CLIP)......................................................... 94
for TEDS .................................................. 217 CLIR for FSSN ........................................... 100
TTRX index ................................................ 175 CLIR for ITSI .............................................. 100
TTRX operation mode................................ 178 CLIR for MSISDN....................................... 101
TTXPWR maximum transmitting power Default Access Point Name ....................... 105
of MS in TEDS ......................................... 212 Emergency Target: Emergency Target of
TWIDTH carrier bandwidth on TEDS......... 216 Organisation Block ................................... 103
Two-way cell relationship ........................... 221 Emergency Target: External Network ........ 102
TWT waiting time for random access Emergency Target: TETRA Network ......... 101
acknowledgement in TEDS...................... 215 Enable Participation in End-to-End
TX power.................................................... 176 Encrypted Calls ........................................ 110
TXPWR maximum MS transmit power........ 184 Fleet Specific Short Number (FSSN) ........... 86
VOICE TETRA voice service ..................... 182 Forwarded to number (MSISDN/External
WT waiting time ......................................... 188 Number) ..................................................... 96
Radio netwrok parameters Forwarded to number (TETRA
Offset ......................................................... 170 Number) ..................................................... 96
Radio subscriber parameters Gateway SSI ................................................ 96
Activate Data Service................................. 103 Individual Call Area .................................... 113
Air Interface Encryption Method................. 109 Individual Call Maximum Duration for
Alias Identity: PIN For Alias Identity ............ 89 Calling Party............................................. 101
Alias Identity: Profile Id ................................ 89 Individual Calls............................................. 90
Allow Duplex Calls ....................................... 99 International Mobile Subscriber Identifier
Allow Pre-emptive Services ......................... 98 (IMSI) ....................................................... 104
Allow Pre-emptive Speech Items ................. 98 IP Address ................................................. 104
Allow Radio Subscriber Change Access ISI Communications..................................... 91
Point Name (APN).................................... 105 ITSI .............................................................. 85
Allow Resource Pre-emption by Normal Migration Allowed....................................... 113
Priority Resource........................................ 99 Mnemonic .................................................... 87
Allow Semi-Duplex Calls............................ 100 Mobile Subscriber ISDN Numbering
Assigned Identities: Primary Assigned (MSISDN)................................................... 87
Identity........................................................ 88 Normal Priority ............................................. 97
Assigned Identities: Secondary Assigned Obtain an IP Address Automatically .......... 103
Identity........................................................ 88 Organisation Block....................................... 84
Assigned Identities: Terminal Identity .......... 89 Override Calling Line Identification
Authentication Key Defined........................ 108 Restriction (CLIR Override)........................ 94
Authentication Required............................. 108 PABX Calls................................................... 91
PABX Numbering Integrated to Fleet........... 86

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 461/466
 Passing Acceptance Status ......................... 85 Service priority parameters: Emergency
Periodic Registration: Subscriber individual call ................................................. 43
Registration Checked by .......................... 110 Service priority parameters: External
Pre-emptive Resource Priority ..................... 98 network call.................................................... 43
PSTN Calls .................................................. 92 Service priority parameters: Group call........... 42
Radio User Assignment Services: Service priority parameters: Packet data ........ 43
Radio User Assignment Required in Service priority parameters:
Registration ................................................ 88 Telephony-style call ....................................... 43
Radio User Assignment Services: Signalling parameters
Radio User Assignment Signalling CLIR override (25) ..................................... 287
Supported................................................... 88 Energy Economy........................................ 137
Requests and Status Messages .................. 92 Energy economy (57)................................. 287
SDS Messages ............................................ 93 Energy Economy mode for background
Short Data Services: Acknowledgement groups ...................................................... 319
for Messages............................................ 106 Extended ACCH in use (53)....................... 294
Short Data Services: Allow Using Higher limit of cell load............................... 338
Storage..................................................... 105 Hook indiv call (3) ...................................... 286
Short Data Services: Right to Use Hysteresis of cell load ................................ 337
Gateway with External Systems............... 106 Lower limit of cell load................................ 338
Specify an IP Address................................ 104 Maximum Group EG .................................... 50
Speech Item Priority..................................... 97 Refreshing period....................................... 311
Subscriber Class Definition........................ 112 SBOFF disallowed subscriber
TEDS: Allowed TEDS Functionality ........... 106 classes ..................................................... 179
TEDS: Ready Timer................................... 107 SBON allowed subscriber classes ............. 179
Terminal Enable/Disable: ITSI Subscriber Class Definition........................ 112
Permanently Disabled ...............................111 SwMI ident ................................................. 311
Terminal Enable/Disable: Over the Air System code (26)....................................... 311
Status ....................................................... 112 SMSGW parameters
Terminal Enable/Disable: Reason for Charging options for SMSGW (200) .......... 406
Disabling the Terminal...............................111 SMSGW 01–32 .......................................... 407
Terminal Enable/Disable: Terminal Spare SMSGW 01–32 ............................... 407
Supports Enable/Disable Over the Storage for SDS-TL messages allowed
Air..............................................................111 (201)......................................................... 406
Terminal Enable/Disable: TETRA Speech item priority and priority value
Equipment Identity (TEI) Status ............... 112 range 1-20 in use (128) ............................... 296
Visiting Org Block......................................... 84 Status and SDS parameters
Channels for dedicated sending profile

S (344)......................................................... 411
Channels for important sending profile
Service priority parameters (338)......................................................... 411
Pre-emptive emergency individual call ........ 42 Channels for normal sending profile
Service priority parameters: Broadcast (335)......................................................... 411
call ................................................................. 42 Channels for paging sending profile
Service priority parameters: dedicated data (347)......................................................... 411
channels ........................................................ 44 Channels for repeating sending profile
Service priority parameters: Direct call ........... 43 (341)......................................................... 411

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

462/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 Priority of dedicated sending profile PABX numbering integrated to fleet........... 149
(342)......................................................... 409 TEDS parameters
Priority of important sending profile Access Point: Default .................................. 60
(336)......................................................... 409 Access Point: Pools..................................... 60
Priority of normal sending profile (333)........ 409 Activate Data Service................................. 103
Priority of paging sending profile (345)........ 409 Aip time interval ......................................... 390
Priority of repeating sending profile Allow Radio Subscriber Change Access
(339)......................................................... 409 Point Name (APN).................................... 105
Redundancy of dedicated sending profile CEID cell index .......................................... 222
(343)......................................................... 410 CENAME cell mnemonic............................ 222
Redundancy of important sending profile Control channel width in TEDS (311)......... 340
(337)......................................................... 410 Default Access Point Name ....................... 105
Redundancy of normal sending profile HLR of APNs and APN pools..................... 318
(334)......................................................... 410 HLS of APNs and APN pools..................... 422
Redundancy of paging sending profile International Mobile Subscriber Identifier
(346)......................................................... 410 (IMSI) ....................................................... 104
Redundancy of repeating sending profile IP Address ................................................. 104
(340)......................................................... 410 LAID location area identifier....................... 221
Use dedicated profile for Protocol ID LANAME location area mnemonic ............. 222
01–04 (356–359)...................................... 413 Lease Period.............................................. 390
Use important profile for Protocol ID Max served users in QAM PDCH
01–04 (348 – 351).................................... 413 (371)......................................................... 346
Use paging profile for Protocol ID 01–04 Max TEDS TTRXs in TBS (312) ................ 340
(360–363)................................................. 413 Maximum transferring MSs in TEDS
Use repeating profile for Protocol ID TTRX (331) .............................................. 346
01–04 (352 – 355).................................... 413 Nature of neighbourhood relationship........ 224
Use SDS4 Sending profiles (332) .............. 409 Network delay ............................................ 389
System parameters Obtain an IP Address Automatically .......... 103
Mismatching registration rejected Pd - partial record interval (28) .................. 389
(199)......................................................... 320 Pd - response_wait timer (53).................... 391
Pd - standby timer (54) .............................. 392

T Pd IP ITSI (13) ........................................... 292

Pd MSMS ACC (12)................................... 292
TBS fallback indication SDS (145) ................ 301 Pd PI spoofing detect (125) ....................... 295
TBS load monitoring in use (137) .................. 298 Pd SW version (11) .................................... 291
TCS client parameters Priority for registration on TEDS (325)........ 344
Fleet Specific Short number domain.......... 148 Priority lev of group att/det PDU on TEDS
Fleet Specific Short number Fleet (327)......................................................... 344
Identifier ................................................... 148 Priority level of PDU for DGNA on TEDS
Home Exchange ........................................ 148 (326)......................................................... 344
Individual Short Subscriber Identity Routing period............................................ 389
(ISSI) ........................................................ 148 Short Data Services: Acknowledgement
Interface unit .............................................. 150 for Messages............................................ 106
Mnemonic .................................................. 149 Short Data Services: Allow Using
Mobile subscriber ISDN numbers .............. 149 Storage..................................................... 105
Organisation block ..................................... 147

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 463/466
 Short Data Services: Right to Use TEXADV extended advanced links and
Gateway with External Systems............... 106 MAC-U-BLCK supported in TEDS ........... 211
Source routing............................................ 390 TEXCELL expedited cell reselection in
Specify an IP Address................................ 104 TEDS........................................................ 218
TACC access parameter in TEDS ............. 213 TFREQ1DA sending frequency of ext
TADVR advanced link roaming support in services 1da element ............................... 215
TEDS........................................................ 211 TFREQ2 sending frequency of ext
TCEID cell index ........................................ 223 services 2 element ................................... 216
TCENAME cell mnemonic ......................... 223 TFRH fast reselect hysteresis in
TCIRC circuit mode data for TEDS............ 211 TEDS........................................................ 218
TDLTO radio downlink timeout for TFRT fast reselect threshold in TEDS........ 218
TEDS........................................................ 214 TFWDREG forward registration support
TDPRI data priority support in TEDS ......... 211 in TEDS.................................................... 218
TDXTID system identifier ........................... 224 TIMM immediate in TEDS.......................... 214
TEDS - Allowed segment retransmission TINTLEA long interleaver support in
(315)......................................................... 340 TEDS........................................................ 211
TEDS - Allowed tl-sdu retransmission TLAID location area identifier..................... 222
(314)......................................................... 340 TLANAME location area mnemonic........... 223
TEDS - Packet data PDU priority TMINPRI minimum PDU priority for
(316)......................................................... 341 TEDS........................................................ 215
TEDS - TL-SDU win size in extended AL TN2005 minimum length of random
(318)......................................................... 341 access frame in TEDS ............................. 216
TEDS - TL-SDU win size in original AL TN2006 maximum allowed path delay in
(317)......................................................... 341 TEDS........................................................ 217
TEDS DL signalling cadence (319)............ 342 TN2009 maximum length of random
TEDS L2 feedback duration (T.230) access frame in TEDS ............................. 217
(320)......................................................... 342 TNRXLEV minimum RX access level in
TEDS L2 feedback interval (T.231) monitored TEDS cell ................................ 218
(321)......................................................... 343 TNTXPWR maximum transmitting power
TEDS max number of reserved slots for of MS in monitored TEDS cell .................. 218
MS (330) .................................................. 345 TNU number of random access
TEDS max waiting time for slot grant transmissions on TEDS uplink ................. 215
(324)......................................................... 344 TRXLEV minimum RX access level in
TEDS min amount of RA slots in TEDS........................................................ 212
multiframe (329) ....................................... 345 TSRH slow reselect hysteresis in
TEDS minimum granting delay (322)......... 343 TEDS........................................................ 218
TEDS start-high-go-low starting level TSRT slow reselect threshold above fast
(323)......................................................... 343 in TEDS.................................................... 218
TEDS system code (365)........................... 322 TT252 acknowledgement waiting timer
TEDS waiting time for random access for TEDS .................................................. 217
ack (328) .................................................. 345 TTRX operation mode................................ 178
TEDS: Allowed TEDS Functionality ........... 106 TTXPWR maximum transmitting power
TEDS: ReadyTimer.................................... 107 of MS in TEDS ......................................... 212
TENCR air interface encryption for TVOICE voice service for TEDS ................ 211
TEDS........................................................ 211 TWIDTH carrier bandwidth on TEDS......... 216

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

464/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation
 TWT waiting time for random access QoS control enabled (95)........................... 280
acknowledgement in TEDS...................... 215 Signaling SCTP listen port for DXT
TX power.................................................... 176 (85)........................................................... 263
Use of TEDS options (313) ........................ 340 Signalling QoS tagging DSCP (90) ............ 250
Terminal disabling parameters SIP signalling QoS tagging DSCP
EIR system id............................................. 319 (98)........................................................... 254
TEI query enable........................................ 320 TBS signaling SCTP parameter HB
Terminal Enable/Disable: ITSI INTERVAL (83) ........................................ 261
Permanently Disabled ...............................111 TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO
Terminal Enable/Disable: Over the Air INITIAL (84).............................................. 262
Status ....................................................... 112 TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO
Terminal Enable/Disable: Reason for MAX (86) .................................................. 263
Disabling the Terminal...............................111 TBS signaling SCTP parameter RTO
Terminal Enable/Disable: Terminal MIN (87) ................................................... 264
Supports Enable/Disable Over the TBS signaling SCTP parameter SACK
Air..............................................................111 TIMEOUT (88).......................................... 265
Terminal Enable/Disable: TETRA ToBB Rel 1 activated in the DXT (107)........ 281
Equipment Identity (TEI) Status ............... 112 ToBB server SIP UDP listen port (106)........ 265
TETRA IP transmission parameters .............. 227 ToBB signaling QoS tagging DSCP
Dejitter buffer size (96)............................... 253 (105)......................................................... 258
DWS signaling SCTP parameter HB Voice frame QoS tagging DSCP (92)......... 251
INTERVAL (99) ........................................ 255 Voice frame QoS tagging IEEE_802.1p
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO (93)........................................................... 252
INITIAL (100)............................................ 255 Voice transport VLAN identifier (94)........... 252
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO
MAX (101) ................................................ 256
DWS signaling SCTP parameter RTO
U
MIN (102) ................................................. 256 Use of Fixed TBS fallback parameters in
DWS signaling SCTP parameter SACK Enhanced TBS fallback mode ..................... 331
TIMEOUT (103)........................................ 257
G4WIF signaling QoS tagging DSCP V
(114) ......................................................... 261 Visiting Org Block ............................................ 84
G4WIF signaling SCTP listen port for
DXT (108)................................................. 258
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter HB W
INTERVAL (110)....................................... 259 WO command group ..................................... 285
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO Workstation user parameters
INITIAL (111) ............................................ 259 Alias Assignment ......................................... 67
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO Allow Call Transfer....................................... 80
MAX (112) ................................................ 260 Allow Forced Release of Individual Call........ 80
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter RTO Allow Pre-emptive Services ......................... 77
MIN (113) ................................................. 260 Ambience Listening...................................... 67
G4WIF signaling SCTP parameter SACK APN Pools.................................................... 71
TIMEOUT (109)........................................ 259 Client Applications ....................................... 72
IP voice base UDP port value (97)............. 253 Enable Participation in End-to-End
OSTE-NISI transform (89) ......................... 250 Encrypted Calls .......................................... 80

TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0 DN00126593-25-5en

This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation. 465/466
 Group Combining......................................... 73 Outgoing Communication: Calling Line
Group Communications ............................... 67 Identification Restriction (CLIR) for
Groups ......................................................... 72 MSISDN ..................................................... 79
Incoming Communication: Calling Line PABX Calls................................................... 69
Identification Presentation (CLIP) .............. 77 Password ..................................................... 66
Incoming Communication: Override Pre-Emptive Resource Priority..................... 77
Calling Line Identification Restriction PSTN Calls .................................................. 69
(CLIR Override).......................................... 78 Radio Subscribers........................................ 74
Individual Call Maximum Duration for Requests and Status Messages .................. 70
Calling Party............................................... 81 SDS Messages ............................................ 70
IndividualCalls.............................................. 67 Short Data Services: Allow Using
ISI Communications..................................... 68 Storage....................................................... 80
Normal Priority ............................................. 76 Short Data Services: Right to Use
Organisation Block....................................... 65 Gateway with External Networks ............... 79
Organisation Blocks ..................................... 73 Speech Item Priority..................................... 76
Organisation Parameters ............................. 74 User name ................................................... 66
Outgoing Communication: Calling Line Workstation Users........................................ 75
Identification Restriction (CLIR) for
FSSN.......................................................... 79
Outgoing Communication: Calling Line
Identification Restriction (CLIR) for
ITSI............................................................. 78

DN00126593-25-5en TETRA System Release 6.0 - 7.0

466/466 This document and its contents are the property of Airbus DS SLC and must not be copied or circulated without authorisation